Home

MES Interface Module User`s Manual

1. Constantly obtaining monitoring data from information system are required SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Figure 1 3 Loads reduction of information system INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 1 1 Features 1 o 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Le series 3 Buffering function for reliable data acquisition transmission a Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high no trigger will be missed Trigger buffering function When multiple sets of conditions for data transmission are met in a concentrated manner their data and trigger times can be buffered in the module s internal memory After the loads are reduced data operations and transmission are executed using the buffered data MES interface module When loads are concentrated Trigger buffer Job 1 2 Trigger information Tag data time Action Job 3 3 Trigger information Tag data time execution Job 1 1 Trigger conditions Trigger conditions Executes action of Job 1 1 and stores trigger information of Job 1 2 and 3 3 in the trigger buffer Trigger conditions met 4 After loads have been reduced When loads are reduced Trigger buffer Time
2. 10BASE T 100BASE TX ae I Z QJ7141MES9 100 At RUN M SRE ERR Fom gi E i Ka aa0 SD O RD Figure 4 5 LED display oS lt 6 HJ Table 4 3 LED display 3 Z lt x Name LED status Description 9 2 In normal operation RUN ON It may take some time until the RUN LED is turned ON after the module is started OFF Watchdog timer error Hardware error OFF In normal status A ERR ON Module continuation error Flash Module stop error Z ON 100 Mbps 100 M OFF 10 Mbps ON During data send or data receive 3 SD RD OFF Data not transmitted o 9 T HRE 25 B36 ee O 528 Te 9 ZOzZ OSE om Hi ba ann 4 3 Parts Names 4 27 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Le series 4 4 Wiring 4 4 1 Wiring This section explains how to connect cables to the MES interface module HUB ee DOUE ome 4 f ee f Twisted pair cable Straight Figure 4 6 Wiring For the equipment required for 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection and system configuration examples refer to the following c Section 2 1 4 System configuration for operation Section 2 3 Connection System Equipment 4 4 2 Wiring precautions To establish a reliable system and fully utilize the MES interface module functions make wiring so that noise effect can be reduced 1 Sufficient safety measure
3. From the previous page Erecutedinoid r Actions are executed Up to 10 actions can set for a job and they are executed in order z L37 Section 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action z e Section 6 1 7 Stored procedure call function Communication action e Section 6 1 8 Arithmetic processing function Operation action e Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions 6 In Update Insert actions substitute or insert values are 7 committed to database li nZ 58 5E F xecute Not checked program after action box checked Checked g The program in the application server computer is e executed after execution of the last action L gt Section 6 1 9 Program execution function 5 Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution 5 If a value was written to a tag component it is written to the device data of the programmable controller CPU i ae Zu Job execution is completed a 5 Re ao tie amp End nao Figure 6 2 Job execution procedure a Point 2z ERIE ZE For the case where an error occurs during job execution refer to the following ES x C3 Section 6 1 11 2 When an error occurs in job execution 29 o2 25 ez o Z O Z 5 U MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 z3 6 1 2 Job execution procedure 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series 6 1
4. 3 Removing a CompactFlash card 1 Open the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module then remove the gt i CompactFlash card Z LED cover EJECT button EJECT button fe an JTL g B ECT o A Press 3 Remove in this DZ Py O weg direction re l Oo ONS ceentateeiets 2 CompactFlash card slot Compact lash carg 2 i 5 T JT1MES96 Q a Pr E a Figure 4 16 CompactFlash card removal A e Put the finger at the bottom of the LED cover that is on the front of the MES interface module and lift the LED cover to open e When ejecting the CompactFlash card from the MES interface module press the EJECT button to push the CompactFlash card out e w x fa WW Q O x a fal Zz LE Bae lu ma nao When having difficulty in replacing the CompactFlash card the following tweezers Q are available 28 es Eg Product Plastic tweezers JE Model name NK 2539 93 n 6 E 2 ra d Figure 4 17 Replacing the CompactFlash card using Plastic tweezers e eeeeeecsceeoseeeoeaeeseeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 8 rd 2 fz EQ 2 Attach the CompactFlash card slot cover and close the LED cover on the front of 250 the MES interface module 228 e Attach the CompactFlash card slot cover When the CompactFlash card is not installed attach the CompactFlash card slot cover z e Lower the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module unt
5. Action execution execution After completing the action of Job 1 1 executes actions of Job 1 2 and 3 3 in this order based on the trigger buffer information Time The numbers 1 to 3 show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database Figure 1 4 Data buffering in the case of load concentration 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Aeres b Data to be send to the database are protected even if a communication error occurs DB buffering function When an error occurs during performing communication with a database stored procedure execution requests or the SQL texts failed to send can be stored ina CompactFlash card After the recovery the buffered SQL texts or stored procedure execution requests are automatically sent to the database Manual operation is also possible OVERVIEW Disconnected CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Database SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Resend Database INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION CompactFlash card Figure 1 5 Buffering of send data SQL text during a communication error FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL
6. n 1 n 2 n 3 Component A DO D10 D20 Q Component B D1 to D2 D11 to D12 D21 to D22 2 Component C D3 to D8 D13 to D18 D23 to D28 z C tD 9 ra Component name Device Data type ey ee 2 D2 Component A DO Single word 7 Q Component B D1 l Double word When the size is not set 8 Component C D3 String 12 characters hie Planned to gt Component D D9 Single word n 1 n 2 n 3 rd be added DS Di m E20 Ze Component A DO D10 D20 F 2 z D10 to D11 D19 to D20 ZTO Component B D1toD2 D11 to D12 gt D21 to D22 D12 to D17 D21 to D26 Component C D3 to D8 _ D13 to D18 D23 to D28 Component D D9 D19 D29 E B28 Figure 7 39 An example of array block size ta o ZO OSE om fi bn ann 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 51 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 9 Precautions on Component setting If a wrong device number is set for a component in Component setting an error will occur on another component that has the same access target CPU setting Correct the device number in Component setting 7 52 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 9 Server Service Setting MELSEC Aeres Configure the settings for access to a server computer The set server service name is used in Job settings Double clicking
7. Is there an error code in the response message returned by the No By the error code identify the error and take corrective ML processing function acung Ee Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT Yes e Section 10 2 Error Code List According to each of the following identify the error and take corrective actions lt gt Section 10 3 3 1 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I O signals e Section 10 3 3 2 Troubleshooting about network connection e Section 10 3 3 3 Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and access target CPU e Section 10 3 3 4 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function e Section 10 3 3 5 Troubleshooting about the XML processing function e Section 10 3 3 6 Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function a a ee een Figure 10 1 Troubleshooting flowchart for operation of the MES interface module 10 1 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 1 This section explains how to find an error code Finding an error code By an error code check the error details and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List 1 Check an error of the MES interface module An error error code of the MES interface module can be checked by any of the following e System monitor of GX Developer gt Section 10 1 3 System monitor e Current error area and Error log area in the bu
8. a6 Q series C Controller module Function input FX x x x x x x x Function output FY x x x x x x x Function register FD x x x x x x x Special relay SM M 2 O O O O O O O Special register SD D O O O O O O O Input relay X O O O O O O O Output relay Y O O O O O O O Internal relay M O oO O O O O o Latch relay L O O O O O O x Annunciator F O O O O O x Edge relay V O O x O O x x Link relay B Oo O O O Oo O Data register D O O O O Q O o Link register W O O O O O O 0o Contact TS O O O O O O X i Coil TC O O O O O O x Timer A Current value T TN 4 O O O O O O a Long timer LT 14 x x x x x x x Contact CS O O O O O O x Coil CC O O O O O O s Counter 4 Current value C CN O O O O O O Long counter LC 4 be x x x 2 Contact SS O O x O O x x Coil SC O O O O x i Retentive timer Current value ST SN 4 O O x O O x x Long retentive timer LST 4 x x x x x x x Link special relay SB O O x O O Link special register SW O x O O x x Step relay S 9 x x O x x O x Direct input DX x x x x x x x Direct output DY x x x x x x x Accumulator A x x x x x x x Index register a a 2 R o O O O O O x File register ZR o O x O O x x ERn R 1 x O x O Link input Jn x O oO x x O x O Link output Jn Y 6 O O x x O x O
9. Configuration computer l Power OFF the programmable controller i According to Network settings connect the MES interface module and configuration computer to a network L7 Section 2 1 4 System configuration for operation Power ON the programmable controller When changing the settings Operation Check communications with the MES interface module by executing the PING command in the command prompt screen 5 Configure the settings in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool for the MES interface function L gt Chapter 6 FUNCTIONS e Section 7 6 System Setting e Section 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting e Section 7 8 Device Tag Setting e Section 7 9 Server Service Setting e Section 7 10 Job Setting e Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions 4 Set the target MES interface module Write the project to the MES interface module ce Section 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module e Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings N Figure 4 2 MES interface module start up procedure 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 4_ As necessary execute the self diagnostic test for checking the communication function and hardware of the MES interface module Section 4 6 Self diagnostics Test 2 For a battery refer to the following a X 3 Section 4 8 Battery z L
10. This section explains the schematic procedure up to operation for using the MES interface function 1 Starting the server computer Es Point Start the server computer and then the MES interface module gt 2 Starting the MES interface module Procedure to operation PR S eee d d g Database server computer 1 Application server computer 2 SNTP server computer 3 Install the relational database and design the table 4 A A Section 2 6 3 Precautions for using database Create a user program y Set ODBC for the database Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database Install DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool Create an account for user program execution 5 Install DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool Section 5 1 Installation lt gt Section 5 1 Installation t Change the settings of DB Connection Service Change the settings of DB Connection Service Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Operation Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Figure 4 1 Server computer start up procedure Start the SNTP server Be sure to make the settings to use the DB interface function lt Section 6 1 DB
11. 2 Label Table App 59 Label Label Description Job setting No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 ORDERBY1 1 1 to ORDERBY64 10 8_ ORDERBY64 10 20 t Indicates Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 3 Setting item Table App 60 Setting item Item Description Setting value FIELDNAME Field name Any character string Ascending order ASC SORTTYPE Sorting method Descending order DESC App 50 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 19 ORDERBY CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Kel ries Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV 1 File format XML MESSAGE FORMAT Table App 61 File format Item Description File name MULTISELECT CSV File contents Communication action Multi select setting 7 Section 7 11 2 10 Multi select setting 6 y y 4 4 ITEM MAXREC MAXTYPE MAXTAG MAXELEMENT MAXVALUE MULTISELECT1 1 ENABLE TAG 2 3 MULTISELECT1 2 DISABLE MULTISELECT2 1 ENABLE NUMBER 20 i NTCREC NTCTAG NTCELEMENT FILLZERO DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE 5 9 ENABLE ENABLE 2 3 DISABLE TROUBLESHOOTING gt 1 APPENDICES 1 gt Item row File format Label column setting area INDEX Communication action 1 mS Multi select s
12. 4 Check return value a b Set whether to check the return value or not When the Check return value box is checked the return value End code of the executed program is checked If no return value is returned within the DB access timeout time set in DB Connection Service Setting Tool a timeout error is detected and the job execution is canceled For DB access timeout refer to the following C Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool When Check return value is selected set the following items 1 Normal return value Default 0 Set a normal return value 2 Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty When the Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty box is checked if the return value is not normal a value is assigned to the specified tag component Set a tag component to which a value is assigned when this is selected e Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectable Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled Tags for which Array setting is set e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value Table 7 57 Values that can be entered as a substitute value Data type of ta yP g Values that can be entered as a substitute value component Bit type ON OFF is selectable Single precision type Up to
13. Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before E 1 setup exe Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Program name setup exe Publisher Unknown File origin CD DVD drive show detaits xs Change when these notifications appear l To the next page 5 1 Installation Start Windows Explorer then click the drive in which the CD ROM is loaded Double click setup exe To display Windows Explorer right click Start then select Explore When using the operating system with the User Account Control function When the screen on the left is displayed click Allow When the screen on the left is displayed click the Yes button INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION E 4 M eL 26 lA sories From the previous page a The dialog box for selecting the component to be MX MESInterface x installed is displayed S Select the component which wants to be installed ES interface function configuration tool e E Com ET ee ETTE E Select the component to be installed with the oe modes This tool k executed by s tallin a ing computer Soer ie oee is posable to be instaled on the sam
14. T i 1 2 i r 1 Send After sending 3 timeout detected Stored to DB buffer Stored to DB buffer after confirmation of Resend DB buffer data recovery Job settings DB buffer Job1 m gt Job1_Data A Job1_Data Job2 Job2 Data Job2_Data 2 a ace enor 3 4 Job3 Job10_ Data Job3_Data Job10 Figure 6 13 When Immediate sending is selected for the job When using MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier the processing of DB buffering differs lt gt Appendix 1 2 1 a For a MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier Point The new job data whose trigger condition is met may be sent to the database before the data stored to DB buffer 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 10 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aeres b When Adding to the buffered data is selected The following shows the job processing when Adding to the buffered data is selected ai a Processing content When the data cannot be sent to the database it is stored to DB buffer after the detection of a timeout E G 2 When the data is stored to DB buffer the selected resend buffer the data lt is stored to DB buffer without checking the status of communication ze recovery 2S The content of DB buffer is resent after recovery 4 The job data which is started up before the resend completion is added to the buffer
15. Tag data is stored Figure 3 13 Current tag data value area 1 No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 Specify the tag number whose current value is displayed as the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 Z 2 No of stored tag Buffer memory address 1291 The tag No displayed as the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 8 1811 is stored nS ee iS TE bee 2Lo os EQO wee suo ann 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 33 3 6 8 Current tag data value area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eL 26 lA cries 3 Update count Buffer memory address 1292 a After the power is ON the cumulative number of updates for the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 is stored b After specifying the tag number displayed as the No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 when the update count is increased the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 is updated with the value of the specified tag number 4 No of components Buffer memory address 1293 The No of components displayed as the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 is stored The following is an example where the current value of tag No 5 is confirmed in Buffer memory batch monitor of GX Developer HE puffer memory baten monitor 3 al Specify 5 as the No of requested tag Buffer memory 0 Hex p e hex address
16. e w oO fa WW Q O x a fay Zz CE Bae E W ma De File access stop request Y2 During stop Power OFF the programmable controller and remove the battery Figure 4 22 Removing battery for storage In operation INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION File access status X2 FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage 4 25 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEC Le series CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION This chapter explains how to install the execution software of MX MESInterface to each operating environment and how to uninstall it 5 1 Installation This section explains how to install MX MESInterface 1 MX MESInterface installation procedure Installation start y Execute setup exe leg vw Select the component to be installed Which software is to be installed MES Interface Function Configuration Tool DB Connection Service and Setting Tool y y Enter user information Enter user information A E Enter the product ID Enter the product ID Y ee Select the installation destination Select the installation destination y Installation Installation end Figure 5 1 MX MESInterface installation p
17. o lt Table information stored procedure information browse function A function to send table information such as table names and field names or stored procedure information in the database to the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool This function is executed when browsing table information or stored procedure information with Communication action of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool i_ gt Section 7 11 2 4 Browse table name Section 7 11 2 8 Browse field name Section 7 11 3 2 Browse procedure name 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 4 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe Zz O Eo Oz ME E os OF ow an Q e E 0 lt Lu 2 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series The following shows the operation on the database server computer Configuration computer MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Service Database server computer DB Connection Figure 8 3 Table information stored procedure information browse function 0 When clicking on the Browse table name button Browse field name butto
18. 0 lt Q O o w oJ a O d module that is actually mounted Error Display Present Error Displays the latest error code For error codes refer to the following Error History Section 10 2 Error Code List Displays the error history recorded from power ON to the present time with error codes yn Ww 1 The suffix of the product information code represents the function version of the module 2 The function version of the MES interface module is B or later i Example When the suffix is B it means the module is of function version B eo x lt W Q Z 10 1 Error Codes 1 _ 10 1 3 System monitor 0 3 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series 2 Checking the LED status and the switch setting status in H W Information of the diagnostics function a Operation procedure Click the H W Information button in Module s Detailed Information The H W Information dialog box is displayed Operate it referring to the following descriptions H W Information r Module Module Name QJ71MES96 r Display format Product information 091 020000000000 B j C DEC HAW LED Information 1 8000 HAW SW Information Stop monitor Close Figure 10 3 H W Information dialog box b Displayed items The MES interface module information that is stored in the following buffer me
19. MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 3 12 I O signal list Signal direction MES interface module Signal direction programmable controller CPU te S Programmable controller CPU MES interface module w Device Device o Signal name Signal name ERR LED status Error clear request ON Lighting flashing OFF Extinction ON Error clear request OFF x Sampling error X11 eee Y11 5 ON Error OFF Normal E Information linkage error X12 WIZ oZ ON Error OFF Normal S X13 Y13 3 X14 Use prohibited Y14 X15 Yie Access target CPU error 2 X16 VG fe ON Error OFF Normal F X17 Y17 7 _ Use prohibited O X18 Y18 a ee 2 X19 Use prohibited vals X1A Y1A X1B Y1B Another error o X1C Y1C oF ON Error OFF Normal Zu X1D Y1D bac Use prohibited eins XIE Vale Low We a Watchdog timer error dE XIE YAP ON Error OFF Normal Point As for I O signals to a programmable controller CPU do not output ON a Use prohibited signal Doing so may cause malfunctions of the programmable controller system INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 17 3 4 1 I O signal list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device No X0 MELSEC Le series 3 4 2 O signals details Th
20. Program execution destination APP _Server s Command line C DBAPPIRECIPE _02 EXE MIV Check return value Normal return value 0 JV Write the value into the tag when the value is Faulty INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Component Substitute value Process2 DB_Error i JV Do not execute job when the value is Faulty for execution completion FUNCTIONS Figure 7 61 Program execution settings before action execution j le 2 ms G WL raed ESO 260 36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 75 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution 7 T 76 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series Program execution settings after action execution JV Execute program after action Program execution destination APP_Server x Command line C DBAPP RECIPE_02 EXE MY Check return value Normal return value 0 JV Write the value into the tag when the value is Faulty ___ Tag Component Process2 DB_Error rite tab wher the job when the Figure 7 62 Program execution settings after action execution Table 7 56 Setting items when selecting Program execution settings before action execution or Program execution settings after action execution Item Description Execute program before Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution after act
21. Section 2 1 3 System configuration for initial setup e w oO fa WW Q O o a fay Zz CE Bae E W mea Do Power ON the programmable controller RUN LED is turned ON and ERR LED flashes on the MES interface module Zz l ze 2S Install a CompactFlash card to the MES interface z l module 4 25 y D Z Start MES Interface Function Configuration Tool eS Confirm the outline of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool k Section 7 2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Section 7 3 Screen Structure O Section 7 4 Project File Handling e Section 7 5 Project Setting 2 Le Format the CompactFlash card lt L Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card 8 3 8 i SE Select System setting and make Network settings 5 amp L Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting E o 3 226 li ZrO To the next page To the next page Figure 4 2 MES interface module start up procedure 2a a 222 Wo PALS a OSE oo Hi ba ann 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 3 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 4 From the previous page MELSEC A series From the previous page Set the target MES interface module Write a project to the MES interface module Section 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings 4 MES interface module
22. Wonderware Historian 9 0 Industrial SQL Server FUNCTIONS Required software MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL When using the time synchronization function SNTP server Equipped as a standard to Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 4 Operating Environment 2 11 2 4 2 Server computer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1 Instructions for operating system MELSEC A series a Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Table 2 7 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Operating system Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional Performance required for personal computer CPU Pentium 300MHz or more Required memory 128 MB or more Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 Pentium 550MHz or more 256 MB or more Windows Server 2008 Pentium 2GHz or more 2GB or more Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Ultimate Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more Windows Vista Enterprise Windows 7 Professional Windows 7 Ultimate Windows 7 Enterprise Pentium 1GHz or more Windows 8 Pro Windows 8 Enterprise Windows 8 1 Pro Windows 8 1 Enterprise Windows Server 2012 2 a2 2 4 Operating Environment 2 4 2 Server computer Intel
23. 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module e Clear the error in the MES interface module after starting up the CPU module in the multiple CPU system gt Section 2 6 2 Precautions for using multiple CPU system 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres 4 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom The DB interface function does not work Checked item Is Running displayed in the status indication area of Remote operation L gt Section 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function Corrective action e When Stopped is displayed perform any of the following operations Perform Restart from Remote operation Power OFF and then ON Reset the programmable controller CPU lt 3 Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function No communication has been made with the server computer Is a personal computer restarted after installing relational database e Restart the personal computer Is the port No set in Service port of DB Connection Service Setting Tool the same as the port No set in Port No of Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Set the same value Communication is not available if different port numbers are set Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Servic
24. 539 8 35 1 Sorted Descending Tag component Process1 Work_No Process1 RECIPE_A Process1 RECIPE_B Process1 RECIPE_C 539 8 35 1 538 7 34 1 536 5 32 1 Figure 7 79 An example of MultiSelect operation 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 101 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 36 SLo z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG iQ series e When Delete is selected for Action type Delete eliminates a specific record that satisfies the specified conditions Conditions for the record s to be deleted are set in Select Update Delete conditions lt 6 Select Update Delete conditions in this section DB tag link settings is not used Figure 7 80 An example of Delete setting Point When Delete is selected for Action type and multiple records are found to be deleted all of them will be deleted If the Select Update Delete conditions area is blank all records will be deleted from the specified table 7 102 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSele
25. Add Communication action X Ed Delete tly Communication action For Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete Communication action Action type SEEM Database Newserver Table name Browse table name Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component Select Update Delete conditions DB tag link settings Field name Tag Type Component JA 1 as gt gt For stored procedure Communication action Action type Stored procedure Database NewServer Z Procedure name DB tag link settings _Return Argument TagiType Component Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component Return ESS 4 Operation action Operation action Substitution tag Component Operationtag Component Operator Operationtag Component App 36 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 13 ACTION CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Cel series 2 Label f Table App 39 Label a T Label Description z amp Le Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 ACTION1 1 to ACTION64 10 r ACTION64 10 F Z Indicates Action No 1 to 10 S Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 5 W a fe APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 37 Appendix 3 13 ACTION CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item MELSEC Le series a For communication action Select
26. C gt Section 10 2 2 3 SQL failure log of DB Connection Service 1 SQL execution failed Table 8 32 SQL execution failed Item Description Date Error code Target data source SQL text Database Message Database error number Database error message 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 DataSource INSERT INTO TABLE COL VALUES Database Message 0x00000388 Oracle ODBC OraJORA 00904 COL invalid identifier Output log format Example 2 Stored procedure execution failed Table 8 33 Stored procedure execution failed Item Description Date Error code Target data source Procedure name Value in argument 1 Value in argument 2 Output log format gt e Database Message Database error number Database error message 2013 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20f00007 SQLSERVER SampleProcedure 003 MES Example Database Message 0x00000afc Microsoft ODBC SQL Server Driver SQL Server Could not find stored procedure SampleProcedure 8 31 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 8 2 SQL failure log Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC Aeres CHAPTER 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT This section explains the XML message format used with the XML processing function Refer to the following for the XML processing function L Section 6 2 XML Processing Function This section explains the functions of the XML message format 1 Instruction of job execution Table 9 1 Instruction of job execution
27. DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 54 MELSEC Aeres 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting Up to 32 items can be set in Server service settings within one project Server service name Server type IP address Port No 1024 to 65535 User name Password Confirm password Data source name Database type Access error notification setting Connection timeout 1 to 180 NewServer Database server x Oracle 9i JT Notify the access error status Tag Component 10 seconds Figure 7 41 Server service settings Table 7 42 Setting items in Server service settings Item Description Sever service name Enter a server service name Up to 16 characters Server type Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection IP address eae Service is installed Set a port number of the server computer Port No Range 1024 to 65535 Default 5112 Set a user name used to access the server computer User name Up to 30 characters Password Confirm Set a password used to access the server computer password Up to 30 characters Data source name Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed Up to 30 characters Database type Select the type of the database server Access error notification eiia Set w
28. File format App 30 a JOB JOBNAME JOBTYPE TRGBUFFERING LOGGING DEBUGMODE JOB1 Product management 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE JOB2 Value management DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Fae 1 JOB3 Monitoring status ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE JOB4 Product management 2 DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE y SQLBUFFERING AUTORESEND 1 DISABLE 2 MANUALRESEND DISABLE v y v CANCELTAG CANCELELEMENT CANCELVALUE 32 2 Item row Label column setting area Job settings New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help 5 DSW GR g Bw ma aw aia ie ameme _ Nowiob gt 7 Enable at module startup Startup logging Access target CPU settings 4 nd I Trigger buffering I Test mode Device tag settings Trigger conditions Paseo E ETA co ieee 1 cs Trigger 1 isie Q RY AY rogram execution iufFerin soa pine Ea 7 ewe 3 buffering After actions Setting Eres Ehio Mianais econ buries 3 EZ T Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution Tag Component Substitute value No of fields in project 0 No of Fields in jo O Tag component dat length in job O words total Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 11 JOB CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Kel ries
29. Job Unit for accessing a database Stored procedure Stored procedure combines sequential processing procedures into one program against the database and save it to the database management system This executes processing based on the arguments received from MES interface module and returns the processing results to MES interface module Update settings Processing updates the MES interface module settings from MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Configuration computer Personal computer for configuring various settings required for the MES interface function in the MES interface module This computer can be shared with a server computer Time zone Standard time zone for each region of the world Each nation uses the time difference 12 hours maximum from the time at the Greenwich Observatory in the United Kingdom GMT as the standard time The region using the same time difference is called a time zone The standard time for Japan is 9 hours ahead of the GMT In some nations daylight time in which the clock is advanced for one hour is used in summer Tag component Component Generic term for a component Device data making up a device tag Tag This data organizes the communications path data type device etc for access to each programmable controller CPU device data as a single data unit Data source Connection information necessary for accessing data using ODBC With Windows a da
30. MX MESInterface Ed When button is clicked Clicking does not refresh the setting data to the MES interface module MX MeSinteriace Perform any of the following operations later The written settings will be enabled after Perform Update settings L Section 7 13 2 3 Power OFF and then ON Reset the programmable controller CPU the settings are updated or the MES interface module is restarted Figure 7 96 Writing the MES interface function settings T 124 7 12 Online 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres Point 1 Setting data are refreshed to the MES interface module when any of the following operations are performed g Perform Update settings 5 lt gt Section 7 13 2 3 e Power OFF and then ON e Reset the programmable controller CPU z 2 The System setting data are not updated by Update settings lt They are refreshed to the MES interface module when the power is turned ze OFF and then ON or when the programmable controller CPU is reset 2S MX MESInterface i te the hardware of the MES interface module must be reset 2 Figure 7 97 Confirmation dialog box displayed after writing System setting changes F N 3 After writing the data performing any of the following operations clears all the DB buffer e Perform Update settings e Power OFF and then ON T e Reset the programmable controlle
31. Main base unit Extension base unit RCPU RO4CPU 1 RO8CPU R16CPU 1 59 x R32CPU R120CPU oO C Controller module Point Safety CPU 4 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Qs001CPU N A x QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V 64 Q24DHCCPU V Q24DHCCPU LS 9 N A x 62 o T O Applicable x N A Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 09012 or later Can access host station only Cannot access other stations Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 09042 or later Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 10012 or later An extension base unit cannot be connected to the safety CPU module Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 11052 or later Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 12092 or later Use the Q12DCCPU V whose serial No first five digits is 12042 or later Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 14122 or later Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 16072 or later RCPU can be mounted on the RQ extension base unit or Q series extension base unit which is routed from RQ extension base unit Use a MES interf
32. 2 Ifthe same user name already exists the existing name is overwritten If the same user name is set multiple times the setting of the label with the higher number is overwritten App 16 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Kel ries Appendix 3 5 DST CSV 1 File format T Table App 14 File format 22 File name DST CSV System setting Time synchronization setting S File contents f PNN T POAN 5 lt gt Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting le n EE vst ENABLE EJ s MONTH MAR Z Ei s TYPE WEEK Wi Ss WEEKNUM 2 Ea S_DAYOFWEEK SUN Kal s Day i EA s HOUR 02 a Ea E_MONTH NOV z EJ E TYPE WEEK We E wEEkNum l1 EEI E_DAYOFWEEK SUN IA E_ DAY EE E_HOUR 02 r W Label column Cannot be changed by the user z File format Setting area Can be changed by the user Daylight saving setting Daylight saving setting 1 Enable daylight saving E Cancel Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 17 Appendix 3 5 DST CSV APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 15 Setting items MELSEC Le series Item Description Setting value Enable daylight setting ENABLE DST D
33. 4 1 M lt 1 lt 2 QJ71MES96 5 U Figure 4 3 With the LED cover closed 2 With the LED cover open QJ71MES96 Figure 4 4 With the LED cover open 4 3 Parts Names lt lt 3 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aerie Table 4 2 Parts names i 1 Indicator LED Refer to 3 Indicator LED display contents gt Used for connecting a MES interface module to the following personal computers z e Configuration computer 2 10BASE T 100BASE TX e Server computer interface connector RJ45 e SNTP server computer The MES interface module distinguishes 10BASE T from 100BASE TX x depending on the device on other end 2 3 Serial number display Indicates the serial number of the MES interface module z 4 EJECT button Used for ejecting a CompactFlash card from the MES interface module E m 5 CompactFlash card slot Used for installing a CompactFlash card to the MES interface module ao 6 CompactFlash card slot cover Cover for the CompactFlash card slot 7 Battery Battery for file protection Connector pin for battery lead 8 Battery connector pin The battery lead is disconnected from the connector at shipment to prevent z battery consumption z 5 3 Indicator LED display contents a 4
34. 65 e oL 56 zo DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 67 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi als 26 Kel ceries Example The following shows that the job is activated when the value of the tag component Process 1 Temperature reaches 45 or higher nanye nun rae ww UUS Trigger 1 Value monitoring startup Me Component Condition Tag Type Temperature gt Constant Figure 7 52 Value monitoring startup setting example 1 Example To activate the job repeatedly while the condition of Value monitoring startup is met Make settings as follows Table 7 52 Value monitoring startup setting example 2 Item Description Combination AND Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Value monitoring startup Specified time period startup As the condition alternates between true and false as shown below job startup can be repeated while the Value monitoring startup condition is met Tag component value Trigger 1 Timing of Value monitoring startup Condition value Sampling interval Trigger 2 Timing of Specified time period startup True i i i i i i d i i i i i False a H i l Fixed cycle Combined by AND Timing when AND is used Startup point True False Figure 7 53 Job startup points when Valu
35. E Network security Restrict NTLM NTLM authentication in th E Network security Restrict NTLM Outgoing NTLM traffic to E Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon E Shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile E System cryptography Force strong key protection for user k E System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms for en E System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows E System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal s E System settings Optional subsystems prom E User Account Control Detect application installations and p E User Account Control Only elevate executables that are sign E User Account Control Only elevate UlAccess applications th E User Account Control Run all administrators in Admin Appr E User Account Control Switch to the secure desktop when pr E User Account Control Virtualize file and registry write failure aces Approval Mode Prompt for consent Recovery console Allow floppy copy and access to all drives Dis E Shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to Prompt for Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Local Securty Setting Explain Select Elevate without prompting on the lt lt Local User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for S administrators in Admin Approval Mode the secure desktop Prompt for credential
36. From the previous page Item Description Setting value c n When VALUE is selected with TYPE and Any number or character omparison COMPAREEVAL e VALUE is selected with COMPARETYPE string constant value When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Handshake When HANDSHAKE is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 HANDSHAKESTARTTAG startup Tag When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Handshak When HANDSHAKE i lected with TYPE 1 to 256 HANDSHAKESTARTELE eee D en Pe MENT P When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Component Completion When HANDSHAKE is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 HANDSHAKEENDTAG nae notification Tag When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Completion When HANDSHAKE is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 HANDSHAKEENDELEM es notification ENT When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank Component 1 The setting value for the day of the week is expressed in decimal numbers For the setting value contents check with the method below 1 Convert a decimal number to a binary number 2 Each binary bit is the setting contents for the day of the week Figure App 3 Setting contents for the day of the week 0 Not set 1 Set Example When the WEEK setting value is 85 85 Decimal number T Convert decimal number into binary number 1010101 Binary number vy Check the corresponding bits b6 b5 b
37. From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Device type error Description The specified device type is invalid Action e Correct the device type entered in Device tag settings 0082h Device No error The specified device number is out of range e Correct the device number entered in Device tag settings 0083h Device point error The number of device points is incorrect 0084h Write size error The write size is not correct e Check the CPU s on the access route 0085h Link parameter error The link parameter is corrupted e Set a correct link parameter for the programmable controller CPU s on the access route 0087h to 0089h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 00D2h RUN time disable error A request that is not permitted during RUN was issued e Check the CPU s on the access route 00D4h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 00D7h Receive data length error The receive data length or the byte length exceeded the limit 00D8h Protocol error The communication protocol is not correct e Check the cables on the access route 00D9h Address error The address is not correct OODBh Write error Writing is not executable e Check the CPU s on the access route OOEOh Station No error
38. Function Description One shot execution e Executes the specified job only one time regardless of whether the trigger conditions and jobs are enabled or not e If the specified job is being executed the job is not carried out again Validate e Puts the job into the status in which the specified job is executed when the trigger conditions are met Job enabled status e This is the same operation as that of enabling the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool job Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status Invalidate e Puts the job into the status in which the job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met Job disabled status e This is the same operation as that of disabling the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool job Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status Xe Ww Ed 2 E W J3 20 aire APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC A series 9 1 XML Message Format Definition The XML message format is comprised of request messages and response messages This section explains the XML message format definition Point 1 The maximum size of request message after applying URL encoding that the MES interface module can process is 128K bytes If the size exceeds 128K bytes an error code is returned as the response message L Section 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response messages 1 Request message RE
39. The number of records corresponding to the Datetime Tagname Value number of fields set Field name Tag component is inserted AnalogTag1 Machine1 Analog1 10 w 2006 10 20 15 30 00 AnalogTag1 10 AnalogTag2 Machine1 Analog2 5 gt 2006 10 20 15 30 00 AnalogTag2 5 AnalogTag3 Machine2 Analog1 20 gt 2006 10 20 15 30 00 AnalogTag3 20 ts J Y Module date and time are added Figure 7 77 Operating example of Insert INSERT when database is Wonderware Historian 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete 7 99 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j w z iL ae im Z o w l Q O z O 62 e oL 56 ZO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 100 x Point MELSEC Le series d When MultiSelect is selected for Action type MultiSelect substitutes field values of the records whose conditions are met for substitute values tag component values Conditions for the records to be selected are set in Select Update Delete conditions cF 6 Select Update Delete conditions in this section Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in Select sort settings 7 Select sort settings in this sec
40. e Check if the ODBC setting is correct OBA1h to OBASh System error 10 2 Error Code List e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative To the next page 10 17 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT 1 Z Q O a w al D 9 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code OBA6h MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Wait for DB access program execution completion timed out Description No response has returned from DB when accessed the database or from the program being executed An Ethernet communication error has occurred Action e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct e Check if the ODBC setting is correct e Check if the database is operating normally e Check if the program specified for program execution has been completed e In DB Connection Service Setting Tool increase the DB access timeout value e Check if the processing load of the server computer is excessively high e Check if data volume in the data base is exceeding the specified capacity of the personal computer e Check if the number of selected updated records are extreme when selecting or updating OBA7h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representativ
41. l To the next page Check the user name and company name registered If the registration contents are correct click the Yes button No button to return to the previous screen Register the product ID Enter the product ID then click the Next gt button The product ID is shown on the software registration card that came with the product Specify the folder for installation destination M al AG erie When changing the registration contents click the When using the default folder click the Next gt button To change the folder click the Browse button then specify the drive and folder for installation destination REMARKS Up to 100 characters including MESIF can be used for the installation destination This means that up to 94 characters can be used when specifying a destination folder as a directory 5 1 Installation SETTINGS AND MES INTERFACE FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PROCEDURE TO OPERATION ol ja 23 k Eg Sz PE Be FUNCTIONS CONFIGURATION TOOL SETTING TOOL 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION From the previous page Information e W Completed the installation of this product Restarting Windows Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windo
42. 1 Precautions when selecting High speed sampling e Be sure to create a user specified system area in the program memory of the control CPU For the redundant system be sure to create system area for the user setting to the Redundant CPU of both systems in the same capacity When the control CPU is the Universal model QCPU RCPU or C Controller module creation of a user specified system area is not required L gt REMARKS 1 Creating a user specified system area Registration of High speed sampling is limited to one tag only Setting this to multiple tags is not allowed The choice of CPU name in Component setting input is fixed to the first item in Access target CPU settings Control CPU Devices of tag components can be set within the total of 96 points The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of Device tag settings Example When Double word 2 points is set for Data type of all components up to 48 component settings can be registered e T 40 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres c Do not sample The tag is not sampled gt Point amp 1 Select Do not sample in the cases shown below This setting can reduce the load of the MES interface module e Tags for which Array setting is set e Tags that perform writing only e Tags that use handshaking
43. 22 21 20 19 18 17 1002 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 1003 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 10 Tag setting information area INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 2 Sampling information Buffer memory address 1004 to 1007 a The tag sampling result is stored 2 b The bit corresponding to the tag setting No which executed sampling is turned Z ON 0 Not collected 1 Collected S 2 u Z X b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Ecz Buffer memory address 1004 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o2z 1005 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 ZrO 1006 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 1007 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 11 Sampling information area one EQO H Zwo ZOzZ Oe pea ann 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 31 3 6 6 Sampling monitoring cycle area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 32 MELSEC A series 3 Sampling error information Buffer memory address 1008 to 1011 a The tag sampling error information is stored b The bit corresponding to the tag setting No to which the Sampling error occurred is turned ON
44. 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4 9 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Le series Table 4 5 Setting items of the Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module dialog box Switch number Description Switch 1 Mode setting Switch 2 Default operation setting battery error detection setting Switch 3 Lower byte Response monitoring time setting Switch 4 to 5 For system use Do not set 1 Mode setting Switch 1 Select the MES interface module operation mode Table 4 6 Mode setting Switch 1 setting items Setting nent Item Description number 0000h Online Normal operation mode Tests the ROM RAM intelligent function module switch settings 0001h Hardware test Cp Section 4 6 2 Hardware test Executes the 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface self diagnostics 0002h Self loopback test test lt gt Section 4 6 1 Self loopback test 2 Default operation setting battery error detection setting Switch 2 Select the default operation setting battery error detection setting for the MES interface module b15 to b3 b2 b1 bO Specify 0 Switch 2 Battery error detection setting ty Default operation setting Account setting 0 Detects battery errors 0 Operates according to Account setting 1 Does not detect battery errors 1 Operates according to the default User name QJ71MES96 Password MITSUBISHI Defa
45. 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 OBBBh OBBCh Execution error Program execution function The application server has failed to acquire user identifying information Program startup parameters are incorrect 10 2 Error Code List Check if the program specified with the program execution function is executable with the specified account To the next page 10 19 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT 1 Z Q O o w al a 9 ad APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 20 MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action e Check if the program specified with the program execution function is executable with the specified account i ee After creating an account used for Execution error Program Failed to log on to the application OBBDh the program execution function be execution function server sure to log in once at least A user with an empty password cannot be specified Set a password for the specified user OBBEh The application server has failed to acquire user identifying information e Check if the program specified with OBBFh The profile of the specified user was the
46. 8 8 1 Access log The communication contents of the MES interface module and DB Connection Service are output to the access log The following explains the access log contents 1 Service start end a Start Table 8 11 Service start Item Description Output log format Date Error code Service Start Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 Service Start b End Table 8 12 Service end Item Description Output log format Date Error code Service Stop Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 Service Stop 2 Connection disconnection from the MES interface module a Connection Table 8 13 Connection from the MES interface module Item Description Output log format Date Error code SID Session ID MIFWS Connected Source IP Target data source Connection User Name Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 MIFWS Connected 192 168 3 3 DataSource User Name b Disconnection Table 8 14 Disconnection from the MES interface module Item Description Output log format Date Error code SID Session ID MIFWS Disconnected Source IP Target data source Connection User Name Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 MIFWS Disconnected 192 168 3 3 DataSource User Name 8 25 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 8 1 Access log 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL a6 Q series 3 Connection disconnection to a database For details o
47. ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT1_ QJ71MES96_ MITSUBISHI ACCOUNT2_ USER1 USERUSERY 1 ACCOUNT12 USER2 USERUSER2 ACCOUNTIG USER3 USERUSER3 YES YES YES TOP INITIAL FILENAME TOP TOP File format TOP 1 L Item row Change disabled L Label column setting area Can be changed by the user System setting Account setting QI71MES96 Add Account User name 1 to 20 characters Password 8 to 14 characters Confirm password Add 2 Label Table App 12 Label Label Description ACCOUNT1 to Set Account setting items No 1 to 16 ACCOUNT16 Enter only the labels desired to be set Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 15 Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSV XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series 3 Setting item Table App 13 Setting item Item Description Setting value USERNAME User name 2 1 to 20 characters PASSWORD Password 1 8 to 14 characters DWRITE Fixed value YES TWRITE Fixed value YES ADMINISTRATOR Fixed value YES INITIAL Fixed value TOP FILENAME Fixed value Blank For characters can be used in user names and passwords refer to the following Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc
48. APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION CSV 1 File format XML MESSAGE FORMAT Table App 49 File format Item Description File name ACEXCEPTION CSV Communication action Exception processing Section 7 11 2 9 Exception process setting 6 A LEMEN ITEM TAG EXCEPTION1 1 1 DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE f EXCEPTION3 1 1 300 EXCEPTION3 1 2 ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE EXCEPTION15 2 1 DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE 15 _ 5 100 L Item row Label column setting area File contents TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES File format Communication action Exception processing No applicable record C Continue this job Finish this job E Exception processing Applicable B E IV Select the first find record peg Send notification of this exception I I N INDEX T oa Continue this job Finish this job 2 Label Table App 50 Label Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 1 Exception processing No applicable record 2 Exception processing Multiple applicable records Exception processing Applicable records overflow EXCEPTION64 10 2 t Indicates 1 Exception processing No applicable record 2 Exception processing Multiple applicable records or Exception processing Applicable records overflow Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job s
49. Base unit 2 CPU type CPU model Extension base unit QOO0JCPU 8 Basic model QCPU QOOCPU 24 O O Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU 64 O O Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU 34 53 Redundant CPU Q25PRHCPU x O QO0UJCPU 8 QOOUCPU Programmable aoiucpu controller CPU Q02UCPU gt 36 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU gt Q10UDHCPU Universal model Q13UDHCPU QCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU gt QO3UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU No of modules SPECIFICATIONS High Performance model QCPU SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Process CPU 64 O O INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 24 FUNCTIONS 64 MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION o Applicable x N A To the next page DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 2 Applicable Systems 2 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Programmable controller CPU MELS a6 Q series From the previous page Table 2 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules continue Applicable module CPU type CPU model Universal model QCPU Base unit 2 No of modules Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU QO3UDVCPU 1 Q04UDVcPU 1 64 O QO6UDVCPU 1 Q13UDVCPU 1 Q26UDVCPU 1
50. During one shot execution do not turn the power of programmable controller OFF and then ON nor reset the programmable controller CPU 3 When the one shot execution is not completed normally by performing the above S operations or due to a communication error write a project again and perform Update z j settings For Update settings refer to the following CF Section 7 13 2 3 le 2 e G W coe ESO 260 6 ZPO z ie E O Z Le DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 15 Precautions T7 145 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 146 MELSEC Le series 5 Type mismatch a Value substitution A value is assigned for a tag component after the source type is converted into the data type of the tag component A value is assigned to a variable after the type of the variable is converted into the type of the substitution source Example Type conversion of tag components and variables Because the operation result is out of the range for the integer type the variable Temp1 is the floating point type Operation action Substitution tag Compgnent Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component 1 Variable Tempi lt lt Number 2000000000 Number 1000000000 2 DataTag Datal lt lt Variable Temp1 3 lt lt A value is assigned after the source type is converted into the data type of the tag component For example when the tag
51. Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted Install a CompactFlash card e Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted e Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool O8A1h 08A2h 08B0h 08B1h System error 10 2 Error Code List Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative To the next page 10 11 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT o zZ E O I wo lu a O E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 12 MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action OA00h Initialization error 0A01h Start error The CompactFlash card may be e Replace the CompactFlash card 0A02h Stop error corrupted OA03h Reset error e Check if the network on the 0A04h Tag related error Tag related error programmable controller CPU side is normal e Please consult your local Mitsubishi OA05h System error representative The initial SNTP server time enquiry e Check for any fault on the network OAO6h Initial SNTP server time failed and thereby the module started connected to the specified SNTP enquiry error the operation synchron
52. MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action e Check the CompactFlash card for Failed to check the CompactFlash 0495h CF card check error card any error Perform check disk on f the personal computer The access to the CompactFlash card timed out while waiting for a response Replace the CompactFlash card 0496h CF card response error i from the card CompactFlash card with another failure The battery voltage dropped or the e Replace the battery 04D0h Battery error Noag PP P y battery connector was disconnected e Check the battery connection An error was detected from the CPU e Check the CPU status of module 0501h CPU fault detected of the module mounting station mounting station APS of the request packet does not EON match the one of the response packet ee ansmission 0502h APS mismatch a p P Correct Access target CPU The Start I O specified in Access settings i target CPU settings is incorrect j 0604h e Retry writing the setting with MES Failed to read out the setting file The y g g Setting file error Saa Interface Function Configuration 0607h setting file is corrupted Tool The device name specified in the oe E e Correct the device specified in the O60Ah Component device error component setting is incorrect j f E component sett
53. Point When Disable is selected the job can be activated by an instruction of job execution of the XML processing function Section 6 2 XML Processing Function T 64 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 4 Time specification startup z a When the specified date time and day of the week match the actual date time S a and day of the week the condition changes from false to true resulting in job z startup b When Time specification startup is selected the date time and day of the week must be set z Trigger 1 Time specification startup EEEee Year Month Day Hour Minute EE oe 30 Day Mon Tue WenJ Thu Fri J Sat J Sun Figure 7 45 Time specification startup 1 Year Month Day Hour and Minute 7 Directly enter the date and time 6 Matching with the actual date and time is not checked for any field that remains S blank g N Table 7 50 Setting items in Time specification startup Year 4 digits 1000 to 9999 Month Tto 12 5 Lez Day 1 to 31 eee Z W T Hour 0 to 23 as Minute 0 to 59 Da O 2 Day Specify a day of the week 2 Check the checkbox of the day to be specified Se H H 2 If no box is checked it means every day Sz 709 Example The following shows that the job is to be activated at 17 30 on D Monday through Friday Tri
54. The specified station number does not exist Check the station number setting in Access target CPU settings OOEth Processing mode error The access target CPU is not capable of processing the request Check the PLC series in Access target CPU settings 00E2h Intelligent function module specification error The specified intelligent or special function module is faulty e Correct the UO GO buffer memory data in Device tag settings OOE3h Other data error The request data has an error e Check the CPU s on the access route 00E4h Link specification error A link module on the access route received a request that cannot be handled The access route is not supported e Check the access route referring to the accessible range OOE8h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative OOE9h Link timeout The access target is disconnected from the link during the processing e Reconnect the access target on the access route OOEAh Special module BUSY The receive buffer of the access target is full or is not ready for reception Examine the hardware of the intelligent or special function module OOECh Access target BUSY The receive buffer of the access target is full or is not ready for reception e Check the access target OOFOh 10 8 Link error 10 2 Error Code List An request was mad
55. Time synchronization setting Synchronize with PLC CPU time C Synchronize with SNTP o DB buffering settings Component DB buffering status No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request Clear DB buffer request he x DB buffering capacity DB buffer Ful 7 heared DB buffer utilization 64 MB Operation of recovery from network disconnection IF trigger conditions are met with a buffered data in the resend buffer Automatically resend buffer Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data wi Manually resend buffer Adding to the buffered data z Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 13 Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSV APPENDICES 2 Label Table App 10 Label MELSEC Le series Label Description Setting value NWTYPE Fixed value LAN IPTYPE Fixed value SPECIFY IPADDRESS IP address IP address Decimal SUBNET Subnet mask Subnet mask Decimal GATEWAY Default gateway Default gateway Decimal or Blank DNSTYPE Fixed value SPECIFY DNS1 Fixed value Blank DNS2 Fixed value Blank HTTPTYPE Fixed value DEFAULT HTTPPORT Fixed value Blank HTTPNAT Fixed value NO FTPTYPE Fixed value DEFAULT FTPPORT Fixed value Blank FTPNAT Fixed value NO SYSTEMNAME Fixed
56. Variable name with Table name Table name Only the setting Field name an Field name content is displayed Stored procedure name Stored procedure name 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 91 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j Q fs fd W Z l Lu l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 zo DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSe lect Delete This section explains the setting items of communication action when selecting Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete in Action type Communication action Action type v Database NewServer X Table name Browse table name DB tag link settings _ Component Field name Tag Type Component Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Saas lt APSARA a Field name v tial Delete row Browse Field name t Delete row y Insert a whole tag Exception process sett Generated SQL text INSERT INTO VALUES No of fields in project 0 Tag component data length in job O words total Cancel Figure 7 68 Communication action dialog box Table 7 72 Setting items in the Communic
57. _ Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc a When Database server is selected for Server type Set a user name that is required for ODBC access b When Application server is selected for Server type Set the account user name used for the operating system of the application server computer Password Confirm password Up to 30 characters Set a password used to access the server computer For characters that can be used for passwords refer to the following Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Access error notification setting a Notify the access error status Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status If the Notify the access error status box is checked an error occurred in access to the server computer is reported to a tag component b When Notify the access error status is selected choose a tag component into whose device the access error status data is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set c Data are stored as follows depending on the data type Table 7 45 Values for Notify the access error status BEERA EREET Description component OFF Normal Not accessed ON Access error status 0 Normal Not accessed 1 Access error status Bit Other than the above 7 9 Server Service
58. e Unlock them on the database and execute it If they are locked the execution is delayed until they are unlocked In Connection result of previous job execution of Remote operation is Connected displayed under Result lt Section 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution e If Disconnected is displayed correct the setting of Server service settings Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting e Check the network connection route to the database server computer Is the Database type setting in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool correct L 7 Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting e Set the database being used Is the DB buffering whose Manually resend buffer is enabled occurred 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module e Resend the buffered data by the DB buffering function To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom Values will not be stored in the database Checked item Is the number of updated inserted or deleted records 0 in the access log of DB Connection Service Corrective action e Check if Select Update Delete conditions are met e Check if there is any missing field into which a value is to be inserte
59. p Deliv ASC ON OEY te noon 2 order_No DESC Delete row Browse field name Selected records sorting results ORDER_NO PRODUCT_CODE DELIVERY _DATE 206 707 2007 01 10 2007 01 10 2007 01 10 2007 01 29 2007 01 29 2007 01 29 2007 01 31 2007 01 31 2007 01 31 1 First selected records are sorted in ascending order of DELIVERY _DATE M eG Q series 2 Then records of the same DELIVERY_DATE are sorted in descending order of ORDER_NO Figure 7 83 Operation example of Select sort settings 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 8 Browse field name Clicking the Browse field name button displays the Fields list dialog box Select a field name The selected field name is set on the Communication action dialog box O by clicking the OK_ button The field name is set on the row which was being selected when the Browse field name button was clicked Fields list z 2 Field i z Field2 38 Field3 Field4 Field5 n 6 z O 5 Figure 7 84 Browsing example of Fields list Zu Zz DS Up to 1024 fields can be displayed Za The following field names in the database are not displayed bee e An inapplicable character is included in Field name of the MES Interface Fu
60. r Action details MELSEC Le series The following explains the display of the View details dialog box Program execution result before action Program execution destination Program execution result after action Program execution destination Return value Return value Type MultiSelect Field name 1 colt Database DB 2 col2 3 colS Table name mestbl Request record No 10 Execution result foucess Applicable record No 9 Acquired record No 2 il SQL text SELECT coll col2 colS FROM mestbl WHERE col2 50 Substitute value Tag Type 222 0 32 TAGI 50 0 Se TAGI 2007 09 01 00 32 TAGI Figure 7 101 View details dialog box Component coll a col2 col5 Table 7 89 Items in the View details dialog box Action list Item Description Displays a list of executed job actions Selecting an action displays its action details Program execution result Displays a program execution result before execution of the first before action action Program execution result P F f Displays a program execution result after execution of the last action after action Displays the action details Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete lt 37 3 a in this section Action details e Communication action Stored procedure 3 b in this section e Opera
61. 0 No sampling error 1 Sampling error detected b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 1008 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1009 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1010 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 1011 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 12 Sampling error information area c The following results when a Sampling error occurs Example When an error occurred in the tag sampling of the tag setting number 16 e The Sampling error X11 is turned ON e Sampling error information area Buffer memory address 1008 bit 15 is turned ON e The error code is stored in the Sampling 16 error code area Buffer memory address 1027 4 Sampling 1 to 64 error codes Buffer memory address 1012 to 1075 The error code that indicates the error contents is stored in the corresponding tag setting number area for which the Sampling error occurred For error codes refer to the following lt gt Section 10 2 Error Code List 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 7 Tag status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 3 6 8 Current tag data value area The specified current tag data is stored i This section explains how to display the specified tag data in the Current tag d
62. 1 1 Features 1 5 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Le series 4 Log data are available in the event of an access error After connection with a database when there is a communication error a log of the error contents can be recorded to the database side Analyzing the log can protect data and analyze the error Database SQL failure log Figure 1 6 Obtaining logs for access errors 5 Directions from the information system can be realized Processing registered in the MES interface module can be started from information system applications This enables to realize production directions from the information system Not only can data be sent to a database but it can also be received from a database This enables to download data such as production information from information system databases lt MES interface module gt f f lt Information system gt 1 Instructs job execution 2 Starts registered processing a Job execution Database 3 Sends data S lt MES interface module gt lt Information system gt 1 Instructs job execution 2 Starts registered processing Job execution Database 3 Sends data Figure 1 7 Realization of directions from the information system 1 1 Features 1 OVERVI
63. 3 When the test has failed conduct the self loopback test again If an error occurs again a possible cause is the hardware failure of the MES interface module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 4 6 Self diagnostics Test 4 6 1 Self loopback test 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 4 6 2 Hardware test Test ROM RAM intelligent function module switch settings for the MES interface module a a S 1 MES interface module operation mode setting Q In Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer set Mode setting to Hardware test Switch 1 0001h O Match the other intelligent function module switch settings to the setting contents used E 58 2 Hardware test execution Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status Dl 6 2 Reset the programmable controller CPU lt After the programmable controller CPU is reset the following hardware tests are g executed automatically During the test the ERR LED flashes 1 ROM check Reads the ROM data and checks the sum 2 RAM check Reads the test data written to the RAM and checks the consistency A e w ao fa WW Q O x a fal zZ CE Bae ene E W mea Do 3 Switch setting check Checks that the intelligent function module switch settings are set within the allowable range 2 z However the Switch 1 Mode setting is not tested E 52 3 Co
64. 4 pesi continue _Cancel User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer J To the next page App 66 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES Em VIELSE Ley ries From the previous page EJ J BR User Accounts Tum User Account Control On or Off agzi Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure nafs aaa aa button E Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer 0K cance 1 End Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages 5 Deselect Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure and click the App 67 APPENDICES rs ELGG Ley aries b When using Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 Open the Control Panel A Getting Started Docume L Connect to a Projector Pictures Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs P Windows Fax and Scan Help and Support gt All Programs Search programs and files Shutdown gt 2 Select System and Security 4 Search Control Panel P Adjust your computer s settings View by Category System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and f
65. C Do not sample r Array setting I Use array Length of array 2 series block r Component setting input CERTES CPU name ControlCPU z w Head device Data type fsingle word A bytes Add teplace IT Perform statistical processes Statistical type Average No of samples 10 Delete Component List ae wl f 2 al Component name Statistical type F array blocksiee O points No of tag components in project 0 No of statistical processes in project 0 No of device points in tag 0 A Figure 7 29 Device tag settings Point 1 How to add delete or copy an item For addition deletion or copying of items refer to the following lt Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New Tag item is added 7 38 7 8 Device Tag Setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting Up to 64 items can be set in Device tag settings within one project a A W Device tag name NewTag Prohibit data writing Sampling settings Normal sampling 1 seconds Enhance sampling efficiency g High speed sampling Devices must be connected in series up to 96 points 5 C Do not sample z Array setting s 2 o tr Use array z E Component setting input G S Component name CPU name ControlcPu Clear Head devic
66. Check if the access target PLC series is supported Section 3 2 1 Accessible CPU modules 0041h a e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative 0044h i A processing code that is not 0045h Processing code error e Check the CPU s on the access route supported was issued 0046h Station No specification The specified station number is e Check the station number setting in error incorrect Access target CPU settings 0047h Receive data error Data have not been received e Check the CPU s on the access route 0048h 0049h 004Dh e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error 004Eh representative 0050h 0051h The RUN write setting of the e Check the Ethernet module setting of 0055h Channel No error aes Ethernet module is disabled the access target CPU e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0064h System error representative e Check the routing parameter set for the 0065h Routing parameter error No routing parameter has been set CPU s on the access route 0066h Data send error Failed to send the data 0067h Data receive error Failed to receive the data e Check the CPU s on the access route 0080h Read size error The read size is not correct To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 7 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0081h MELSEC A series
67. Connection Service Setting Tool being used for the database or any other application e Change the port number to another that is not being used for the database or any other application Has any Check Point software been installed in the server computer Is the ODBC setting of the database correct Is Limit IP addresses permit to connect of DB Connection Service Setting Tool set e Uninstall the Check Point software Correct the ODBC setting of the database e If itis set add the IP address of the configuration computer to Permitted IP addresses list Browse table name Browse field name Is the version of DB Connection Service 1 09K or later e When the installed software version is 1 08J or earlier update the software Browse procedure name Is the version of DB Connection Service 1 10L or later e When the installed software version is 1 09K or earlier update the software Has ODBC setting been changed after Browse stored procedure Browse field name or Browse procedure name has been successfully completed e Start up MES Interface Function Configuration Tool again and perform Browse stored procedure Browse field name or Browse procedure name Failed to acquire the return values and arguments when Stored procedure is selected on the Stored procedure list screen Is the information of the database updated while opening the Communication action screen e
68. E System Configuration 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 1 Computer Task Scheduler 2009 07 14 13 42 Shortcut If you started this action continue Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut Gia Network Windows Memory Diagnostic 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut Microsoft Management Console EB Windows PowerShell Modules 2009 07 14 13 52 Shortcut Microsoft Windows Y Details Cancel User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Local Security Policy Date modified 2010 03 17 5 44 Date created 2010 03 17 5 44 Shortcut Size 1 21 KB mmi Program name Microsoft Management Console Verified publisher Microsoft Windows show detaits Lime ci ificati File Action View Help o EXslba Security Settings Name Description gt ij Account Policies T Account Policies Password and account lockout policies gt ig Local Policies 5 b EE Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec Network List Manager Policies E Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Windows Firewall with Advanced Security gt Ml Public Key Policies E Network List Manager Policies Network name icon and location group policies gt B Software Restriction Policies Public Key Policies gt El Application Control Policies I Software Restriction Poficies gt IP Security Policies on Local Comput Application Control Policies Application Control Policies gt
69. ENABLE 32 2 PASSWORD3 DB2 ORACLE10G DISABLE PASSWORD4 DB3 SQLSRV2000 ENABLE 64 File format __ Item row L Label column setting area Server service settings Gh New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help DEHER Bw S NewProject QP system setting 2 Ead Server service name NewServer Access target CPU settings Device tag settings EE S Server service settings gt sti Ja a amp Job settings 3 Server type Database server x CP 1P address o o0 0 0 LoM P Port No 1024 to 65535 5112 6 mma User name V Password Confirm password EJ Data source name o ad Database type Oracle 9i ind 1 0 _ Access error notification setting Notify the access error status Tag Component Ei Connection timeout 1 to 180 EA App 28 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 10 SERVER CSV Label Description APPENDICES SERVER 1 to SERVER32 2 Label Table App 30 Label Server service settings No 1 to 32 3 Setting item Table App 31 Setting item MELSEC Aeres Item Description Setting value SERVERNAME Sever service name Up to 16 characters Database server DB SERVERTYPE Server type ai Application server APP IPADDRESS IP address IP address Decimal PORT Port number 1024 to
70. In this case the MES interface module can normally be powered off without file access stop because it automatically restores the files when powered on again In rare cases however the module cannot completely restore files If a problem arises by this perform file access stop processing before powering off the system or resetting the programmable controller CPU Also regularly backing up important data e g save on other media is recommended Section 4 7 2 1 Stopping file access When removing or replacing the CompactFlash card a Be sure to stop file access before removing or replacing the CompactFlash card Cc F Section 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card b Not doing so may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being accessed or a file system error c If an error occurs in the CompactFlash card restore the card d The setting of information linkage function is saved to the CompactFlash card When necessary write those settings to the CompactFlash card after replacing the card CompactFlash card diagnostic time The MES interface module diagnoses such as file restoration the installed CompactFlash card when 1 Powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU 2 Installing the CompactFlash card during power on About a CompactFlash card format a For the CompactFlash card format use the formatting function of MES Interface Function Conf
71. Is the file set in Output destination read only e Correct the file specification Is the access to the folder containing the file set in Output destination authorized e Check the right of access to the folder Is the drive space of the server computer full e Check the free space on the drive The DBConnector service failed to start due to the following error The system cannot find the file specified is recorded in Event Viewer of Administrative Tools in Windows Does the following file exit in the installing destination directory of DB connection service and Setting tool MESIF DBConnector exe Is the personal computer restarted after uninstalling DB connection service and Setting tool Section 5 2 Uninstallation e Uninstall DB connection service and Setting tool and restart the personal computer before reinstallation 10 44 Oracle s data source driver is not located although SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe was executed on 64 bit version Windows Has the 32 bit version of Oracle Client been installed lt gt Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool e Install the 32 bit version of Oracle Client and then execute SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe again 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface mo
72. Job execution is canceled when access to the database fails or when type mismatch is found lt e Section 6 1 11 2 When an error occurs in job execution e Section 7 15 5 Type mismatch JV Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution Component Substitute value x Job_cancellation ON Figure 7 64 Setting example of Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution 1 Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution a Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors job cancellation that occur during job execution When Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution box is checked if job execution is canceled a value is assigned to the specified tag component b Set a tag component to which the value is assigned when this is selected 1 Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set 2 Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value Table 7 59 Values that can be entered as a substitute value Data type of tag component Bit type Values that can be entered as a substitute value ON OFF is selectable Single precision type Double precision type Floating poin
73. MultiSelect MultiSelect of Communication action Delete Delete of Communication action Procedure Stored procedure of Communication action Operation Operation action 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 83 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 SLo z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 2 Summary Details of the existing actions are displayed Table 7 63 Display for Details Item Display format 12 Select Database Table name DB Tag link setting No 1 DB Tag link setting No n MultiSelect Select DB Tag link setting Field name Tag component constant value Update Database Table name DB Tag link setting No 1 DB Tag link setting No n Insert e DB Tag link setting Field name Tag component constant value Delete Database Table name Database Stored procedure name DB Tag link setting Return value DB Tag link setting AE Bon ie Tes lnk setting No n DB Tag link setting Tag component constant value Note that if return value does not exist DB Tag link setting Return value is not displayed Operation action No 1 Operation action No n e With s
74. NET10 16980 NETNO2 Network No ETHERNET or CCIEFIELD is selected for NET2 When other than the above is selected Blank When DIFFERENT is selected with o2 VO Add OTHER STATION and CCLINK or C24 Oh to FEOh Hexadecimal ress is selected with NET2 When other than the above is selected Blank When NET 10 or ETHERNE i T 1 to 120 is selected with NET2 When When CCLINk DIFFERENT is is selected with 0 to 63 selected with NET2 STATION2 Stati b alon number OTHER STATION When C24 is a o selected with NET2 When CCIEFIELD is selected for 0 to 120 NET2 When other than the above is selected Blank App 22 Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV with OTHER STATION Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres For characters can be used in CPU names refer to the following For characters that can be used for describing the name refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names g etc in the product He 2 Ifthe same CPU name already exists the existing name is overwritten 7 If the same CPU name is set multiple times the setting of the label with the higher number is X L overwritten 3 If the series other than QCPU is selected for SERIES NO cannot be selected If selected an error occurs g 4 Some restrictions apply to the setting values
75. Output log format Date Error code SID Session ID MIFWS Connected Source IP Target data source Connection ID Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 MIFWS Connected 192 168 3 3 DataSource ID b Disconnection Table 8 31 Disconnection from the MES interface module Output log format Date Error code SID Session ID MIFWS Disconnected Source IP Target data source Connection ID Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 MIFWS Disconnected 192 168 3 3 DataSource ID 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 L236 8 8 1 Access log OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL oe z O O mf A Z Q S m a ee as 22 Lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series 8 8 2 SQL failure log When an SQL text or stored procedure is executed on a database if an error occurs the error contents are output to the SQL failure log The following shows the SQL failure log contents For details on Database error number and Database error message in the output log format refer to the manual for each database Depending on the Error code however Database Message and subsequent data cannot be output According to the error code confirm the error details and take corrective actions
76. Power ON the programmable controller Check that the CompactFlash card is fully inserted to the MES interface module Turning CompactFlash card status X1 ON indicates correct installation End Figure 4 11 Installation of the CompactFlash card 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 15 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS A e w oO fa WW Q O x a fal zZ lt tyrz Bae W mea Do INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Le series Removal or replacement of the CompactFlash card Before removing or replacing the CompactFlash card be sure to stop file access by the following procedure Removal replacement of a CompactFlash card Is the programmable controller power ON Power ON the programmable controller Disable the read from write to the CompactFlash card by file access stop processing 1 Stopping file access t Remove the CompactFlash card lt 3 Removing a CompactFlash card Install a new NO CompactFlash card YES Install a new CompactFlash card 2 Installation of the CompactFlash card NO Operation restarted YES y Turn the powe
77. Q System setting E a Access target CPU settings mona 7 QI71MES96 i Device tag settings GB Server service settings Job settings Subnet mask Network settings Account setting Default gateway r Time synchronization setting Synchronize with PLC CPU time Synchronize with SNTP Ap serer beIa ezone fe mT 03 00 Daylight saving time Setting DB buffering settings DB buffering status i No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request Clear DB buffer request s A f s DB buffer full DB buffering capacity DB buffer utilization 64 MB Operation of recovery from network disconnection IF trigger conditions are met with a buffered data in the resend buffer Automatically resend buffer Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data gt Manually resend buffer Adding to the buffered data Figure 7 19 System setting Table 7 21 Setting items in System setting Item Description Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module Network setting to the network lt gt Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Time synchronization Make the time setting for the MES interface module setting lt L gt Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface Account setting module Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting Configure the settings for the DB buff
78. R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible o the next page To th t re aod B22 Zw oO PALS a OSE oo Hi ba ann 3 5 Buffer Memory List 3 21 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 3 15 Buffer memory list Address Initial Reference gt Application y Decimal Hex value section 140 8Cx 141 Current error Section System area 8Dn area 3 6 4 142 to 145 8Ex to 91H 146 to 149 92H to 95x 150 96x 151 97H 152 98x 153 99x 154 to 157 9A to 9Dx 158 to 163 QEx to A31 164 to 169 A4x to A91 meot AAu to AFH 176 to 181 BOH to B5x 182 to 187 Error log 6 Same as Error log 1 B6x to BBu Section o oo ree 3 6 5 Error log 7 Same as Error log 1 BCh to C1H 194 to 199 C24 to C71 200 to 205 C8H to CDx 206 to 211 CEx to D31 212 to 217 D4x to D9x 218 to 223 DAH to DF 224t0229 E0x to E51 230 to 235 E6x to EB 236 to 241 ECu to F11 242 to 247 F24 to F71 Error code 0 R Time 0 R Use prohibited System area Error count 0 R Error log write pointer 0 R Error code 0 R Error log 1 System area Time 0 R Error log 2 Same as Error log 1 Error log 3 Same as Error log 1 Error log 4 Same as Error log 1 Error log 5 Same as Error log 1 Error log 8 Same as Error
79. Te Check the source type and the data type of the tag component F Section 7 15 5 Type mismatch z TE Zu ann 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 121 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M aLS 26 Q ceries Table 7 83 Variable types and values available for Component Variable type Values variable names that can be entered in Component Up to 16 characters For the characters that can be used for variables refer to the following Variable i i lt gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product 3 Setting example of Operation action The following is a case in which correction power is calculated using a correction voltage and it is assigned to a tag component Process 1 Correction power The tag component value Process 1 Correction power obtained from the following Operation action is Process 1 Voltage x 100 50 x Current Operation action CorrcetionVol Process Voltage Number 100 CorrcetionVol lt lt Variable Corrcetionvol Number 50 CorrcetionPo lt lt Variable CorrcetionVol 3 Process Current lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt i EEEE Tag component data length in job 3 words
80. Trigger conditions lt gt Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions File format App 32 SCHEDULING J3 7z f3 None S G TA TIMER Jo o T T T T 1 2 3 VALUE 3000 3 4 HANDSHAKEENDELEMENT 4 Item row L Label column setting area To the next page Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Cel ries From the previous page Table App 35 File format ra lt nee ip Item Description OE we 23 5 Jv Job settings z9 Trigger conditions Combination The job starts when the trigger conditions changes From false to true H gt Trigger 1 Disable A 2 5 E 2 Q 4 fe Trigger 2 Disable E 3 rigger able KA iggi W a a ao Trigger 1 Time specification tartup Year Month Day Hour Minute i Ko 17 30 8 B gt Day M Mon M Tue M Wen iM Thu Fri D Sat Sun a File format hi Q Continued lt Trigger 1 Specified time period startup zi B gt 10 seconds Trigger 1 value mon pring startup x lt W Tag Component Condition Tag Type E Component a Process Temperature gt Constant i 45 Trigger 1 Handshake operation ail ig Conny Handshake startup Process1 Start Completion notification Process1 iCompletionN
81. W coe ESO 260 6 ZPO z ie E O Z Le DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 13 Online Remote operation T7 137 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 138 MELSEC Aeres 3 Update settings a After writing the MES interface function settings select the Update settings radio button Clicking the Execute button restarts the MES interface module and updates the settings For writing the MES interface function settings refer to the following lt gt Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings When Update settings is performed the operation behavior is as follows 1 During the setting update the MES interface function is temporarily stopped No job is executed during the stop 2 After the setting update the MES interface function is operated 3 The data changed in Change job status are cleared C Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status 4 The written MES interface function settings are updated 5 The trigger buffer area and the DB buffer area are cleared E Point Update settings may change the programmable controller CPU control Ensure the safety before executing it 4 Clear error D When Error status is Continuation error take corrective actions to remove the error cause Then select the Clear error radio button a
82. When multiple sets of conditions for data transmission are met in a concentrated R manner their data and trigger times are buffered in the module s internal memory so that Trigger buffering yA Section 6 1 5 actions data operation transmission can be executed later using the buffered data function Section 7 10 1 SQL text transmission function Communication action Automatically creates an SQL text and communicates with the database The following commands can be selected for the SQL text e Select MultiSelect e Update e Insert e Delete Section 6 1 6 Section 7 11 2 Stored procedure call function Communication action A function to startup stored procedure in the database Section 7 11 3 Arithmetic processing function Operation action Program execution function Performs operations for tag component values Executes programs in the application server computer before execution of the first action and after execution of the last one in a job Section 6 1 8 Section 7 11 4 Section 6 1 9 Section 7 10 3 DB buffering function Buffers SQL texts into a CompactFlash card when they cannot be sent due to network disconnection or failure of the database server computer After recovery the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database Manual operation is also possible Section 6 1 10 Section 7 6 4 Section 7 10 4 Section 7 13 6 Processes execution of reques
83. Work_No Completed Rejected Date j 536 496 32 2005 07 01 15 12 00 w z iL ae im Z o w l Q O z O 62 e oL 56 ZO Matched Updated Updated Updated Tag component Process1 Work_No Process1 Completed Process1 Rejected Constant Server time 536 496 32 2005 07 01 15 12 00 Z Foo Figure 7 73 Operation example of Update wz 2 Zoo gt F An ann 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 97 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series c When Insert is selected for Action type Insert generates a new record and inserts an insert value tag component value constant value variable into a field of the generated record 1 Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for the field value to be inserted For characters that can be used for field names refer to the following lt lt gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc For browsing the field names in the database refer to the following lt 8 Browse field name in this section 2 Tag Select a tag constant or variable which is substituted Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 3 Component Select or directly enter a component constant value valuable that is to be substi
84. directly hereafter explained with the Motion CPU 1 Auto refresh using CPU shared memory in a multiple CPU system By performing auto refresh between the QCPU and Motion CPU in the multiple CPU system device data in the Motion CPU can be read to the QCPU Registering device data read to the QCPU with tags enables to handle the device data in the Motion CPU 2 Settings required for auto refresh Set the devices to which data are stored and the number of points sent by each CPU with PLC parameter Multiple CPU settings Refresh settings of GX Developer For auto refresh settings refer to the following manual 3 QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System 3 Acquisition example of the Motion CPU device data a System configuration MES interface module cee Motion CPU CPU No 2 Figure App 6 System configuration App 62 Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly APPENDICES MELSEC Kel ries b Refresh settings for the Motion CPU CPU No 2 Set the number of points to be sent and devices stored to the auto refresh area in the CPU shared memory of the Motion CPU Example D256 to D511 Auto refresh area 0000 to OOFF Refresh settings Change screens Setting 1 x J Set starting devices for each PLC Send range for each PLC PLC side device The auto refresh area Caution Stt sam 256 511 ae ae mee eer Caution Offset HEX from starti
85. e Check the disk device for any fault 507 Failed to rename the SQL failure log file e When the attribution of the new and old SQL failure log files is set to read only cancel the setting e If read write is disabled for the new and old SQL failure log files enable it in the security setting When the new and old SQL failure log files have been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault c Event log output error list of DB Connection Service Client source name DBCnctClient Table 10 6 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service Client source name DBCnctClient Error code 50 51 Error description and cause 52 Unable to start DB Connection Service Client 53 Corrective action Terminate unnecessary applications Add more memory to the computer 10 2 Error Code List 10 27 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service CA J XML MESSAGE n FORMAT 1 z Q O n w D O ad E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Access log of DB Connection Service MELSEC Le series Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error code Error description and cause Corrective action Service Not Start 0x20100001 1 Failed to start the service due to insufficient memory e Terminate any unnecessary applications Service Not Start e Add m
86. e The component is added in Component List Modifying a component zo e When a component to be modified is selected in Component List its settings are 2S displayed in Component setting input e Modify the item settings in Component setting input and click the button Deleting a component z e Select a component to be deleted in Component List and click the Delete button 5 oO N Deleting the settings in Component setting input e Clicking the button deletes the settings in Component setting input O r Component setting input 7 a T Component name cPUname controcPU ti s C i Clear goo Head device Data type Single word X bytes Add Eos I Perform statistical processes Replace a fa o Statistical type i ples wo Component List J fel ef z I Component name CPU name Device Data type Statistical type 2 z 1 5 FE O lt F 5 eZ zal 23 8 9 10 11 12 13 _14 o 15 6 16 5 mas J array block size 0 5 Figure 7 35 Component setting j 6 fe 2 fri a W z E ESO 260 836 TO z e O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 45 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M aLS a6 el series Table 7 38 Items in Component setting Item Description Component name Enter a component name Up to 16 characters Select one
87. selected in CPU name in Component setting input e Delete the component setting with selection of any other than the first item or change the setting so that the first item will be used for it e If High speed sampling is selected only the first item in Access target CPU settings Control CPU can be selected for the tag component Is the number of device points set in the tag setting more than 96 e Reduce the number of device points in the tag setting to 96 or less e When High speed sampling is selected set tag component devices within the total of 96 points Unable to change the Prohibit data writing setting Is the tag used for a setting item by which data are written to the tag e Completion notification of Handshake operation substitution tags of Select in Communication action etc e Stop using the tag for the setting item by which data are written to the tag before changing the setting e If the tag is used for a setting item by which data are written to the tag clearing the Prohibit data writing box is not allowed 5 Server service settings gt Section 7 9 Server Service Setting Symptom Unable to set or change Server service name Table 10 14 Server service settings Checked item Is the same name used for another Server service name or Device tag name Corrective action Because a unique name must be used for Server service name and Devi
88. 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Kel ries CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW This manual explains the specifications preparatory procedures functions and troubleshooting for the MELSEC Q series QJ71MES96 MES interface module hereafter abbreviated as MES interface module When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems OVERVIEW k N z Zz The MES interface module links the programmable controller Production equipment 2 device data with information system Manufacturing Execution System database without 0 communication gateways ie 2S HO Information linkage using the MES interface module Conventional information linkage without the MES interface module lt Manufacturing Execution System gt lt Manufacturing Execution System gt D Information system Information system 2 Database Database a a N lt Communication gateway gt Host information system communication processing Computerization via communication gateways is unnecessary SQL Data processing XML Operation processing logging etc Controller communication lt Production equipment gt lt Production equipment gt SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION
89. 1 to 64 error codes Buffer memory address 4008 to 4071 The error code showing the error contents is stored in the corresponding area of access target CPU setting number for which the Access target CPU error has occurred For error codes refer to the following Section 10 2 Error Code List 3 36 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 9 Access target CPU setting status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 3 6 10 Information linkage function area 1 Time synchronization setting status Buffer memory address 11500 OVERVIEW a The setting status of Time synchronization setting is stored For Time synchronization setting refer to the following C Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting 0 Synchronize with PLC CPU time 1 Synchronize with SNTP b When selecting Synchronize with SNTP in Time synchronization setting This area is set when the time information was obtained from the SNTP server computer If the time information could not be obtained from the SNTP server computer this area is not set since the operation for when Synchronize with PLC CPU time is selected is performed Time is synchronized with the programmable controller CPU CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z O q o S M a o 2 SNTP time query result Buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected in Time synchronization setting the time information o
90. 1024 4096 Select 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 9s 7 58s Update p 0 2s 0 3s 0 7s 2 5s 9 6s Insert c When MultiSelect is selected The following table lists the results in the case where MultiSelect is selected for Action type Table App 72 Measurement results when MultiSelect is selected for Action type No of data 16 64 256 1024 4096 16384 40000 MultiSelect 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 9s 7 58 30s 75s App 58 Appendix 4 Processing Time Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later and 13091 or earlier APPENDICES MELSEC Kel ries Appendix 4 3 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier 1 Measurement conditions Server computer Access target CPU Table App 73 Measurement conditions Item Description CPU Intel Xeon 2 8GHz Memory 256MB Operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Database Oracle 10g Programmable controller CPU Q25HCPU control CPU on own station Network No other station specified Own station Sequence scan time ims Device tag settings No of tags For trigger conditions 1 tag For communication data 1 tag for 16 64 256 fields 4 tags for 1024 fields 16 tags for 4096 fields Sampling setting For trigger conditions High speed sampling 1 x 100ms For communication data Do not sample Data type For trigger conditions Bit transmit and receive For data
91. 1290 with Buffer memory batch monitor of Monitor format 82 Word Display 16bit integer Value DEC GX Developer C Wad 2 Check that 5 is stored as the No of stored tag Buffer memory address 1291 Check that the Update count Buffer memory address 1292 is updated ooo r a 4 Check that the No of components for tag No 5 is cooo cooo 000 eooo o stored in the No of components Buffer memory address 1293 Check that the tag component value is stored in the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to the address required for the No of components 3 34 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 8 Current tag data value area 3 SPECIFICATIONS SLSEC KEY series 5 Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 a The current values of the tag components whose No is specified with the No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 are stored b Two words are assigned per tag component 1300 Current value of 1301 tag component 1 1302 Current value of 1303 tag component 2 1810 Current value of 1811 tag component 256 Figure 3 14 Current tag data value area component 483 c Data are stored as follows depending on the data type for the tag Upper word Lower word Single precision 0 Current value Double precision Current value Floating point Curr
92. 16 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration orssssereeriiiis Anann E EER 2 19 2 6 1 Precautions for using Redundant CPU ssssssssssssssssrrssstrrrssttrrrsssttnrrnnsttntsnntttnnnattennnnnten nnanet 2 19 2 6 2 Precautions for using multiple CPU SySteM ec eceeeeeeentteee eee eeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeetneeeeeeeenaaes 2 20 2 6 3 Precautions for using database eee eeeeeer eee erent eee eetnnee eee eeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeiaeeeeeennaes 2 21 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 38 3 1 Performance Speci iCalion scsissicdseesavactediaansns accede saneheseaxaiatadessabansaces teanagastealusacasdes LAEE 3 1 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeieeeeseeiaeeeeseeiaeeeeesenieeeeseeniaeeeeseaes 3 5 29 Funcion LIST sic capex sees dss Seead gas lenec agentes OO 3 12 A 10 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 0 ccccccceceeeeeeeseeetecteeeeeeeeees 241 WO SIGMA NSCs icies sc cnctees see deceescietecvans ENN 3 4 2 WO Signals details 2 2 0 eee eee cette eee eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeaaeeeeeeeaeeees 3 5 BufferiMemory UStieswesednceedeasit E aNnde 3 6 Buffer Memory Detallsictcceciesceecessduecedeusvdysecsdyssusneceee TR 3 6 1 Module status area ou ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeees 3 6 2 Network connection status area oo eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeees 3 6 3 Network settings status area ooo ceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenee
93. 31 14 35 23 JOBS Startup o ao 2006 07 31 14 35 18 JOB2 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 09 JOB2 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 08 JOB1 Startup 2006 07 31 14 35 08 JOB4 Startup 2006 07 31 14 34 58 JOBS Startup 2006 07 31 14 34 58 JOB2 Startup 2006 07 31 14 34 56 JOB3 Handshake end 2006 07 31 14 34 55 JOB3 Handshake start 2006 07 31 14 34 53 JOB4 Startup JOODOUOU BOR OOH IO eI INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Figure 7 100 Working log dialog box Table 7 85 Setting items in the Working log dialog box Item Description Date Error code Summary Error log data of the MES interface module are displayed a Z O E iQ zZ 5 TE Error log Update Updating the error log 7 Clear Clearing the error log history 3 2 This area displays event log data of the jobs whose executions have mM Icons Date Job Summary Q been completed roe z E93 Event log View details Detailed log data of the jobs are displayed Z 5 z Update Updating the event log S28 Clear Clearing the event log history Zz Pod ze Wo PALS a OSE aki ann 7 12 Online T 127 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Led series 1 Error log The following explains the display of the Error log Table 7 86 Displays in Error log Item
94. 32 characters 2 For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Specify the date and time of the MES interface module in the following a format Year 4 digits YYYY Date String Year 2 digits YY Month 2 digits MM Day 2 digits DD Z m Hour 2 digits hh Bae Minute 2 digits mm Eos Second 2 digits ss DLO Example YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 2005 07 01 15 12 00 2 About variables Variables can be used for Component of Substitution tag or Component of Operation tag By using a variable a value computed in Operation action can be assigned to a database or to a tag component In the latter case operation is performed based on a value extracted from the database The following table shows the variable types and values that can be entered in the Component column Up to 64 variables can be set for one job Point 1 A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held 2 The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value of zero 3 If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component when a substitution tag is the tag component Type conversion to tag component error is displayed INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j O 2 ms G WL raped See 260 36 ZPO z e O Z
95. 48 y ITEM REMOTEEXEC SERVER COMMAND REMOTEEXEC1 1 ENABLE 4 CADBAPP RECIPE_02 exe REMOTEEXEC1 2_ ENABLE K C DBAPP COUNT_01 exe REMOTEEXECS 1_ ENABLE C DBAPP LOG_01 exe DISABLE REMOTEEXEC5 2 a a m o ENABLE o bs Ee RETURNCHECK RETURNVALUE ERRORWRITE ERRORTAG ERRORELEMENT 1 DISABLE ee ee eee ae ENABLE OC ENABLE ERRORVALUE 2 nowan 4010 L Item row Label column setting area Program execution setting before action execution Program execution setting after action execution ae Program execution settings before action execution IV Execute program before action Program execution destination APP_Server Zi Commandiine C DBAPP RECIPE_02 EXE Check return value lormal return value EJ 0 9 M Write the balue into the tag when value is Faulty Tag Component i Process2 DB_Error ssi V Do not execute job when the value is Faulty Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres 2 Label it 5 Table App 56 Label uw A 2 Label Description z 5 m Job settings No 1 to 64 1 Before actions 2 After actions REMOTEEXEC1 1 to REMOTEEXEC64 2 g REMOTEEXEC64 2 I 5 Indicates 1 Before actions 2 After actions T Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 a amp 3 S
96. 5 6 4 Figure 7 36 Moving average 4 4 T 50 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 n Array No i c He eof gt soll Figure 7 37 n Array No When Array setting is set the device range of array No n is displayed in Device n of Component List To change the Device n display use the following methods 5 e Enter a value in the box A e Change the value with the M or button ee cas 8 Array block size no IV array block size 10 points 6 q Figure 7 38 array block size When block is selected in Array setting array block size setting is available g Usually the block size need not be changed because the it is automatically adjusted to avoid duplication of components Change array block size when Setting a desired number for the start device No of each block 9 e Adding any component in the future goo The following example explains the cases where array block size is manually set and oa O is not set Example When Component D is to be added in the future e When 10 is set for array block size device numbers are not changed e When nothing is set for array block size device numbers in and after array No 2 are changed INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION When the size is set Array block size 10
97. 59 Appendix 5 External DimMensions c ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeneeee scene eee eeteceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeenaaees App 61 Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly cccceeeeeeteees App 62 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R ccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeieaeeeseeeaaees App 64 Appendix 7 1 Overview of warning messages eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teers eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeteenaeeeees App 64 Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenaeeeesenaaeees App 65 Appendix amp Transportation Precautions i c ciccisscssccssssecccatansancicecssaaancadetaadeccdbasandasdaeaseccddtanaatacedaveanaads App 73 Appendix 8 1 Controlled model sicscicisicvseccosisesisnsvedtaaseechaseve becnageteeracnateanascosuetaananedeteaeae aad N ETENE EA App 73 Appendix 8 2 Handling for ShIpping ccceeeeeeececceceeeeeeeeeeeceaecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeteseccncusaeeeeeeerereteteeeines App 73 Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States App 74 Appendix 9 1 Disposal precautions cccceeeeeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneecaeceeeeeeeeeeeesesecncnceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeiaes App 74 Appendix 9 2 IExportation precautions nasute O A App 75 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 A 15 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES A
98. 6 FUNCTIONS 6 14 MELSEC Le series 2 Factors for starting DB buffering DB buffering is conducted when SQL texts or stored procedure call information cannot be sent to the database by any of the following causes a or b a Disconnection on the network or failure of the database server computer Upon detection of a connection timeout DB buffering is started L gt 7 DB buffering operation Time for detecting connection timeout is set to 10 seconds by default K Section 7 9 1 8 Connection timeout Range 1 to 180 seconds Default 10 seconds Even if a trigger condition is met again during connection timeout detection the corresponding job is not executed K gt Section 6 1 11 1 Operation behavior of jobs b Failure of the database software Upon detection of DB access timeout DB buffering is started lt 7 DB buffering operation Time for detecting DB access timeout is set to 30 seconds by default Section 8 5 2 DB access timeout required Range 1 to 3600 Default 30 Even if a trigger condition is met again during detection of DB access timeout the corresponding job is not executed Ks Section 6 1 11 1 Operation behavior of jobs Point If an error occurs when the sent SQL text or stored procedure is executed on the database by some reason such as its incorrectness or inconsistency with the database buffering is not performed and an SQL failure log is output on the database server c
99. 65535 fa USERNAME User name Up to 30 characters PASSWORD Password Up to 30 characters When DB is selected with r Character string Data source SERVERTYPE EJ SOURCENAME l l name When APP is selected with Blank SERVERTYPE Oracle 8i ORACLE8I Oracle 9i ORACLE9I Oracle 10g 11g 12c ORACLE10G SQL Server When IDB i 2000 2005 SQLSRV2000 en DB S 2008 2012 selected Avith MSDE 2000 MSDE2000 EJ oBtyPe Database type SERVERTYPE Access 2000 ACCESS2000 Access 2003 2007 ACCESS2003 2010 2013 Wonderware ae INSQL Historian When APP is selected with Blank SERVERTYPE Access error When enabled ENABLE ERRORWRITE ane notification setting When disabled DISABLE DEVICETAG Tag 1 to 64 ELEMENT Component 1 to 256 TIMEOUT Connection timeout 1 to 180 Unit second Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 10 SERVER CSV App 29 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 11 JOB CSV 1 File format Table App 32 File format Item Description File name JOB CSV File contents e Job settings 37 gt Section 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting e Job settings DB Buffering lt gt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering e Job settings Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution CLF Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation
100. 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 117 7 11 3 Setting items in Communication action Stored procedure OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION ma FUNCTIONS O 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 6 ZPO z O O Z ve DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 118 MELSEC A series 3 DB tag link settings Set assignments between field values and tag component values or constant values Up to 256 rows can be set in DB tag link settings for each communication action a Return Argument Select the argument type of a stored procedure in the following Input Integer Input Real Input String Input Date e Output Integer Output Real Output String e I O Integer I O Real I O String Set the argument in accordance with the order of the first and second argument in the first row The argument is set automatically when the procedure name is set by selecting on the Stored procedure list screen 14 In case the data type of the argument of the stored procedure is not applicable any of Input String Output String or I O String is set as an argument When the database type is SQL server Return can be set 1 When DB buffering is enabled in Job settings none of the return values output variables and input outpu
101. 7 90 An example of Clear the unused tag components by zero 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 115 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 116 MELSEC Le series 7 11 3 Setting items in Communication action Stored procedure This section explains the setting items of communication action when selecting Stored procedure in Action type Communication action Action type Stored procedure Database NewServer kA Procedure name r DB tag link settings roe Return Argument Tag Type Component A Combine Field name Condition _ Field name Executed procedure O No of fields in project 0 Tag component data length in job O words total Cancel Figure 7 91 Communication action dialog box Table 7 80 Setting items in the Communication action dialog box Item Description Action type Select an action type Database Select a database to be accessed Procedure name Set a procedure name to be executed Browse procedure name button Browse the stored proced
102. After changing the Database on the Communication action screen execute Browse procedure name again The elements cannot be added on the tag setting screen Device range is incorrect Was the device of RCPU which does not exist in the range of QCPU or C Controller module specified 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom e Specify the device number within the range that can be specified in QCPU or C Controller module 10 43 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool CA J XML MESSAGE n FORMAT 0 Z Q O n w l D O E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series 10 3 2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of DB Connection Service Setting Tool K gt Chapter 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL Table 10 17 DB connection service setting tool Symptom Unable to start DB Connection Service Setting Tool Checked item Has another DB Connection Service Setting Tool been already started Corrective action e Terminate the already started DB Connection Service Setting Tool e Only one DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be activated Is the memory or the system resources on the personal computer sufficient e Increase the necessary memory on the personal computer e Close other programs and restart DB Connection Service Setting
103. App 56 No of tags Sampling setting For trigger conditions 1 tag In the case of Select Update or Insert For communication data 1 tag for 16 64 256 fields 4 tags for 1024 fields 16 tags for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect For receive data 1 tag Use array For trigger conditions High speed sampling 1 x 100ms For communication data Do not sample Data type For trigger conditions Bit transmit receive For data Single precision No of components For trigger conditions No of jobs x 2 For communication data Same as the number of fields In the case of MultiSelect 16 data 4 components 64 data 8 components 256 data 16 components 1024 data 32 components 4096 data 64 components 16384 data 128 components 40000 data 200 components Appendix 4 Processing Time Length of array In the case of MultiSelect 16 data 4 64 data 8 256 data 16 1024 data 32 4096 data 64 16384 data 128 40000 data 200 To the next page Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later and 13091 or earlier APPENDICES Job setting MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table App 69 Measurement conditions Item Description Trigger conditions Handshake operation No of jobs In the case of Select Update or Insert 1 job for 16 64 256 1024 fields 2 jobs for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect 1 job No of a
104. App 18 Setting item Item Description Setting value When set 1 to 64 TAG Tag When not set Blank When set 1 to 256 EJ ELEMENT Component When the TAG is blank Blank When not set Blank Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 19 Appendix 3 6 DBBUF CSV XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV 1 File format Table App 19 File format Item Description File name CPU CSV File contents Access target CPU settings lt 3 Section 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting File format App 20 EJ acru no no f cpus Painting equipment _ anacpu DIFFERENT neto cpuso Welding equipment acru SINGLE CCLINK E Item row Change disabled L Label column setting area Can be changed by the user Access target CPU settings Ga New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help Os GRs HM NewProject QP system setting Za CPU name NewCPU J Access target CPU settings BB controicpu ER occ 3 eran J Device tag settings Server service settings a 0 A Multiple CPU specification No specification Job settings E gt Other station specification No specification C Other Station Single network Other Station Co existence network Network communication r
105. CSV File Format This section explains the format of CSV files Setting information files created by exporting the project settings with the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool L7 Section 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file Exported setting information files can be utilized for creating setting sheets or printing Appendix 3 1 Setting information files list This section lists the exported setting information files Table App 6 List of exported setting information files Reference File name Setting contents i section ere cay System setting Network settings Appendix 3 3 f System setting Time synchronization setting ACCOUNT CSV System setting Account setting Appendix 3 4 DST CSV System setting Time synchronization setting Appendix 3 5 DBBUF CSV System setting DB buffering settings Appendix 3 6 cPu csv i Access target CPU settings Appendix 3 7 TAG csv 1 Device tag settings Appendix 3 8 COMPONENT CSV 1 Device tag settings Component setting Appendix 3 9 SERVER CSV Server service settings Appendix 3 10 Job settings JOB CSV Appendix 3 11 Job settings DB buffering settings CONDITION CSV Job settings Trigger conditions Appendix 3 12 ACTION CSV Job settings Action Appendix 3 13 ACFIELD CSV Communication action DB tag link settings Appendix 3 14 ACCONDITION CSV Communication action Select Update D
106. Content length String valueOf requestMessage length BASIC authentication String account QJ71MES96 MITSUBISHI String enc_account new String encodeBase64 account conn setRequepstProperty Authorization Basic enc_account OutputStream outStream conn getOutputStream PrintStream printStream new PrintStream outStream printStream print requestMessage printStream close InputStream inputStream conn getInputStream BufferedReader reader new BufferedReader new InputStreamReader inputStream String STr while str reader readLine null System out printIn str Receive contents display reader close catch Exception e System err printIn Errorn n e To the next page 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method 9 5 9 2 2 Sample program Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT Base64 encode static String encodeBase64 String inStr MELSEC Le series From the previous page String reffable ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789 int rest inStr length 3 if rest 0 inStr new String new byte 0 0 0 substring rest byte inBuf inStr getBytes StringBuffer outStr new StringBuffer for int i 0 i lt inBuf length i 3 int tempBuf inBufli lt lt 16 inBufi 1 lt lt 8 inBuf i 2 for int j 18 j gt 0 j 6 outStr append refTable charAt tempBuf gt gt j amp Ox3f if
107. DBConnector Corrective action Terminate any unnecessary applications Add more memory to the personal computer 503 The full path name of the SQL failure log file is too long Shorten the path to the SQL failure log file with DB Connection Service Setting Tool 504 The SQL failure log file could not be opened If no directory exists for storing the SQL failure log file create it e When the attribution of the SQL failure log file is set to read only cancel the setting e If read write is disabled for the SQL failure log file enable it in the security setting e When the SQL failure log file name represents a directory rename or delete the directory e When the SQL failure log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault 505 506 The log could not be written to the SQL failure log file Failed to delete an old SQL failure log file When the disk space is full ensure a free disk space e When the SQL failure log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault e When the attribution of the oldest SQL failure log file is set to read only cancel the setting e If read write is disabled for the oldest SQL failure log file enable it in the security setting e When the oldest SQL failure log file has been open in another application terminate the application
108. Description Date 2 Displays the date and time on which an error information occurred Displays an error code of the error occurred Error code For error codes refer to the following Section 10 2 Error Code List Summary Displays error messages and system information In the case of time synchronization using SNTP the clock time of CPU No 1 is displayed for the time from when the module starts up until it succeeds in time query to the SNTP server 2 The date and time of an error information that occurred before obtaining the clock time from CPU No 1 is not displayed 3 For system information no error code is displayed T 128 7 12 Online 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 2 Event log There are two kinds of Event log data Startup log and Detailed log by which the job startup history and job execution details can be checked respectively g O a Startup log Startup log data of the jobs each of which has Startup logging setting in Job settings are displayed t Section 7 10 1 4 Startup logging 6 The following explains the display of the Startup log o ins 2S 1 Icons ae Each of icons represents the completion status of a job Table 7 87 Icons and their meanings P C The job was completed normally No detailed log S The job was completed normally With detailed log g Sel
109. Displays the number of settings for each setting type in the project into which data are imported Displays the number of the settings to be imported for each setting type Existing registration information Import information T 14 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 1 Selecting an item to be imported In the tree select the item to be imported a Ww Table 7 16 Item to be imported Checked item Item to be imported Project root All items in the project Setting type All items under the setting type whose checkbox is checked Item Each item whose checkbox is checked O When the setting type shown below is selected items under any other setting type are E z automatically selected if they are used for the selected one ao Note that if an item of the same name exists in the target project the item is not automatically selected The user must select items to be imported n z Table 7 17 Automatically selected item Setting type Automatically selected item E Device tag settings Access target CPU settings a 2 Import precautions e i o There is a limit on the number of settings for each setting type in a project am igi F z i Lez Check Existing registration information and Import information and select items of 22 cree Zw each setting type to be imported so that each limit is
110. For the output log format refer to the following Section 8 8 2 SQL failure log 10 2 Error Code List 10 35 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service CA J XML MESSAGE FORMAT 0 Z Q O A w al a 9 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response messages Error code 0x41170101 Table 10 9 Error codes returned in XML response messages Error name System error Description Action e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0x41170103 0x41171101 XML message length error XML request message interpretation error The length of the received XML message is invalid The received XML request message is invalid Data are not properly formatted as an XML message 0x41171111 Duplicated XML request message route The XML request message route is duplicated Multiple Request tags exist 0x41171201 XML request message route error There is an invalid route for XML request message transmission Any tag other than Request exists 0x41171205 XML request message attribute error The attribute in the received XML request message is invalid Failed to identify the message type is oneshot validate or invalidate Attribute type does not exist Attribute type value is invalid Attribute jobname does not exist The XML declaration is
111. GIES LY MUG Example The following shows that the job is activated at 60 second intervals for an hour from 12 00 to 13 00 every day m Trigger conditions Combination AND The job starts when the trigger conditions changes from false to true Trigger 1 Time specification startup hd Year Month Day HOLY Minute Day T Mon Tue Wenl Thu Fri Sat Sun Trigger 2 Specified time period startup 60 seconds Figure 7 49 Example of setting combination of Time specification startup and Specified time period startup 6 Value monitoring startup a The actual tag component value is compared with the condition value tag component value or constant value at every sampling times and the job is activated when the condition changes from false to true Even if the trigger condition becomes true temporarily between samplings the job is not activated unless it is true at time of sampling i i Starup point Startup point R HE Pom gas value Not activated here Tag component value d lt gt i i Sampling interval H H i Figure 7 50 Job startup points when Value monitoring startup is selected 1 66 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres b When Value monitoring startup is selected specify conditions for comparison Trigger 1
112. Handshake startup in the sequence program j When Handshake startup turns OFF the MES interface module turns OFF Completion notification causing the handshake operation to be completed After confirming the completion of the handshake operation the next job is executed le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 36 SLo z O O Z Te If an error occurs during job execution Completion notification does not turn ON To detect such an error enable Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution lt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 69 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 70 MELSEC A series Point When accessing the Redundant CPU it is recommended to select Handshake operation for trigger condition When selecting other than Handshake operation data separation may occur at system switching of the redundant system b Handshake operation is selectable only in Trigger 1 When Handshake operation is selected selection is not allowed for Trigger 2 For selection of Handshake operation set the following items Trigger 1 Handshake operation v Tag Handshake startup Process1 Completion notification Process1 HaNyss HUN rams ww U UG Component Figure 7 55 Hand
113. Interface Function Configuration Tool is not displayed correctly Cannot operate MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Is the memory or the system resources on the personal computer sufficient Forced to terminate MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom e Increase the necessary memory on the personal computer e Close other programs and restart MES Interface Function Configuration Tool To the next page 10 37 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool CA J XML MESSAGE n FORMAT 1 Z Q O A w al a 9 d APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom Unable to import a project file Table 10 10 Common to all settings Checked item The specified project file is incorrect or corrupted MELSEC Le series From the previous page Corrective action e Specify a correct project file Is there any inconsistency in the setting e Check the setting and correct it if any Did the number of settings exceed the upper limit e Check the number of settings lt L Section 7 4 4 Importing a project Unable to import a CSV file Is the CSV file description correct Is there any inconsistency in the setting e Correct the CSV file description e Check the setting and correct it if any Did the number of settings exceed the upper limit e Check the number of setting
114. Link direct device S Une 2 2 g O i Link special relay Jn SB O O x O x O Link register Jn W O O x O x O Link special register Jn SW O O x O O Intelligent function module device Un G 7 O O x O O O 3 10 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series ice CPU CPU nACP C Controller Device Q RCPU Q LCPU fe ACPU Device name Q mode 16 A mode U module Cyclic transmission area ene O O x x x x O Module access device U3En G 12 15 device Cyclic transmission area AE x x x x x x x device U3En HG 1 4 Module refresh q ee Refresh data register RD 14 x x x x x x x 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 O Accessible x Inaccessible The local devices of the Q QnA series programmable controller CPU and file registers for individual programs cannot be accessed by specifying the program name Do not use local devices and file registers for individual programs since they may not be read written correctly For the QCPU Q mode QnACPU specify SM for the QCPU A mode ACPU specify M9000 or later For the QCPU Q mode QnACPU specify SD for the QCPU A mode ACPU specify D9000 or later For the device name specify either of them For n specify the block number For n specify the network No For n specify the intelligent function module special f
115. MX MESIinterface Oracle 8i Oracle 9i All versions All versions Oracle 10g Oracle 11g 12012 or later Version 1 05F or later Oracle 12c 16072 or later Version 1 12N or later Microsoft SQL Server 2000 All versions All versions Microsoft SQL Server 2005 09012 or later Version 1 01B or later Microsoft SQL Server 2008 12012 or later Version 1 05F or later Microsoft SQL Server 2012 14122 or later Version 1 09K or later Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE 2000 Micrason Access 2000 All versions All versions Microsoft Access 2003 Microsoft Access 2007 10012 or later Version 1 04E or later Microsoft Access 2010 13092 or later Version 1 08J or later Microsoft Access 2013 15102 or later Version 1 10L or later Wonderware Historian 9 0 Industrial SQL Server 09012 or later Version 1 01B or later 2 4 Operating Environment 2 4 2 Server computer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 4 3 Computer for developing XML processing applications This section explains the operating environment of the computer for developing XML processing applications OVERVIEW Table 2 10 Operating environment of computer for developing XML processing applications Item Description Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Sun Microsystems J2SE v1 4 2 N Program development environment z O lt o U Zz Q SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO O
116. MX MESInterface X Figure 7 99 Verifying the MES interface function settings T 126 7 12 Online 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel eries 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module The working log of the MES interface module can be checked a n z In Working log error log data of the MES interface module and job event log data can be i checked Q Select Online View working log from the menu The Working log dialog box is displayed 6 Operate it referring to the following descriptions a 2S HO Working log Error log Information of errors and system Date Error code Summary 2006 07 31 14 30 47 OB8C Communication message reception timeout nO 2006 07 31 14 24 48 Start operation 5 2006 07 31 14 20 02 Start operation 2006 07 31 14 18 56 0883 Communication connection error 5 2006 07 31 14 18 46 0B8C Communication message reception timeout L 2006 07 31 14 18 23 Start operation O 2006 07 31 14 17 26 0B8C Communication message reception timeout a 2006 07 31 14 17 03 Start operation oO 2006 07 31 14 16 13 Start operation a Update Clear r Event log Information of job execution _Date Job name Summary a 2 2006 07 31 14 35 42 JOB4 Startup Z ws 2006 07 31 14 35 41 JOB1 Startup 8A 2 2006 07 31 14 35 34 JOB2 Startup z ray z 2006 07 31 14 35 23 JOB4 Startup 9 m 2006 07
117. NUMBER Constant type Character string STRING Variable VARIABLE None NONE When TAG is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE 1 to 64 IN1TAG Input 1 Tag When other than the above is selected with INICONSTTYPE Blank E INT ELEMENT Input 1 When TAG is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE 1 to 256 Component When other than the above is selected with INICONSTTYPE Blank When TAG is selected with IN CONSTTYPE Blank Character string valid When DATESTR is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE as a date 9 INPUT1 Input 1 Variable When NUMBER is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Numerical value When STRING is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Any character string When VARIABLE is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Variable name When NONE is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Blank No operation NONE ADD OPERATION Operator E SUBTRYST x MULTIPLY DEVIDE REMAINDER To the next page App 46 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Kel series From the previous page Table App 54 Setting item ra lt Item Description Setting value R z When NONE is selected with OPERATION Blank z Z Tag TAG le ae Date string DATESTR n IN2CONSTTYPE eae 3 When other than the above is Numerical value NUMBER d selected with OPERATION Character string STRING z Variable VARIABLE 8 ae None NONE tt When NONE is selected with OPE
118. OOOO S S One shot execution Executes a job as a one shot task Section 7 12 6 i Z a Se uN___ saa aaa EQ Aa 226 SPo O 528 2 lt TE gt E nh ann 7 3 Screen Structure T 7 3 2 Menu configuration F MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 5 Help MELSEC Aeres Product information Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Figure 7 9 Help menu Table 7 5 Help menu items oe Reference Item Description section Displays the product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Product information Tool Section 7 14 Connect to MITSUBISHI Displays the Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website screen ELECTRIC FA Global Website 7 3 3 Toolbar configuration This section shows each command provided on the toolbar un r Z h Ose SB amp s AMR Figure 7 10 Toolbar Table 7 6 Toolbar items PEE Reference Item Description section C New Creates a new project Section 7 4 1 i Open Retrieves an existing project Section 7 4 2 mj Save Overwrites and saves the current project Section 7 4 3 B Add item Adds the item selected in the Edit items tree Section 7 3 4 E Delete item Deletes the item selected in the Edit items tree Section 7 3 4 the Reads the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface ae Read Section 7 12 3 module Ea Write Write
119. OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION ez o Z O O Z 5 U MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series Point 1 The job can be started only when the device tags used for trigger conditions of all jobs have been sampled normally 1 1 When the first five digits of the serial No is 11011 or earlier the operation of the MES interface module is different 3 Appendix 1 2 2 Trigger monitoring function 2 If Value monitoring startup is selected the tag component value used for trigger monitoring and the one used in the started job may be collected at different timings To collect these tag component values synchronously use Handshake operation Section 7 10 2 8 Handshake operation 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aeres 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function When multiple sets of trigger conditions conditions for data transmission are met ina a concentrated manner their data and trigger times are buffered in the module s internal Ei memory so that actions data operation transmission can be executed later using the o buffered data Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high jobs
120. S c s E 4 D T d t CS 5 E U e u r ES amp 6 F V f v z i 7 G wl g w A 8 8 H X h x lt 8 9 l Y i y Zw J Z j z EA E EN lt ES a mom 1 BES NT o 3 3 wE O INDEX 2 Reserved terms The following words are reserved terms and therefore cannot be used For reserved terms of the database refer to the following gt Manuals of the database used Table App 3 Reserved terms Reserved terms abstract boolean break byte case catch char class const continue DATETIME debugger default delete do double else enum event exit export extends false final finally float for function goto if implements import in include Infinity instanceof int interface invoke long NaN native new null oneshot package private protected public return short static super switch synchronized SYSTEM this throw throws trace transient true try typeof undefined var void volatile S lt Cc 4 wm DW VIO Zi l ml olo a gt while with Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables App 7 Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc The shaded sections can be used Note that u
121. Setting 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 8 Connection timeout Range 1 to 180 seconds Default 10 seconds In case a connection error occurs on the network between the MES interface module and the server computer set a timeout time during which the MES interface module A will detect the error Usually this setting is not needed In any of the following cases adjust the connection timeout time if necessary a Reduce the connection timeout time to e Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a connection error to the start of lt 5 DB buffering shorter EE e Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a connection error to notification of 58 an access error and job cancellation shorter b Increase the connection timeout time when e A connection timeout occurs in spite of normal network condition z 5 Point S The relation of the values set for Connection timeout and DB access timeout o time in DB Connection Service Setting Tool must be as follows e Connection timeout value lt DB access timeout value a e INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 36 ZPO z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 9 Server Service Setting T x57 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting T T 58 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGUR
122. Single precision No of components For trigger conditions No of jobs x 2 For communication data Same as the number of fields Job setting Trigger conditions Handshake operation No of jobs No of actions Select Update condition Program execution 1 job for 16 64 256 1024 fields 2 jobs for 4096 fields 1 action for 16 64 256 fields 4 actions for 1024 fields 16 actions for 4096 fields Comparison with constant value 1 condition only None Measuring method Appendix 4 3 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier Measurement interval From ON of Handshake startup to OFF of Completion notification No of measurements Average of 20 measurement results Appendix 4 Processing Time App 59 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series 2 Measurement results a When Enhance sampling efficiency is checked The following table lists the results in the case where the Enhance sampling efficiency box is checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 74 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is checked No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 Select 0 2s 0 3s 0 9s 3 21s 13 5s Update p 0 2s 0 2s 0 5s 1 48 52s Insert b When Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked The following table lists the results in the case where t
123. System Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Operating system IAr English version Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro Operating System no vA wi 2 Microsoft Windows 8 1 Enterprise Operating System 5 Interface Ethernet 5 al fe fe 2 z p 7A Eeg ZeE ral ie 235 ZrO O 528 2 lt tr Ww 322 OLE a i ann 2 4 Operating Environment 2 9 2 4 1 Configuration computer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1 Instructions for operating system MELSEC Le series a Performance required for personal comp
124. Tool The screen of DB Connection Service Setting Tool is not displayed correctly Cannot operate DB Connection Service Setting Tool Forced to terminate DB Connection Service Setting Tool Is the memory or the system resources on the personal computer sufficient e Increase the necessary memory on the personal computer e Close other programs and restart DB Connection Service Setting Tool Unable to reflect the setting Unable to export a file Was a user ID having the administrator authority used for the login Is there no permitted IP address Is there no permitted IP address e Log in again with a user ID having the administrator authority e Clear the Limit IP addresses permit to connect checkbox or add an IP address for which connection is permitted e Clear the Limit IP addresses permit to connect checkbox or add an IP address for which connection is permitted An access log output error is recorded in Event Viewer of Administrative Tools in Windows Is the file set in Output destination read only e Correct the file specification Is the access to the folder containing the file set in Output destination authorized e Check the right of access to the folder Is the drive space of the server computer full e Check the free space on the drive An SQL failure log output error is recorded in Event Viewer of Administrative Tools in Windows
125. Update Insert MultiSelect Delete Table App 40 Setting item of communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete Item Description Setting value Select SELECT Update UPDATE TYPE Action type Insert INSERT MultiSelect MULTISELECT Delete DELETE DB Database 1 to 32 DBTABLE Table name Any character string FILEDSNUM DB Tag link setting 0 to 256 When SELECT UPDATE Number of select imULTISELECT or DELETE is 0to8 CONDNUM update delete selected for TYPE conditions R When INSERT is selected for TYPE Blank When SELECT UPDATE MULTISELECT or DELETE is gt EXCEPTNUM Exception selected for TYPE processing count DB buffering is disabled When INSERT is selected for TYPE Blank OPENUM Operation action count Blank When SELECT or MULTISELECT ie Sort condition is selected for TYPE ORDERBYNUM count When other than the above is Blank selected for TYPE b For communication action Stored procedure Table App 41 Setting item of communication action Stored procedure Item Description Setting value TYPE Action type Stored procedure STOREDPROC DB Database 1 to 32 DBTABLE Stored procedure name Any character string FILEDSNUM DB Tag link setting 1 to 257 The items other than above will be blank c For operation action Table App 42 Setting item of operation action Item Description
126. When DST is DISABLE When TYPE is WEEK Blank When MONTH is 1 3 5 7 8 10 or 1 to 31 LAST When TYPE i 1 en S E_DAY Ending day S When MONTH is DATE 1 to 30 LAST 4 6 9or 11 When MONTH is 2 1 to 28 LAST When DST is DISABLE Blank E HOUR Endina ti When DST is ENABLE 00 to 23 nading time 7 When DST is DISABLE Blank 3 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format p g Appendix 3 5 DST CSV APPENDICES Appendix 3 6 DBBUF CSV MELSEC Aeres 1 File format Table App 16 File format Item Description File name DBBUF CSV File contents System setting DB buffering settings lt gt Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting 3 ITEM E status 3 WA REcorpsize 1 Ef FuLL Ef userate o EA Resenoine E CLEARING C Item row Label column setting area File format System setting DB buffering settings i Tag DB buffering status No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request Clear DB buffer request DB buffer Full DB buffer utilization Component DB buffering capacity 64 MB 2 Label Table App 17 Label Label Description STATUS DB buffering status RECORDSIZE No of DB bufferings FULL DB buffer full USERATE DB buffer utilization RESENDING Resend DB buffer request EJ CLEARING Clear DB buffer request 3 Setting item Table
127. a DB buffering enabled job is not canceled x Point Check DB buffer utilization shown in 6 to prevent the DB buffer full status 6 DB buffer utilization a Select a tag component into whose device the utilization of the DB buffer area Unit is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type Utilization rates of the Automatically resend buffer and Manually resend buffer are compared and the greater buffer utilization rate is stored as a value Table 7 32 Values stored in DB buffer utilization Data type of ta Ll g Description component OFF Not accumulated Bit ON One or more data accumulated 0 Not accumulated Other than the above 4 Other than 0 Utilization of DB buffer area Unit Stored as an integer value Digits after decimal point are truncated T 30 7 6 System Setting 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 DB buffering capacity Range 16MB to 512MB Default 64MB a Set the capacity used for DB buffering out of the entire CompactFlash card ai a capacity within the following range z Maximum capacity CompactFlash card capacity 32M bytes Note that a sufficient free space is needed for the CompactFlash card b A half of th
128. a battery voltage drop INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 8 Battery 4 21 4 8 3 Battery replacement 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 2 MES interface module battery Q6BAT life a The following shows the service life of the MES interface module battery Table 4 10 Battery life Battery life Power on time N p Actual service value Guaranteed time after battery ratio 1 Guaranteed value a mn Reference value error o 26 000 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours 2 96 years 5 years 62 days 30 37 142 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours s 4 23 years 5 years 62 days 50 43 800 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours 5 years 5 years 62 days 70 43 800 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours 5 years 5 years 62 days 100 43 800 hours 43 800 hours 1 500 hours 5 years 5 years 62 days The power on time ratio denotes the ratio of power on time in a day 24 hours If the power is ON for 12 hours and OFF for 12 hours the power on time ratio is 50 2 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C which is calculated based on characteristic values of manufacturer supplied memories SRAM and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature range of 25 and 75 C operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C 3 The actual service value ref
129. accumulated Bit ON One or more data accumulated Other than the above EE Noraceumulatad Vi 1 or greater Number of buffering data that are accumulated camer 528 we 282 gt FE aki ann 7 6 System Setting T 27 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 28 MELSEC Aeres 3 Resend DB buffer request a Select a tag component used to request for resend processing of the DB buffer Note that the following tags are not selectable Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set b The following explains the operation of the resend processing using Resend DB buffer request Table 7 29 Operation of the resend processing using Resend DB buffer request Data type of tag component Description Bit The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified tag component is ON Normal Turns OFF after completion of the resend processing 2 Error Outputs error code OB83h to the error log and turns OFF Resend DB buffer request Tag component value DB buffer resend processing Other than the above The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when 1 is written to the specified tag component Normal 0 is written after completion of the resend processing Error Outputs error code 0B83h and 0 is written Do not change the value of the specified tag comp
130. an 3 incorrect module sce What settings are applied Q 2 When using Windows 8 PEE i Wor Refer to the technical bulletin No FA A 0153 ZE 2 l 256 To the next page eae rA Pad OZO ese A Aann 5 1 Installation 5 4 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION User Information From the previous page the y MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co l To the next page 5 1 Installation Next gt MELSEG iQ series The left screen appears Check that all applications have been closed then click the OK button If any applications are running close them all Setup starts The left screen appears Check the description then click the Next gt button B Enter a user name and company name then click button 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION From the previous page Registration Confirmation You have provided the following registration information Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co Is this registration information correct Input ProductID Please enter the product ID of the product Please input in single byte English characters Choose Destination Location The setup will install SWnDNC MESIF in the following directory Click Next to install in this directory Click Browse and select the directory for installing in other directory Click Cancel for not installing Destination Folder cw ELSECS
131. are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies VS FlexGrid Pro 8 0J Copyright C 2001 2003 ComponentOne LLC SH NA 080644ENG Q 1502 KWIX MODEL QJ71MES96 U SY E MODEL CODE 13JR95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
132. buffer are DB buffer content error invalid The CompactFlash card may Replace the CompactFlash card 0B2Fh be corrupted A part of invalid data in the DB buffer has been corrected Partial correction of DB 0B30h A part of the DB buffered data in the buffer content CompactFlash card may have been corrupted e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0B31h System error representative Failed to clear the DB buffer The 0B32h DB buffer clear error CompactFlash card may be corrupted The DB buffer file is invalid The 0B33h DB buffer file error CompactFlash card may be e Replace the CompactFlash card corrupted Data stored in the DB buffer are 0B34h DB buffer content error invalid The CompactFlash card may be corrupted 0B35h ae e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative OB3Ah Because the DB buffer became full e Check the network status OB3Bh DB buffer full error the data could not be stored in the DB Ensure a DB buffering capacity buffer OB3Ch e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative OB3Dh e Check the C tFlash card Failed in file operation during DB Pe E OPA ES ka OB3Eh DB buffering error i If the CompactFlash card is buffering operation damaged replace it OB3Fh e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative 0B40h Data in the DB buffer could not be 0B41h DB buffer read error read norm
133. cannot access Unicode character data in RCPU e When the device value is model dependent characters The character code may be converted during action execution lt gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product e When the device value is a termination character NULL code 00h The character data following it are ignored The character string is regarded as terminated 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 47 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G re z E E o 260 36 S7Lo z e E O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 5 Character string length 1 to 32 characters a Set a character string length when String is selected for Data type b When String is selected data are stored as follows 1 When the value length is shorter than the character string length NULL codes 00h are stored after the stored values Example ABCD is stored in the device of the tag component whose character length is 8 A B C D 41hl42h 43h 44h 00h 00h 00h 00h X When the value length is longer than the character string length The values whose quantity is equal
134. component Data1 is double precision type data the type of the variable Temp1 is converted from floating point to double precision first and then the converted value is assigned Figure 7 116 Type conversion of tag components and variables If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component the job execution is canceled At this time Type conversion to tag component error is displayed in the error log b Conversion from BCD type to numerical type When a device value of programmable controller is inapplicable as a BCD type BCD type conversion error is displayed in the error log c Operation of numerical values There are two kinds of numerical values Integer type and Floating point type e Integer type Represents the bit type single precision type 16 bit BCD type 32 bit BCD type and double precision type of tag components e Floating point type Represents the floating point type of tag components The following table lists operation items and types of the results Table 7 99 Operation items and types of the results Item Operation result Operation of floating point type Addition subtraction In the range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Integer type multiplication of integer type Exceeding the above range Floating point type Divisible Integer type Not divisible Floating point type When zero divide is executed the job execution is canceled At this time zero divide error is displayed in the er
135. den ealenigiy E E 7 2 T32 lt MGNUACONTIQUIATION rea rnnsrororirar nt aE edie AEE RENEE EER 7 4 Ta3 Toolbar COnMGQUIPATION escini a E E E AAO EEE 7 6 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree cece eee ce eee i OA 7 7 GA Project File PaMNNG visisccessecsteststicncdiesciiies acdhhi leva E E EEA EREE 7 9 TAA Creating a New proj tbannsorsininiiiiiiecn sn AE EEE EENAA EEEE EE 7 9 74 2 Opening a project ccceeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeaeeneeeeeeaeneeeeeeesensedeteeaenseeseeeanseeeeeeeeneeeenenenseeess 7 9 TAS SAVING apoo chases fee a ecw tess oe Dalaat S R A OE 7 10 FAA mponina projot sa vededsteasieeeria ns adeeees eee 7 11 TAO Importing a CSV le ee pi EnS 7 13 TAG Exporting a CSV Tile aivis iccsienes dcossiane cdvessiek reeceiiacee E A A EE 7 16 74 7 Printing a setting information fil eee ee eeeee teen eetneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaaeeeseeenaeeeeesnaes 7 16 To POLTSEN aoco Ticecteteystedeceesiadeceeds ys ieceetenssedecernnadeceds syleccesees eedecedennereds wieere uaadeeres iced 7 17 TE SYSUSMS CUMING a ccc cs sceceenes tenets E laihanavvusinns E E e aaea 7 18 7 6 1 Setting items in Network Setting 2 0 0 eee eee eeee eee eeetee eee eeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeneeeeesenaees 7 19 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization Setting cc eee ee eeeee eee eeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeennaeeeeeeenaes 7 20 7 6 3 Setting items in Account Setting ccc ceeneeceeeeeeeneceeeneneeceeeeneneeceeessesec
136. execution System error Set a correct database type in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Select Job settings Communication action in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and set a correct table name field names and Select Update Delete conditions Also set a correct data type for the data entered in the fields Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated or not Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for table names and field names Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0x20600025 No record was updated inserted or deleted by the SQL execution Select Job settings Communication action in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and set update insert or delete conditions correctly e Check if the database has been filled with registered data 0x20600026 to 0x20600028 System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0x2060002B Data source name Transmitting Commit Success Response Failed Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response Check if it is connected to the network e Check if the gateway and or hub is operating e Check if the power of the module is not turned off Database error number and Database error message are output to the space after Database Message in the SQL failure log of DB Connection Service
137. file protection battery is not mounted to the MES interface module e 1 ON is written to the Battery status area Buffer memory address 7 e The ERR LED is turned ON and ERR LED status X10 and Other error X1C are turned ON Battery errors are not detected by turning ON the battery error detection setting Switch 2 Bit 2 with intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer Refer to the following for the intelligent function module switch settings of GX Developer K7 Section 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4 24 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage z When storing the MES interface module without mounting a battery make sure to perform S the shutdown operation then power OFF the programmable controller and remove the battery Point Not doing so may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being 6 accessed or a file system error ae a Operation procedure Mount the programmable controller CPU and MES interface module on the base unit and power ON the programmable controller CPU Q Stop file access S Turn the File access stop request Y2 ON from OFF g N Confirm that file access has stopped Check the File access status X2 is turned ON A 4 Power OFF the programmable controller CPU Remove the battery from the MES interface module
138. folder column of Table lt 7 13 must be saved in the same folder If any one of them is missing an error is aio 7A detected a When the file shown as Optional is not included in the folder it is imported with its settings treated as disabled no settings Table 7 13 Import target CSV files 2 O R Saving in E Import target CSV file Settings to be imported folder 5 Syst tting Network setti SYSTEM CSV System seting Ne vork setting l Required b e System setting Time synchronization setting ACCOUNT CSV System setting Account setting Required DSTCSV System setting Lime synchronization setting Optional Daylight saving setting o Q CPU CSV Access target CPU setting Required z y TAG CSV Device Tag setting Required S a 2 COMPONENT CSV Device Tag setting Component setting Required E 3 a SS OO eee nao 2 Select Project Import CSV Files from the menu The Open dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Open button INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Look in CQ csv eX EE S svstem FUNCTIONS File name SYSTEM Files of type CSV file SYSTEM CS x Cancel Figure 7 15 Open dialog box j Table 7 14 Setting items in the Open dialog box Item Description Look in Select the location where the CSV file is stored Specify SYSTEM CSV le 2 ms G WL z ESO 2
139. for the Correct the device points entered in error access target station is out of range Device tag settings cane Errors detected in CC Link IE Field Network ie CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 10 2 Error Code List To the next page 10 21 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT 1 Z Q O A w al a 9 rg E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 22 MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action ee Errors detected in the Ethernet interface module o CFFFh L 3 User s manual of Ethernet interface module ae Errors detected in CC Link IE Field Network o DFFFh CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual Se Errors detected in CC Link IE Controller Network o EFFFh 3 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual FOOOh i Errors detected in the MELSECNET H 10 network system o FEFFh L77 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H 10 Network System Reference Manual e Please consult your local Mitsubishi FFDOh System error j representative FFD1h Monitor condition Reading is not possible because the e Delete the monitor condition by GX dissatisfied error monitor condition is not met Developer FFD2h i PE e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error
140. gt 2 Label Table App 36 Label Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Trigger conditions 1 Trigger 1 2 Trigger 2 CONDITIONG4 2 t Indicates 1 Trigger 1 2 Trigger 2 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 CONDITION1 1 to CONDITION64 2 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 33 Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 37 Setting item a6 Q series Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV Item Description Setting value Disable NONE Time specification startup SCHEDULING M Fixed scan interval TIMER TYPE Condition type Value monitoring startup VALUE At module startup UNITSTART Handshake operation HANDSHAKE When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 1000 to 9999 YEAR Year When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 1to12 MONTH Month When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 1 to 31 DAY Day When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE i 1 K Week Day of the week l l O t 127 Decimal When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 0 to 23 HOUR Hour When other than the above is selected with
141. ieee chistes coe tied eee ated se Scents oe he chws O 8 14 94 2 MOM COMMOUFATNON fis ice ccgses set Jeasass oer stan E O 8 15 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenieeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaees 8 16 8 6 Importing EXxporting Filossera A TORAO 8 21 r Hel Ppeecrrecenisnncanmnnnennnio nr a naa N EE ATA E TOETA 8 23 8 8 Output Log Specifications sis trua inaenea aia ad e idea adaa a aaa a 8 24 ooi ACCOSSHOG a tvanes een dane de cadnees iateecheeteen vad cee donee Lack cehued deeael ee ected 8 25 9092 SGU PAWS lOG epa E sauaa sant aaagasaed agadawans tanta sececanesadeabinena diet iteaad 8 31 A 13 CHAPTERS XML MESSAGE FORMAT 9 1to9 6 9 1 _ XML Message Format DeTIMIGON srssssnureniesi e dentatesaeddees da sedinele avede 9 2 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method ccceeeeeeceeenee cae ceeeeeee cece eeececcenaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseetecseesieaeees 9 4 9 2 1 XML message format sending method asserir inea OEA 9 4 9 2 2 Sample prograrM pesas a ee EA a AE EER A E Aaa A A a E a A 9 5 CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 1 to 10 54 10 1 Error CodeS igc 5 et senseentatsncevesaghuncvanss asecetus snaduasatasuaacseearsteavans sagadncnete Manned sagandenmeased coe tabvanwueaneeses 10 2 10 1 1 Finding an error COdE cette ttre teeter erent te eee tne etree eae eee ee EANNAN AE EENE CRAEN NNN AN 10 2 1012 Eror LY POS S reenn a E EE E O ince iieeediinceeen nae 10 3 1S Oyeme E E T E tee
142. in Account setting Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface module At least one account setting is required and up to 16 accounts can be set Account setting QU71MES96 i Add Edit Figure 7 23 Account setting 1 Adding an account Clicking the Add button displays the Add Account dialog box Set the following items and click the _OK_ button Add Account User name 1 to 20 characters Password 8 to 14 characters Confirm password Figure 7 24 Add Account dialog box Table 7 25 Setting items in the Add Account dialog box Item Description Enter a user name 1 to 20 characters Case sensitive For characters that can be used for user names refer to the User name following Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Enter a password 8 to 14 characters Case sensitive For characters that can be used for passwords refer to the following Password Confirm assword L Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc T 24 7 6 System Setting 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 2 Modifying an account z a D Selecting an account and clicking the Edit button displays the Edit Account A dialog box Set the following items and click the _OK_ button Zz
143. incorrect 0x41171301 XML request message jobname error The jobname in the received XML request message is invalid The job of the specified jobname does not exist e Check the content of the sent XML message 0x41173101 Job execution error Failed in one shot execution of the job which is requested by the XML processing function e Check if the job is already in execution e Check if the MES interface module is operating e Check CompactFlash card status X1 and File access status X2 Execute the job after starting the module and sampling tag data Section 3 6 7 2 Sampling information Buffer memory address 1004 to 1007 0x41173103 0x41173105 10 36 System error 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response messages e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom MELSEC Aeres 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 1 Common to all settings Symptom Unable to connect MES Interface Function Configuration Tool to the MES interface module Table 10 10 Common to all settings Checked item Is there any disconnection in the connection route Corrective action Connect the cables properly Is the IP address setting corr
144. is not allowed for Trigger 2 A desired device tag name is not displayed in Completion notification of Handshake operation A desired device tag name is not displayed in the field of Substitution tag for Select in Communication action A desired device tag name is not displayed e Set the tag to data write enabled in the field of Substitution tag in Exception Is the tag set to data write disabled lt gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in processing of Communication action Device Tag setting A desired device tag name is not displayed in the field of Substitution tag in Operation action A desired device tag name is not displayed under Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution 3 p Is the DB buffering enabled e Disable the DB buffering Unable to set Exception processing in m_n hw Is Insert or Stored procedure set for e Set any other than Insert and Stored Communication action Action type procedure for Action type 1 0 40 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Online lt e Section 7 12 Online e Section 7 13 Online Remote operation Symptom Unable to write a project to the MES interface module Table 10 16 Online Checked item Is the total number of fields in the project more than 8192 MELSEC Aeres Corrective action
145. log 1 Error log 9 Same as Error log 1 Error log 10 Same as Error log 1 Error log 11 Same as Error log 1 Error log 12 Same as Error log 1 Error log 13 Same as Error log 1 Error log 14 Same as Error log 1 Error log 15 Same as Error log 1 Error log 16 Same as Error log 1 Shows whether or not reading writing is possible R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible To the next page 3 22 3 5 Buffer Memory List 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table 3 15 Buffer memory list MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Address ieee Initial Reference Application Decimal Hex value section 248 to 799 T Use prohibited System area F8x to 31FH 800 to 801 Sampling Current cycle Unit second 0 R 3201 to 321 ping ycle Section monitoring 802 to 803 3 6 6 cycle area Maximum cycle Unit second 0 R 322 to 3231 804 to 999 Use prohibited System area 324 to 3E7H 1000 to 1003 Tag setting information 0 R 3E8x to 3EBu 1004 to 1007 Sampling information 0 R 3ECu to 3EFH 1008 to 1011 Sampling error information 0 R Section 3F 0x to 3F3x Tag status area Sampling 1 error code 0 R 3F 4x The composition of each area is the same as that of the Sampling 1 1013 to 1075 Sampling 2 to error code 3F5x
146. module 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 5 Error log area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 3 6 6 Sampling monitoring cycle area The MES interface module monitors the device data sampling time and trigger conditions alternately The time cycle required for this repetition can be confirmed in this area When the sampling monitoring cycle is one second device tag sampling and trigger conditions are monitored based on the set values When it is longer than one second delay of up to sampling monitoring cycle minus 1 second may occur in the monitoring OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 1 Current cycle buffer memory address 800 to 801 The current sampling monitoring cycle value is stored Unit Second 25 2 Maximum cycle buffer memory address 802 to 803 The maximum sampling monitoring cycle value up to the present moment is stored Unit Second 2 Zz O lt iS we S w a Oo 3 6 7 Tag status area 1 Tag setting information Buffer memory address 1000 to 1003 a The information on whether Device tag settings have been made or not is stored b The bit corresponding to the preset tag setting No is turned ON 0 Not set 1 Set SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 1000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1001 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
147. modules that can be used on the network communication route Request source Use a QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU for the MES interface module and network module Relay station Use a QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU for the network module Access target CPU For accessible CPU modules refer to the following Figure 3 1 Single network Table 3 4 Single network Pave Access target CPU PLC series Network communication CC IE Control NET 10 H Ethernet CC IE Field 4 Pate ert dey Repu LCPU QnACPU QCPU A mode C Controller Bek mode ACPU module o o j a a ee O 0 O Accessible x Inaccessible MES interface Network module pi module gt Request Fes source iy Access Guy E C24 multidrop CC Link communication route Network s The following lists CPU modules that can be used on the network communication route Request source Use a QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU for the MES interface module and network module Access target CPU For accessible CPU modules refer to the following Figure 3 2 Single network 3 6 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 SPECIFICATIONS Network communication porte 7 cry LCPU QnACPU QCPU A mode C Controller u QCPU Q mode RCPU ACP PE Joo o o o o o MELSEC Aeres Table 3 5 Single ne
148. mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Do not install remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Failure to do so may cause malfunction Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery Doing so may damage the battery resulting in a battery fluid leakage inside the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it Before handling a module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operation Precautions WARNING Make sure safety before controlling a running programmable controller e g data modification Do not write any data to the System area in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module As for signals output from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module never output ON a Use prohibited signal Doing these operations may cause malfunctions of the programmable controller system Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of the product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to Appendix 9 Transportation Precautions CAUTIO
149. name Condition Tag Type Component lt lt Process1 Completed HE voio Processt WorkNo lt lt Processi Rejected lt lt Date Server time lt lt G Delete row Browse field name sort settings Field name tjl Delete row Ses i ajaj mea z m Insert awholetag Exception process setting Generated SQL text UPDATE CompletionReport SET Completed Process1 Completed Rejected Process1 Rejected Servertime CURRENT_TIMESTAMP WHERE WorkNo Y Process1 WorkNo No of fields in project 8 Tag component data length in job 7 words total Cancel Figure 1 2 MX MESInterface MES interface function configuration tool 1 29 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Kel series 2 The information system load can be reduced Data can be monitored on the MES interface module side and when the conditions are met the data can be sent to the information system Also the data can be operated and the results of the operations can be sent to the information system This can reduce the information system loads compared to the conventional system of constantly obtaining and monitoring data OVERVIEW MES interface module CONFIGURATION SYSTEM lt Information system gt Sends data as required PERE E RC Database SPECIFICATIONS lt Information system gt
150. not exceeded z oe Ww of nao Table 7 18 Number of settings available for each setting type Setting type Allowable number of settings Access target CPU settings 64 Device tag settings 64 2 Ifan item of the same name exists it is overwritten and therefore excluded from the restriction on the number of settings for each setting type INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j 3 rs a Lu Z o Lu l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 4 Project File Handling T 15 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file Export the current project settings to a CSV file Exported CSV files can be utilized for creating setting sheets or printing System setting Access target CPU settings Device tag settings Server service settings and Job settings can be exported Select Project Export CSV Files from the menu The Save As dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Save button Save in O My Documents v e gE E My Music Emy Pictures File name SYSTEM Save as type CSV file SYSTEM CS z Cancel Figure 7 17 Save As dialog box Table 7 19 Setting items in the Save As dialog box Item Description Save in Select the location where the CSV file is
151. obtainable from the SNTP server computer refer to the following K7 Section 7 6 2 3 When time information is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer 6 24 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 6 3 2 Daylight saving time function r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres CHAPTER 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL This chapter explains the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 7 1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool The MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is used to configure various settings required for the MES interface function in the MES interface module In addition to the configuration the MES interface function offers features such as the operation status check working log check or stop restart operation 7 2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Select Microsoft Windows Start All Programs MELSOFT Application MESInterface MES interface function configuration tool 2 The MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is activated Up to five MES Interface Function Configuration Tools can be started 1 For Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 select All App MES interface function configuration tool from the Start screen 7 1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool T 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCT
152. of data transmission triggers is high jobs are executed without missing any trigger Data separation New data and old data are mixedly exists in units of 16 bits 1 word in 32 bits data 2 words or larger data due to data reception timing Daylight saving Summer time The system in which clocks are set one hour ahead of standard time in a specific period of time in summer For highly reliable processing programmable controller CPU devices are used to manage Handshake i processing between the programmable controller CPU and MES interface module Field Corresponds to a column in a relational database and indicates a type of data Record attribute Variable Temporary Variable that can be used in a single job for temporary storage of values selected from a database variable and for writing operation values to a database or tag components Reco Corresponds to a row in a relational database One row Record stores the values of multiple columns Fields Rollback Processing for canceling changes to a database PACKING LIST The following table shows the products included to the QJ71MES96 MES interface module and MX MESInterface Version 1 SW1DNC MESIF E Model Product name Quantity QJ71MES96MES interface module 1 QJ71MES96 Battery Q6BAT 1 SW1DNC MESIF E MX MESInterface Version 1 with one license CD ROM 1 SW1DNC MESIF EA MX MESInterface Version 1 with multiple licenses CD ROM 1 A 24
153. of the MES interface function and the error status of the MES interface module can be checked The following explains the display of Module status The display of Module status is updated every 3 seconds Module status Operation status Running Error status None Figure 7 106 Module status 1 Operation status Table 7 93 Items displayed for Operation status Display Description Running Displayed when the MES interface function is running Displayed when the MES interface function is stopped Stop Even if trigger conditions are met no job will be executed during stop of the function Displayed during the operations indicated below e Perform Update settings e Power OFF and then ON Initializing e Reset the programmable controller CPU Even if trigger conditions are met no job will be executed during initialization f Displayed when the operation status of the MES interface function is Stopping changing to the Stop status Displayed when MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is acquiring Getting status Ig 5 the status data from the MES interface module Displayed when MES Interface Function Configuration Tool has failed in connection for acquiring the status data from the MES interface module Acquirement failed 2 Error status Table 7 94 Items displayed for Error status Display Meaning None Displayed when the MES interface module is operating normally Disp
154. of the data are deleted The latest log is stored after the remaining data When this function is enabled a processing time is required for saving or deleting the startup history of the job It is recommended to disable this function during system operation 5 Test mode a Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not Up to 4 jobs can be set to Test mode When the Test mode box is checked the test mode is activated and execution details of the job can be confirmed before operation Execution details of the job can be checked by selecting Online View working log View details C Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module b When Test mode is selected The following are performed in the test mode Operations other than the following are identical to the actual operations e Startup data are logged e Detailed data are logged e No data are written to the programmable controller CPU e No data are written to the database 7 10 Job Setting T 61 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 36 ZPO z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 62 MELSEC A series 7 10 2 Setting items
155. or Administrator d The functions cannot be used The following functions cannot be used This product may not perform properly when these functions are used e Activating the application with Windows compatible mode e Simplified user switch over e Remote desktop e Large font size Advanced setting of Display Properties e DPI setting other than 100 set the size of text and illustration other than smaller 100 e Power save mode Standby Hibernate Sleep e Windows XP Mode e Windows Touch or Touch e Modern UI e Client Hyper V 2 4 Operating Environment 2 4 1 Configuration computer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 4 2 Server computer This section explains the operating environment for the server computer OVERVIEW Table 2 6 Operating environment for server computer Item Description 2 Computer Windows supported personal computer CPU Required See Table 2 7 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems memory Hard disk available capacity 64 MB or more a Disc drive CD ROM disc drive 8 Display Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels or higher Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System Microsoft Windows Se
156. procedure name OFF oo W WwW ann 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 85 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL EJ Point Data type of tag component 1 About tag components MELSEC Le series Tag components can be used as component values for each action or as condition values of Select Update Delete conditions The following table lists data types of tag components and those of assignable fields If the data type of a tag component does not match the one of its substitution target field an error occurs resulting in cancellation of job execution The data type of a tag component will change through operation processing of a job lt gt Section 7 15 5 Type mismatch Table 7 68 Data types of tag components and those of assignable fields Oracle 8i 9i 1 0g 11g 12c SQL Server 2000 2005 2008 2012 MSDE 2000 Data type of assignable field Access 2000 Access 2003 2007 2010 2013 Wonderware Historian Yes No type bit Byte type Numeric type Integer int Integer type Bit type smallint Long Integer type Single precision type NUMBER a Single type Discrete Tag CHAR oa x Double precision type Double type Analog Tag Integer 2 VARCHAR real 16 bit BCD type char AutoNumber type A 2 32 bit BCD type varchar made text Text type ii Memo type 2 float Single type Numeric type Floating NUMBER real
157. program execution function is not found in the application server executable with the specified OBCOh The application server has failed to account add a privilege for program execution The application server has failed to OBCih Execution error Program f load the user profile exo onnesety The application server has failed to icati i OBC2h Pp i i Check if the program specified with add an access right for screen display i e g 2 f the program execution function is The application server has failed to E OBC3h executable with the specified start a program esc unt OBC4h Failed to retrieve a loaded user file The application server has failed to OBC5h i terminate exclusion control Function incompatible with DB e Install the latest version of DB OBC6h DB connection service eo p wi i j Connection Service version of Connection Service to a server OBC7h version error 7 connection target is used computer of the connection target e Check if the settings of the stored procedures return values and arguments are correct e Check if the data type between the argument and the input argument Stored procedure The stored procedure execution has j OBC8h and input output argument of the execution error been failed stored procedure to be passed are the same e Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for the stored procedure names OC00h e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error
158. referring to the following explanation After completing the setting click the _OK button Multi select setting IV Specify the maximum number of acquiring records Tag Type Component 78 IV Notify the number of acquired records Tag Component Completed IV Clear the unused tag components by zero comes Figure 7 89 Multi select setting dialog box a Specify the maximum number of acquiring records If the Specify the maximum number of acquiring records checkbox is checked records of up to the specified number are acquired The records are acquired in the sorting order set in Select sort settings When selecting this set a tag for which a value is specified 1 Tab Type Select a tag for which a value is specified Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 2 Component Select or directly enter a component or a constant value to be specified Table 7 79 Values available for Component Item Values available for Component Number Within the range of 1 to 40000 Single precision type Double precision type 16 bit BCD type or 32 bit BCD type tag component Device tag Point An error occurs if the specified tag component value is 0 or less For error codes refer to the following CF Section 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTER
159. representative 0C56h e Check if the CompactFlash card is f damaged CF card check error Failed to access the CompactFlash 0C80h 2 e Turn the power OFF and ON or event log writing card during event log output reset the programmable controller CPU Remaining capacity of the CF card full error event ena y _ e Check the capacity of the O0C81h CompactFlash card is not sufficient for log writing 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module writing the event log CompactFlash card To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action oDooh Setting file out of range Access was made to outside the access error setting file range ODO1h NeW Seting Me oreadan Failed to create a new setting file error e Turn the power OFF and ON or 0D02h Setting file open error Failed to open the setting file reset the programmable controller ODO03h Setting file seek error Failed to seek the setting file CPU 0D04h Setting file read error Failed to read out the setting file ODO5h Setting file write error Failed to write the setting file ODO6h Setting file close error Failed to close the setting file 0D80h to uel e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 100Eh System error 7000h representative to 20FFh aoo
160. request _ Tag Component data Databeas al Temporary variable Zu Constant N50 Data OOF ata SE Zu l Eam oa O Figure 6 9 Stored procedure call function Communication action 1 Considerations for the stored procedure call function Q zz a Database type Ze The stored procedure call function is supported by the following database types gz e Oracle 10g 11g 12c EZ SQL Server 2008 2012 ee ez b Return value When the database is Oracle 10g 11g 12c a stored procedure has no return value If the return value is required use the output argument or input output argument o Z O Z 5 me Commit execution When the database is Oracle 10g 11g 12c do not commit in a stored procedure Rollback to before the job execution cannot be performed when the job execution O wa 3 failed R For the operation at job execution failure refer to 7 Section 6 1 11 2 When z an error occurs in job execution ES A commit is executed by MES interface module after the job completion B35 d Result set The result set cannot be acquired from a stored procedure For SQL Server 2008 2012 return values output arguments and input output gt arguments of a stored procedure which returns a result set cannot be acquired see BuO ann 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 11 6 1 7 Stored procedure call function Communication action 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series 6 1 8 Arithmetic processing function
161. rest 0 outStr delete outStr length 3 rest outStr length outStr append substring rest return new String outStr 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method 9 2 2 Sample program 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING The following flowchart shows the troubleshooting procedure for errors that might occur during operation of the MES interface module mA XML MESSAGE a FORMAT Z E Q fe E i No 5 Is the RUN LED ON Identify the error and take corrective actions o CE Section 10 3 3 1 Troubleshooting about LED Yes indication and I O signals Is the ERR LED ON Yes By the error code identify the error and take corrective or flashing actions D ame Section 10 1 Error Codes 9 No Section 10 2 Error Code List a i No Is the MES interface Activate the MES interface function function working Section 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of Yes the MES interface function Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function No is Is the job enabled Enable the job Q e Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status Yes e Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT No Check the log output to the server computer identify the error and take corrective actions e Section 10 1 Error Codes Yes e Section 10 2 Error Code List Is there any problem on the server computer
162. source IP address belongs to the SID Session ID TCPOpen Request Error IP MES interface module or the configuration 0x20800010 address computer Invalid TCPOpen request Check the version of the MES interface module or MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 0x20800011 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20800012 System error representative 0x2FE00010 To the next page 10 32 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error code Error description and cause Corrective action 0x20B00001 Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error 0x20B00002 representative Set the database type of the DB server setting correctly with the MES Interface Function 0x20B00003 Failed to acquire table names from the database Configuration Tool e Check if there is any problem in the connection route Failed to acquire the information which is Set the database type of the DB server setting 0x20B00004 necessary for table name acquisition when correctly with the MES Interface Function acquiring table names from the database Configuration Tool 0x20B00005 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error 0x20B00006 representative Failed to acquire the version of the database when 0x20B00008 e Set the databa
163. specified table will be selected updated or deleted INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Select Update Delete conditions Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component FUNCTIONS Delete row Browse field name Figure 7 81 Select Update Delete conditions j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 103 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series a Combine Select a method by which conditions set in respective lines are combined Select AND or OR If AND and OR are combined the database will process AND first and then OR o wm Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name that is used for comparison For characters that can be used for field and table names refer to the following lt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc For browsing the field names in the database refer to the following lt gt 8 Browse field name in this section c Condition Select a condition for comparison Table 7 74 Selection items for Condition The field value is equal to the condition value x The field value is not equal to the condition value gt T
164. stored procedure names refer to the following lt gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc For browsing the stored procedure names in the database refer to the following L 2 Browse procedure name in this section Browse procedure name Clicking the Browse procedure name button displays the Stored procedure list dialog box Select a stored procedure name The selected stored procedure name is set on the Communication action dialog box by clicking the OK_ button Stored procedure list StoredProcedure1 StoredProcedure2 StoredProcedure3 Figure 7 92 Browsing example of Stored procedure list Up to 1024 stored procedures can be displayed The following stored procedure names in the database are not displayed e An inapplicable character is included in Stored procedure name of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc e The number of characters exceeds 32 e The number of arguments exceeds 256 When the target stored procedure name is not displayed enter the stored procedure name manually to Procedure name in the Communication action dialog box When a stored procedure in the database is added changed while the data are being browsed close the Communication action dialog box once and browse the stored procedure names again
165. substitute value tag component value variable Set conditions of the record to be selected in Select Update Delete conditions lt 3 gt 6 Select Update Delete conditions in this section Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in Select sort settings lt gt 7 Select sort settings in this section 1 Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for the field value to be selected For characters that can be used for field names refer to the following gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc For browsing the field names in the database refer to the following lt 3 gt 8 Browse field name in this section Tag Select a tag or variable for which a value is substituted Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set Component Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution target Communication action Action type Select DB tag link settings Database foe zl Table name RECIPEDATA 2 RECIPEZ 3 RECIPES F otero __ Field name eect O RECIPEL RECIPEZ RECIPES Browse field name a jaaiType Component A Select Update Delete conditions Browse table name Field name WorkNo Combine AR Re Tagit ype Condition Component Process W
166. the following at the command prompt to start the ODBC Data Source Administrator SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe 4 The Create New Data Source dialog box is displayed then select Oracle in OraHome92 The Oracle ODBC Driver Configuration dialog box is displayed then set the following e Data source name SAMPLEDS TNS Service Name SAMPLETNS e Enable Closing Cursors Select the checkbox O Clicking the Connection test button displays the Oracle ODBC Driver Connect dialog box Enter the user name and password then click the OK button ee If the connection is normal the confirmation dialog box appears Click the ox button in the Oracle ODBC Driver Configuration dialog box Click the OK button in the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEG Q series 2 For Microsoft SQL Server MSDE 2000 and Wonderware Historian 9 0 F The following shows a setting example using Microsoft SQL Server 2000 with i a Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System 3 Set the following conditions Data source name SAMPLEDS e Server name SAMPLESRV z 14 Data source name can be set as desired 5 For Data source name in Server service settings use the name set with this setting se Zo 2 The server name is the name for accessing a Microsoft SQL Server 2000 database bz T
167. the actual date time and day of the week the condition changes from false to Time gpeciicaion siap true resulting in job startup O O lt gt 4 Time specification startup in this section The condition is alternated between true and false in the specified cycles unit seconds Specified time period and when it changes from false to true the job startup is activated O O lt 3 5 Specified time period startup in this section The actual tag component value is compared with the condition value tag component value or constant value at every sampling times Value monitoring startup and the job is activated when the condition O O changes from false to true 6 Value monitoring startup in this section The job is activated only once when the MES At module startup interface module is started up O O lt 3 7 At module startup in this section The job is activated when Handshake startup of the programmable controller CPU turns ON Handshake operation Upon completion of the job execution oO x Completion notification of the programmable controller CPU turns ON lt gt 8 Handshake operation in this section O Selectable x Not selectable 3 Disable a When Disable is selected for Trigger 1 or Trigger 2 Another trigger is regarded as a trigger condition b When Disable is selected for both Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 The job is not activated by trigger conditions
168. the job ceeeeeeeeeee 7 60 7 140 9 1 Error COG erreca ii 10 7 DB Connection Service eee 10 24 MES interface module 10 7 XML response MESSAQES sieer 10 36 e aE E E E ETE 7 128 Event l0jenecenuiemnnrnnnr n 7 129 Exception process setting Applicable records overflow ccceeee 7 112 Exception processing setting Multiple applicable records cccceeees 7 110 No applicable record eeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 7 108 F Finding an mor COG seasca 10 2 Formatting the CompactFlash card 0008 7 143 Function IStiscsinditecedtucshedinsadetecs ites Ea 3 12 DB Connection Service ossei nenaon 3 15 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 3 14 MES interface module eeceeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 H Hardware test cceeceeceecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteesnenaeees 4 13 HTTP eneco inar R A 22 9 4 I WAS QIU r re N 7 98 Intelligent function module switch settings 4 9 IP TING E E E T 8 3 8 18 VOsignal liS a aattine oage eed aieeattes 3 16 VO signals details sesessonsenonecian nione 3 18 J JOD erana E TAA A 23 6 1 7 58 7 81 Job cancelatjOM iiciin 7 80 M Manually resend buffer eeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeene 7 79 MOVING an temic issn e E 7 8 Multi select Setting scseccccscnisneneates 7 114 MUIUISGISCE ensine 7 100 N Network Setting cccccccecceceecesseceesessaneceenteanceeeviias 7 19 0 OD BG oan A 22 8 2 8 6 One shot execution of a job
169. this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inap
170. to System error representative 0x20C00007 e Set the datab t f the DB tti Failed to acquire the version of the database when pus ae ASS VPR RTTE wane eee 0x20C00008 correctly with the MES Interface Function acquiring field names from the database Configuration Tool To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 33 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT 0 Z Q O A w al a 9 ad APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service 10 34 Error code Error description and cause Corrective action Set the database type of the DB server setting correctly with the MES Interface Function 0x20C00009 Failed to execute SQL when acquiring field names j Configuration Tool 0x20C0000A from the database f e Check if there is any problem in the connection route 0x20C0000B e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative 0x20C0000D Set the database type of the DB server settin The database type set for the DB server setting is yP mg 0x20C0000E correctly with the MES Interface Function different from the actual database type Configuration Tool 0x20C0000F e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error 0x2FE00010 representative Database error number and Databa
171. to be saved Specify SYSTEM CSV The respective setting files are exported into the same folder as the File name specified file SYSTEM CSV For the files to be exported refer to the following Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Files of type Select CSV file SYSTEM CSV 7 4 7 Printing a setting information file To print setting details of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool use a CSV file that includes exported project settings setting information file For exporting CSV files refer to the following 5 Section 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file Print the setting information file with a tool that is capable of printing text files 7 16 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 6 Exporting a CSV file r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 5 Project Setting l z Set the information on the project project name comments S a Lu i 3 ee gt Click the project root in the Edit items tree The project setting area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen Set the following items z New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit view Online Help o PELER BME e Be NewProject a g 4 RI settings kroes nane earannan Device tag settings GB Server service settings p Comment Job settings no EA fe z O UL fa Lu oO N SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Figure 7 18 Proje
172. to connect Access log capacity IP Address 1 MBx 10 Files ms Mask bit length Optional lt a J Output SQL failed log 2 Permitted IP Output destination g addresses list sqiFailedlog S a SQL Failed log capacity 1mx 10 Files of W w zug EO Figure 8 5 Screen structure Dreg naO INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe z O O mf A Z Q S m Q ari as 22 Lu og Oz ZE W W NN 8 4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 14 8 4 1 Screen structure 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series 8 4 2 Menu configuration This section shows each command provided on the menu bar 1 File Import Ctrl I Export Ctrl E Exit Figure 8 6 File menu Table 8 1 File menu items me Reference Item Description j section Import Imports an existing file Export Exports the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file Exit Exits the DB Connection Service Setting Tool Section 8 6 2 Help Product information Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Figure 8 7 Help menu Table 8 2 Help menu items ae Reference Item Description i section Product information Displays product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool Connect to MITSUBISHI Section 8 7 f Displays the Connect to MITSUBISHI ELE
173. true Changed from false to true False Changed from false to true False Remained false True i False Changed from false to true True i False Remained false True False y Changed from false to true True n False AND When both of them are true the result is true Changed from false to true False Remained true True False Changed from false to true True False Changed from false to true True i False Remained true True _ False Changed from false to true True False 7 10 Job Setting Changed from false to true False T 63 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 6 ZPO z O E O Z ve DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel series 2 Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Select items for Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 referring to 3 and subsequent descriptions Table 7 49 Selection items for Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 Item Description Trigger 1 Trigger 2 No trigger conditions Disable ae oO O 3 Disable in this section When the specified date time and day of the week match
174. unit for sending one SQL text Select Update Insert MultiSelect or Delete or one stored procedure execution request Operation action is a processing unit of up to 20 dyadic operations System switching Function for the Redundant CPU to switch between control system and standby system of the redundant system Switching from control system to standby system and vice versa COMMIT Processing for finalizing the changes to a database Storage card regulated by the CF and CompactFlash Specification issued by the Compact CompactFlash card CF card A 22 Flash Association This memory card is necessary for the MES interface module to operate the MES interface function To the next page From the previous page Term Description Server service Generic term for the services can be offered by a server computer to which DB Connection Service is installed There are database server service and application server service The database server service is a service for accessing a database The application server service is a service for linking with a program Server computer There are database server computers and application server computers The database server computer is a personal computer with a relational database which links information with the MES interface module The application server computer is a personal computer with a program that operates upon request from the MES interface module
175. value QJ71MES96 DIAGNOSIS Fixed value NO INTERVAL Fixed value Blank DESTINATION Fixed value Blank EDEVICE Fixed value Blank STARTUP Fixed value YES Time Synchronize with PLC CPU time PLC SNTP synchronization i Synchronize with SNTP SNTP setting SNTP server When PLC is selected with SNTP Blank SNTPADDRESS gt address When SNTP is selected with SNTP SNTP server address Decimal When PLC is selected with SNTP Blank E tvezone SNTP time zone When SNTP is selected with SNTP Time zone character strings DB BUFSIZE DB buffering capacity 16 to 512 When Adding to the buffered data is i BUFFERED Automatically selected EJ auToRESEND l l resend buffer When Immediate sending Do not add ah This item is not output to the buffered data is selected When Adding to the buffered data is K This item is not output Manually selected EJ manuatresenp resend buffer When Immediate sending Do not add IMMEDIATELY to the buffered data is selected 14 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSV 1 File format Table App 11 File format Item Description File name ACCOUNT CSV File contents System setting Account setting lt gt Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting ITEM USERNAME _ PASSWORD DWRITE TWRITE
176. z pa 2 Input Integer lt lt 0 lt lt TAG Numner Lu 2 Procedure name StoredProcedure 3 1 0 Integer lt lt 0 lt lt TAG Power I O Integer gt gt 0 gt gt TAG Power lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt gt 3 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Execution result lt lt lt lt z Success lt lt lt lt O lt lt lt lt E lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt fi 2 lt lt lt lt v J nz Executed procedure gt 0 nO TAG Result StoredProcedure 0 0 0 a gt 4 J Figure 7 103 Action details in the case of Stored procedure 2 O Table 7 91 Items displayed for Stored procedure UL Display Description D oO 1 Type Database Stored Displays data of Action type Database and Procedure name which were 2 procedure name set in Communication action Displays the execution result of the Stored procedure e When succeeded 2 Execution result Success is displayed a e When failed 355 A a OOF Failed is displayed Z ma z m Displays data of DB tag link settings which were set in Communication ue 5 3 DB tag link settings i action The information on stored procedure executed in Communication action is 4 Executed procedure displayed c Operation action Action details INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Substitute tag Component Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Compone
177. 008 or later print the symbol shown d in Figure App 11 on the batteries devices or their packaging g 2 x Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices Point The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States App 75 Appendix 9 2 Exportation precautions APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Memo App 76 Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States Appendix 9 2 Exportation precautions INDEX A ACCESS JOG epuer nanan 8 4 8 19 8 25 Access target CPU cccececessseeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeneees 7 33 Accessible devices and ranges s es 3 5 ACCOUNT sais iccivs acnsderssiaeaddeasnaiunctieraleiaisiarseuss A 22 7 24 ADIO O A 22 ACUIONS eera ERAAN 7 81 AQGING an OM aori EE 7 7 Applicable systems cisini sanninna siaaa 2 5 Arithmetic processing Operation action 6 12 7 119 Ar
178. 16 1 Method of ensuring compliance 2 To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Thi s manual is organized by objective for using the QU71MES96 MES interface module and MX MESInterface Version 1 SW1DNC MESIF E Use this manual with referring to the following 1 2 3 a 6 7 Features and software configuration Ks Chapter 1 OVERVIEW Section 1 1 covers the features Section 1 2 covers the MX MESInterface software configuration System configuration applicable systems connection system equipment and operating environment K gt Chapter 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Section 2 1 covers the system configuration Section 2 2 covers the applicable systems Section 2 3 covers the connection system equipment Section 2 4 covers the operating environment Performance specifications abo
179. 16 characters Double precision type Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 Floating point type Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 16 bit BCD type Unsigned 16 bit BCD notation 0 to 9999 Example 1234 32 bit BCD type Unsigned 32 bit BCD notation 0 to 99999999 Example 12345678 Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the Character string following gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 3 Do not execute job when the value is faulty Program execution settings before action execution only When the Do not execute job when the value is faulty box is checked if the return value is faulty the job execution is canceled 7 10 Job Setting T lt 77 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G Pe raed E o 260 B36 ZRO z e E O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC LAY series 5 Wait for execution completion Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before executing the next processing When Check return value is selected Wait for execution completion is always selected 7 78 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 3 Setting items in Progr
180. 2 5 2 6 1 10 7 7 1 7 8 1 7 9 1 7 10 1 7 11 1 7 11 2 7 12 5 7 13 2 7 13 4 8 1 8 2 8 6 10 2 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 Appendix 3 9 Sections 2 6 2 6 1 2 6 2 Appendix 1 Apr 2007 SH NA 080644ENG C Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Sections 2 2 2 5 3 2 7 7 7 7 1 7 8 1 7 11 1 7 12 2 10 2 1 Appendices 2 4 6 Oct 2007 SH NA 080644ENG D DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS PACKING LIST Sections 2 2 2 4 2 2 6 2 3 1 3 3 3 6 10 4 1 6 1 6 6 1 9 7 3 1 7 4 5 7 6 2 7 6 4 7 8 1 7 8 3 7 9 1 7 10 1 to 7 10 3 7 10 5 7 11 1 7 11 2 7 12 5 8 5 8 8 1 8 8 2 10 2 1 Appendices 1 1 3 1 3 2 3 8 3 10 3 13 3 15 3 16 Addition Sections 6 3 2 7 8 2 Appendices 1 2 3 5 3 19 3 20 Oct 2007 SH NA 080644ENG E Correction Sections 3 3 7 8 7 11 1 7 12 5 Appendices 3 8 3 20 Jan 2008 SH NA 080644ENG F Gorrection GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS Sections 1 1 2 2 to 2 4 2 6 2 3 1 3 2 4 4 1 4 7 1 Chapter 5 Sections 6 1 9 6 1 10 7 2 7 3 1 7 3 4 7 5 to 7 11 7 12 5 7 13 4 8 1 to 8 3 8 5 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 3 3 3 4 3 6 to 3 13 Addition Appendix 7 Change of section No Appendix 7 Appendix 8 Sept 2008 SH NA 080644ENG G Gorrection SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW V
181. 2 Label w Table App 33 Label a T Label Description sf X L JOB1 to JOB64 Job settings No 1 to 64 o 3 Setting item 2 O Table App 34 Setting item 5 Item Description Setting value a JOBNAME Job name Up to 16 characters Enable at module When enabled ENABLE JOBTYPE startup setting When disabled DISABLE When enabled ENABLE TRGBUFFRING Trigger buffering When disabled DISABLE D W When enabled ENABLE 2 LOGGING Startup logging fa When disabled DISABLE m When enabled ENABLE lt E DEBUGMODE Test mode When disabled DISABLE When disabled DISABLE When Using the Manually resend MANUALRESEND SQLBUFFERING DB buffering buffer is selected When Using the Automatically AUTORESEND resend buffer is selected is When the condition is 0 or 1 Blank z EEJ JOINTCONDITION Combination When there are 2 AND AND conditions OR OR ACTIONNUM Job action count 1to 10 Notify errors job When enabled ENABLE cancellation that EJ CANCELWRITE RIN occur during job execution When disabled DISABLE CANCELTAG Tag 1 to 64 CANCELELEMENT Component 1 to 256 CANCELVALUE Substitute value Optional Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 31 Appendix 3 11 JOB CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV 1 File format Table App 35 File format Item Description File name CONDITION CSV File contents Job settings
182. 2 first octet 168 second octet 3 third octet 3 fourth octet is stored as follows b15 to b8 b7 to bO Buffer memory address 55 03H 3 03H 3 Third octet value Fourth octet value 56 COH 192 A8H 168 First octet value Second octet value 2 Storage example of Subnet mask Buffer memory address 57 to 58 For 255 255 255 0 each octet 255 first octet 255 second octet 255 third octet O fourth octet is stored as follows b15 to b8 b7 to bO Buffer memory address 57 FFH 255 OOH 0 Third octet value Fourth octet value FFH 255 FFH 255 First octet value Second octet value 3 26 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 1 Module status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 3 Storage example of Default gateway Buffer memory address 59 to 60 For 192 168 3 254 each octet 192 first octet 168 second octet 3 third octet 254 fourth octet is stored as follows g b15 to b8 b7 to bO Buffer memory address 59 03H 3 FEH 254 Third octet value Fourth octet value COH 192 A8H 168 First octet value Second octet value For network connection refer to the following L7 Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting oO 3 6 3 Network settings status area 2 Zz O lt Q u 3 Ww a 2a The values stored to the Network setting status area is the same as the Network connection status area For the storage examples of IP ad
183. 3 Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery Section 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage 3 If an account is forgotten and therefore connection to the MES interface module cannot be made eject the CompactFlash card from the MES interface module then follow the procedure in the Z figure above 3 and subsequent procedure 7 For details on how to eject the CompactFlash card refer to the following a iral 3 Section 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card o 4 For details on how to insert eject the CompactFlash card and precautions for use refer to the oe following _ Section 4 7 CompactFlash Card 5 When the test has been completed abnormally check the following and execute the PING a command again e Network settings for the MES interface module or configuration computer lt e Connection status of the MES interface module or configuration computer x wW oO N A e w ao fa WW Q O x a fal zZ CE Bae E W ma Do INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 5 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 6 4 3 Parts Names This section explains the parts names of the MES interface module 1 With the LED cover closed n ae ELS a6 Q series fe QJ71MES96 RUN
184. 3 Tag function The tag function collects device data of the programmable controller CPUs on the network in units of tags By allocating database fields to tag components the DB interface function enables the following e Database value reading writing e Reading writing of programmable controller CPU device data specified with tag components For the tag function setting refer to the following gt Section 7 8 Device Tag Setting Programmable MES interface module controller CPU CPU1 Device tag name Process1 Device Component name CPU name Device Data type D2001 za Parameter D2001 Figure 6 3 Tag function Es Point 1 Values assigned to tag components by the job are written to a programmable controller CPU after all actions of the job are completed Since these values are occasionally written in two or more sequence scans values from the sequence program need to be referred after all data are written Use the handshake operation to run the sequence program with the completion of writing all data lt gt Section 7 10 2 8 Handshake operation 2 For the tags for which Enhance sampling efficiency is selected the tag data can be read out at high speed when they are collected and when handshake operation is performed 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 3 Tag function 6 FUNCTIONS 2G Q series 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function The trigger monitoring function monito
185. 33 4003 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 16 Access target CPU setting information area 2 Access target CPU error information Buffer memory address 4004 to 4007 a The access target CPU error information is stored b The bit corresponding to the Access target CPU setting number for which the Access target CPU error has occurred is turned ON 0 No Access target CPU error 1 Access target CPU error occurred b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 4004 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4005 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 4006 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 4007 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Figure 3 17 Access target CPU error information area c The following results when the Access target CPU error occurs Example When an error occurred in the access target CPU for Access target CPU setting No 16 e Access target CPU error X16 is turned ON e Access target CPU error information area Buffer memory address 4004 bit 15 is turned ON e The error code is stored in the Access target CPU 16 error code area Buffer memory address 4023 3 Access target CPU
186. 4 Double type point CHAR char it Analog Tag Real x Text type ra Floating point type VARCHAR varchar text Memo type gt char 5 CHAR Text type i Character string varchar R String Tag VARCHAR m Memo type 5 text 7 86 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 1 When using the operation field the insertion function INSERT and update function UPDATE cannot be executed for the operation field for Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 S 2 The 16 bit and 32 bit BCD types are handled as the following types respectively when the u communication action is performed to the database i e 16 bit BCD type single precision type e 32 bit BCD type double precision type 3 Not available for Select Update Delete conditions 4 When using Select and MultiSelect for a field whose data type is single type or double type perform the following for Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft a Access 2013 z Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb in the ODBC setting for the database used z 3 lt 7 Section 8 2 3 For Microsoft Access z e When the database source file used is accdb change it to mdb O 5 Memo type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used for Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 6 Values are as
187. 4 1 2 4 2 2 5 3 2 10 2 1 Appendix 3 7 Feb 2013 SH NA 080644ENG M Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Sections 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 6 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 6 8 5 1 6 1 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 8 7 8 1 7 8 2 7 8 3 7 9 1 7 10 3 7 10 5 7 11 7 11 1 7 14 7 15 8 1 8 2 8 4 2 8 5 8 7 8 8 1 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 1 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 13 3 14 3 15 Oct 2013 SH NA 080644ENG N GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS Sections 1 1 2 2 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 5 2 6 2 3 1 to 3 3 4 3 5 1 5 2 6 1 2 6 1 10 7 6 7 6 4 7 9 1 7 10 7 10 1 7 10 4 7 11 7 11 1 7 13 5 7 12 5 8 1 to 8 3 8 8 1 8 8 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 1 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 1 2 2 4 3 3 3 7 3 10 3 11 3 13 3 14 7 1 7 2 Sections 6 1 7 7 11 2 7 11 3 Change of section No Sections 6 1 7 to 6 1 10 6 1 8 to 6 1 11 7 11 2 7 11 4 Jun 2014 SH NA 080644ENG O Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Sections 2 2 2 4 1 2 4 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 6 2 3 6 3 5 2 6 1 7 7 2 7 7 7 8 1 7 9 1 7 11 1 7 13 6 8 1 8 2 8 3 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 1 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 3 7 3 10 7 2 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision Dec 2014 SH NA 080644ENG P Gorrection Sections 3 2 4 7 1 7 8 3 10 2 1 10 3 3 Addition Sections 2 6 2 Feb 2015 SH N
188. 4 b3 b2 b1 bO Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Monday Wednesday Friday and Sunday are set Figure App 4 Setting example for day of the week Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV App 35 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Appendix 3 13 ACTION CSV a6 Q series 1 File format Table App 38 File format Item Description File name ACTION CSV File contents Job settings Action lt 3 Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions File format is DBTABLE FILEDSNUM ACTION1 1_ UPDATE 1 CompletionReportt l4 ACTION2 1 VULTISELEGT competent i400 1 ACTION2 2_ INSERT 3 ERRORLOG i400 ACTION3 1 OPERATION L Item row L Label column setting area Job settings Actions Type Summary J 1 Select DB1 RECIPEDATA RECIPE1 gt gt Process1 RECIPE1 RECIPE2 gt gt Process1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3 gt gt 2 Update DB1 CompletionReport Completed lt lt Process1 Completed Rejected lt lt Process1 Rejected Da 3 Insert DB1 ERRORLOG Date lt lt Date Server time Process_No lt lt 1 Work_No lt lt Process1 Work_No 4 MultiSelect DB1 RECIPEDATA Work_No gt gt Process2 Work_No RECIPE_A gt gt Process2 RECIPE_A RECIPE 5 Delete DB1 CompletionReport 6 Operation CompletionRate lt lt Process1 Completed 1000 CompletionRate lt lt CompletionRate 100
189. 4030 32 33 4040 4069 4070 4011 4021 J gt J A Q oO O O ol amp N N N 4012 4022 4032 35 4013 4014 4015 4016 4026 4036 39 4017 4 The following table shows the assignment of the Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 11520 to 11583 Table 3 18 Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to 64 AEG 11524 15 11534 25 11544 11554 11564 11574 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 1 to 10 11520 11521 11522 11523 11 12 13 14 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 11 to 20 11530 11531 11532 11533 21 22 23 24 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 21 to 30 11540 11541 11542 11543 EE Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 31 to 40 11550 11551 11552 11553 aes Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 41 to 50 11560 11561 11562 11563 SS ee Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 51 to 60 11570 11571 11572 11573 Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 61 to 64 11580 11581 11582 11583 11525 16 11535 26 11545 11555 11565 11575 1152 17 1153 27 1154 1155 1156 1157 E 6 6 6 6 6 6 Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to 64 A no S SLO 11527 18 11537 28 11547 11557 11567 11577 11 11 11 11 11 11 3 5 Buffer Memory List 528 19 538 29
190. 42 table or view does not exist 00 27 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 8 1 Access log 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Aeres d COMMIT Table 8 20 COMMIT Item Description ai When ka Date Error code SID Session ID COMMIT Success a Output succeeded log format When fled Date Error code SID Session ID COMMIT Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 COMMIT Success z succeeded 2 Ps e ROLLBACK Z2 E Table 8 21 ROLLBACK gt 6 Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID ROLLBACK Success Output succeeded log format Wien tailed Date Error code SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed o i Database Message Database error number Database error message 2 When O Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 ROLLBACK Success z succeeded a N f GetNext Request for next record Table 8 22 GetNext Request for next record Item Description o When 2i Date Error code SID Session ID GetNext Success Zvz Output succeeded 23 o log format l Date Error code SID Session ID GetNext Failed Ebe When failed hee Database Message Database error number Database error message naO When Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 GetNext Success succeeded Q g DELETE Zz Table 8 23 DELE
191. 5 e oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 19 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting Make the time setting for the MES interface module The time used in the MES interface module is obtained from the SNTP server computer or programmable controller CPU CPU No 1 in the case of a multiple CPU system x Point To synchronize the time between the MES interface module and other devices on the network using the time on the SNTP server computer is recommended m Time synchronization setting Synchronize with PLC CPU time Synchronize with SNTP Figure 7 21 Time synchronization setting 1 When Synchronize with PLC CPU time is selected When the Synchronize with PLC CPU time radio button is selected the time is adjusted to the time of CPU No 1 The timing is as follows e When powering ON the programmable controller from OFF e When resetting the programmable controller CPU e Once a minute 2 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected a When the Synchronize with SNTP radio button is selected the time is adjusted to the time of the SNTP server computer on the network The timing is as follows e When powering ON the programmable controller from OFF e When resetting the programmable controller CPU e Once a minute b When Sy
192. 5 Table5 n 6 N fa Figure 7 69 Browsing example of Tables list Am z Up to 1024 tables can be displayed SRE The following table names in the database are not displayed at nao An inapplicable character is included in Table name of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc e The number of characters exceeds 32 When the target table name is not displayed enter the table name manually to Table name in the Communication action dialog box Point When a table in the database is added changed while the data are being browsed close the Communication action dialog box once and browse the table names again INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION et FUNCTIONS 5 DB tag link settings Set assignments between field values and tag component values or constant values Up to 256 rows can be set in DB tag link settings for each communication action le 2 ms G W E z E ESO 26 6 brats z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 95 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M aLS a6 Q series a When Select is selected for Action type Select substitutes a field value of the record whose conditions are met for a
193. 548 558 568 578 11529 20 11539 30 11549 11559 11569 11579 3 25 SETTINGS AND MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO o Z O q 9 3 iw o o PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Le series 3 6 Buffer Memory Details This section explains the buffer memory details Point 1 The values stored in buffer memory are cleared when the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset 2 When a value of 65536 or more is stored in the area composed of one word a count is stopped at FFFFh 65535 3 If a value of more than two words is stored in the area composed of two words a count is stopped at FFFFFFFFh 4294967295 3 6 1 Module status area The ON OFF status of the MES interface module LED setting status of the intelligent function module switches and battery status are stored Refer to the following for details LCF Section 4 3 Parts Names e Section 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 3 6 2 Network connection status area The status of network connection to which the MES interface module is currently connected is stored 1 Storage example of IP address Buffer memory address 55 to 56 For 192 168 3 3 each octet 19
194. 6 data 64 16384 data 128 40000 data 200 Job setting Trigger conditions Handshake operation No of jobs In the case of Select Update or Insert 1 job for 16 64 256 1024 fields 2 jobs for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect 1 job No of actions In the case of Select Update or Insert 1 action for 16 64 256 fields 4 actions for 1024 fields 16 actions for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect 1 action Select Update condition None Sort condition None Program execution None Measuring method App 54 Measurement interval From ON of Handshake startup to OFF of Completion notification No of measurements Appendix 4 Processing Time Average of 20 measurement results Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 13092 or later No of data 16 64 256 1024 4096 16384 40000 MultiSelect APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres 2 Measurement results y lt n s s N a When Enhance sampling efficiency is checked i g A The following table lists the results in the case where the Enhance sampling 5 XE efficiency box is checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 66 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is checked 2 No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 Select 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 9s 7 38 Q N Updat W aes 0 2s 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 88 z Insert 5 ae b When Enhance sampling ef
195. 60 36 SmO z O E O Z Te Files shown in the above D and in the same folder as the specified file File name SYSTEM CSV are the import target CSV files aw For files to be imported refer to the following 52 8 lt 3 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format 28 z Files of type Select CSV file SYSTEM CSV SZE Aann 7 4 Project File Handling T 13 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 4 When the CSV file to be imported is selected the Import from CSV files dialog box is displayed Make the setting referring to the following descriptions After completing the setting clicking the Import button starts the import Import from CSV files Existing registration information oO lt lt Project root Existing registration information oO System setting Settin No of access target CPUs 1 Selection tree 1 Access target CPU settings 4 9 No of device tags O Controicru lt Item type OE Device tag settings 0 No of server services 0 No of jobs 0 Import information Import information No of access target CPUs No of device tags No of server services No of jobs Import Cancel Figure 7 16 Import from CSV files dialog box Table 7 15 Setting items in Import from CSV files dialog box Item Description Selection tree In the tree select the item to be imported
196. 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 3 When marking a check in Disable writing to database the following is executed e Execute Communication action set in a job and send rollback at the end When the following items exist an error will occur Server Service setting IP address port number user name password data source name lt Communication action Table name field name 3 When the database is Wonderware Historian the following SQL text is sent during execution 9 2 of Communication action that is set in the job 2S SQL text INSERT INTO History DataTime TagName Value SELECT TOP 0 NULL NULL NULL When any one of the following items is incorrect an error will occur x Server Service setting IP address port number user name password data source name 5 An error will not occur even when Communication action is incorrectly set z Te Clicking the button changes the job status g N 7 13 5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering o The current and past maximum values of No of DB buffering data and buffer utilization 2u can be viewed Ga 2 nao DB buffering status Now Maximum No of bufferings nnl 33 Buffer utilization o o Figure 7 110 DB buffering status INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 97 Items displayed in DB buffering status Description oy i Displays the current number of Displays a past maximum value in the No of bufferings 3 buffered
197. 83h e Check if Server service settings is connection error correct e Check if the ODBC setting is correct e Check if the server computer has no An Ethernet communication error has problem referring to the following ae occurred ops4h Communication lt gt Section 10 1 1 2 Checking connection timeout an error of the server computer e Ask your network administrator about the firewall setting lt 3 Section 5 1 Installation OB85h Pe e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative OB87h Message transmission e Check the Ethernet connection OB88h error on e Check if Server service settings is An Ethernet communication error has correct sto occurred ou ats OB89h Message transmission e Check if the ODBC setting is timeout correct e Please consult your local Mitsubishi OB8Ah System error 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module representative To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code OB8Bh MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Message reception error Description An Ethernet communication error has occurred Action e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct e Check if the ODBC setting is correct e Check if the database has been restarted or not When the database is Micros
198. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Led cries MES Interface Module User s Manual QJ71MES96 SW1DNC MESIF E MX MESInterface SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with only this product For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system please read the User s Manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as JN WARNING and A CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Note that the N CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Precautions NWARNING When controlling a running programmable controller e g data modification create an interlock circuit on sequence programs so that the whole system functio
199. A 080644ENG Q Gorrection Sections 4 8 1 Japanese Manual Version SH 080643 R This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS se ca ssgeeactuicuate cet cate dec ea S ASEE EAEE EINT AIEEE SEEEN A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUC Torns canes dees aE EE EEEE cet A 6 REVISIONS waseesiveeseteccdiae vans tir AN E aE N E N ENTENEN ENTONAR A 7 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeseneaeeees A 16 FLOW TO USE THIS MANGAL sc2si cat state teas catenaies sicpedtesxssiabteenssiicddcessidvacetens pa lecteecsteddaseuandaszanuarileddcameesextualins A 17 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 00 eccececectere terete eee eiiee eerie tuunan En EnaA teaser eieeeeeeeneeeeene A 20 DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS vrs yiecscerts se
200. ADDRESS TIMEZONE Available file SYSTEM CSV DST CSV to Setting area Displays setting values Label column Displays setting items b Type made up of label columns item columns and setting areas Table App 8 Type made up of label columns item columns and setting areas Item Description Item row Displays setting items TAG2 Line B HIGHSPEED 1 NO ENABLE 20 TAGS Line C EXECUTE 5 NO ENABLE 48 File format Sa E E a eae Setting area Displays setting values Label column Displays item numbers or setting items ACCOUNT CSV DBBUF CSV CPU CSV TAG CSV COMPONENT CSV SERVER CSV Available file JOB CSV CONDITION CSV ACTION CSV ACFIELD CSV ACCONDITION CSV ACEXCEPTION CSV ACOPERATION CSV REMOTE CSV ORDERBY CSV MULTISELECT CSV App 10 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres 2 Precautions for editing setting information files For details on how to edit setting information files and setting information files that can be imported refer to 1 below Appendix 3 1 Setting information files list Point 1 When editing a setting information file using such as spreadsheet software change the setting items to match the setting information file formats explained starting from the following descriptions 2
201. ATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 7 10 Job Setting Configure the settings for the DB interface function For the DB interface function refer to the following C Section 6 1 DB Interface Function Double clicking Job settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant items Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Q New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help OSHER H HR 2 E NewProject Q system setting Job name NewJob 1 Enable at module startup x Startup logging Test mode w Access target CPU settings 1 Trigger buffering Device tag settings r Trigger conditions Gi Server service settings Combination fano TOUTS ts When tha hae conons B Job settings changes from false to true T Trigger1 Disable M Trigger 2 Disable v Add J communicstion action z Edit Delete E l r Program execution DB Buffering Before actions Setting T Enable DB buffering After actions e Setting Using the Manually resend buffer 7 MT Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution tag Component Substitute value at No of fields in project 0 No of fields in job 0 Tag component data length in job 0 words total Figure 7 42 Job settings Point 1 How to add delete copy or move an item F
202. Allow remote access Seethe name of this computer Device Manager Clack Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Tum automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Power Options Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 Free up disk space Defragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions View event logs Schedule tasks J To the next page App 70 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES rs ELGG Ley aries From the previous page l 4 Select Local Security Policy E Open Bum When User Account Control is enabled the p era Name Date modified Type En B een 200907701346 shortcut following screen appears I Downloads Computer Management 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut E Recent Places E Data Sources ODB1 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 3 B ee essa Click the Continue or Yes button Bi Libraries iSCSI Initiator 2009 07 14 1341 Shortcut Documents Local Security Policy 2010 03 17 544 Shortcut a Music Performance Monitor 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut Pictures R Print Management 2010 03 17 5 43 Shortcut E Videos fa Services 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut
203. C SQL Server Driver SQL Server Could not find stored pant p procedure StoredProcedure1 6 z Z co to ann 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 28 8 8 1 Access log 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 Program execution reception processing results Table 8 25 Program execution reception processing results a6 Q series Item Description When Output AeA Date Error code SID ProgramExec Source IP lt Command line gt Success Return value succeede log format 5 When failed Date Error code SID ProgramExec Source IP lt Command line gt Failed When Example E 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 ProgramExec 192 168 3 3 lt hoge exe gt Success 0 u 7 Table name field name stored procedure name browsing results a Table name browsing Table 8 26 Table name browsing results Item Description When Output Date Error code SID Session ID Table Get Success succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID Table Get Failed Wh i 2012 06 27 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 0 Table Get Success Example succeeded When failed 2012 06 27 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 0 Table Get Failed b Field name browsing Table 8 27 Field name browsing results Item Description When Output Date Error code SID Session ID Field Get Table name Success succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID Tabl
204. CTRIC FA Global Website screen ELECTRIC FA Global Website 8 15 8 4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 4 2 Menu configuration 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Aeres 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool The following shows how to change the DB Connection Service settings Set the following items then click the Reflect settings button 5 After updating the settings check for an error by selecting Administrative Tools Event Viewer in Windows Z K gt Section 10 1 Error Codes A Point 58 1 Change the DB Connection Service settings when a job using the DB Connection Service is not operating The status is as follows 2 e The programmable controller is powered OFF e The MES interface function operation is stopped with Online Remote E operation of MES interface function configuration tool a K gt Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function 2 When reflecting the settings with a job using DB Connection Service is running the execution of the connected job is canceled and a communication ie error occurs 8 a 2 Also for a job to which Enable DB buffering is selected any SQL text is P buffered in the DB buffer AAL INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe Zz O a Oz ux Pas os Oy ow an Q e E 0
205. Control UAC is provided to protect the system from being destroyed e g prevention of start up of a program which will execute an unintended operation Before taking either of the methods described below understand that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and consider the risk The following two methods are available for preventing warning messages 1 Disabling the User Account Control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the User Account Control function a When using Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 m PIS Open the Control Panel Internet Explorer E mail L Windows Mail F Welcome Center W Backup Status and Configuration gA g Windows Media Player p Small Business Resources Windows Fax and Scan g Windows Meeting Space i Windows Photo Gallery amp Windows Live Messenger Download y Paint gt AllPrograms To the next page Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R App 65 Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES rs VIELSE Ley aries From the previous page 2 Select User Accounts 3 D Control Panel Home System and Maintenance User Accounts Get started with Windows Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer i Appearance and pert Ry P lizatio Check for updates ersonalization Check this computer s security status Cha
206. Core 2 Duo 2GHz or more 32 bit version 1GB or more 64 bit version 2GB or more 2GB or more 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres b Supported version Table 2 8 Supported version of MX MESInterface Supported version of Operati t Pareang SyS em MX MESInterface OVERVIEW Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP 32 bit version 2 All versions Windows 2000 Server z Windows Server 2003 32 bit version 7 Windows Server 2003 64 bit version Version 1 05F or later 5 Windows Server 2008 32 bit version 64 bit version S Windows Vista 32 bit version Version 1 04E or later Windows Vista 64 bit version Version 1 05F or later Windows 7 32 bit version 64 bit version Version 1 06G or later Windows 8 32 bit version 64 bit version Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 1 32 bit version 64 bit version Version 1 12N or later Version 1 10L or later SPECIFICATIONS 1 Itanium processor IA 64 is not supported c User authority e Installation uninstallation are available only by the administrator s authority e MX MESInterface is available only by the administrator s authority d The functions cannot be used The following functions cannot be used This product may not perform properly when these functions are used SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION e Activating the application with Windows compatible mode e Simpl
207. D When NO is selected with OTHER Blank STATION When SINGLE or DIFFERENT is selected for OTHER STATION and 1 to 239 NETNO1 Network No NET10 ETHERNET or CCIEFIELD is selected for NET1 When other than the above is selected Blank When SINGLE or DIFFERENT is El 101 I O Address selected with OTHER STATION and Oh to FEOh Hexadecimal CCLINK or C24 is selected with NET1 When other than the above is selected Blank Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV To the next page App 21 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Table App 21 Setting item MELSEC Le series From the previous page Item Description Setting value When NET 10 or ETHERNE l 1 1 to 120 is selected with NET1 When SINGLE or When CCLINK DIFFERENT is is selected with 0 to 63 selected with NET1 9 STATION1 Stati b aton number OTHER STATION When C24 is a o selected with NET1 When CCIEFIELD is selected for 0 to 120 NET1 When NO is selected with OTHER Blank STATION CC IE Control NET10 When NET 10 H DIFFERENT is CC Link CCLINK NET Nenon selected with Ethernet ETHERNET etwor OTHER STATION C24 C24 CC IE Field CCIEFIELD When other than the above is selected Blank with OTHER STATION When DIFFERENT is selected for OTHER STATION and
208. DEX Item row Label column setting area Operation action Operation action Substitution tag Component Operationtag Component Operator Operationtag Component 1f H lt lt ra EE ee Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 45 Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV APPENDICES 2 Label Label Table App 53 Label Description MELSEC Le series OPERATION1 1 1 to OPERATION64 10 20 3 Setting item Job settings No 1 to 10 Action No 1 to 10 Operation action No 1 to 20 OPERATION64 10 20 Indicates Operation action No 1 to 20 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 Table App 54 Setting item Item Description Setting value OUTCONSTTYPE Substitution Tag TAG constant type Variable VARIABLE a When TAG is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE 1 to 64 OUTTAG Substitution tag When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Blank OUTELEMENT Substitute When TAG is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE 1 to 256 component When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Blank OUTPUT Substitute When TAG is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Blank variable When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Variable name Tag TAG Date string DATESTR 6 IN CONSTTYPE Input 1 Numerical value
209. Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 72472 MELSEC Le series c Exception processing Applicable records overflow When MultiSelect is set in Action type configure the processing for the case where the number of arrays set in Array setting is less than the number of records selected by Select Update Delete conditions Exception processing Applicable records overflow IV Select the first find record IV Send notification of this exception Component Substitute value Warning_Number 10 Continue this job Finish this job Figure 7 88 Exception processing Applicable records overflow 1 Select the first find record When the Select the first find record checkbox is checked if the number of arrays set in Array setting is less than the number of records selected by Select Update Delete conditions records equivalent to the number of arrays are actually selected When this checkbox is not checked the select processing is not performed If the Select the first find record checkbox is not checked the following is performed e When Notify the number of acquired records is set in Multi select setting O is notified e When Clear the unused tag components by zero is set in Multi select setting 0 is assigned 37 10 Multi select setting in this section 2 Send notification of this exception If the Send notification of this exception checkbox is checked a valu
210. E n FORMAT 1 Z Q O A w al a 9 ad APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error code Error description and cause Corrective action SID Session ID DB Connect Data source p ee 4 e Terminate any unnecessary applications 0x20400020 User Failed Add more memory to the personal computer Failed to create a DB handle e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20400021 System error f representative Set correct data source name user name and password in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool SID Session ID DB Connect Data source j 4 es To use a 64 bit version operating system for the 0x20400022 User Failed he server type the following at the command Failed in DB connection prompt to start the ODBC Data Source Administrator SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe 0x20400023 0x20500011 0x20500012 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error 0x20500020 representative to 0x20500022 SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed 0x20600001 j P SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory wee e Terminate any
211. E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration IP Security Policies on Local Computer Intenet Protocol Security IPsec Administratio Di Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Fle Aion Yew Hep 6 Select Security Options es ialk FETs j pean Name Description gt B Account Policies EALAR tei gt T Local Policies reer mey E Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec PA User Rights E Network List Manager Policies b Gl Public Key Policies b GB Software Restriction Policies b I Application Control Policies b amp IP Security Policies on Local Compute b E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration l To the next page Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R App 71 Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES From the previous page Eile Action View Help Cs ELSE Ley aries Select User Account Control Behavior of the e 2H XOsl bm App 72 Ib Security Settings gt Gi Account Policies a ij Local Policies b I Audit Policy gt i User Rights Assignment gt D Security Options gt Windows Firewall with Advanced Sect E Network List Manager Policies gt Public Key Policies gt B Software Restriction Policies gt B Application Control Policies b amp IP Security Policies on Local Compute gt E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Policy elevation prompt for administrators in Admin
212. ELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service rror code rror description and cause orrective action E d E d ipti d Cc ti ti SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed s SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed Ceeuou ate SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed e Set a correct database type in Server service se da f settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Failed in preparation before SQL execution Tool ool SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed ae aie Bae Sane Select Job settings Communication action in ession ID Faile l i MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed f set a correct table name 0x20600022 SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record that is to be obtained by the SQL execution e Set a correct database type in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Select Job settings Communication action in SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and SID Session ID COMMIT Failed set a correct table name field names and Select J 23 SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed Update Delete conditions Cee SID Session ID GetNext
213. ES Program execution function interface module z f Table information stored Acquires the table information and stored procedure information and sends them to 7 procedure information browse table information browse function and stored procedure information browse function lt 2 function of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool E m O IP filter function Specifies the IP address of the MES interface module that can connect to the DB Section 8 1 HO i uncti Connection Service to ensure the security of the server computer 3 eal Outputs the communication contents between the MES interface module and DB e Connection Service to the access log Log output n aes The error contents are output to the SQL failure log when the SQL text or stored 5 uncti 2 SQL failure log procedure cannot be completed normally in the database due to the reason such as lt no table exist 5 DB Connection Service Settin a Tool g Software changes the DB Connection Service settings Section 8 5 2 00 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 3 Function List 3 15 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Le series 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 1 I O signal list The following lists the MES interface module I O signals to the programmable controller CPU The following I O signal assignm
214. ESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 48 Setting item MELSEC Le series Item Description Setting value AND AND COMB Combination OR OR For the first line Blank FIELDNAME Field name Any character string Tag TAG Date DATE Date string DATESTR TYPE Constant type Numerical value NUMBER Character string STRING Variable VARIABLE None NONE EQUAL NOTEQUAL Select Update lt LESSTHANEQUAL COMPARE Ni Delete conditions gt GREATERTHANEQUAL lt LESSTHAN gt GREATERTHAN When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 6 TAG Tag When other than the above is selected Blank with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 ELEMENT Component When other than the above is selected Blank with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE Blank When DATE is Server time SERVER selected with Module ti UNIT TYPE odule time When DATESTR is selected with Character string valid as a date TYPE EJ VALUE Constant value When NUMBER is selected with Numerical value TYPE When STRING is selected with TYPE Any character string When VARIABLE is selected with Variable name TYPE When NONE is selected with TYPE Blank App 42 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV
215. EW MELSEC Aeres 6 Supporting diverse databases When designing a new system a wide range of database types can be selected Even when connecting to the existing system the system can be transferred without changing the existing database OVERVIEW 7 Access independent of the database table configuration is possible Freely designed database tables can be used for access to databases Z When designing a new system not only the high flexibility of design but when 7 connecting to the existing system the system can be constructed without changing Z2 the database tables 08 nO 8 Time synchronization using SNTP is also possible The clocks for the MES interface module and the programmable controller CPU can n be set through communications with an SNTP server computer This enables to synchronize the time for the entire system 3 S D gF lt vz Er DLO INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 1 1 Features 1 a7 1 OVERVIEW a6 Q series 1 2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration This section explains the MX MESInterface software configuration Table 1 1 MX MESInterface software configuration Ane Reference Item Description i section Installs each execution software MES Interface Function Configuration Tool DB Installer Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool in
216. Edit Account Ps User namef1 to 20 characters QJ71MES96 fi 2 Password 8 to 14 characters 000e A 6 Confirm password eee Figure 7 25 Edit Account dialog box z iS rm Table 7 26 Setting items in the Edit Account dialog box g n Item Description Enter a user name 1 to 20 characters Case sensitive For characters that can be used for user names refer to the User name following Z y z A r c nDo lt gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string 2 A 5 constants etc E 3 ti Default QU71MES96 DE Enter a password 8 to 14 characters Case sensitive Password Confirm For characters that can be used for passwords refer to the following password lt 3 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Default MITSUBISHI INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 3 Deleting an account D Select the account to be deleted and click the Delete button FUNCTIONS j w z iL pa im Z o w l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 ZO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 125 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 26 MELSEC A series 4 Precautions on security of the MES interface module Although the MES interface module supports the basic authentication account setting using user names and passwords it shall not completely protect the sys
217. Execute Figure 7 111 DB buffering operation 1 Resending data stored in the DB buffer D Selecting the Resend radio button and clicking the Execute button executes the resend processing of the SQL texts stored in the DB buffer when manual resend is selected for the jobs of the SQL texts or stored procedure execution request If the resend processing fails the error code OB83h is output to the error log 2 Clearing the DB buffer D Selecting the Clear radio button and clicking the button clears all of the SQL texts or stored procedure execution request that are stored in the DB buffer Point If clear processing is executed during resend processing error code 0B44h may be output lt 3 gt Section 10 2 Error Code List If this error occurs execute the Clear error and turn off the ERR LED CF Section 7 13 2 4 Clear error 7 142 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 13 7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering The current and past maximum values of No of trigger buffering data can be viewed a fs m Trigger buffering status Now Maximum No of bufferings 2 S 6 Figure 7 112 Trigger buffering status fe Be 8 Table 7 98 Item displayed in Trigger buffering status r Description nos Bi SYA Displays a past maximum value in the 2 No of bufferings 1 Displ
218. FACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres b Notify the number of acquired records c When the Notify the number of acquired records checkbox is checked the number of actually acquired records is notified to the specified tag component When selecting this set a tag component to which a value is notified 1 Tag Select a tag component to which a value is notified Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable Clear the unused tag components by zero When the Clear the unused tag components by zero checkbox is checked if the specified number of arrays of the tag component is less than the number of actually acquired records zeros are assigned to other array areas Example When the specified number of arrays of the tag component is 6 and the number of actually acquired records is 4 Komponen Device Data type n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 Component A DO Single word Component A E 9 4 p2 7 T 1 p4 0 re 0 D100 to D101 D102 to D103 D104 to D105 D106 to D107 D108 to D109 D110 to D111 Component B D100 Double word gt Component B 482 623 769 154 0 0 String ZR1000 to ZR1003 ZR1004 to ZR1007 ZR1008 to ZR1011 ZR1012 to ZR1015 ZR1016 to ZR1019 ZR1020 to ZR1023 Component C ZR1000 8 characters Component C Table Data Data2 Date NULL 0 NULL O V Acquired records 0 is assigned to unassigned tag components Figure
219. FICATIONS MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 3 15 Buffer memory list Address Bore Initial Reference Application 5 Decimal Hex value section 4072 to 11499 FE8 to Use prohibited System area 2CEB 11500 Time synchronization setting status 0 R 2CECu 0 Synchronize with PLC CPU time 1 Synchronize with SNTP Secti ection 11501 to 11507 3 6 10 2CEDu to SNTP time query result 0 R Mee 2CF3x 11508 2CF4n System area 11509 2CF5 11510 Sa Monitoring interval timeout count 0 R 2CF6x Information 11511 i i Section linkage function No of trigger buffer data 0 R 2CF7u area 3 6 10 S12 Trigger buffer overflow count 0 R 2CF8 11513 to 11519 2CF9u to System area 2CFFh 11520 Trigger buffer overflow count for Job 1 0 R 2D001 Soe 11521 to 11583 Trigger buffer The composition of each area is the same as that of the Trigger buffer 2D014 to overflow counts overflow count for Job 1 ii 2D3Fh for Jobs 2 to 64 Refer to 4 for the assignment of each area 1 Shows whether or not reading writing is possible R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible 2 The following table shows the error code area assignment for Sampling 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 1012 to 1075 Table 3 16 Sampling 1 to 64 error code areas Sampl
220. FIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 7 3 1 Screen structure MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 3 2 Menu configuration This section shows each command provided on the menu bar 1 Project New Open Save Save As Import gt Export gt Ctrl N Ctrl 0 Ctrl 5 Recent files gt Exit Figure 7 5 Project menu Table 7 1 Project menu items we Reference Item Description 3 section New Creates a new project Section 7 4 1 Open Retrieves an existing project Section 7 4 2 Save Overwrites and saves the current project Section 7 4 3 Save As Saves the current project under a new file name Section 7 4 3 Project file Imports an existing project Section 7 4 4 Import CSV Files Imports an existing CSV file Section 7 4 5 Export CSV Files Exports the current project settings to a CSV file Section 7 4 6 Recent Files Select a file recently used in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool to open it Exit Terminates the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2 Edit Add item Ctrl Ins Delete item Ctrl Del Replicate item Shift Ctrl Ins Figure 7 6 Edit menu Table 7 2 Edit menu items ae Reference Item Description i section Add item Adds the item selected in the Edit items tree Delete item Deletes the item selected in the Edit items tree Section 7 3 4 Replicate item Copies the item selected
221. Failed Also set a correct data type for the data entered SID Session ID Reset Failed in the fields Failed in SQL execution e Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated or not e Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for table names and field names e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20600024 System error representative SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed e Select Job settings Communication action in SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and x ession ID GetNext Faile set update insert or delete conditions correctly 0x20600025 SID Session ID GetNext Failed t update insert or delet diti tly SID Session ID Reset Failed e Check if the database has been filled with No record was updated inserted or deleted by the registered data SQL execution 0x20600026 A e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error 0x2060002A representative X SID Session ID Transmitting Commit e Check if it is connected to the network 0x2060002B Success Response Failed e Check if the gateway and or hub is operating Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response Check if the power of the module is not turned off ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed 0x20700001 Failed in program execution due to insufficient memory e Terminate any
222. G TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 41 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 1 Creating a user specified system area The following explains how to create a user specified system area in the program memory of the control CPU Select Online Format PLC memory from the menu of GX Developer As the Format PLC memory dialog box appears select Create a user setting area in Format Type Ensure 1K step for High speed monitor area from other station per MES interface module 1 4 Clicking the Execute button executes formatting of the PLC memory Format PLC memory Connection target information Connection interface USB lt gt PLC module TargetPLC Network no 19 Station no Host PLC type Q06H Target memory Program memory Device memo v Format Type Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only 1 Separately from the areas used by GX Developer and or GOT 1K step Online change area of multiple blocks is required per MES interface Online change area of FB definition ST module K steps Create a user setting system area High speed monitor area from other station 0 15K steps Figure 7 31 Format PLC memory in GX Developer Point Execution of the PLC memory formatting deletes the programmable controller CPU data Read the programmable controller CPU data into GX Dev
223. H 100UDEHCP dded t E QSO UDE M Ang oy et ent Cai addedio 11052 or later Section 2 2 applicable systems Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions App 1 APPENDICES Functions added 64 bit Windows has been added to the operating environment for server computer e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System e Windows Vista Connectable database servers were added Oracle 11g e Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Records can be deleted from databases e Delete was added to the options of the Communication action in the Jog settings 12012 or later Items in the Edit items tree can be moved within each MESInterface 1 05F or later M Serial No first 5 digits of Software version of MX MES interface module aLS a6 Q series Reference Section 2 4 2 Section 7 11 1 i Section 7 3 4 setting area bit Wi i 32 bit Windows 7 has been added to the operating Section 2 4 1 environment for configuration computer 32 bit and 64 bit Windows 7 have been added to the Section 2 4 2 operating environment for server computer The L02CPU and L26CPU BT were added to accessible 1 06G or later programmable controller CPUs The following devices were added as accessible devices Section 3 2 12092 or later e Bit devic
224. HCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU Generic term for the QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QU71C24 and Q series C24 QJ71C24 R2 Q series E71 Generic term for the QJ71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 and QU71E71 B2 RCPU Generic term for RO4CPU RO8CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R series E71 Another term for the RJ71EN71 Generic term for the AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF UC24 A1SJ71C024 R2 A1SJ71C24 R4 A1SJ71C24 PRF A1SCPUC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 and A 20 A2CCPUC24 PRF To the next page From the previous page Generic term abbreviation Description Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Windows 7 aj F Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System Windows 8 Bice Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise Operating System Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows 8 1 Operating System Windows 8 1 ene amp Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Enterprise Operating System Generic term for the following Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System a me Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Oper
225. IONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 7 3 Screen Structure This section explains the screen structure of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 7 3 1 Screen structure Toolbar New MES interface function configuration tool DER Menu aria ho Deu 6 TE e KE Section 7 3 2 Menu configuration E n A re Proectrame a oS configuration Edit items tree ENE SENE sth Comment gt Section 7 3 4 f Operations using the Edit items tree Detailed setting edit screen Status bar Figure 7 1 Screen structure 7 2 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 1 Screen structure r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series When a text takes up too much space and all characters are not displayed per form the following e Resize the column of the table Drag the right border of the column to the desired width Communication action Complet Rejected Server time Communication action type ITEC Databasi Rejected Server time Figure 7 3 Table column width adjustment e Place your mouse cursor on it The setting can be viewed by placing your mouse cursor on the table or an input box Communication action Figure 7 4 Checking with the mouse cursor 7 MES INTERFACE CON
226. Interface Function 2 Make the settings when using the program execution function lt Section 6 1 9 Program execution function 3 Start it when using the SNTP server computer time with time synchronization function Section 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 4 Restart a personal computer after installing the relational database If not communication with the MES interface module may be impossible 5 Log on to the application server computer with the created account for user program execution once before using the program execution function When using the application server computer to which the program execution function is set log on with an account other than the created account for user program execution 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 2 Starting the MES interface module a S Point z Start the server computer and then the MES interface module Q CS 1 Starting the server computer in this section Zz O aie Procedure to operation QS nO 4 MES interface module 1 Configuration computer 2 l O 3 Install MES Interface Function Configuration Tool k L Section 5 1 Installation a A Mount a battery to the MES interface module 2 Mount the MES interface module to a base unit J Connect the MES interface module to the configuration computer on a 1 1 basis 3
227. Job 1 1 Trigger conditions met conditions met Executes action of Job 1 1 and stores trigger information of Job 1 2 and 3 3 in the trigger buffer conditions met Time The numbers 1 to 3 show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database Figure 6 6 In the case of load concentration c When loads are reduced Trigger interval gt Processing time for action e The information in the trigger buffer are read out sequentially causing actions to be executed e Since the trigger buffer information that was used for action execution is cleared free space is reproduced enabling new trigger buffering MES interface module When loads are reduced Trigger buffer Job 1 2 Sending i i Action data i J execution Oia Database Job 3 3 Action execution After completing the action of Job 1 1 executes actions of Job 1 2 and 3 3 in this order based on the trigger buffer information Time Time The numbers 1 to 3 show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database Figure 6 7 When loads are reduced 6 8 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Cel ries Point 1 For job operations performed when T
228. MELSE E saree Appendix 3 6 DBBUF CSV Item File name 1 File format Table App 16 File format Description DBBUF CSV XML MESSAGE FORMAT p Fle contents System setting DB buffering settings 7 Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting corresponding setting Le ITEM TAG ELEMENT Shows settings eA ee corresponding to the label Bsa columns and item rows in mee the file format and AE E tam row Por Label column setting erea explanations for them System setting Shows setting item name and a condition in entering a setting value Label Ti i D buferna cary 2 Label Table App 17 Label Description o B B INDEX STATUS DB buffering status RECORDSIZE INo of DB bufferings FULL DB buffer full 4 USERATE DB buffer utilization RESENDING Resend DB buffer request CLEARING clear DB buffer request 3 Setting item Table App 18 Setting item Item Description Setting value When set 1 to 64 TAG Tag When not set Blank When set 1 to 256 EJ cement Component When the TAG is blank Blank When not set Blank __ Appendix 3 Setting information File Format CSV File Forma ADH 19 Appendix 3 6 DBBUF CSV Figure App 2 How to see the setting information file formats a Setting values App 12 1 Settin
229. MES interface module Communication module Device data Device data Programmable controller CPU Programmable controller CPU Figure 1 1 Information linkage using the MES interface module INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 1 OVERVIEW i MELSEC LY ries 1 1 Features This section explains the features of MX MESInterface 1 Connection with the information system is enabled by simple settings without program Access to information system databases can be realized simply by making the necessary settings with the setting tool There is no need to write programs for accessing databases so the engineering costs for system construction can be reduced and the work period can be shortened MX MESInterface MES interface function configuration tool New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help Os BBs BOB WS NewProject Q system setting Job name NewJob F Enable at eee I Startup logging m Access target CPU settings J Trigger buffering T Test mode EER Device tag settings Communication action GO Server service settings Job settings EA Newt Action type Update z Database oB1 z Table name CompletionReport Browse table name DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions aaeeea _TaafType Component Combine Field
230. N When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transportation regulations Refer to Appendix 8 for details of the relevant models CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem
231. NSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION e The display of the connection result is not changed until the next job is executed to communicate the database server computer e The result of the one shot communication with the database server computer is not reflected FUNCTIONS j w z iL pa im Z o w al Q O z O E3 e oL 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 13 Online Remote operation T7 139 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 140 MELSEC Le series 7 13 4 Changing the job status The job status can be changed EJ Point The job status changed by this operation returns to the status set in Job settings by performing any of the following operations e Perform Update settings gt Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings e Power OFF and then ON e Reset the programmable controller CPU Change job status Job List JOB1 JV Enable job JOB2 JOB3 Vv Enable startup logging Enable detailed x logging Disable writing to n PLC device Disable writing to z database Execute Figure 7 109 Change job status D From Job List select the job whose status is to be changed Select a checkbox of the status to be changed Table 7 96 Selection items of Change job status Item Description e Checked The job is enabled and thereby it is executed when the trigger condi
232. O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series 7 Troubleshooting on the CompactFlash card Table 10 24 Troubleshooting on the CompactFlash card Symptom Checked item Corrective action e Replace with one of the CompactFlash Is there a problem with the type of cards shown in the following section CompactFlash card 7 Section 2 3 1 CompactFlash card sold separately Stop file access before turning off the Settings were erased while the power was power or resetting the control CPU i Was the power turned off or the control lt gt Section 4 7 2 1 Stopping file CPU reset during writing to the access CompactFlash card e Format the CompactFlash card again gt Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card Is the CompactFlash card inserted e Eject the CompactFlash card once and correctly insert it again Stop file access before turning off the power or resetting the control CPU Cannot recognize the CompactFlash card Was the power turned off or the control lt 7 Section 4 7 2 1 Stopping file CPU reset during writing to the access CompactFlash card e Format the CompactFlash card again lt 7 Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card 8 Troubleshooting about RCPU Table 10 25 Troubleshooting about RCPU Symptom Checked item Corrective action When RCPU is the control CPU for the Is the MES interface module whose first 5 e Use the MES interface module whose MES interface module Errors detected by d
233. OB63h OB64h System error DB buffering write error Failed to write data to the DB buffer 10 2 Error Code List Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Change the setting of the DB buffering capacity to ensure a sufficient free space on the CompactFlash card e Check if the CompactFlash card is damaged or not To the next page 10 15 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module XML MESSAGE a FORMAT 1 Z Q O n w al a 9 APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 16 MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action The tag component value specified for Set 1 or more to the tag component Max number of acquired ae OB68h records ilegal the maximum number of acquired value specified for the maximum i 9 records is 0 or less number of acquired records e Please consult your local Mitsubishi OB80h System error representative e Check the Ethernet connection An error occurred in the Ethernet e Check if Server service settings is 0B81h Communication start error communication and the correct communication failed to start e Check if the ODBC setting is correct e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0B82h System error representative soi e Check the Ethernet connection Communication 0B
234. ODBC connection function Zul A Receives SQL text or stored procedure execution request from the MES interface P function on the MES interface module gg Accesses the database via ODBC interface and executes the SQL text or stored procedure amp Sends the execution results to the MES interface module INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe z O O mf A Z Q S m a ee as 22 Lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 ag 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series 2 Program execution function The program execution function executes a program on the application server computer upon request from the MES interface module The following shows operation on the application server computer Application server computer DB Connection Service When an access is made Figure 8 2 Program execution function D Receives program execution requests from the MES interface function operating on the MES interface module Executes programs on the application server computer Sends the program execution results to the MES interface module 1 In Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 DB Connection Servic
235. OLTAGE DIRECTIVES GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Sections 2 1 1 2 2 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 5 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 7 2 4 8 1 5 1 6 1 4 7 11 1 7 11 2 8 2 8 5 10 1 3 10 2 1 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 4 Appendix 9 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision Jan 2009 SH NA 080644ENG H Gorrection Sections 2 2 3 2 6 1 4 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 1 2 Jan 2010 SH NA 080644ENG Gorrection SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS Sections 1 1 2 3 2 4 2 2 5 2 6 2 3 1 3 3 4 3 4 7 2 4 8 1 to 4 8 3 6 1 6 6 1 9 7 3 1 7 3 4 7 8 1 7 9 7 9 1 7 10 7 10 1 7 11 7 11 1 7 12 5 8 1 8 2 8 8 1 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 2 10 3 3 Appendices 3 1 3 10 3 13 to 3 15 3 19 5 7 1 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Sept 2010 SH NA 080644ENG J Correction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Sections 2 1 to 2 3 2 4 1 2 4 2 3 1 3 2 5 1 5 2 7 7 1 7 10 2 7 12 6 7 15 8 3 10 3 1 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 3 7 7 1 7 2 Sept 2011 SH NA 080644ENG K COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Sections 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 6 2 3 1 3 2 4 3 7 7 7 7 1 7 9 1 7 11 1 7 11 2 7 15 8 2 10 2 1 10 3 3 Appendices 1 1 3 7 3 8 3 10 4 1 4 2 Jun 2012 SH NA 080644ENG L COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Sections 2 2 2
236. ON MELSEG Q series From the previous page l Confirm the file to be deleted To uninstall it click the Yes button button To not uninstall it click the No button returns to the previous Clicking the No screen e The component indicates the installed icons and file No to All If the left screen appears click the fee Shared File X Iae button 4 When the message showing the completion of the removal is displayed click the OK_ button 5 When the above screen is displayed restart the personal computer When reinstalling after uninstallation be sure to restart the personal computer If not the DB Connection Service and Setting tool may not operate normally after reinstallation l End 5 411 5 2 Uninstallation 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Cel ries This chapter explains the MES interface functions of the MES interface module g The MES interface functions are set using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 3 lt gt Chapter 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function z 5 The DB interface function executes access to the database in units of jobs ate b9 6 1 1 DB interface function operation The operation of the DB interface function is shown below 2 O Programmable MES interface module S controller CP
237. ON AND UNINSTALLATION Sm Music Gy Pictures Files of type MES interface function project file mup Cancel Figure 7 12 Open dialog box FUNCTIONS 7 l Q Table 7 7 Setting items in the Open dialog box z are o Item Description E Look in Select the location where the project is stored th 2 File name Specify a project file name F o z Se A Select a project file type ZrO Files of type P MES interface function project file mup orm 529 2 lt tr Zoo gt E An ann 7 4 Project File Handling T 9 7 4 1 Creating a new project MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi al 26 Q ceries 7 4 3 Saving a project Save a project 1 Save the current project Perform either of the following Click l Save e Select Project Save from the menu 2 Saving a project under a new name Select Project Save As from the menu 2 The Save As dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Save button Save in G My Documents v lex EB ary Music E My Pictures Save as type MES interface function project file mup Cancel Figure 7 13 Save As dialog box Table 7 8 Setting items in the Save As dialog box Item Description Save in Select the location where the project is to be saved File name Specify the name of the project file to be saved Select a type
238. ON TOOL MELSEC Aeres 1 Statistical type 4 2 3 4 Select a type of the statistical processing Table 7 41 Options of Statistical type Item Description Average An average value after starting sampling is stored Maximum The maximum value after starting sampling is stored Minimum The minimum value after starting sampling is stored Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the number of times specified by No of samples and an averaged value Moving average 2 3 4 is stored Since the processing range moves at each sampling the latest value can be obtained Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the number of times specified by No of samples and the maximum Moving maximum 4 value is stored Since the processing range moves at each sampling the latest value can be obtained Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the number of times specified by No of samples and the minimum Moving minimum 2 3 4 value is stored Since the processing range moves at each sampling the latest value can be obtained If a statistical value of Average Maximum or Minimum is reset a value obtained after resetting will be stored e How to reset a statistical value of Average Maximum or Minimum Perform substitution of some value for the relevant tag component using Operation action of a job
239. Operation action The arithmetic processing function performs operations for tag component values In this function up to 20 dyadic operations can be processed per operation action By storing an operation result in the temporary variable area complicated operations are also executable For the arithmetic processing function setting refer to the following Section 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action An operand is selectable from tag component constant and temporary variable Temporary Tag component Tag component variable Constant Constant Temporary Tag component Up to 20 dyadic operations Tag component lt variable Constant gt can be performed for one operation action The result can be Four operations and assigned to a tag remainder can be specified component or by corresponding operators Executed in order temporary variable Pi Figure 6 10 Arithmetic processing function Operation action 6 1 9 Program execution function The program execution function is used for executing programs in the application server computer before execution of the first action and after execution of the last one in a job For the program execution function setting refer to the following K 7 Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution Programs that can be executed from Command line are applicable Since program execution is set on the server computer a
240. PERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 4 Operating Environment 2 15 2 4 3 Computer for developing XML processing applications 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 16 MELSEC Le series 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number The serial No and function version of the MES interface module can be confirmed on the rating plate and GX Developer s system monitor 1 Confirming the serial number on the rating plate The rating plate is situated on the side face of the MES interface module MELSEC G MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial No first 5 digits MAC ADD SERIAL 0000000000 B wa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Figure 2 8 SERIAL on the rating plate on the side of the MES interface module Relevant regulation standards 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION a6 Q series 2 Checking on the front of the module The serial No and function version on the serial number display are also indicated on the front of the module lower part QJ71MES96 10BASE T 100BASE TX 100 M SD RD QJ71MES96 ae ee Ze 1 120121102450001KB i Function version QU71MESS6 oe Serial number Figure 2 9 SERIAL on the serial number display on the fro
241. Precautions for System Configuration 2 6 3 Precautions for using database 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres This chapter explains the performance specifications functions buffer memory etc of the g MES interface module and the MX MESInterface For general specifications of the MES interface module refer to the following manual lt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 Performance Specifications Ze D2 This section explains the MES interface module and the MX MESInterface performance aS specifications 3 1 Transmission and interface specifications 12 FA Table 3 1 Transmission and interface specifications S Item Specifications 5 Interface 10BASE T 100BASE TX a Data transmission 10 Mbps 100 Mbps rate Transmission method Base band No of cascaded z A o Ethernet Maximum 4 stages Maximum 2 stages 2 oh stages F rz Maximum segment 5 S z 100m length between a hub and a node FO length fetes fo A The auto negotiation function is available automatically distinguishes 10BASE T from eae Supported function 100BASE TX Supply power voltage 3 3V 5 Supply power fa ae Maximum 150 mA 26 capacity Oe CompactFlash card es Card size TYPE card lt z No of installable z2 1 o2 cards 25 Number of occupied I O points 32 points slot I O assignment Intelli 32 points The clock data is obtained from a progra
242. Process gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi gt gt Processi Component WworkNo RECIPE1 RECIPE2 RECIPES __1 WorkNo 2 RECIPE1 _3 RECIPEZ 4 RECIPES Browse field name t amp Delete row Generated SQL text a WorkNo xl Table name RECIPEDATA Select Update Delete conditions Browse table name Field name Condition RECIPES Combine b delete row Browse field name Tag Type Number Component Select sort settings Field name delete row Browse fieldname No of fields in project 21 Tag component data length in job 20 words total v Insert a whole tag Exception process setting Multi select setting SELECT WorkNo RECIPE1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3 FROM RECIPEDATA WHERE RECIPES 1 ORDER BY WorkNo DESC Figure 7 78 An example of MultiSelect setting Database DB1 Table name RECIPEDATA Work_No RECIPE_A RECIPE_B RECIPE_C 536 3 32 1 537 6 33 0 538 7 34 1 539 8 35 1 540 9 36 0 Matched Selected Selected Selected RECIPE_C 1 Work_No RECIPE_A RECIPE_B RECIPE_C 536 5 32 1 538 7 34
243. QUEST tag Table 9 2 Request message REQUEST tag Omission Not possible Format lt REQUEST type Instruction of job execution jobname Job name gt Specifies the instruction of job execution required 68 oneshot One shot execution Attribute validate Validate invalidate Invalidate jobname Specifies the job name to be executed Contents None Sub component None a One shot execution An example for one shot execution of the job named Pro01 yl lt xml version 1 0 gt lt REQUEST type oneshot jobname Pro01 gt b Validate An example enabling the job named Pro01 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt REQUEST type validate jobname Pro01 gt c Invalidate An example disabling the job named Pro01 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt REQUEST type invalidate jobname Pro01 gt When one shot execution is performed in the job for which Handshake operation is specified as a trigger condition Completion notification is turned ON Turn OFF Completion notification in the sequence program 9 2 9 1 XML Message Format Definition Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC Aeres 9 2 Response message RESPONSE tag W 5 Table 9 3 Response message RESPONSE tag g d z Item Description z amp re Omission Not possible Format lt RESPONSE status Job execution result code Error code gt The request message recepti
244. RATION SYSTEM QO02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU oO QCPU Q mode Universal model QCPU o Z O q o S M o 7 LCPU QnACPU SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION ACPU INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 1 Cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station 2 Serial numbers of the MES interface module to be used are restricted The restriction is the same as the one for the applicable systems lt L gt Section 2 2 Applicable Systems 3 Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 12092 or later 4 Use the MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 14122 or later 5 Do not access directly the PLC series other than the above table If the CPU module is accessed directly by mistake all access target CPU may not be accessed FUNCTIONS la le 2 Ww pA S RE ZA Lu EOS Zee Alsie a25 ZrO rA So 528 Bi Lu 322 Ole on AnNa 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Le series 2 Accessible routes a Single network MES interface Network module L module Network 2 to 7 Request Relay Relay Sourc Network 1 station station Network 8 Access target CPU 1 1 1 1 E 1 1 Network communication route e The network is any of CC IE Control NET 10 H Ethernet or CC IE Field e The following lists CPU
245. RATION Blank 3 When TAG is selected with E 1 to 64 _ IN2CONSTTYPE IN2TAG Input 2 Tag When other than the above is Wh her than theab en other than the above is selected with OPERATION i S selected with Blank IN2CONSTTYPE When NONE is selected with OPERATION Blank if When TAG is selected with fa 1 to 256 m Input 2 IN2CONSTTYPE o IN2ELEMENT Conan When other than the above is lt en other than the above is p selected with OPERATION i ii selected with Blank IN2CONSTTYPE When NONE is selected with OPERATION Blank When TAG is selected Blank with INZCONSTTYPE When DATESTR is selected Character string valid is with INZCONSTTYPE as a date Z When NUMBER is selected Numauesivalis umerical valu INPUT2 Input 2 Variable When other than the above is with INZCONSTTYPE selected with OPERATION Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV When STRING is selected with INZCONSTTYPE Any character string When VARIABLE is selected with INZCONSTTYPE When NONE is selected with INZCONSTTYPE Variable name Blank App 47 APPENDICES Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV a6 Q series 1 File format Table App 55 File format Item Description File name REMOTE CSV File contents Job settings Program execution lt 3 Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution File format App
246. S activities The systems enable to speed up the responses to production plan and status changes that lead to efficient production processes and optimization of production activities ODBC Abbreviation for Open DataBase Connectivity Standard specifications for software to access databases Abbreviation for Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Protocol for synchronizing computer time via a TCP IP network SNTP server computer Computer that provides time information to the MES interface module This computer can be shared with a server computer Abbreviation for Structured Query Language is Data manipulation language and used for relational database operations Abbreviation for Uniform Resource Locator pee Notation method for indicating the locations of information resources on the Internet Converts character strings into characters can be used in URLs URL encode This designates percent encoding defined by RFC3986 XML Abbreviation for eXtensible Markup Language Markup language for describing documentation data meanings and structures Item One setting group unit included each setting type for editing re Designates the right to use the MES interface module or server computer or an ID necessary for their use Unit for processing defined in a job There are Communication action for communicating with a database and Operation action for operating tag component values Action Communication action is a processing
247. Section 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action The statistical processing is reset and a value processed after the substitution is stored Statistical values of Moving average Moving maximum and Moving minimum cannot be reset The substitution cannot be performed on values of Moving average Moving maximum and Moving minimum The job will be canceled When Moving average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is specified for a tag component a job using the tag component is not able to start its execution until sampling for the specified number of times is completed The job will be canceled 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 49 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 36 ZPO z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 2 No of samples 2 to 20 Specify the number of samples when Moving average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is selected Moving average when No of samples is 4 Device value 3 4 Sampling interval gt ist Tag component value mi gt 3rd 0 Time seconds lt Change in tag component values gt 1st 2nd 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 3rd 3 4
248. Server service settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant x Point items Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Q New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help Oe ER AME NewProject amp system setting Access target CPU settings Device tag settings Sy Server service settings SEEM E Job settings Server service name Server type IP address Port No 1024 to 65535 User name Password Confirm password Data source name Database type Access error notification setting Connection timeout 1 to 180 NewServer Database server 0 0 Oracle 9i rT Notify the access error status Tag Component 10 seconds Figure 7 40 Server service settings 1 How to add delete copy or move an item For information on how to add delete copy or move an item refer to the following gt Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New server item is added 7 9 Server Service Setting T 53 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z ESO 260 36 ZPO z e S O Z Te
249. Setting items for job cancellation o Z O O Z 5 U MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 21 6 1 11 Precautions 6 FUNCTIONS 6 22 MELSEC Le series 6 2 XML Processing Function The XML processing function is a function by which execution of XML format message requests from user applications can be processed The XML processing function allows the following instructions for job execution e One shot execution of a job e Validating a job The job is executed when the trigger conditions are met e Invalidating a job The job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met For the XML message format refer to the following C3 Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT Application server computer Ly y Request message Job startup er lila XML User application J Response message Figure 6 17 XML processing function 6 2 XML Processing Function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries 6 3 Time Synchronization Function The time synchronization function adjusts the time of the MES interface module to be synchronized with the time of the SNTP server computer or a programmable controller g CPU No 1 CPU in the multiple CPU system on the network Time information is utilized for job start conditions or i
250. Setting value 2 TYPE Action type Operation OPERATION OPENUM Operation action count 1 to 20 The items other than above will be blank App 38 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 13 ACTION CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSV 1 File format XML MESSAGE FORMAT Table App 43 File format Item Description File name ACFIELD CSV Communication action DB tag link settings File contents eae s ee lt gt Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action ra ITEM FIELD1 1 1 Completed TAG 1 FIELD1 1 2 Rejected TAG 1 FIELD1 1 3 Date bame SERVER TROUBLESHOOTING __ Item row File format Label column setting area APPENDICES Communication action Communication action Action type E Database NewServer Table name la Browse table name Field name Tag Type Component i Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component 1 DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions B g gt l g INDEX 2 Label Table App 44 Label Label Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 DB tag link settings No 1 to 256 FIELD64 10 256 FIELD1 1 1 to Tr FIELD64 10 256 t Indicates DB tag link settings No 1 to 256 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 Appendix 3 Setting Informat
251. TALLATION FUNCTIONS O 2 ms G WL z See 260 36 ZPO z e O Z ve 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 1 3 MELSEC A series Job name Up to 16 characters Enter a job name For characters that can be used for job names refer to the following 3 Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product Enable at module startup a Set whether to enable the job at startup of the MES interface module or not If the Enable at module startup box is not checked the job is disabled at startup of the module Even if trigger conditions are met the job is not executed b While the MES interface module is operating this setting can be changed by the following e Instruction of job execution in the XML processing function 7 Section 6 2 XML Processing Function e Online Remote operation Change job status Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status Trigger buffering a Set whether to enable the trigger buffering function or not For the trigger buffering function refer to the following C Section 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function b Precautions when selecting Trigger buffering 1 Handshake operation is not selectable for trigger conditions 2 No tag component can be selected for the following items e Substitution tag of Select in Communication action e Subs
252. TE k HJ Item Description JE When 2 Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of deleted records Z5 Output succeeded log format eniz Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When MEA 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt DELETE FROM TABLE gt Success 1 u Example o 5 A 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000c60 SQL lt DELETE FROM table1 gt Failed i 9 Database Message 0x000003ae Oracle ODBC OraJORA 00942 table or view does not exist G m 5 Stored procedure reception processing results Table 8 24 Stored procedure execution reception processing results al Item Description w z Om When Date Error code SID Session ID Procedure lt Procedure name Value in argument 1 Value in argument 5 lt Cub succeeded 2 gt Success Return value ES utpu 25 D TD Date Error code SID Session ID Procedure lt Procedure name Value in argument 1 Value in argument my ZZ g When failed 2 gt Failed Return value ane Database Message Database error number Database error factor message 8 When 2013 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000e14 Procedure lt StoredProcedure1 10 0 0 gt Success 0 succeeded s Example 2013 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20f00007 SID 00000794 Procedure lt StoredProcedure1 gt Failed F 9 9 When failed Database Message 0x00000afc Microsoft ODB
253. TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom Though the job is cancelled rollback is not executed Checked item Was the stored procedure created in Oracle 10g 11g 12c committed Corrective action Do not commit in the stored procedure created in Oracle 10g 11g 12c Failed to the stored procedure execution Has the stored procedure execution error occurred e Check that the settings of the stored procedure name return values and arguments are correct e Check that reserved terms of the database are not used for the stored procedure name Return value output argument and input output argument of the stored procedure cannot be acquired Is the stored procedure which returns a result set executed by SQL Server 2008 2012 e Modify the stored procedure not to return the result set Return value output argument and input output argument of a stored procedure which returns a result set cannot be acquired The data of the specific term is not stored in the database Does the buffered data exist in the Manually resend buffer When Immediate sending is selected in Operation of recovery from network disconnection of System settings DB buffering settings the data whose trigger condition is met is send regardless of whether the data exist e While the BD buffering is being performed resend the bu
254. TYPE Blank When SCHEDULING is selected with TYPE 0 to 59 EJ MINUTE Minute i When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank SECOND Fixed value Blank When TIMER is selected with TYPE 1 to 32767 Unit second EJ timer Period l When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 MONITORTAG Tag l When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 MONITORELEMENT Component l When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank EQUAL Pa NOTEQUAL When VALUE lt LESSTHANEQUAL COMPARECONDITION Condition is selected with TYPE gt GREATERTHANEQUAL lt LESSTHAN gt GREATERTHAN When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE Tag WAGI COMPARETYPE Tag type is selected with TYPE constant VALUE When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE and TAG is 1to64 COMPARETAG Comparison tag selected with COMPARETYPE When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank When VALUE is selected with TYPE and TAG is Comparison 1 to 256 COMPAREELEMENT selected with COMPARETYPE component value When other than the above is selected with TYPE Blank To the next page App 34 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format APPENDICES Table App 37 Setting item M eL a6 Q series
255. Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON Only in case of a module continuation error Watchdog timer X1F iror Turns ON when a watchdog timer error occurs 2 Output signals details Table 3 14 Output signals details Device be Signal name Description No v2 File access stop 1 Turns ON when file access is stopped request 2 For ON OFF timing refer to the description of X2 1 By turning ON during a module continuation error ERR LED ON turns OFF the ERR LED and X10 X11 X16 and X1C During a module stop error ERR LED flashing turning this device ON does not turn OFF the Y10 Error clear request ERR LED 3 20 2 Clears the Current error area Buffer memory address 140 to 145 Clears the latest error code displayed on System monitor of GX Developer lt 37 Section 10 1 3 System monitor 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 2 I O signals details 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aerie 3 5 Buffer Memory List ai The buffer memory list is shown below S a Ww Table 3 15 Buffer memory list Address Mine Initial Reference f Application j Decimal Hex value section 0 RUN LED status 0 R z Ox 0 OFF 1 ON 2 Ps 1 ERR LED status 0 R sa 1H 0 OFF 1 ON 2 Flash EE nz Switch 1 status Mode setting 8 2 0000h Online 0 R 3 2h 0001h Hardware test 0002h Self loopback test Switch 2 status Defaul
256. U 9 E Trigger monitoring 2 Trigger buffering 3 Database server computer Action 4 9 e D1000 Component Communication action 1 Update P 5 5 Operation action 2 A lt Communication action 3 Insert i m g a Databa Executed in order Communication action 10 Select INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION ez Program execution 5 p 4 DB buffering 6 _ Execute fe file Application server computer Figure 6 1 DB interface function operation 1 Collects tag data lt gt Section 6 1 3 Tag function 2 Activates a job lt gt Section 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function o Z O Z 5 U 3 Stores data and trigger times temporarily in the module s internal memory when loads are al concentrated mM fe L gt Section 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function 2 5 4 Accesses the database and performs arithmetic processing ti 2 gt Section 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action Sor uU5o e Section 6 1 8 Arithmetic processing function Operation action ZrO 5 Executes programs lt 3 Section 6 1 9 Program execution function 6 Temporarily stores SQL texts in a CompactFlash card when a communication error occurs lt L gt Section 6 1 10 DB buffering function Bs 529 2 lt TE gt E An ann 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 6 1 1 DB interface function
257. VER CSV vasse a a App 28 Appendix 3 11 JOB CSY parses a E E EEE App 30 Appendix 3 12 CONDITION CSV isser iiser denaii eves sed a a a a aia d ANa aai ai App 32 Appendix 3 13 AC TIONI GSV eneiniad aaiae aaae E aaa da adiada ada aaia App 36 Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSW cinnin a aa a A a AEE Aa App 39 Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV eion Ra anaiena aa eeen anaa Teana AAEE EAE AE EEEE TN App 41 Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION COV pinnus a e A Aaa a RETEA App 43 A 14 Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV scccssssssssssessseseseessucesucsssessucessvessecsreessusesneesaneseeesressseeasecssneeens App 45 Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV ccccssssccccsssseeceessssceeessseeaeeessssaeeeessseaeseessesaaeeessesscaesessesaeeeesssaas App 48 Appendix 3 19 ORDERBY CSV sissies ccsdsascdeddesnees ie iE EEOAE AREE ERO NEE AEE ENRE App 50 Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV c cccccssssseccssssssseecesssssseessesetseceusessnsecessessnseeseusstseeeussssnseeees App 51 Appendix 4 Processing TIM ccicssiccicasiiieneses nie ceeesint eve ceesnnee cesses EEEE ENAA EEE App 53 Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 13092 or later eseeeeeeeeees App 53 Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later and 13091 or ARNGN aeczaccan sacs etse a r E caseeiasne aoe App 56 Appendix 4 3 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier 0 eeeee App
258. Value monitoring startup ee Component Condition Tag Type Component S Figure 7 51 Value monitoring startup 1 Tag Component Select a tag component to be compared with Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 5 2 Condition o LL Select a condition for comparison DZ nO Table 7 51 Selection items for Condition Item Description The tag component value is equal to the condition value The tag component value is not equal to the condition value 2 f x The tag component value is equal to or greater than the condition value E F Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String The tag component value is greater than the condition value g gt Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String z2 The tag component value is smaller than the condition value lt Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String E The tag component value is equal to or smaller than the condition value Not selectable when Data type of the tag component is Bit or String a e Lez nND0 3 Tag Type og 5 Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison Fom nao Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 4 Component Select or enter a component constant value that is used as a condition for comparison INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j w z iL ae im Z o w l Q O z O
259. When editing a setting information file make sure to use the exported setting information file A setting information file must not be created by the user XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING a Space All spaces are treated as a part of the item If a space is used with a setting item in which a space cannot be used an error will occur APPENDICES b Uppercase lowercase characters Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished c Special characters 1 Line feed To input a Line feed enter n Example An error occurred in Line A n Execute recovery processing 2 mark To input enter INDEX 3 comma When inputting a enclose the entire item in double quotation marks However at the use of Excel double quotations do not need to be entered since they are added automatically when the data is saved in CSV format Example As the temperature was abnormal the machine stopped Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 11 Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions APPENDICES a6 Q series 3 How to see the setting information file formats The following shows how to see the setting information file formats explained starting from the subsequent descriptions The figure below is for explanation and therefore differs from the actual pages Indicates a file name Indicates the APPENDICES
260. Z lt For MES Interface Function Configuration Tool gt lt 3 MES interface function configuration tool be MX MESInterface Le n When using Windows 2000 a Click Change or Remove Programs S b Select the program to be deleted p n c Click the Change Remove button When using Windows Vista Windows i fa Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server Zu 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 Lee Select the program to be deleted in Uninstall or Dea change a program and click Uninstall Change ol When using the operating system with the User Account Control function e Windows needs your permission to continue If the screen on the left appears click the If you started this action continue rel Uninstall or change an application Microsoft Windows Continue button ja 23 k Eg Sz Be 23 User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer yunu a When the screen on the left is displayed click the nO Do you want to allow the following program to make button 2 changes to this computer 2 ims rey Program name Uninstall or change an application Verified publisher Microsoft Windows Show details Yes CEJ 2 Change when these notifications appear re e 1 he o To the next page 266 226 ZrO Eog Om we wW B22 82 F ow W ann 5 2 Uninstallation 5 10 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATI
261. ace module appropriate to each CPU module If an unsupported one is used for a CPU module it does not function normally b When mounting to remote I O station of MELSECNET H The MES interface module cannot be mounted to remote I O station of the MELSECNETI H Mount the MES interface module to a CPU module of the master station 2 2 Applicable Systems 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 Application to multiple CPU system When using the MES interface module in multiple CPU system refer to the following manual lt QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System The MES interface module is compatible with the multiple CPU system with function version B from the first product OVERVIEW N 2 3 Connection System Equipment z O lt 5 o Le z Q S This section explains the equipment can be connected to the MES interface module 1 CompactFlash card sold separately The MES interface module requires one CompactFlash card 2 Use a CompactFlash card manufactured by Mitsubishi listed in the following table 2 Failure to do so may cause a problem such as data corruption in the CompactFlash E card and system stop a Table 2 2 CompactFlash card sold separately GT05 MEM 128MC CompactFlash card 128 MB o GT05 MEM 256MC CompactFlash card 256 MB Z y QD81MEM 512MBC CompactFlash card 512MB 83 QD81MEM 1GBC CompactFlash card 1GB ER S Da O Point 1 For CompactFlash card format us
262. actFlash card slot cover removal e Put the finger at the bottom of the LED cover that is on the front of the MES interface module and lift the LED cover to open e Put the finger at the top of the CompactFlash card slot cover and then remove the cover FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 17 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 18 Install the CompactFlash card When installing the CompactFlash card into the MES interface module pay attention to the orientation of the card Push the CompactFlash card securely into the slot until it is flush with the EJECT button EJECT button Orientation of a CompactFlash card CompactFlash card slot LED cover Insert in Figure 4 15 Installation of a CompactFlash card MELSEC Le series Tab direction this direction CompactFlash card Lower the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module until it clicks When a CompactFlash card is installed the CompactFlash card slot cover cannot be attached to the MES interface module Save the removed CompactFlash card slot cover carefully 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Kel ries
263. administrator about the firewall setting Section 5 1 Installation e Ask your network administrator about the proxy server setting e Replace it with another computer 3 Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and access target CPU Table 10 20 Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and access target CPU Symptom Unable to access another station via Q series E71 Checked item Is a remote password set for the GX Developer communication port UDP IP of the Q series E71 on the target or relay station Corrective action e Remove the remote password set for the GX Developer communication port UDP IP of the Q series E71 on the target or relay station An error occurs when accessing the Redundant CPU Is MES interface accessing the Redundant CPU of other station e Mount a MES interface module to the extension base unit of the Redundant CPU that is access target and access it The MES interface cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station Is system switching consecutively occurring e Review the system so that system switching will not occur consecutively When the MES interface module is started up Errors detected by the access target CPU error code 4B00h occurs 10 46 Is the MES interface module accessing other CPU or accessing the other station via a network module controlled by other CPU in the multiple CPU module
264. agnostic screen a Select System monitor Present Error of GX Developer C gt Section 10 1 3 System monitor 2 The Current error area can be cleared in either of the following methods a Turn ON the Error clear request Y10 b Power ON the programmable controller from OFF or reset the programmable controller CPU 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 4 Current error area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 3 6 5 Error log area 1 Error count Buffer memory address 150 OVERVIEW a The cumulative number of registrations to the Error log area is stored 2 Error log write pointer Buffer memory address 151 a The number of error log to which the latest error is registered is stored 1 0 No error No error log stored 1 or more Error log number of the latest error stored The pointer value of 16 indicates that the latest error has been registered into the error log area of 16 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO b If 17 or more errors occur the excess errors are registered to the error log areas starting from the error log 1 area again 3 Error log 1 to 16 Buffer memory address 152 to 247 The error history is stored The Error log area is composed of 16 logs of the same data arrangement 2 Zz O lt iS u S w a ao a Error code An error code which indicates the error contents is stored For error codes refer to the following Section 10 2 Error Code Li
265. al set in Device N 0628h a e Correct Device tag settings setting error tag settings is invalid 0629h ae e Retry writing the setting with MES A Failed to read out the setting file The 062Ah Setting file error Seen Interface Function Configuration setting file is corrupted 062Ch Tool ae The access target CPU specified in or No CPU specification e Specify an existing CPU as the 062Dh the component setting does not error 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module exist or its setting was deleted access target To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 062Eh MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Data type incorrect error Description There is an inconsistency between the device and data type that were specified in the component setting Any other than Bit was specified for a bit device or Bit was specified for any other than bit device Action Correct the component setting 062Fh Excessive number of characters error The number of characters specified in the component setting is out of range 0630h Decimal Exponential form setting error The decimal or exponential type specification in the component setting is invalid Correct the component setting 0631h 0649h Setting file error Failed to read out the s
266. ally e Check the CompactFlash card 0B42h DB buffer clear error Failed to clear the DB buffer e If the CompactFlash card is Data in the DB buffer could not be damaged replace it 0B43h DB buffer read error read normally e Do not clear the DB buffer during resending of DB buffered data 0B44h DB buffer empty error The DB buffer is empty e Check the CompactFlash card 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module e If the CompactFlash card is damaged replace it To the next page 1 0 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0B45h MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name DB buffer content error Description Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid Action Check the CompactFlash card If the CompactFlash card is damaged replace it OB46h 0B47h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative OB48h Error in conversion from character string to number Character strings could not be converted to numerical values e Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case 0B49h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0B4Ah 0B4Bh Error in conversion from character string to number System error Character strings could not be converted to numerical values Change the setting so that type conversion
267. am execution r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not a H 4 5 H z When Enable DB buffering checkbox is checked DB buffering function is enabled w For the DB buffering function setting refer to the following L gt Section 6 1 10 DB buffering function r DB Buffering Enable DB buffering Z Using the Manually resend buffer Y 7 a3 Figure 7 63 DB Buffering BS cas When the DB buffering function is enabled select the following Default Using the Manually resend buffer Table 7 58 Setting items when selecting Enable DB buffering z Item Description z Perform the resent processing manually k Using the Manually resend buffer After recovering from network disconnection automatic resend is not a performed i After recovering from the network disconnection automatic resend is Using the Automatically resend buffer performed gF W Bao Q 25 ZE 3 ez 25 no PA O E O R a O 4 3 Coe E93 hs ire B36 Tes O 528 aN 9 ZO OSE mf i ann 7 10 Job Setting T 79 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering F MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 80 MELSEC Le series 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors job cancellation that occur during job execution
268. ame is overwritten Also if the same component name is set multiple times in the same item Tag the setting of the label with the higher number is overwritten Specify Access target CPU settings No that is set in the CPU CSV label Specifying Access target CPU settings No that is not set in CPU CSV causes an error Setting a device that does not exist causes an error Setting a device that does not match the data type causes an error If the total of device points is set greater than 96 at High speed sampling selection this causes an error Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV App 27 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 10 SERVER CSV 1 File format Table App 29 File format Item Description File name SERVER CSV File contents Server service settings lt gt Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting 6 SERVER SERVERNAME _ SERVERTYPE IPADDRESS PORT USERNAME SERVER1 Application APP 192 168 3 10 5112 USERNAME1 SERVER2 Oraclegi DB 192 168 3 11 5113 USERNAME2 4 SERVER3 Oracle10g DB 192 168 3 12 5114_ USERNAME3 SERVER4 SQLServer2000 DB _ _ 192 168 3 13 5115 USERNAME4 1 EZ EJ PASSWORD _ SORCENAME DBTYPE ERRORWRITE DEVICETAG PASSWORD1 DISABLE 1 PASSWORD2 DB1 ORACLE9I
269. ank App 40 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV 1 File format Table App 46 File format Item Description File name ACCONDITION CSV File contents Communication action Select Update Delete conditions gt Section 7 11 2 6 Select Update Delete conditions File format 6 8 ITEM COMPARE CONDITION1 1 1 _ Work noa rae EQUAL jhi h J CONDITION1 2 1 AND_ NUMBER _ NUMBER LESSTHAN fioo CONDITION1 3 1 OR___ Wwork No2 rae EQuaL fi 2 L Item row L Label column setting area Communication action Communication action Action type SERS Database Newserver xl Table name Browse table name DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions Field name Tag Type Companent Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component N gt gt 1 2 gt gt T ii li E EA E 2 Label Table App 47 Label Label CONDITION1 1 1 to CONDITION64 10 8 Description Job settings No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 CONDITION64 10 8 Indicates Select Update Delete conditions No 1 to 8 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 P Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 41 Appendix 3 15 ACCONDITION CSV XML M
270. ant to set up a data source vA Create a New Data Source to SQL Server TE This wizard will help you create an ODBC data source that you can use to T connect to SOL Server ER What name do you want to use to refer to the data source ee neon Name S4MPLEDS i pae How do you want to describe the data source Description J Which SQL Server do you want to connect to Server SAMPLESRV X Mih SGL Server authentication using a logn ID and password entered by the user ji CEAN e ae BEV pae To change the network ibrary used to communicate with SOL Server Beene FO ox cick Cient Configuration So s Cent Configuration Sz Corect to SOL Server to obtain defauit settings for the p addtional configuration options F7 Use ANSI quoted identifiers FZ Use ANSI nulls paddings and warnings p Use the failove SUL Server i the pray SOL Serveris noi avaible Cms ie To the next page 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC TAY series Double clicking Data Sources ODBC displays ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box 4 Select the System DSN tab then click the Add button 4 For use of a 64 bit version operating system type the following at the command prompt to start the ODBC Data Source Administrator SystemRoot SysWOW64 odbcad32 exe 4 The Create New Data Source dialog bo
271. are executed without missing any trigger x To utilize the trigger buffering function enable Trigger buffering at each Job settings 5 Z2 1 Trigger buffering function DZ This section explains the operations of the job for which Trigger buffering is enabled 2 gt a In a normal case Trigger interval gt Processing time for action e When trigger conditions are met tag data and trigger time are stored in the 9 trigger buffer e Based on the information in the trigger buffer an action is executed immediately g MES interface module Normal case 6 QF a 1 t ND0 2ng 1 J execution EFO 1 HOw A E a Oke oo O 22 Se 2S 32 2 Figure 6 5 In a normal case Q SF ez o Z O Z 5 U MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 7 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series b In the case of load concentration Trigger interval lt Processing time for action e Every time a trigger condition is met tag data and trigger time are stored in the trigger buffer e When action processing is not completed in time up to 128 pieces of trigger information are stored in the buffer MES interface module When loads are concentrated Trigger buffer Job 1 2 Trigger information tag data time Action Job 3 3 Trigger information tag data time execution
272. artUp OG ccenn a ideaa 7 129 Startup logging sccecranneinenneiaro ieee 7 61 Statistical processing eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerrerree ren 7 48 Stored procedure cceccesesssssssseeseeeseeeeeees A 23 6 11 System configuration 0 2 2 eeeeeeeeee ete eeeeeeetteeeeeeeetaaes 2 1 System Setting ss ices eave ieee 7 18 T Test MOUS os craca a a 7 61 Time SynehronizZ ti M scena 6 23 7 20 TIME ZONE ccc cceeceeccccececeeeeeeeeceneneeeeeeaaeeeses A 23 7 20 Transfer SCIUPiccesseascacesteeasanacnseadceacetaandteexateanadis 7 123 Trigger DUNEN eccna A 24 FURCUOM saie ana ea aa 6 7 SEa PEE E E E T 7 59 SAUS eera E a 7 143 Tngger CONCILION ssssssscronanneonnion A 23 7 62 At module Staup sessssassstensssadrecteseaacteaaenendeceddss 7 69 DisaDlesenanesentr a sesaaceaagessereans 7 64 Handshake operation cccceceeeeeeeeeseees 7 69 Specified time period startup ceeee 7 66 Time specification startup 0 0 eeeeeeees 7 65 Value monitoring startup 0 eeeeeeeeeeee eee 7 66 Trigger monitoring FUNCTION eect eeetereeer eee 6 5 U Update siiip n Eaa 7 97 Update Settings cc ccceceeeeeeeeetnreeeeeetneeeeere 7 138 UR E E E A 22 9 4 V Var lable onesna A 24 7 90 7 121 VOT teicher eaten ET 7 126 w WORDE lOean a 7 127 WIE e naa R 7 124 X XML processing c0ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 22 6 22 9 1 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using
273. as it is provided for explanation only In addition this manual provides the following explanations Point Explains the matters to be especially noted the functions and others related to the description on that page Provides the reference destination related to the description on that page and the convenient information A 19 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the QJ71MES96 MES interface module and MX MESInterface Version 1 SW1DNC MESIF E Generic term abbreviation Description ACPU Generic term for the A1NCPU AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJHCPU A2CCPU A2CJCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 AZUSCPU A2ZUSCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 ASNCPU A3ACPU A3UCPU and A4UCPU C Controller module Generic term for the QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V and Q24DHCCPU LS Ethernet Generic term for 1OOBASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 and 10BASE2 network systems Ethernet module Generic term for the E71 QE71 Q series E71 and L series E71 Generic term for the AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N3 T EG A1SJ71E71N B5 and A1SJ71E71N B2 Generic product name for the model names of the SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n Version 4 or later A designates a multiple license produc
274. ata value i area fo D Set the tag number displayed in the No of requested tag Buffer memory address m Zz 1290 1 Check that the tag number is stored in the No of stored tag Buffer memory address 1291 and that the Update count Buffer memory address 1292 is incremented by a 1 2 oO Check that the tag component values for the No of components Buffer memory address 1293 are stored in the Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300 to 1811 The tag numbers are the numbers beginning at 1 to 64 in the order set with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2 Ifa value outside the range is set the Current tag data value area is not updated 3 The Current tag data value area is updated each time the sampling is completed for the tag whose number is set as the No of requested tag Buffer memory address 1290 2 Zz O lt iS we S w a 2a Buffer memory address 1293 is stored gE E No of requested tag _ Specify tag No an 5 Buffer memory address 1290 Example Specify 5 ES ti ooo No of stored tag The current tag No is stored Buffer memory address 1291 A Example 5 is stored pee count fipdates kaien gt s Buffer memory address 1292 ee anie cored Z Qs No of components No of components _ z z l a2 23 Current tag data value Buffer memory address 1300
275. ating System nove st Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Generic term for the following Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Generic term for the UC24 QC24 N and Q series C24 Especially when referring to the QC24 N and Q series C24 they are written as Serial Computer link module Serial communication module communication module A 21 DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS The following table shows the definitions and descriptions of the terms used in this manual Term Description Abbreviation for Comma Separated Values Saks Text file in which the data are aligned and set off by commas and double quotations DB buffering Function temporarily stores SQL text that failed to be sent due to a communication error and resends the text when the communications have been recovered Abbreviation for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HME Protocol to exchange XML format messages between the MES interface module and user applications in the XML processing function Tag for Wonderware Name for data unit in the data base Wonderware Historian Historian Abbreviation for Manufacturing Execution Systems Systems for controlling and monitoring the plant status in real time to optimize production ME
276. ation Tool e As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another item and then delete the item e An item used for another item is unable to be deleted 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Device tag settings gt Section 7 8 Device Tag Setting Symptom Unable to change or delete an item in Device tag settings Table 10 13 Device tag settings Checked item Is the selected item used in Job settings Is the selected item used in DB buffering settings of System setting Is the selected item used in Access error notification setting of Server service settings Corrective action e As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another item and then delete the item e An item used for another item is unable to be deleted MELSEC Kel ries XML MESSAGE n FORMAT Unable to set or change Device tag name Unable to select High speed sampling Is the same name used for Server service name or another Device tag name Is High speed sampling selected in another Device tag settings e Because a unique name must be used for Server service name and Device tag name use a different name e Clear the High speed sampling checkbox in the Device tag settings e Registration of High speed sampling is limited to one tag only Is any other than the first item Control CPU in Access target CPU settings
277. ation action dialog box Item Description Action type Select an action type Database Select a database to be accessed Table name Set a table name of the database to be accessed Browse table name button Browses the table names registered to the set database Set assignments between field values and tag component values or constant values Select Update Delete When Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action conditions type set conditions for the records to be selected updated or deleted DB tag link settings 1 When Select or MultiSelect is selected for Action type set a condition A Select sort settings for sorting selected records To the next page 1 Up to 8192 fields can be set in DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions and Select sort settings for each project The setting can be checked on the status bar of Job settings or in the Communication action dialog box 7 92 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 7 72 Setting items in the Communication action dialog box Item Description Exception process setting button Set the processing to be performed in the following cases e No corresponding record exists when Sel
278. aylight saving Disable daylight setting setting When the time is synchronized with DISABLE programmable controller CPU JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL When DST is ENABLE S_MONTH Starting month AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC When DST is DISABLE Blank noe Setting by week WEEK Specification S_TYPE Setting by date DATE method When DST is DISABLE Blank When TYPE is WEEK 1 to 4 LAST S_WEEKNUM Starting week When TYPE is DATE Blank When TYPE is WEEK SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Starting day of S_DAYOFWEEK When TYPE is DATE Blank Wi When DST is DISABLE Blank When TYPE is WEEK Blank When MONTH is 1 3 5 7 8 10 or 1 to 31 LAST 12 Kall s_pay Starting da When TYPE s when MONTH is aaay DATE 1 to 30 LAST 4 6 90r 11 When MONTH is g 1 to 28 LAST When DST is DISABLE Blank a When DST is ENABLE 00 to 23 S_HOUR Starting time When DST is DISABLE Blank JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL When DST is ENABLE EJ amp _MontH Ending month AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC When DST is DISABLE Blank oe Setting by week WEEK Specification KJ tyre Setting by date DATE method When DST is DISABLE Blank When TYPE is WEEK 1 to 4 LAST E_WEEKNUM Ending week When TYPE is DATE ia an When DST is DISABLE E_DAYOFWEEK Ending day of When TYPE is WEEK When TYPE is DATE SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT week Blank
279. ays the current number of number of buffering data buffered Peon SITIS buffering data buffered jobs S jobs O 4 The space is displayed as blank during data acquisition or in the case of failure of data acquisition a Point When the number of buffering data is large check the number of jobs and the as o trigger condition setting Zin Lez gae Da O 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card Format the CompactFlash card installed in the MES interface module r CompactFlash card operation INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Execute Figure 7 113 CompactFlash card operation Check the Format box and click the Execute button FUNCTIONS Executing the formatting deletes all of the CompactFlash card data EJ Point When the CompactFlash card is formatted after the system operation the MES interface function settings are cleared Read out the MES interface function settings to MES Interface Function Configuration Tool before formatting the card C Section 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings j le 2 e G Ww coe ESO 260 36 ZPO z e S O Z re DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 13 Online Remote operation T 143 7 13 7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M ELSE Q series 7 14 Help The product information of the MES Inter
280. bel Label Description TAG1 to TAG64 Set Device tag settings items No 1 to 64 App 24 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 8 TAG CSV Enter only the labels desired to be set Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 25 Setting item MELSEC Aeres Item Description Setting value TAGNAME Device tag name 1 2 3 Up to 16 characters f Do not sample NOT SAMPLING Sampling Normal sampling EXECUTE specification High speed sampling 4 HIGHSPEED When NOT is selected with SAMPLING Blank When EXECUTE is selected with a 1 to 32767 Unit Second INTERVAL Sampling interval SAMPLING When HIGHSPEED is selected with SAMPLING 1 to 600 Unit x 100 ms BEFORE LOGGING Fixed value NO Prohibit data Disable DISABLE WRITE J writing Enable ENABLE Enhance sampling When enabled YES E BLockReEaD efficiency When disabled NO COMPNUM No of components 0 to 256 Use ENABLE ARRAY Use array Not use DISABLE When ENABLE is selected for ARRAY 2 to 40000 EJ arraysize Length of array When DISABLE is selected for ARRAY Blank Series CONT Array EJ arraytyPe Block BLOCK arrangement When DISABLE is selected for ARRAY Blank i When enabled ENABLE Block size BLOCKSPECIFY Pee When disabled DISABLE specification When DISABLE is s
281. btained from the SNTP server is stored When Daylight saving setting is enabled time corrected to daylight saving time is stored during the period of summer time SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Table 3 19 SNTP time query result Address ae T A 4 Name Description Setting side Decimal 11501 SNTP time query result Year The four digit year data is stored SNTP time query result 11502 The month data 01 to 12 is stored Month 11503 SNTP time query result Day The day data 01 to 31 is stored 11504 SNTP time query result Hour The hour data 00 to 23 is stored SNTP time query result INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 11505 j The minute data 00 to 59 is stored Set on system Minute side SNTP time query result 11506 The second data 00 to 59 is stored Second The day of the week data is stored 11507 SNTP time query result Day of 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 2 the week 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 5 6 Saturday fre 3 Monitoring interval timeout count Buffer memory address 11510 a The cumulative number of times that a monitoring interval timeout has occurred is m EZ O stored Z The monitoring interval timeout occurs when trigger detection has not been completed ES Sok within the monitoring interval B36 LO If this timeout occurs perform the following e Increase the monitoring interval Increase the sampling interval of the tag that is used for trigger con
282. c Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions aio 56 Communication action Action type a z Database NewServer x Table name Browse table name DB tag link settings Field name Tag Type Component a Combine Field name Condition Tag Type Component 2 3 9 z O D gf W ao Delete row A field name E t 4 elete w Insert a whole tag E on D F Generated SQL text INSERT INTO ALUES E No of fields in project 0 allt Tag component data lenath in job Owords total Cancel Figure 7 67 Communication action dialog box INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 66 Setting items in the Communication action dialog box Item Description Action type Select an action type Database Select a database to be accessed s No of fields in project Displays the total number of fields in the project 2 Tag component data length s b P 5 Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job r in jo 7 The setting items other than above differ depending on the selected action type For a details refer to the following table 2 D OQ O Table 7 67 Selection items for Action type lt Eez ae Reference Zee Item Description 7 nez section HSE Poe Select Update H Create SQL text specifying table name and field i Insert Section 7 11 2 name MultiSelect z Delete 23 Create stored procedure execution request z m Stored procedure ie Section 7 11 3 622 specifying the
283. capacity Set the file capacity per access log and number of files 1 Output destination Default dbConnector log Set the output destination of the log file If no output destination is set the log is output to the install folder If a read only file is specified the log is not output and Access log output error is output to Administrative Tools Event Viewer of Windows Access log capacity Range 1 to 10 MB x 2 to 100 files Default 1 MB x 10 files Set the file capacity per access log and number of files If the log exceeds the capacity for one file a new log file which copies the original log file name with adding a number is created If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files the file is deleted from the oldest one X 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Aeres Example When Output destination is set to dbConnector log and Access capacity is set to 1MB x 3 files aai L Capacity over lt g 2 ES 3 a Ne Ki N dbConnector log dbConnector log Q N fy Mho N 2 dbConnector log 001 N dbConnector log 001 gt Files within the specified z 3 Ro number of files Ei Me cas 3 dbConnector log 002 NK x dbConnector log 002 o NS 2 fe x Figure 8 10 File capacity per access log and number of files a N D When dbConnector log exceeds 1M byte it is rena
284. cautions for using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool W gt 1 When deleting an item gt Deleting an item such as Access target CPU settings or Device tag settings is not allowed when the selected item is used for another item such as Job settings As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another item 6 and then delete the item lt 5 ae MX MESInterface A The access target CPU setting NewCPU that you are trying to delete is used in the following setting It cannot be deleted annie aw eea o Figure 7 115 Error dialog box g 2 Changing PLC series in Access target CPU settings The CPU type set for PLC series of Access target CPU settings cannot be changed if the change may generate illegal character strings of the devices for the tag 9 components for which Access target CPU settings is selected goo 3 Changing the Prohibit data writing setting in Device tag settings oa O The enabled data write setting cannot be changed to Prohibit if the tag is used for the setting items provided for tag writing e Completion notification of Handshake operation substitution tags of Select in Zz Communication action etc k 32 f 2 4 One shot execution 2z When performing the one shot execution set the same settings for the system settings being used on the MES interface module and the system settings of the project currently opened with the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
285. ccepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista Access Excel SQL server and Visual Studio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark or registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Oracle and Java are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates CompactFlash is a trademark or registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual
286. ce tag name use a different name Unable to change Server type Is the Server service name same as the existing one e Correct the Server service name A desired device tag name is not displayed in Access error notification setting Is the tag set to data write disabled 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Set the tag to data write enabled gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting 10 39 0 Z Q O o w al a 9 ad APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series 6 Job settings e Section 7 10 Job Setting e Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions Table 10 15 Job settings Symptom Checked item Corrective action e Do not use Select actions in the job where DB buffering is enabled e The DB buffering is not available for jobs performing Select actions Unable to set DB buffering settings Is there any Select action set for the job e Delete any unnecessary variable settings 5 Are there 64 variables that were already Unable to set a new variable of the job defined in the job e Up to 64 variables can be set for one job e Select any other than Handshake Unable to select Trigger 2 in Trigger Is Handshake operation selected for operation for Trigger 1 conditions Trigger 1 e When Handshake operation is selected selection
287. ce tags oao O 08_5erver No of server services 5 COGS APP Server A Ni E Job settings CO ErrorwatchJob o of jobs INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Import FUNCTIONS Cancel 7 Figure 7 14 Import from project file dialog box l Q 2 Table 7 9 Setting items in the Import from project file dialog box a toe Item Description te g fe Selection tree In the tree select the item to be imported Zz 5 2 Existing registration Displays the number of settings for each setting type in the project into i 5 6 information which data are imported Import information Displays the number of the settings to be imported for each setting type Pod B22 252 gt E An ann 7 4 Project File Handling T 11 7 4 4 Importing a project MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 1 Selecting an item to be imported In the tree select the item to be imported Table 7 10 Item to be imported Checked item Item to be imported Project root All items in the project Setting type All items under the setting type whose checkbox is checked Item Each item whose checkbox is checked When the setting type shown below is selected items under any other setting type are automatically selected if they are used for the selected one Note that if an item of the same name exists in the target project the item is not automatically selected The user must
288. cessing Time 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A ries 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges This section explains the accessible devices and ranges For inaccessible CPU modules refer to the following L gt Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly OVERVIEW 1 Accessible CPU modules Table 3 3 Accessible CPU modules PLC series gt Model Basic model QCPU QOOJCPU QO0CPU Q01CPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU 2 Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU QO6UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU RCPU 2 RO4CPU RO8CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU LO2CPU L26CPU BT LO2CPU P 3 L26CPU PBT LO2SCPU LO2SCPU P LO6CPU LO6CPU P 4 L26CPU L26CPU P 4 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ZASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU QCPU A mode Q02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A A1NCPU AQJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJHCPU A2CCPU A2CJCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2SCPU A2ZSHCPU A2ZACPU A2ZACPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 AZUSHCPU S1 A3NCPU A3ACPU A3UCPU A4UCPU C Controller module 2 Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V Q24DHCCPU LS CONFIGU
289. computer the ODBC setting for the database used must be done beforehand Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 2 When installing DB Connection Service on an application server computer an account for user program execution must be created beforehand 2 When installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool on a configuration computer MX MESInterface Configuration computer amp Installation 4 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Commercialized product Figure 2 3 Installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2 a2 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 2 System configuration for installation 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 1 3 System configuration for initial setup This section shows system configurations for initial setup of the MES interface module using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool OVERVIEW MES interface module Twisted pair cable Crossing cable N Ethernet Configuration computer z O lt 5 9 Le zZ Q S or MES interface module Twisted pair cable Straight cable Ethernet SPECIFICATIONS Configuration computer Figure 2 4 System configurations for initial setup of the MES interface module The following explains the network settings of the configuration computer when connecting it to the MES interface module on a 1 1 basis SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Set the sam
290. cords data Per Up to 40000 records MultiSelect communication action selectable for i hate 5 Up to 45000 words job communication action No of operations possible for operation Maximum 20 dyadic operations operation action action Section 7 11 4 Operators for operation Addition subtraction multiplication division remainder character action string combination Maximum 2 programs job Program Allowable number of f ee One program before execution of initial action one program after Section 7 10 3 execution settings execution of final action 3 1 Performance Specifications To the next page DB interface 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eL a6 Q series From the previous page Table 3 2 MX MESInterface performance specifications Item Device tag No of access target CPU settings Specifications 64 settings project Reference section Section 7 7 No of tags 64 tags project No of components 256 components 2 tag 4096 components project Data type Signed single precision integer type 16 bits signed double precision integer type 32 bits single precision floating point type 32 bits bit type character string type 1 to 32 characters 16 bit BCD type 32 bit BCD type Section 7 8 3 Statistical processing Average maximum minimum moving average moving 3 3 maximum moving minimum DB buffering Buffering capacity duri
291. ct Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 6 Select Update Delete conditions When Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action type set conditions for the records to be selected updated multi selected or deleted g When a field value of a record matches a condition value the record is selected 6 updated or deleted Up to 8 rows can be set for one communication action in Select Update Delete conditions z 2 Point ze 1 Exception processing is executed when 2S e Records to be selected updated multi selected deleted do not exist gt 9 a Exception processing No applicable record in this section e Multiple records exist for select update delete M 37 9 b Exception processing Multiple applicable records in this 6 section 5 e The number of records to be multi selected is greater than the number of a arrays set in Array setting of the tag 2 cF 9 c Exception processing Applicable records overflow in this section 2 Be careful not to create significant number of selected updated records due to 0 the select update delete conditions Zi z Failure to do so may affect performances of the data base or the system DE 3 When Update or Delete is selected for Action type and multiple records ug are found to be updated or deleted all of them will be updated or deleted If the Select Update Delete conditions area is blank all records of the
292. ct setting INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Table 7 20 Setting items in Project setting Item Description Project name Enter a project name Up to 32 characters Enter comments about the project as necessary Up to 2048 characters Comment FUNCTIONS 1 Project name Up to 32 characters Enter a project name For characters that can be used for project names refer to the following C Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product The set project name is displayed at the project root j le 2 ms G WL raed ESO 260 6 ZPO z e O Z Te 2 Comment Up to 2048 characters Enter comments about the project as necessary For characters that can be used for comments refer to the following z EQO C Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names B2e variable names etc in the product 322 7 5 Project Setting T 17 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 6 System Setting Configure the initial settings for the MES interface module 1 Click System setting in the Edit items tree The system setting area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen Make the setting referring to the following descriptions New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help DSWE ideme E NewProject
293. ctions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List Was the job execution time prolonged If the job execution time is prolonged startup of the next job may be delayed 37 Section 6 1 11 1 Operation behavior of jobs Was the value in the Monitoring interval timeout count area buffer memory address 11510 increased Check and correct the number of job settings or trigger condition settings Job execution is slow Is the processing load of the server computer is appropriate Check if the processing load of a personal computer for server is excessively high Is data volume in the data base within the specified capacity of the personal computer Check if the number of selected updated records are extreme when selecting or updating Review data volume in the data base Set the Select Update Delete conditions that apply appropriate records only Selecting Resend from DB buffering operation of Remote operation will not resend buffered SQL texts of the job for which manual resend is selected K gt Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering Is there any problem on the connection routes to all of the database server computers Check the connections with all of the database server computers e When buffered SQL texts are to be sent to more than one destination unless the communication with all the database server computers is recovered resending is not started Are the DB Connection Se
294. ctions In the case of Select Update or Insert 1 action for 16 64 256 fields 4 actions for 1024 fields 16 actions for 4096 fields In the case of MultiSelect 1 action Select Update condition None Sort condition None Program execution None Measuring method Measurement interval From ON of Handshake startup to OFF of Completion notification No of measurements Average of 20 measurement results Appendix 4 Processing Time App 57 Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later and 13091 or earlier XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series 2 Measurement results a When Enhance sampling efficiency is checked The following table lists the results in the case where the Enhance sampling efficiency box is checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 70 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is checked No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 Select 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 9s 7 58 Update p 0 2s 0 2s 0 5s 1 38 47s Insert b When Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked The following table lists the results in the case where the Enhance sampling efficiency box is not checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 71 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked No of fields 16 64 256
295. d e Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated e Check if the value to be stored exceeds the number of characters defined for the field Database values will not be stored in programmable controller devices Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module e If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions lt 3 Section 10 2 Error Code List When trigger conditions of a job with Startup logging setting are met is the startup logged in Event log of Working log lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module e If no startup data is logged refer to the following Job will not start up In Change job status of Remote operation is Disable writing to PLC device set e Enable writing to programmable controller devices Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status Has an error occurred in the access log of DB Connection Service Is No of selected records indicated as 0 in the access log of DB Connection Service Was the relevant device value manipulated in the programmable controller CPU e If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions lt 3 Section 10 2 Error Code List e Check if Select Update Delete conditions are met e Do not manipulate the device va
296. d Even if the value changes however the clear processing is not interrupted 2 To make another DB buffer clear request after completion of clear processing wait for a sampling interval of the specified tag component or more and then turn it ON or write 1 7 6 System Setting T 29 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j Q rs fd Lu Z o W l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 ZO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 5 DB buffering full a Select a tag component into whose device the status of whether the DB buffer Automatically resend buffer or Manually resend buffer is full or not is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type Table 7 31 Values stored in DB buffer full Data type of tag Description component i OFF DB buffer is not full pi DB buffer is full 0 DB buffer is not full 1 DB buffer is full Other than the above c When the DB buffer becomes full even if a DB buffering enabled job is activated its SQL texts are discarded without being buffered Note that execution of
297. d Network only INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 2 Using more than one networks from the following e CC Link IE Controller Network e MELSECNET 10 e MELSECNET H e Ethernet e CC Link IE Field Network Access from a MELSECNET H network to a CPU module on another station over CC Link IE Field Network FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 266 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting T 35 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL c Other station Different network MELSEC A series To access a CPU module on another station over two types of networks 1 and 2 listed in Table 7 34 specify a different network Table 7 36 Network types No Network name C24 1 CC Link CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET 10 2 MELSECNET H Ethernet CC Link IE Field Network Access from a MELSECNET H network to a CPU module on another station over CC Link 2 gt 1 e Access from a C24 network to a CPU module on another station over CC Link IE Controller Network 1 gt 2 5 Network communication route Co existence network communication route Set the network type network No head I O address and station No used for access The setting items vary depending on the specified network type Point To access a CPU on a
298. d 32 bit BCD notation 0 to 99999999 Example 12345678 Sa 2 Up to 32 characters E 3 For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the oap Character string following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 3 Continue this job Finish this job e When Continue this job is selected After executions of exception processing described in the above 1 and 2 the system continues executions of other actions e When Finish this job is selected After execution of exception processing described in 1 and 2 the job is forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions At this time update insert delete values before execution of the exception processing are committed and they are written to relevant tag components INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j Point 1 When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing an error occurred during job execution job cancellation is not notified lt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation 2 If Enable DB buffering is selected for a job its exception process setting is disabled lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering le 2 ms G WL raed ESO 260 36 ZPO z e O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 111 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect
299. d choose a tag in a list box next to the Insert a whole tag button Clicking the Insert a whole tag button inserts all of the tag components into contiguous rows starting from the selected one e The existing data set in the rows starting from the selected one are moved down 1 Entry of Component When data are entered in Component by Insert a whole tag or with the Field name space blank the data are copied to the Field name space Characters not allowed for Field name are not entered Because of this setting the same name to each of the field name and tag component name is useful eeeeeoeeeveeeeeaeseeeeeoeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeee eee 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 93 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j w z iL ae im Z o w l Q ie z O 62 e ions 56 rO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 1 Action type Select an action type Table 7 73 Selection items for Action type Item Description gt Substitutes a field value of the record whose conditions are met for selee a substitute value tag component value variable 4 Substitutes a s
300. d for field names refer to the following lt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored lt 3 procedure names etc pE For browsing the field names in the database refer to the following ie lt gt 8 Browse field name in this section 2 Tag Select a tag constant or variable which is substituted z Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable 3 3 Component g Select or directly enter a component constant value valuable that is to be 2 substituted AAE ae oon ENS eo Beso SEE lt z ono Se Lae eee 20E i e E s oe T name cenation Testvee Component _ fe ui severe el pae Ser a DES lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt tjt Delete row Browse field name lt lt lt lt select sor a lt lt Field name lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION tial Delete row ECA fete ro efie _ Insert a whole tag Exception process setting Multi select settin Generated SQL text UPDATE CompletionReport SET Completed Process Completed Rejected Process Rejected Servertime CURRENT_TIMESTAMP WHERE WorkNo Process1 WorkNo No of fields in project 8 Tag component data length in job 7 words total Cancel Figure 7 72 Setting example of Update FUNCTIONS Database DB1 Table name CompletionReport
301. data jobs that have been number of buffered data jobs that buffered have been buffered Displays a past maximum value in the ead 43 Displays the current buffer utilization Buffer utilization p ay buffer utilization FUNCTIONS The buffer utilization is stored as an integer Digits after decimal point is truncated Utilization rates of the Automatically resend buffer and Manually resend buffer are compared and the greater buffer utilization rate is displayed 2 The maximum values are cleared when the MES interface module power is turned OFF When power is reapplied No of bufferings and Buffer utilization at the time are displayed as maximum values 3 The space is displayed as blank during data acquisition or in the case of failure of data acquisition j w z iL pa m lt o w al Q e z O E3 e oL 56 rO Point When the buffer utilization is high ensure the capacity of the CompactFlash card Section 7 6 4 7 DB buffering capacity Range 16MB to 512MB Default Z 64MB 529 Zuo ann 7 13 Online Remote operation T7 141 7 13 5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering eLS a6 Q series Operate the DB buffering For the DB buffering function refer to the following L Section 6 1 10 DB buffering function DB buffering operation Resend Clear
302. db a SRE 5 The ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box is Data Source Name pee displayed Set the following and click the ee Database selection button a Soma aoa real Data source name SAMPLEDS a 256 r System Database vieis Nene Foe C Database 7 g a The Select Database dialog box is displayed eee Select the following and click the OK_ button c mes a e Folder C mes e Database Name sampledb mdb Select Database INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION I Read Only I Exclusive List Files of Type Access Databases m z Network Click the OK _ button in the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box FUNCTIONS Click the OK button in the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box End MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe z O O mf A Z Q S m Q ari as 22 Lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 12 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 13 MELSEC TA series 8 3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool D Select Start All Programs MELSOFT Application MESInterface DB connection service setting tool of Microsoft Windows 1 For Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 select All App DB connection service setting tool from the Start screen 2 When using the operating system with the User Account Control function a warni
303. dialog box is displayed r Make the setting referring to the following Zu para lt gt Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action Sas e Section 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action P nao Deleting an action e Select an action to be deleted in Action list and click the Delete button Copying an action e Select an action to be copied in Action list choose Replicate the selected action from the combo box next to the Add button and click the Add button INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j 6 fe 2 fri W z E ESO 266 836 Pime z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 81 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series Copying an action of another job within the project 1 Select Replicate actions of other jobs in the combo box next to the Add button and click the button 2 The Replicate Actions of other Jobs dialog box is displayed Replicate Actions of other Jobs Source Jobs Source Actions Selected Actions to replicate Summary Job name Type Summary DB CompletionReport Complet CompletionReport Update DB CompletionReport Complet No of fields in project 8 Tag component data length in job 3 words total Figure 7 65 Replicate Actions of other Jobs dialog box By repeat
304. ditions e Reduce the trigger detection time ee a Reduce the number of configured jobs g4 F ZO O SE Aa ann 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 37 3 6 10 Information linkage function area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 38 MELSEC A series 4 No of trigger buffer data Buffer memory address 11511 6 The number of times the current trigger buffer has been used is stored If the number of times the trigger buffer has been used is always large check the number of jobs for which Trigger buffering is enabled and the trigger condition setting gt Section 7 10 Job Setting Trigger buffer overflow count Buffer memory address 11512 The cumulative number of trigger buffer overflows is stored If the trigger buffer overflows frequently check the number of jobs for which Trigger buffering is enabled and the trigger condition setting gt Section 7 10 Job Setting Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 11520 to 11583 The cumulative number of trigger buffer overflows for each job is stored 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 10 Information linkage function area 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION This chapter explains the settings and procedure to operate the MES interface module in a system Point 1 Before use make sure to read SAFETY PRECAUTIONS at the beginning of this manual 2 The mount
305. dress buffer memory address 71 to 72 subnet mask buffer memory address 73 to 74 default gateway buffer memory address 75 to 76 refer to the following section C gt Section 3 6 2 Network connection status area This network settings status of the MES interface module is stored For network settings refer to the following L gt Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 27 3 6 3 Network settings status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 28 MELSEC Le series 3 6 4 Current error area 1 Error code Buffer memory address 140 An error code which indicates the error contents is stored For error codes refer to the following lt Section 10 2 Error Code List 2 Time Buffer memory address 142 to 145 The time when the error occurred is stored in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bO Buffer memory address 142 Month 01H to 12h Year 00x to 99x The last two digits of the year 143 Hour 00x to 23x Day 01H to 31H 144 Second 00H to 59x Minute 00x to 59x 445 Year 00H to 99x The first two digits of the year Day of the week 0h to 6x Figure 3 8 Error time area E Point 1 The information of the Current error area can be confirmed on the following di
306. dule This section shows the troubleshooting of problems that may arise during operation of the MES interface module 1 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I O signals Table 10 18 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I O signals Symptom The RUN LED does not turn on Checked item Is the module in preparation Corrective action e Wait for startup of the module Is the Watchdog timer error X1F ON e If a watchdog timer error is identified please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The ERR LED is on or flashing Is the battery connected Or has the battery voltage dropped e Check the battery connection e Replace the battery Is any of the error detection signals X11 X12 X16 and X1C ON X11 Sampling error X12 Information linkage error X16 Access target CPU error X1C Another error Check the error code in System monitor of GX Developer e According to the error code obtained by the error detection shown on the left identify the error cause and take corrective actions By the error code identify the error and take corrective actions Module READY X0 does not turn ON or it takes time to turn ON Is the module in preparation Depending on the number of items set in Access target CPU settings it may take several minutes until XO turns ON Are there many files in the installed CompactFlash card e If many files are stored in the Compac
307. dule Name QJ71MES96 Product information 091020000000000 B 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot m Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Fuse Status sare Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Remote password setting status r Error Display mamal ea aa AS HEX DEC Error History The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Enor contents Disposal Contents Disposal HAW Infomation Start monitor f Sto Figure 10 2 Module s Detailed Information dialog box 1 0 4 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 3 System monitor 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Item Description b Display items The following shows the detailed information of the MES interface module Module name MELSEC Aeres Table 10 1 Displayed items Displays the name of the mounted module I O Address mA J XML MESSAGE an FORMAT Displays the head I O signal number of the module Module Implementation Position Displays the slot position where the module is installed Product information Displays the product information 1 VE Module access Displays that it is accessible when the Watchdog timer error X1F is OFF E Status of I O Address Displays whether or not the module set with parameters by the user matches the Verify
308. e OBA8h SELECT execution error Failed to execute SELECT OBAQ9h COMMIT execution error Failed to execute COMMIT OBAAh ROLLBACK execution error Failed to execute ROLLBACK e Check the sent SQL text and database contents e Check if the table and field settings are correct e Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for table names and field names OBABh 10 18 DB update error 10 2 Error Code List Failed to update the DB 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module e Check the sent SQL text and database contents e Check if the table and field settings are correct e Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for table names and field names lt When the database is Microsoft Access gt e Check if 128 or more fields are set for update actions e Check if multiple accesses have been made to one file at the same time accesses from multiple MES interface modules To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code OBACh MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name SQL execution error Description SQL execution caused an error Action e Check the sent SQL text and database contents e Check if the table and field settings are correct e Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for table names and field names Check if th
309. e The following is a program example in which a job is executed when an execution request X100 from the outside turns ON When system switching occurs during Handshake operation the processing to retry is incorporated X100 P Sets In process flag at i LSET Mo JI processing request MO M200 MI z Resets In process flag V at LRST Mo Jat normal completion SM1518 P j SET M1 Processing at system switching RST M100 J MO M200 7 AF RST M200 For XML processing X5 MO M1 M100 M200 Te Gade Var ae an AF E F i Send data generation RST M201 J Job restart processing SET M100 J M100 M200 TS a re nt 1_Receive data processing 1 Processing for normal job execution RST M100 M201 poanien on TENT 1 en dl as eee Processing for failed RST MO job execution RST M100 J MO M K300 T100 Retry timer 30 seconds T100 M200 E FF RST M201 SET M100 Job restart processing RST M1 z Resets Completion AST M200 J hotification 2 END Figure 7 59 Program example when Redundant CPU is used The same job cannot be restarted during the job operation After switching systems the job waits time set by Retry timer 30 seconds in program example 2 Completion notification M200 may not be turned OFF at system switching The job restart processing is performed at the next scan 3 Precautions Executing t
310. e 7 82 Select sort settings z a Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for records to be selected For characters that can be used for field names and table names refer to the aE following lt z C gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored DE procedure names etc ues For browsing the field names in the database refer to the following lt 3 8 Browse field name in this section b Order Set the order of sorting the selected records Table 7 75 Setting items for Order Item Description Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in ascending order INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Ascending order Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in descending Descending order 9 order FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 SLo z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 105 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 106 Data base before sorting ORDER_NO PRODUCT_CODE DELIVERY_DATE 200 2007 01 31 201 2007 01 10 202 2007 01 29 203 2007 01 31 204 2007 01 10 205 2007 01 29 206 2007 01 10 207 2007 01 29 208 2007 01 31 Sorting conditions in Select sort settings Select sort settings ield Order 1
311. e Client user session executes programs DB Connection Service Client is automatically started at the time of user login 3 IP filter function gt Section 8 5 3 Limit IP addresses permit to connect The IP filter function can specify the IP address of the MES interface module or the configuration computer that can connect to the DB Connection Service to ensure the security of the server computer Batch specification using the mask bit length specification is possible If the IP filter function is not used any MES interface module or configuration computer can connect to the DB Connection Service 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Aeres 4 Log output function DB Connection Service outputs an access log and an SQL failure log a Access log gt Section 8 5 4 Output access log The communication contents between the MES interface module and or the configuration computer and DB Connection Service are output to the access log For access log specifications refer to the following gt Section 8 8 1 Access log SQL failure log L gt Section 8 5 5 Output SQL failed log The error contents are output to the SQL failure log when the SQL text or stored procedure cannot be completed normally in the database due to the reason such as no table exist For SQL failure log specifications refer to the following gt Section 8 8 2 SQL failure log
312. e DB buffering capacity is used as the Automatically resend buffer and Z another half as the Manually resend buffer 7 Z no 3 gf lt fe 2 ga Er DLO INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO ala 36 brats z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 31 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Led series 8 Operation of recovery from network disconnection Set the operation when the trigger conditions are met in case the data exists in the resend buffer a Automatically resend buffer Select the buffering operation for when the communication is recovered from the communication disconnection in case the data are accumulated in the Automatically resend buffer of the DB buffer Default Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data Table 7 33 Setting items in Automatically resend buffer Item Description Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data After recovery the data is resent automatically After recovery the job whose trigger condition has been met is sent to the database before the data remaining in the resend buffer The new job data whose trigger condition created while the data resend is completed is met is sent immediately Therefore the new job data whose trigger condition is met may be sent t
313. e Data type Single word zj l bytes Add I Perform statistical processes to a aun _ cA O Component List wje p al T O Component name CPU name Device Data type Statistical type i 1 tl Z B 3 FY FY 15 16 tis o ar of tag components in project 0 No of statistical processes in project 0 No of device points in tag 0 Z fe z n0 t OF Figure 7 30 Device tag settings rau z bee nao Table 7 37 Setting items in Device tag settings Item Description Device tag name Enter a device tag name Up to 16 characters Set whether to collect tag data at regular intervals or not Sampling settings When collecting set a sampling interval Also set whether to make the sampling more efficient or not Prohibit data writing Enable or disable writing data to the tag INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Set whether to use arrays for the tag or not L 3 Section 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting Configure the tag component settings Array setting Component setting input eing L Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting Displays a list of the components that have been already set Component List ra L Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting FUNCTIONS Make setting when changing the block size manually Array block size j L gt Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting No of tag components in g 5 Displays the number of all the tag components
314. e Delete any unnecessary field settings lt gt Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action e Up to 8192 fields can be set within one project Failed in online operation Is the IP address set in Transfer setup of Online correct e Select Online Transfer setup and correct the setting e Perform the online operation for the MES interface module selected from Online Transfer setup Send a PING request from the configuration computer to the IP address of the MES interface module Is there a response e If no response is returned check if the module is powered up or if the network is properly connected Has the account set in Transfer setup of Online been registered to the MES interface module e Select Online Transfer setup and correct the setting e Specify the account that is registered in the MES interface module Is the firewall function of the operating system or security software enabled on the configuration computer e Check the firewall setting Section 5 1 Installation Unable to select One shot execution from Online Was the job for one shot execution selected Select the job for one shot execution and then select Online One shot execution from the menu Failed to perform One shot execution from Online Failed to format the CompactFlash card During one shot execution was the power of the programmable controller
315. e Get Table name Failed Wh ey 2012 06 27 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 0 Field Get TableName Success Example succeeded When failed 2012 06 27 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 0 Field Get TableName Failed Output log format Example c Stored procedure name browsing Table 8 28 Stored procedure name browsing results Item Description When F Date Error code SID Session ID Procedure Get Success succeeded When failed Date Error code SID Session ID Procedure Get Failed Wh a 2013 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000924 Procedure Get Success succeeded When failed 2013 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000924 Procedure Get Failed 8 Stored procedure argument information browsing Table 8 29 Stored procedure argument information browsing Item Description When F Output Date Error code SID Session ID ProcParam Get Stored procedure name Success ioc Perna succeeded 8 When failed Date Error code SID Session ID ProcParam Get Stored procedure name Failed When 2013 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000925 ProcParam Get ProcedureName Success Example succeeded When failed 2013 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000925 ProcParam Get ProcedureName Failed 00 29 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 8 1 Access log 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Kel ries a Connection Table 8 30 Connection from the MES interface module Item Description
316. e M32768 or later e Bit device B8000 or later The Q12DCCPU V was added to applicable systems Section 2 2 bit Wi i 64 bit Windows 7 has been added to the operating 7 Section 2 4 1 environment for configuration computer The connectable database server has been added i Section 2 4 2 e Microsoft Access 2010 1 08J or later The CC Link IE Field Network becomes available 13092 or later The LO2CPU P and L26CPU PBT have been added to Section 3 2 accessible programmable controller CPUs The function to browse table names field names of database used for the communication action setting is added The following devices were added as accessible devices e Extension data register D4216832 or later e Extension link register W405800 or later 09102 or later The following devices were added as accessible devices e Extension internal relay W65536 or later e Extension link relay B0000 or later e Extension file register ZR4184064 or later Connectable database servers were added e Microsoft SQL Server 2012 16 bit BCD and 32 bit BCD are added to the data type of tag component Following CPU modules were added to applicable systems as mountable modules e QO3UDV Q04UDV QO6UDV Q13UDV Q26UDVCPU e Q24DHCCPU V Q24DHCCPU LS The LO2SCPU LO2SCPU P LO6CPU LO6CPU P L26CPU and L26CPU P have been added to accessible programmable controller CPUs App 2 14122 or later 1 09K or later Secti
317. e MES interface module communication function and hardware 4 6 1 Self loopback test Execute the self loopback test for a hardware check including the communication function of the MES interface module 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface 1 MES interface module operation mode setting E In Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer set Mode setting to Self loopback test Switch 1 0002h Q Match the other intelligent function module switch settings to the setting contents used 2 Self loopback test execution a cable has been connected to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX interface disconnect it Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status Reset the programmable controller CPU 2 After the programmable controller CPU is reset the following self loopback test is executed automatically 1 Self loopback check This test checks whether data can be sent to received from in the MES interface module During the test the ERR LED flashes 3 Confirmation of the self loopback test result amp Check the ERR LED status to see the self loopback test result Table 4 7 Self loopback test result ERR LED status Self loopback test result OFF Completed ON Failed When the test is completed normally set the Mode setting to Online with Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer and reset the programmable controller CPU Switch 1 0000h
318. e access target network module the accessible CPU module is only the control CPU 6 Use QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU of the access target network module 7 Use an Ethernet module to access a programmable controller CPU over Ethernet With the built in Ethernet port of a programmable controller CPU a programmable controller CPU cannot be accessed Example of accessible Example of inaccessible module configuration module configuration 25 o Z O q o S M o 7 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MES MES interface Ethernet Programmable Ethernet interface Ethernet Programmable module module controller CPU module module module controller CPU v INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 4 EH Ethernet Ethernet TU lt Figure 3 6 Access to the programmable controller CPU over Ethernet 2 O 8 When the access target CPU is Q12DCCPU V the access is not possible Z5 Le 9 Use a MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 15102 or later 10 Use a MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 16072 or later 11 When the Network communication route is NET 10 H the access is not possible a 2 wW z HRE 25 a6 ZrO O 528 T 9 ZO OSE oo fi ba ann 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 9 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 Accessible devices 1 Device Device name Table 3 8 Accessible devices QCPU QCPU A mode Ce iele 3
319. e and take corrective actions gt Section 10 2 Error Code List Did the Trigger conditions change from false to true completely Correct the Trigger conditions lt gt Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions Start the job when the Trigger conditions change from false to true Did the Combination of Trigger conditions change from false to true completely Correct the Trigger conditions lt gt Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions Start the job when the Combination of Trigger conditions change from false to true When Value monitoring startup is set for Trigger conditions is the time for the monitoring target device value change long enough for the sampling interval of the device tag KLF Section 7 10 2 6 Value monitoring startup Increase the time for the monitoring target device value change Latch it in the sequence program Shorten the sampling interval of the device tag 3 Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting Are the device tags used for trigger conditions of jobs sampled normally If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions lt L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List In Change job status of Remote operation is the job set to be disabled Enable the job L gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status To enable the job at startup of the module select Job settings E
320. e array Length of array 4 series C block Component List iee fio gt Component_A n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 DO D1 D2 D3 Component name CPU name Device Data type Device n 1 Component_A ControlCPU D0 Single word D3 D100 D102 D104 D106 2 Component_B ControlCPU D100 D101 Double word D106 D107 Component B to D101 to D103 to D105 to D107 3 Component_C ControlCPU 2R1000 2R1003 String 8 ZR1012 ZR1015 3 2 c 2R1000_ ZR1004 ZR1008 ZR1012 z omponent_ to ZR1003 to ZR1007 to ZR1011 to ZR1015 Figure 7 33 When series is selected FUNCTIONS j Es Point If any duplicate device is identified in the same tag an error dialog box will appear Check the device settings le 2 ms G WL raed Se 260 B36 ZPO z e O Z 5 Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 43 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series b Block Devices of all tag components are arranged as a block The size of the block can be changed in array block size For array block size refer to the following lt gt Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting Usually the block size need not be changed because it is automatically adjusted to avoid device duplication Example When Length of array is set to 4 with block setting Only the start dev
321. e following countermeasures on the MES interface module side to eliminate the effect of high frequency noise when constructing the network system 1 Wiring e Do not install the twisted pair cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other e Make sure to place the twisted pair cable in a duct 2 Cable e In the environment where the cable is susceptible to noise use the shielded twisted pair cable STP cable 3 10 Mbps communication e Connect the 10 Mbps compatible equipment with the MES interface module and transmit the data to the equipment at a transmission speed of 10 Mbps 2 8 2 3 Connection System Equipment 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 4 Operating Environment 2 4 1 Configuration computer OVERVIEW This section explains the operating environment for the configuration computer N Table 2 3 Operating environment for configuration computer z Computer Windows supported personal computer es CPU g Required See Table 2 4 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems fe memory Hard disk available capacity 64 MB or more Disc drive CD ROM disc drive Display Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels or higher Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System SPECIFICATIONS Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating
322. e following table shows the details of the I O signals of the MES interface module 1 Input signals details Signal name Module READY Table 3 13 Input signals details Description Turns ON when the MES interface module becomes ready after the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset X1 CompactFlash card status 1 Turns ON when the CompactFlash card is installed and the file access status X2 is OFF 2 Turns OFF when the CompactFlash card is not installed or the file access status X2 is ON X2 File access status 1 Turns ON while file access is stopped a The following operations are available while file access is stopped Removing and installing a CompactFlash card L gt Section 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card Powering OFF the programmable controller during operation without battery Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery b While file access is stopped the following status occurs Reading from or writing to a CompactFlash card is disabled The MES interface function is suspended Operation from MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is disabled 2 Turns OFF during file access operation Powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU brings file access in operation File access stop request Y2 During stop In operation File acce
323. e is assigned to the specified tag component when the number of arrays set in Array setting is less than the number of records selected by Select Update Delete conditions When selecting this set a tag component to which a value is assigned e Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectable Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled Tags for which Array setting is set e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following table shows values available for substitution 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres Table 7 78 Values available for substitution Data type of tag ee Values available for substitution component Bit type ON OFF is selectable w Single precision type Up to 16 characters 2 Double precision type Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 Floating point type Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 16 bit BCD type Unsigned 16 bit BCD notation 0 to 9999 Example 1234 32 bit BCD type Unsigned 32 bit BCD notation 0 to 99999999 Example 12345678 2 Up to 32 characters z 2 Sih For characters that can be used for strings refer to the following E T g Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants cas etc 3 Continue thi
324. e log files is out of range To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 25 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service CA J XML MESSAGE FORMAT 0 Z Q O A w al a 9 ad E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 401 Error description and cause The computer ran out of memory when initializing the access log file 402 The computer ran out of resources when initializing the access log file MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Corrective action e Terminate any unnecessary applications Add more memory to the personal computer 403 The full path name of the access log file is too long e Shorten the path to the access log file with DB Connection Service Setting Tool 404 The access log file could not be opened If no directory exists for storing the access log file create it e When the attribution of the access log file is set to read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the access log file enable it in the security setting When the access log file name represents a directory rename or delete the directory e When the access log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault 405 406 The log could not be written to
325. e module and MX MESInterface The functions of the items are listed 2 and the subsequent descriptions aa MX MESInterface Products manufactured by other companies Windows User created application SNTP server application DB interface XML processing PERAL AA function function function Figure 3 7 Function summary 3 12 3 3 Function List 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 2 MES interface module function list Table 3 9 MES interface module function list R PEA Reference Function Description E section Section 6 1 DB interface function Executes access to the database in units of jobs Section 7 10 Section 7 11 Collects device data of the programmable controller CPUs on the network in units of tags By allocating database fields to tag components the DB interface function enables the Section 6 1 3 Tag function following Section 7 8 e Database value reading writing e Reading writing of programmable controller CPU device data specified with tag components Trigger monitoring Monitors values such as the time and tag values and when the trigger condition Section 6 1 4 Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high jobs are executed without missing any trigger function changes from false to true when the conditions are met starts a job Section 7 10 2
326. e monitoring startup and Specified time period startup are combined 7 68 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 At module startup The job is activated only once when the MES interface module is started up 8 Handshake operation 6 a The job is activated when Handshake startup of the programmable controller CPU turns ON Upon completion of the job execution Completion notification of the programmable controller CPU turns ON o Handshake operation is a startup method by which completion of job execution EE Q can be notified to a programmable controller CPU ao i l Sampling interval i a NEA A Controler Handshake operation started A H H H i H i A e C an 8 hired ON Handshake startup OFF m N e h ON Completion notification OFF Handshake operation completed 9 2 i ERT Zu Device data 3 2 Zug Fom oa O lt MES interface module gt Job operation Data Figure 7 54 Handshake operation INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION D When Handshake startup turns ON in the sequence program the MES interface module collects tag component values used for the job and executes the job Upon completion of the job execution the MES interface module turns ON Completion notification FUNCTIONS After confirming that Completion notification is ON turn OFF
327. e name field name procedure name is not displayed in the list when Browse table name Browse field name Browse procedure name on the Communication action dialog box is executed Table 10 16 Online Checked item Is the information on the database side updated while the Communication action dialog box is being opened MELSEC Le series From the previous page Corrective action e Reopen the Communication action dialog box and execute Browse table name Browse field name Browse procedure name again e Change Database on the Communication action dialog box and execute Browse table name Browse procedure name again e Change Database or Table name on the Communication action dialog box and execute Browse field name again Is an inapplicable character used for the table name field name or stored procedure name e Change the table name field name or stored procedure name to the name which does not include an inapplicable character Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc Does the number of characters used for the table name field name or stored procedure name exceed 32 e Change the table name field name or stored procedure name to the name whose number of characters does not exceed 32 Is there a stored procedure whose arguments are more than 256 e Change the arguments of the stored procedur
328. e network address as the one of the MES interface module in the network settings for the configuration computer Set the values to be identical Default value of Host i i Host T MES interface module Network section Section 1 Configuration computer Network section section IP ADDRESS 192 168 3 3 IP ADDRESS _192 168 3 1 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 o Subnet mask 255 255 255 o Figure 2 5 Network settings for configuration computer Set different values INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 2 Make the network settings of the configuration computer in the Internet Protocol n z 7 Zz TCP IP Properties dialog box S O n r r z Example Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System 2 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties a General 2 a You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports D 5 this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for lt 1 E the appropriate IP settings hd a Eos zee Obtain an IP address automatically Q 5 Use the following IP address g 2 IP address 192 168 3 0 Subnet mask 25 255 255 0 Default gateway 5 3 Figure 2 6 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Simos EQO ZE BuO CHOOSCSCCESHCHOHSOHSOHSEHEHHOOSHEHSOHSHOHLEOSEOSESHEHOHSEOHOHSCOSEHOEEOLEOSESEE s oO Pag ann 2 1 System Configuration 2 3 2 1 3 Sys
329. e of Select Update or Insert Programmable controller Q25HCPU control CPU on own station Access target CPU In the case of MultiSelect CPU QO6UDHCPU contro CPU on own station Network No other station specified Own station Sequence scan time ims For trigger conditions 1 tag In the case of Select Update or Insert For communication data 1 tag for 16 64 256 fields No of tags 4 tags for 1024 fields 16 tags for 4096 fields Device tag In the case of MultiSelect settings For receive data 1 tag Use array For trigger conditions Sampling setting High speed sampling 1 x 100ms For communication data Do not sample For trigger conditions Bit transmit receive For data Single precision Data type To the next page Appendix 4 Processing Time App 53 Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 13092 or later APPENDICES Device tag settings MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table App 65 Measurement conditions Item Description No of components For trigger conditions No of jobs x 2 For communication data Same as the number of fields In the case of MultiSelect 16 data 4 components 64 data 8 components 256 data 16 components 1024 data 32 components 4096 data 64 components 16384 data 128 components 40000 data 200 components Length of array In the case of MultiSelect 16 data 4 64 data 8 256 data 16 1024 data 32 409
330. e radio button then click the Install button computer as DB connection service and etting tool a E Do iem If the left message appears click the Cancel m r R button and after uninstalling MX MESInterface z There is a possibility for improper installation if you execute without uninstalling it install this product E a Lu ft N If the left message appears install this product on a computer to which the operating system compatible with the product is installed 3 7 QF C7 Section 2 4 Operating Environment aie ER If the left message appears execute eS Severe Xx EnvMEL SETUP EXE in the CD ROM for this OI ey ak a ree res oe After executing SETUP EXE install this product If the product is not installed correctly at the time restart the computer ol ja 23 k Eg Sz PE Be When using Windows Vista This program might not have installed correctly After completion of the Environment of If thi didn t i Il r i lli i i hi r gt a Vince eer MELSOFT installation the Program Program Setup Launcher Compatibility Assistant shown on the left may Publisher InstallShield Software Corporation w Location E EnvMEL SETUP EXE a p pe ar 5 H H H Reinstal stig r comimiended settings Click This program installed correctly and close 3 gt Thi installed correct l e ihe Do not select Reinstall using recommended settings because the installer installs
331. e screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module When connecting a connector properly press crimp or solder it using the tools specified by the manufacturer Incomplete connection may cause short circuit fire and malfunctions Push the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash card slot and install it securely After installing the CompactFlash card check that it is inserted securely Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to poor contact Wiring Precautions CAUTION Always store the communication cables and power cables connected to the module in the duct or fix them in place with clamps Not doing so may cause swing move or poor connection of the cable or damage of a module and or cable due to careless pull resulting in malfunctions Install connectors securely to modules Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When disconnecting communication cables connected to the module never pull on the cable section Wh
332. e setting Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Is the firewall function of the operating system or security software enabled on the server computer e Check the firewall setting Section 5 1 Installation Is the port specified in Service port of DB Connection Service Setting Tool being used for the database or any other application Change the port number to another that is not being used for the database or any other application L gt Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting Has any Check Point software been installed in the server computer e Uninstall the Check Point software Is the ODBC setting of the database correct 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom Correct the ODBC setting of the database To the next page 10 47 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module mA XML MESSAGE FORMAT 0 Z Q O o w al a 9 ad APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom In the tag component where statistical processing is set the average maximum or minimum value to be calculated is reset Checked item Is there any setting that enables data writing to the tag component where statistical processing is set Corrective action e Disable the write setting e Writing data to the
333. e the formatting function of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool lt gt Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card 2 A CompactFlash card has a service life restriction on the number of writes For details refer to the specifications of each product INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 3 Connection System Equipment 2 7 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 Twisted pair cable sold separately Use twisted pair cable that meets IEEE 802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards a For 100 Mbps Either 1 or 2 of the following can be used 1 Unshielded twisted pair UTP cable Straight cable Category 5 or higher Crossing cable Category 5 or 5e 2 Shielded twisted pair STP cable Straight cable Category 5 or higher Crossing cable Category 5 or 5e b For 10 Mbps Either 1 or 2 of the following can be used 1 Unshielded twisted pair UTP cable Straight cable Category 3 or higher Crossing cable Category 3 to 5e 2 Shielded twisted pair STP cable Straight cable Category 3 or higher Crossing cable Category 3 or 5e EJ Point During high speed communication 100 Mbps via 100BASE TX connection communication errors may occur due to the effect of high frequency noise generated from the equipment other than programmable controller depending on the installation environment Take th
334. e to 256 or less Are a large number of tables fields or stored procedures registered to the database 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Set the DB access time much longer L gt Section 8 5 2 To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom The table name field name procedure name cannot be browsed properly when Browse table name Browse field name Browse procedure name on the Communication action dialog box is executed Table 10 16 Online Checked item Is there a response from the IP address of the server computer when a PING is sent from the configuration computer MELSEC Kel series From the previous page Corrective action e If there is no response check if the power of the server computer is ON or the network connection status is correct Is a personal computer restarted after installing relational database e Restart the personal computer Is the port No set in Service port of DB Connection Service Setting Tool the same as the port No set in Port No of Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Set the same value Is the firewall function of the operating system or security software enabled on the configuration computer or server computer e Check the firewall setting Section 5 1 Installation Is the port specified in Service port of DB
335. e to a link stop station 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module e Restore the link to connect the station on the access route To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code OOF 1h MELSEC Kel ries From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Special module bus error Description The specified intelligent or special function module is not ready for processing OOF2h Special module timeout No response has been received from the specified intelligent or special function module Action Examine the hardware of the intelligent or special function module 0100h to 0104h 0110h 0112h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0180h Switch setting error A switch setting error was detected in the hardware test e Check the intelligent function module switch setting Conduct the hardware test again 0181h 0182h ROM check sum error RAM test error A ROM error was detected in the hardware test A RAM error was detected in the hardware test Conduct the hardware test again 0190h Timeout error 0191h Communication error 0192h Comparison error 0193h In frame position error An error occurred in the self loopback test e Hardware failure e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0200h to 0203h 0210h 0300
336. e uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated or not OBADh ODBC connection error during SQL execution An error occurred when opening the ODBC connection by SQL execution Check the sent SQL text and database contents Check if the table and field settings are correct Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for table names and field names OBAEh to OBB5Sh System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative OBB6h OBB7h OBB8h Execution error Program execution function Specified program file not exist Program execution function Failed to generate an event when executing the program Failed to generate a thread when executing the program There is no execution file of the program that is specified for the program execution function OBB9h OBBAh Specified program file duplicated Program execution function Wait for DB access program execution completion timed out There are more than one execution file of the program that is specified for the program execution function No response has returned from the program being executed Check if the program specified with the program execution function is executable with the specified account In DB Connection Service Setting Tool increase the DB access timeout value Terminate running programs before logoff For Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows
337. each operating CHAPTER 5 environment Operates on a configuration computer and configures various settings required for the MES Interf Function MES interface function eftace unctio inig uncti _ CHAPTER 7 Configuration Tool In addition to the configuration the application tool offers features such as the operation status check working log check or stop restart operation Operates on the server computer and links databases with the MES interface module DB Connection Service i CHAPTER 8 and the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool DB Connection Service Operates on the server computer and changes the settings of the DB Connection i p piret 9 ng l CHAPTER 8 Setting Tool Service 1 8 1 2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Kel eries CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the MES interface module OVERVIEW 2 1 System Configuration N 2 1 1 Overall system configuration This section shows the overall system configuration when using the MES interface module z O lt in o U zZ Q S Database Oracle SQL Server etc manufactured by other companies SNTP server computer 1 2 Server computer 3 SPECIFICATIONS Ethernet SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MES interface m
338. ecords when Select or MultiSelect is selected for Action type The number of records is displayed in Acquired record No as follows e When Execution result is Success Select Number of acquired records 0 or 1 MultiSelect Number of acquired records e When Execution result is Failed Nothing is displayed Displays the number of inserted records when Insert is selected for Action type The number of records is displayed in Insert records No as follows e When Execution result is Success Insert Number of inserted records Zero may be displayed due to the following 1 Database restrictions are violated 2 When the database is Wonderware Historian Disable writing to database is set up Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status When Execution result is Failed Nothing is displayed 7 8 DB tag link settings SQL text 7 12 Online 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module Displays data of DB tag link settings which were set in Communication action The SQL text executed in Communication action is displayed r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres b Communication action Stored procedure Action details Type Stored procedure Return Argument Substitute value Tag Type Component A 1 Return gt gt 0 gt gt Tac Result w Database NewServer 1 Input Integer lt lt 0 lt lt TAG Code
339. ect Correct the IP address setting lt 7 Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Is the user name and password setting correct e Correct the user name and password setting lt 7 Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting Is the IP address duplicated e Correct the IP address setting lt 7 Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Is there a firewall and or a proxy server in the connection route e Ask your network administrator about the firewall setting Section 5 1 Installation e Ask your network administrator about the proxy server setting Is the MES interface module connected to the network Network connection status X4 ON e Connect the MES interface module to the network Is it in Online mode Change the mode to Online Is there any problem on the personal computer e Replace it with another computer MES Interface Function Configuration Tool does not start Have five MES Interface Function Configuration Tools already started e Terminate any of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tools and then start another e Up to five MES Interface Function Configuration Tools can be started Is the memory or the system resources on the personal computer sufficient e Increase the necessary memory on the personal computer e Close other programs and restart MES Interface Function Configuration Tool The screen of MES
340. ect Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action type e Multiple corresponding records exist when Select Update or Delete is selected for Action type e The number of records to be multi selected is greater than the number of arrays set in Array setting of the tag when MultiSelect is selected for Action type Multi select setting button When MultiSelect is selected detailed settings can be configured by clicking this Generated SQL text Displays SQL text that is generated in the currently editing Communication action For the display format of tag components constants valuables refer to the following Section 7 11 1 4 a button Selecting a row and clicking the t button reverses the order between the selected row and the one immediately above it The tj button cannot be clicked on the first row l button Delete row button Browse field name button Selecting a row and clicking the l button reverses the order between the selected row and the one immediately below it The l button cannot be clicked on the last row Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row Browses the field names registered to the set database Insert a whole tag button e All of the tag set in Device tag settings are inserted into Tag and Component e Select a row into which data are inserted an
341. ect box connection is only 3 permitted from the MES interface module or the configuration computer with the set IP address At least one IP address setting is required for this and up to 64 IP addresses can be set When not checking the box connection is permitted from any MES interface lt 5 module or the configuration computer F b When selecting Limit IP addresses permit to connect set the IP addresses with connection permission 1 Adding an IP address with connection permission Z Set the following items then click the Ada button Table 8 4 Setting items when Limit IP addresses permit to connect is selected IP address Set IP addresses permitted to connect in decimal notation 9 Mask bit length Blank s55 Re ER The IP address is added to the Permitted IP addresses list AGS Example 192 168 0 64 Set the following items then click the Ada button Table 8 5 Setting items when Limit IP addresses permit to connect is selected Item Description IP address Set IP addresses permitted to connect in decimal notation Set the enabled bit length of the set IP address Range 1 to 32 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Mask bit length 4 The IP address mask bit length is added to the Permitted IP addresses list 3 Example 192 168 0 64 26 2 3 TE ZPE Miara S20 oe z O O mf A Z Q S m S ari as 22 Lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 5 Setting It
342. ecting the job and clicking the button displays the View details dialog box Dd The job was canceled No detailed log p The job was canceled With detailed log Z y gt nDo Selecting the job and clicking the button displays zo lt the View details dialog box DEE 2 Date Displays the date and time on which a job is activated 3 Job Displays a job that was activated INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 4 Summary Displays trigger conditions Table 7 88 Displays in Summary Display Description Startup Shows that any job other than handshake operation was activated 2 Handshake start Shows that job execution of handshake operation was activated G Handshake end Shows that job execution of handshake operation was completed z j b Detailed log Detailed log data of the jobs each of which has Test mode setting in Job settings are displayed LF Section 7 10 1 5 Test mode le 2 ms G W z ESO 260 36 ZPO z O O Z ve Selecting a job of or icon and clicking the button displays the View details dialog box DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 12 Online T7 m 129 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 130 3 View details 7 12 Online View details Action list Type Database Table Insert mestbl Update mestbl Select mestbl MultiSelect 3 mestbl
343. ecution is cancelled impossible Not stored Valid Job data is stored to DB buffer 2 Invalid Data is sent to database Transmission Stored Valid Immediate sending Data is sent to database b 2 possible Adding to the buffered data Job data is stored to DB buffer HO Not stored Valid Invalid Data is sent to database Point Check the DB buffer status No of bufferings utilization and prevent the full status of the DB buffer Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering g e Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering af Processing content Zu 250 When the job data cannot be sent to the database one of the following Zog processing is performed after the detection of a timeout es DB buffering function is invalid Job execution is cancelled DB buffering function is valid Job data is stored to DB buffer The content of DB buffer is resent after recovery e Automatically resend buffer After recovery the data is resent automatically e Manually resend buffer After recovery the data is resent when the resend operation is performed INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION ez Communication recovery Job startup Auto resend Kaa Job startup After sending timeout detected o Z O O Z 5 U Stored to DB buffer Resend Automatically Resend Manually resend buffer data resend buffer data Figure 6 12 Processing content of DB buffering 3 8 Point bed The job proc
344. ed data and resend z 5 The data which is started up after the resend completion is sent normally 5 Communication recovery DN Resend Job startup cai startup Resend start completed _ Job startup 5 i P i 1 4 i o i Send 2n After sending 3 pee timeout detected 28 z Stored to DB buffer Stored to DB buffer Resend DB Stored to DB buffer Dea buffer data Job settings DB buffer MEE Job1_Data Zz 3 Job2_Data k Job3_Data Sz 4 z 2 i 23 Job10 5 Job10_Data 6 Job11 gt Job11_Data Figure 6 14 When Adding to the buffered data is selected for the job Point The data is sent to database in order of the trigger condition has been met o Z O O Z 5 me MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 19 6 1 10 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series 6 1 11 Precautions 1 Operation behavior of jobs a When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job 1 When Trigger buffering is disabled for the job Because the job is being executed it is not executed again i i i i i interval Job startup Another job is not executed during job execution Job execution Figure 6 15 When trigger condition is met again during execution of the job set to Value monitoring star
345. edit screen is switched to the one for the added item Point Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting type refer to the relevant section of each item 5 Moving an item An item can be moved by a drag and drop operation x Point 1 Items can be moved within each of Access target CPU settings Device tag settings Server service settings and Job settings 2 The top item listed under Access target CPU settings default name ControlCPU cannot be moved 7 8 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 4 Project File Handling z This section explains how to handle project files S MES Interface Function Configuration Tool treats the MES interface function settings for a single MES interface module as one project 7 4 1 Creating a new project 5 Create a new project lt 5 When a new project is created the project currently being edited is discarded EE cas D Perform either of the following e Click New e Select Project New from the menu A 3 7 4 2 Opening a project F N Retrieve an existing project Perform either of the following No o zy z Click Ga Open TE e Select Project Open from the menu p The Open dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the Open button INSTALLATI
346. eee 7 134 9 1 P Parts name Siscie aeaa 4 6 Performance specifications cceeseereeeees 3 1 Program eXxeCutiOn ceeceeeeeeeeeeees 6 12 7 75 8 3 Project SOU ecrcnrnnre nenoaia 7 17 R E o a E E E T E E E E 7 126 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Remote operationis 7 135 Change job status 00 0 ceeeeeereeeeeeneeeeeerees 7 140 CompactFlash card operation ccee 7 143 Connection result of previous job execution 7 139 DB buffering operation ccceeeeeeeeeteeeeetees 7 142 DB buffering Status eceeeeeeeeteeeeeeenees 7 141 Module operation eceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 137 Module status cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeeeees 7 136 Trigger buffering status eeeeeeeeeeeees 7 143 Replicating an item ec ceeeeeesteeeeeeesteeeeeeenaaes 7 8 REQUEST O vanities nities 9 2 RESPONSE lacras a NaN 9 3 S Sele Cikunir a e a aeee eee 7 96 Select sort SettingS occnccaiciiiicsiiaie 7 105 Select Update Delete conditions 7 103 Self loopback test ccceeceeceeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeees 4 12 Server SELVICE 0 cece eeeeeccccec aces eeeeeeeesaeeeeeeenanes A 23 7 53 Settings and procedure to operation 25 4 2 ONTP eaer eea a ETA A 22 7 20 SQL failure lOQ nrrecserancairasiensros 8 4 8 20 8 31 SQL text transmission Communication action E bad entre ci ant ntes A 22 6 10 7 85 7 92 St
347. eeeeeeaaeees 2364 CURFENT GION dedesi priina etzeesedaacesocunzaz ASA 200 Enron log saree ii cee steed tece fee eevee tee eas dessa aie teed Line age ie ee odiueentte daeed 3 6 6 Sampling monitoring Cycle area ec eee eeeeeteeeeteeteeeeeteeteeeeeeeeaeeees 367 Tag Status area wssetessicestsiiinee dst E ii eweed ited AEREN 3 6 8 Current tag data value AFCA eeeeceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeeeteeeneeeeeseeeaeees 3 6 9 Access target CPU setting status area cee eeenteeteeeeenteeeeeeeeaees 3 6 10 Information linkage function area o oo eee eeeetee eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseeenaeeees CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 1 Handling Precautions iscsiisincts ti cagee inet RER 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeenee 43 PartS Naimes schiiceet tina elas aaa adeiioeieeia aati aeeeeh eae AA WING eseas aa ceva eatancanti el E E a E a AAA WING eiin aae a a edna aes aga eaney AA2 WIIG ProCana E 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 0 ec eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenneeeeeees 4 6 Self diaGnOstics TSi vis cceceets covccautecs N 46 7 SehloopDack teStscscesscsscncecasacazsdaasesshaicedaciaagheb4iaadagshdi wasauua see sazanteadaanibaceass 4 6 2 Hardware test 0 cccccccscscscesccsscssecccessessescesceucesscuseeacscsesseuceceeseeseuacesss 4 7 CompactFlash Card reisseri annad aaa a adria aa 4 7 1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card essse
348. eeeneeaeceeeseeaseeeneneanes 7 24 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering Setting ec ceee eee eeeee terete tee eee eeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaes 7 27 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting 0 ent nr rn eerie e eee nneeeeeetaeeeeeeenneeeeeseiaeeeeeenaaes 7 33 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU Setting oe eeeceneeeeeeenee eee eeenaeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaes 7 34 G8 Dice Tag SOWING ea hecues vid etocuds vaahcteneueshuntaeeerhs A 7 38 T81 Settingitems in Device Tag SOtING wie cccctersivncseenesteneeedeuieeceeusuelecuecenesapiedunnuea de eeeeenecereesticeys 7 39 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting eeeeeeeeeeenneeeernnnseeenneeersnnnnaetrnneaannnnnnnttenanennnnnnaaeennnnatnannnneeena 7 43 7 8 3 Setting items in Component Seting sesira AEE 7 45 CS SOME SEMVICE Soin ves s55 02 225 5 sctedeeeapeee ca eanpecedecs O 7 53 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service Setting ccececcceeeseeeceeeeeneeceeceeeneeaeeeeeneeecaeeeeensecaeenenneaaaes 7 54 A 12 TAQ JOD SOWING a ES 7 58 CAVA Setting tems 1 JOD SoNg esusen N 7 59 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions 00 0 2 eee e ee eetee ee eee enne eee teeta eee e ee taeeee eee taeeeeeetiaeeeeee 7 62 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution cc ce cece eee eeceeee eee etneee sete tees eee taaeeeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeen 7 75 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering eee eeeeeeee eee eeeeee eee eeneeeeeeeceneeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeenees 7 79 7 10 5 Setting items f
349. eeesseeresseerrrsrsrere 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeresseeeresee AG Baley ocara E E E E 4 8 1 Battery specifications eeesseeessreseeesrnneresrnnnseeenneeerinnnasennnnennnnnnnarenneenna 48 2 Mounting of battery iicc cccicissi is aneensttiiensscndienidianenstinnneniateereaesnnes 4 8 3 Battery replacement ccceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeetnneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeeetnaeeeeeneeaas 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery 0 ce eeeeeeeeeenttee eee etteeeeeeeteeeeeeetea 4 10 Removing Battery for Storage cece ener e teeter eter tetneee eee tenieeeeeeenneeeereeea CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Bed INSTANALION P E AE EE EE save eects andtccutas wea E fost cengasuastiaens E EE 52 WrinsStallatiOni icee aisiviaiceateieievecoas dat edecicdie A E N CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONS 61 DB Interface Functio Mn oieoaeue ain A A 6 1 1 DB interface function OPEratiOn ss icccissachacestssdvccvensdshanhssnssudaddnacessnshceaes TA 6 1 6 1 2 JOD execution POCO svecuiges cedavcacazsnsssanaans nnwedesageneasddevasneseqadadnedaedades a aar EA camaadsnasade 6 2 GLS TAQ TUNCUON ives cccedevesntevecatenvecsevenes cnedvousns dod i ina cnediaetiaens Jeet anes dadanetenenuedinneedatinens deviates 6 4 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring FUNCTION eee eee eeeetee eee teeeeee eee teeeeee eee teneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeaeeeeseeaaeees 6 5 6 1 5 Trigger buffering fUNCON lt ct icki asinine AEN aii e
350. eenaesaeeeeeeeeeeneess App 6 Appendix 2 1 ASCII code table cc cccccecceceeceeccee cee eeee eee ee eee ceeceaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeseeseceeccesaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeea App 6 Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etenin TINE PIOGU CE caisson ventas aa a EA i e E E A App 7 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants Ct e ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 8 Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc App 8 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format 2 c eeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneaeeeeeeeeees App 9 Appendix 3 1 Setting information files liSt cccccccceceeeeeeeceeecee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeea App 9 Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees App 10 Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSW cendna r noa App 13 Appendix 3 4 ACCOUNT CSYV pensaninan Ea a Ea a Eaa App 15 Appendix 35 gt DS TCS Vrnimo e a a ane phacts aaa detacetigan ete daatnan es App 17 Appendix 3 6 DBBUF CSV renerien aa aaa aa AE aaa a aaaea a eaaa aaa aaan aaas App 19 App ndix 3 7 lt CPU CSV enmi ierannernane a E a aa A helene E a NEE A N App 20 Appendix 3 8 TAG CSV oi aiaei edi eaaa ea a a a a ea e aad dee ae App 24 Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV a a a Aaa a EAA E aAA App 26 Appendix3 10 SER
351. elected for ARRAY Blank When ENABLE is selected for BLOCK 1 to 1073741824 Decimal integer SPECIFY BLOCKSIZE Array block size When DISABLE is selected for BLOCK SPECIFY When DISABLE is selected for ARRAY Blank For characters can be used in device tag names refer to the following L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product 2 A name same as a server service name cannot be set Make the setting causes an error 3 If the same device tag name already exists the setting of the label with the higher number is overwritten 4 Registration of High speed sampling is limited to one tag only Setting multiple tags for high speed sampling causes an error Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 8 TAG CSV App 25 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV 1 File format Table App 26 File format Item Description File name COMPONENT CSV File contents Device tag settings Component setting lt gt Section 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting File format z 7 z ITEM COMPNAME CPUNO DATATYPE DEVICE FORMAT COMPONENT1 1_ Valve 1 BIT M12 DEC D1003_ DEC 1 COMPONENT64 1 D5000 DEC Opening degree w100__ DEC w EJ
352. elete conditions Appendix 3 15 ACEXCEPTION CSV Communication action Exception processing Appendix 3 16 ACOPERATION CSV Operation action Appendix 3 17 REMOTE CSV Job settings Program execution Appendix 3 18 ORDERBY CSV Communication action Select sort settings Appendix 3 19 MULTISELECT CSV Communication action Multi select setting Saved information setting file can be imported lt Section 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 1 Setting information files list Appendix 3 20 App 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions This section explains the setting information file format and editing precautions This section shows with an example in which the setting information file is displayed with spreadsheet software 1 Setting information file format The setting information file format has the type made up of label columns and setting areas and the type made up of label columns item rows and setting areas a Type made up of label columns and setting areas Table App 7 Type made up of label columns and setting areas Item Description NWTYPE SPECIFY IPADDRESS SUBNET GATEWAY File format SNTP
353. eloper before executing the PLC memory formatting T 42 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting An array is a data format in which the specified number of data of the same data type are a arranged sequentially Ei The Array setting is set when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the 2 same tag component Either of the following can be selected for device assignment to each tag component e Assigning consecutive devices to each tag component series e Handling all tag components as a block and assigning the same kind of devices ina series of blocks block 53 Tags with array settings are used for MultiSelect be r Array setting V Length of array 2 series block Figure 7 32 Array setting A z 2 1 Use array 5 When the Use array checkbox is checked the tag is arranged as arrays 2 2 Length of array Range 2 to 40000 Default 2 Set the number of arrays for the tag o QF zy z i HE 3 Series Block Sg Select a method for the array setting BEO a Series Devices of respective tag components are arranged consecutively Example When Length of array is set to 4 with series setting Only the start device device in n 1 need be set Devices in and after n 2 are configured automatically INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Array setting IV Us
354. ems of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 18 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Aeres Example When specifying IP addresses in a batch If the IP address is set to 192 168 0 64 and Mask bit length is set to 26 the IP addresses with permission connection are 192 168 0 64 to 192 168 0 127 whose logical product is 192 168 0 64 IP address permitted 192 eee MOO eee el to connect 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Mask bit length 26 Logical product 192 168 0 64 IP address Li folofofofojo 1jol1jof fofofofojofojojolojofojol1jofojojojofo The range in which the logical product above is met is between 192 168 0 64 to 127 192 a aS a ae a ee 1 1 0 0jojojojoj1 0 1 0 1 0jojojojojojojojojojojoj1jojojojojojo 192 168 0 127 t 1Jofojofojofo sfo sfo 1fofojofojofojofofofofofo s s a lh fa Figure 8 9 Specifying IP addresses in a batch J 2 Deleting an IP address with connection permission Select the IP address to be deleted from Permitted IP addresses list then click the button 4 Output access log Default Output a Set whether or not to output the access log b When selecting Output access log set the following items Table 8 6 Setting items when Output access log is selected Item Description Output destination Set the output destination of the log file Access log
355. en using a cable with a connector disconnect it with holding the connector connected to the module When the cable is pulled while connected to the module this may cause malfunctions or module cable damage A 3 Wiring Precautions CAUTION Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Start up and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Do not touch any terminal during power distribution Doing so may cause malfunctions Always switch OFF the external supply power used by the system in all phases before cleaning or retightening terminal screws Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Loose screws may cause a drop of the module short circuit or malfunctions Tightening screws excessively may damage the screws and or the module resulting in a drop of the module short circuit or malfunctions CAUTION Do not disassemble or transform the module Doing so may cause a failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire Always shut OFF the external supply power used by the system in all phases before
356. ency type Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character CHAR char PE String strings refer to the following VARCHAR varchar yP String Tag L Appendix 2 3 Characters available for text Memo type character string constants etc e When using the date and time of the Datey database server Server time T DATE datetime Betmew E e When using the date and time of the MES smalldatetime interface module Module time Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following lt gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Specify the date and time of the MES interface module in the following format char Date Year 4 digits YYYY CHAR y ichar Text type gt String Tag String Year 2 digits YY VARCHAR text Memo type T 88 Month 2 digits MM Day 2 digits DD Hour 2 digits hh Minute 2 digits mm Second 2 digits ss Example YYYY MM DD hh mm ss gt 2005 07 01 15 12 00 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 4 2 3 4 5 6 ad 8 MELSEC Aeres When using the operation field the insertion function INSERT and update function UPDATE cannot be executed for the operation field for Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 Signed integer notation only When us
357. ent is based on the case where the start I O No of the MES interface module is 0000 installed to slot 0 of the main base unit If the MES interface module is mounted other than slot 0 see the list with changing the I O signals by those of the mounted slot Device X indicates an input signal from the MES interface module to the programmable controller CPU and device Y indicates an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the MES interface module Table 3 12 I O signal list Signal direction MES interface module Signal direction programmable controller CPU Programmable controller CPU MES interface module Device Device N Signal nam Signal name No No Module READY X0 ON Module prepared YO OFF Module being prepared Use prohibited x4 CompactFlash card status v1 ON Installed OFF Not installed xo File access status y2 File access stop request ON Stopped OFF Running ON Stop request OFF X3 Use prohibited Ys Network status X4 ON Initialization completed Connectable Y4 OFF Initializing Unconnectable Information linkage status X5 v5 ON Executing OFF Stopped X6 Y6 X7 WU X8 Use prohibited Y8 Use prohibited x9 M9 XA YA XB SNTP time query timing YB ON Query complete OFF No query XC YC XD o YD Use prohibited XE YE O X YF To the next page 3 16 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 1 I O signal list 3 SPECIFICATIONS
358. ent value Character string 4th character 3rd character 2nd character 1st character bit 0 0 1 16 bit BCD 0 Current value 32 bit BCD Current value 483 Figure 3 15 Data type of tag component When Perform statistical processing is set in Device tag settings data before the statistical processing is stored 2 Only the first four characters are stored 3 Data before the BCD conversion is stored 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 6 8 Current tag data value area 3 35 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 2 Zz O lt iS m S w a Oo SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Le series 3 6 9 Access target CPU setting status area 1 Access target CPU setting information Buffer memory address 4000 to 4003 a The information on whether Access target CPU settings have been made or not is stored b The bit corresponding to the preset Access target CPU setting No is turned ON 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 4000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4001 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 4002 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
359. er 2008 32 bit x64 e Microsoft SQL Server 2012 32 bit x64 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE 2000 Microsoft Access 2000 e Microsoft Access 2003 Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 32 bits e Microsoft Access 2013 32 bits Wonderware Historian 9 0 Industrial SQL Server Maximum 64 items project Reference section Section 7 9 1 Section 7 10 1 Trigger buffering Maximum 128 times No of conditions can be combined Maximum 2 conditions Combination can be selected either AND or OR job Period 1 to 32767 seconds Time Year month day day of the week hour minute Tri i ngger Value monitoring 1 Compares tag component value and tag sacra ie conditions a Condition type component value Compares tag component value and constant value Module startup Handshake Allowable number of i Maximum 10 actions job settings Section 7 11 Type Select update insert multiselect delete stored procedure operation Maximum 8192 fields project e DB tag link settings Select Update Insert MultiSelect Maximum 256 rows communication action No of communication e DB tag link settings Stored procedure Maximum 257 rows action fields communication action Select Update Delete conditions Maximum 8 rows communication Section 7 11 1 Action action e Select sort settings Maximum 8 rows communication action No of re
360. erence value represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C This value is intended for reference only as it varies with characteristics of the memory 4 In either of the following status the guaranteed time after power off is 3 minutes The battery connector is disconnected e The battery lead wire is broken b The battery Q6BAT life is 5 years when disconnected to the MES interface module c Even though the data is retained for the specified time after the Battery status area Buffer memory address 7 is turned ON replace the battery as soon as possible However it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the usage status even when the battery error has not yet occurred EJ Point If the battery is not replaced after a battery error occurs data in the CompactFlash card being accessed may be corrupted or a file system error may occur 4 292 4 8 Battery 4 8 3 Battery replacement 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 3 Replacement procedure of the MES interface module battery When the MES interface module battery has been exhausted replace the battery with a new one according to the procedure shown in Figure 4 20 g The programmable controller must be powered ON for 10 minutes or more before removing the battery Even if the battery is removed the memory is backed up by the capacitor
361. ering function lt gt Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting Default button Clicking the Default button returns System setting to the initial status DB buffering setting 7 18 7 6 System Setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module to the network a E Network settings IP address 192 168 3 3 ra fe Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 lt ae az Default gateway i v 5 nO no EA e z Figure 7 20 Network settings 9 8 a N Table 7 22 Setting items in Network settings Item Description Paties ected Set the IP address of the MES interface module in decimal notation ui g Default 192 168 3 3 fa 2 Lu Set the subnet mask in decimal notation as Subnet mask required All devices on the same network must use the same subnet mask zo lt Default 255 255 255 0 Ge a Set the default gateway in decimal notation Default gateway One default gateway can be registered for the MES interface module Default No setting Point Before entering values in Network settings consult your network administrator the person who plans networking and manages IP addresses INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j w z iL ae im Z o w l Q O z O 6
362. ersion of the setting file is not correct 108 The server port No setting is not correct 109 The server port No setting is out of range 110 The DB access timeout time setting is not correct 111 The DB access timeout time setting is out of range 412 There are too many connection permitted IP address settings 113 Description of the connection permitted IP address setting is not correct 414 The mask bit length setting of the connection permitted IP address is not correct 415 The mask bit length setting of the connection permitted IP address is out of range 116 The access log setting is not correct 417 The setting of the access log file name is not correct ae ane log ip name is tolong Configure the settings again with DB Connection 419 The maximum file size setting for the access log is Service Setting Tool not correct 420 The maximum file size setting for the access log is out of range 424 The maximum number of access log files is not set correctly 422 The maximum number of access log files is out of range 123 The SQL failure log setting is not correct 424 The setting of the SQL failure log file name is not correct 125 The SQL failure log file name is too long 126 The maximun file size setting for the SQL failure log is not correct 127 The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure log is out of range 128 The maximum number of SQL failure log files is not set correctly 129 The maximum number of SQL failur
363. essing which is started up while the data is being stored differs 255 ZB depending on the settings of DB buffering Sme L gt 8 Operation while data is being stored to DB buffer in this section os 528 l Lz 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 17 6 1 10 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS 6 18 MELSEC Le series 8 Operation while data is being stored to DB buffer The job processing which is started up while the data is being stored differs depending on the operation settings of resend buffer selected on each job Related settings e Setting of each job K gt Section 7 10 4 e Operation setting of resend buffer 7 Section 7 6 4 8 a When Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data is selected The following shows the job processing when Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data is selected Processing content When the data cannot be sent to the database it is stored to DB buffer after the detection of a timeout When the data is stored to DB buffer the selected resend buffer the status of communication recovery is checked for each time when the job is started up If the communication has not been recovered the data is stored to DB buffer The content of DB buffer is resent after recovery 2 The job data which is started up before the resend completion is sent immediately Communication recovery Job startup na e startup Resena start Job startup
364. et interface Ethernet Programmable controller CPU module module module controller CPU 4 EH Ethernet Ethernet TU Figure 3 3 Access to the programmable controller CPU over Ethernet 9 When the access target CPU is Q12DCCPU V the access is not possible 10 Use a MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 15102 or later 11 Use a MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 16072 or later 12 When the Network communication route is NET 10 H the access is not possible 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 7 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 o Z O q o S M o 7 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS b Different network a6 Q series MES interface Network module module Network 2 to 7 C24 multidrop lt CC Link Request Relay Relay Relay source Network 1 station station Network 8 station Access target CRU gt Network communication route e The network is any of CC IE Control NET 10 H Ethernet or CC IE Field i Co existence network communication route e The following lists CPU modules that can be used on the network communication route and the communication routes of other network t
365. etting Specify the maximum number of acquiring records Component Notify the number of acquired records 3 Tag Componen M Clear the unused tag components by zero 2 Label Table App 62 Label Label Description Job setting No 1 to 64 Action No 1 to 10 MULTISELECT1 1 to MULTISELECT64 1 MULTISELECT64 10 Indicates Action No 1 to 10 Indicates Job settings No 1 to 64 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 51 Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 63 Setting item MELSEC Le series Item Description Setting value Specify the maximum Specif DISABLE H Maxrec pecify ximu p y number of acquiring records Not specify ENABLE Tag TAG MAXTYPE Constant type Numeric value NUMBER When TAG is selected for Togi o MAXTAG Device tag number MAXTYPE Other than the above Blank c eroi When TAG is selected for peer omponent number o MAXELEMENT sie MAXTYPE device tag Other than the above Blank When NUMBER is 1 to 40000 Decimal integer E vaxvaLue Setting value selected for MAXTYPE Other than the above Blank Notify the number of Not notify DISABLE NTCREC i i acquired records Notify ENABLE When DISABLE is S Blank EJ NtcTac Device tag number selected for NTCREC Other than the above 1 to 64 When DISABLE is Compone
366. etting file The setting file is corrupted Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 064Bh Excessive number of device points for high speed sampling tag The total of device points for the high speed sampling tag exceeded 96 e Change the setting so that the total device points will not exceed 96 064Ch High speed sampling tag component registration error Failed to register a component device of the high speed tag to the CPU Ensure a system area in the program memory of the programmable controller CPU Format the PLC memory For the Redundant CPU check the system area for the Redundant CPU of both systems 0650h Setting file error Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 0659h Network communication route error A nonexistent module was specified for Head I O in Network communication route of Access target CPU settings e Correct the Head I O address in Access target CPU settings O6A0h O6AAh O6ABh O6ADh System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0830h 0831h 0832h Setting file error Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted e Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool No CompactFlash card has been installed
367. etting item Table App 57 Setting item Item Description Setting value N W Execute program before When enabled ENABLE 9 REMOTEEXEC i 9 after action When disabled DISABLE a lt SERVER Program execution destination 1 to 32 COMMAND Command line Up to 127 characters When enabled ENABLE RETURNCHECK Check return value When disabled DISABLE 6 RETURNVALUE Normal return value 2147483648 to 2147483647 3 Write the value into the tag When enabled ENABLE 3 ERRORWRITE z when the value is faulty When disabled DISABLE EEJ ERRORTAG Tag 1 to 64 EJ ERRORELEMENT Component 1 to 256 ERRORVALUE Substitute value Any character string Do not execute job when When enabled ENABLE ERREXEC the value is faulty When disabled DISABLE Wait for execution When enabled WAIT WAIT completion When disabled NOWAIT Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 18 REMOTE CSV App 49 APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 3 19 ORDERBY CSV 1 File format Table App 58 File format Item Description File name ORDERBY CSV File contents Communication action Select sort setting L gt Section 7 11 2 7 Select sort settings ITEM FIELDNAME SORTTYPE ORDERBY1 1 1 Completed ASC ORDERBY1 1 2 Rejected DESC Item row File format Label column setting area Communication action Select sort settings Field name
368. ettings No 1 to 64 EXCEPTION1 1 1 to EXCEPTION64 10 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 43 Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION CSV APPENDICES 3 Setting item Table App 51 Setting item MELSEC Le series Item Description Setting value Do not select DISABLE EXEC Select from the head record Select ENABLE Quit Continue this job Finish this Continue the job DISABLE job Terminate the job ENABLE Do not send notification to ee F DISABLE NOTICE Send notification of this tag component exception Send notification to tag ENABLE component TAG Tag 1 to 64 K ELEMENT Component 1 to 256 VALUE Substitute value Optional App 44 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 16 ACEXCEPTION CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 3 17 ACOPERATION CSV Ww 2 N 1 File format Be aa Table App 52 File format a File name ACOPERATION CSV File contents Operation action lt 5 Section 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action z Q z OUTPUT 3 1 1 OPERATIONS 1 1_ VARIABLE __ Correction voltage n 1 OPERATIONS 1 2_ VARIABLE Correction voltage OPERATIONS TAG 15 3 no on WIDE fe 1 ms h mumy NUMBER __ Correction voltage ADD NUMBER _ Correction voltage MULTIPLY TAG APPENDICES File format IN2ELEMENT INPUT2 2 No o do O 2 IN
369. face Function Configuration Tool and the Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website screen can be displayed 1 Product information Select Help Product information from the menu Point The following operation also displays the product information of the MES interface Function Configuration Tool e Click P Product information The Product information dialog box of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is displayed Product information MES interface function configuration tool Ver 1 004 Copyright C 2005 2006 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation All Rights Reserved This product is licensed to Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co ProductID Warning This product is protected by the copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law Figure 7 114 Product information dialog box 2 Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website Select Help gt Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website from the menu 2 The MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website is displayed Online manuals and other information can be viewed T 144 7 14 Help r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 7 15 Precautions This section provides pre
370. fer to the following gt Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery Not following the procedure may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being accessed or a file system error 4 20 4 8 Battery 4 8 1 Battery specifications 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 4 8 3 Battery replacement This section explains how to replace the MES interface module battery ai The battery of the MES interface module is used for file protection w If the voltage of the MES interface module battery has dropped the battery must be 2 replaced 1 Checking the MES interface module for a battery voltage drop z Check for a battery voltage drop in the Battery status area Buffer memory lt 3 address 7 Be nO 2 The following results from battery errors e 1 ON is written to the Battery status area Buffer memory address 7 e The ERR LED is turned ON and ERR LED status X10 and Other error a X1C are turned ON 6 The file contents will not be erased immediately after the battery error S occurrence but may be erased if the battery error is not recognized g Finish the battery replacement in the total power failure compensation time since the Battery status area is turned ON is within the specified time A x10 Zic voy s H m 67 KL Ss T Y100 is turned ON at battery error ie W oc 5 fal W O O a fa zZ CE Bae E W ma Do Figure 4 19 Checking for
371. fered data until the resend operation is completed The data is sent in order of the trigger conditions have met including in the new job data whose trigger condition created while the data resend is completed r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting z Set a connection channel to the access target CPU gt The set CPU name is used in Device tag settings z Double clicking Access target CPU settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant items Ps Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed 5 setting edit screen area 3 Make the setting referring to the following descriptions E n n 6 D 8 Access target CPU settings E F Controicpu O Newceu i JQcPU QMode RCPU 5 aaaea 8 o ean E g Job settings CESS eee e C Other Station Single network Other Station Co existence network r Network communication route a Foe INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Figure 7 27 Access target CPU settings Point 1 How to add delete or copy an item For addition deletion or copying of items refer to the following ma FUNCTIONS L7 Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New CPU item is added le 2 ms G re z E ESO 260 36 ZPO z O S O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 7 Access Ta
372. ffer memory lt Section 3 6 4 Current error area C gt Section 3 6 5 Error log area e MES interface function configuration tool Working log Error log lt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 2 Checking an error of the server computer An error can be checked by log data output to the server computer e Access log of DB Connection Service gt Section 8 8 1 Access log e SQL failure log of DB Connection Service gt Section 8 8 2 SQL failure log e Event log of Windows An error of DB Connection Service is output It can be checked by selecting Administrative Tools Event Viewer in Windows Point If more than one error are displayed in Error log of Working log or by error dialog boxes take corrective actions in chronological order 1 0 2 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 1 Finding an error code 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres 10 1 2 Error types Errors are divided into the following two types 1 Module stop error mA XML MESSAGE a FORMAT a The ERR LED flashes b When a module stop error occurs the MES interface function of the MES interface module is stopped Correct the error according to the error code and turn the power OFF and then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 1 zZ Q O A w al a 9 ad c An error code is stored in the buffer memory area that is corresponding to the error location F
373. ffered data The communication between the database is slow Is the proper driver for ODBC data source selected when using Microsoft SQL Server Select any of the following in Create New Data Source SQL Server 2000 SQL Server SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2008 SQL Server Native Client SQL Server 2012 SQL Server Native Client 11 0 5 Troubleshooting about the XML processing function Table 10 22 Troubleshooting about the XML processing function Symptom The XML processing function does not work Checked item Is Running displayed in the status indication area of Remote operation Corrective action e When Stopped is displayed perform any of the following operations Perform Restart from Remote operation Power OFF and then ON Reset the programmable controller CPU 6 Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function Table 10 23 Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function Symptom Time is not synchronized with the SNTP server computer Checked item Is the SNTP server address setting correct Corrective action Correct the SNTP server address setting Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 53 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE FORMAT 0 Z Q O o w al a 9 APPENDICES INDEX 1
374. ficiency is not checked The following table lists the results in the case where the Enhance sampling efficiency box is not checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 67 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked if No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 2 Select 028 o3s 06s 19s 73s dat pede 0 2s 0 3s 0 6 2 0s 74s Insert c When MultiSelect is selected The following table lists the results in the case where MultiSelect is selected for Action type INDEX Table App 68 Measurement results when MultiSelect is selected for Action type 0 2s 0 3s 0 6s 1 9s 7 38 30s 72s Appendix 4 Processing Time App 55 Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 13092 or later APPENDICES MELSEC Led series Appendix 4 2 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later and 13091 or earlier 1 Measurement conditions Server computer Table App 69 Measurement conditions Item Description CPU Intel Xeon 2 8GHz Memory 1GB Operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Database Oracle 10g Access target CRU Programmable controller CPU In the case of Select Update or Insert Q25HCPU control CPU on own station In the case of MultiSelect QO6UDHCPU control CPU on own station Network No other station specified own station Sequence scan time ims Device tag setting
375. for Action type if multiple records to be updated or deleted exist all of them are updated or deleted 7 110 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 2 Send notification of this exception When the Send notification of this exception box is checked if multiple records to be selected updated or deleted exist a value will be assigned to the E specified tag component fi When Send notification of this exception is selected set a tag component to 2 which the value is assigned e Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Z Note that the following tags are not selectable lt Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled ze Tags for which Array setting is set 25 e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value M EA Table 7 77 Values that can be entered as a substitute value O Data type of tag Values that can be entered as a substitute value 5 component a Bit type ON OFF is selectable Single precision type Up to 16 characters Double precision type Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 Floating point type Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 Ae 16 bit BCD type Unsigned 16 bit BCD notation 0 to 9999 Example 1234 Eang 32 bit BCD type Unsigne
376. for a while However if the replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value in the table below z data stored in the memory may be erased To prevent this replace the battery quickly 7 Table 4 11 Power failure compensation time z E Power failure compensation time 58 3 minutes n z Battery replacement 2 M D Yy Power OFF the programmable controller A Remove the MES interface module from the base unit gt v Open the MES interface module cover MES interface module connector e w ao fa WW Q O x a fa zZ lt yrz Bae W ma Do S y Remove the battery in use from the connector holder 9 lt 6 e Pee 55 Insert a new battery into the holder in 5 z the right orientation and connect the lt 2 or lead connector to the connector 25 y Close the MES interface module MES interface module cover J z Mount the MES interface module to O R the base unit Q R y Power ON the programmable controller 3 fe uw Monitor buffer OFF 2 E memory address 7 and check i Z the ON OFF status 5E 8 226 ZrO Battery failure of the MES interface End module rA O 528 Figure 4 20 Battery replacement procedure wer TE gt E om fi ba ann 4 8 Battery 4 2 4 8 3 Battery replacement E 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Le series 4 9 Operation without Mounti
377. for sampling device values lt 5 For handshaking refer to the following ae L gt Section 7 10 2 8 Handshake operation 0 e When reserving the tag 2 Tags with Do not sample setting cannot be selected in the items provided for tag read setting Except for the case where the trigger condition is set to 2 Handshake operation e Tag component value for Select Update Delete conditions of Select in E Communication action etc a 3 When a system switching occurs to the Redundant CPU collection of device tag may stop for about 15 seconds H Lez 3 Enhance sampling efficiency a If the Enhance sampling efficiency box is checked sampling and reading of tag data ack under handshake operation can be executed at high speed This can be selected when device numbers of all the devices registered to the tag are sequential This is not selectable when Array setting is set 4 Prohibit data writing Set whether to enable or disable writing data to the tag This is not selectable when Array setting is set INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Point Tags for which data writing is prohibited cannot be selected in the setting items provided for writing to tags e Completion notification of Handshake operation substitution tags of Select in Communication action etc FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G WL raped ESO 260 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTIN
378. from a list of the access target CPU names set in Access Component CPU name target CPU settings Head device Set device name Data type Select the data type of sampling data setting input Character string Set a character string length when String is selected for Data type length 1 to 32 characters Perform statistical eae Set whether to perform statistical processing or not processing Component name Displays a component name CPU name Displays a CPU name Device Displays a device range used Data type Displays a data type Statistical type When Perform statistical processing is set displays the type of statistical processing Component List Device n n Array No When Array setting is set displays the device range of array No n For a display example refer to the following lt 7 Section 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting Displays the array No that is currently displayed in Device n of Component List If this is clicked the device range of the first array is displayed in Device n of Component List button When the device range of the first array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked If this is clicked the device range of the previous array is displayed in Device n of Component List button When the device range of the first array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked If this is clicked
379. g errors and the corrective actions lt Chapter 10 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 10 covers troubleshooting and lists the error codes Displaying a reference Displaying a chapter title Reference in this manual and reference manual are shown with C gt Index on the right of a page clears the chapter of the page 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC loros Fo This chapter explains the system configuration of the MES interface module 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 1 Overall system configuration This section shows the overall system configuration when using the MES interface module Orack SQL Server ote manufactured by other companies 3 SNTP server computer Server computer 5 e a i amp m E li a Ethemet of o aus 2s BES Configuration computer 3z F i aranvacku QQNAJACPU 2 II Functions provided by MX MESinterface 5 Figure 2 1 Overall system configuration when using the MES interface module z 1 The SNTP server computer and configuration computer can be shared with server computers 3 This computer is necessary when using the SNTP server computer time for the MES interface g 5 module time o nnn Section 6 3 Time synchronization function y zee 33 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 1 Overall system configuration _ Displaying a section title The section in which the open page is included is clear The above is different from the actual page
380. g values in Example YES Enter alphabetic characters in uppercase 2 Blank Unnecessary to enter setting values 3 Settings other than 1 and 2 above Enter any value according to the setting range for the setting value column Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 2 Setting information file format and editing precautions APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 3 3 SYSTEM CSV W 2 1 File format Be ar Table App 9 File format Ze File name SYSTEM CSV System setting Network settings lt L gt Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting 2 File contents System setting Time synchronization setting gt Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time 8 synchronization setting NWTYPE LAN 3 IPTYPE SPECIFY Oy Be ipappress _ 192 168 3 3 WA susnet 255 255 255 0 EE Gateway DNSTYPE SPECIFY DNS1 DNS2 Oo HTTPTYPE DEFAULT 2 HTTPPORT a HTTPNAT NO FTPTYPE DEFAULT ETPPORT FTPNAT NO SYSTEMNAME QJ71MES96 DIAGNOSIS NO INTERVAL DESTINATION 3 EDEVICE m STARTUP YES Ef snte PLC E sntpapprRess EJ TimeZone a gt pssursize 64 BB auTORESEND gt MANUALRESEND __ Label column Change disabled File format L Setting area Can be changed by the user System setting Network settings Account setting Pakes 192 168 3 3 QJ71ME596 Subnet mask Default gateway G i Add il
381. ger conditions are met with a buffered data in the resend buffer Automatically resend buffer Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data bd Manually resend buffer Adding to the buffered data Figure 7 26 DB buffering settings 2 a 3 1 DB buffering status Ww oo a Select a tag component into which whether data are currently accumulated in the 2 DB buffer or not is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled Ao x Zw e Tags for which Array setting is set TEE Eni z b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type Eom nao Table 7 27 Values stored in DB buffering status Data type of tag Description component Bit OFF Not accumulated ON One or more data accumulated 0 Not accumulated Other than the above 1 One or more data accumulated INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 2 No of DB bufferings a Select a tag component into which whether data are currently accumulated in the DB buffer or not is stored Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set FUNCTIONS j b Data are stored as follows depending on the data type Table 7 28 Values stored in No of DB bufferings Data type of tag Description component le 2 ms G WL z E ESO 260 36 SLo z O O Z re OFF Not
382. gger 1 Time specification startup v eee Year Month Day M Mon V Tue M Wen V Thu Iv F T Sat Sun a Figure 7 46 Time specification startup setting example 1 io Example The following shows that the job is to be activated at 9 00 on the 1st 5 day of every month Trigger 1 Time specification startup Se Year Month Day j WONYySS UN OG LU UYG Minute 1 Day Mon Tue wenf Thu Fri D Sat Sun Figure 7 47 Time specification startup setting example 2 le 2 ms G W z E E o 260 36 ZRO z e O Z U Point If Startup logging is selected each job startup can be confirmed with the time to the second in the startup log The startup log can be checked from Online View working log Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 10 Job Setting T 65 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi IES 26 Q ceries 5 Specified time period startup a The condition is alternated between true and false in the specified cycles unit seconds and when it changes from false to true the job is activated b When Specified time period startup is selected set the cycle Range 1 to 32767 seconds Trigger 1 Specified time period startup 10 seconds Figure 7 48 Specified time period startup LHONYSS HUNT
383. h System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0301h Setting file read error No CompactFlash card has been installed Failed to read out the setting file The setting file is corrupted Install a CompactFlash card Retry writing the setting with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 0400h to 0402h 0480h System error CF card initialization error Unable to initialize the CompactFlash card 0481h CF card drive data retrieve error Unable to read out the drive information of the CompactFlash card 0482h 0483h CF card mount failure Failed to mount the CompactFlash card because a CompactFlash card error has been detected Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Check if the CompactFlash card was inserted properly Replace the CompactFlash card 0490h to 0493h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0494h CF card format error Failed to format the CompactFlash card 10 2 Error Code List Check if the CompactFlash card was inserted properly e Check the CompactFlash card for any error Perform check disk on the personal computer To the next page 10 9 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT o zZ E Q O I ao W al aay O E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 10
384. he Enhance sampling efficiency box is not checked in Sampling settings of Device tag settings Table App 75 Measurement results when Enhance sampling efficiency is not checked No of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096 Select 0 2s 0 3s 0 9s 3 2s 13 5s Update P 0 2s 0 3s 1 0s 3 5s 15 0s Insert App 60 Appendix 4 Processing Time Appendix 4 3 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 5 External Dimensions Ww 0 3 This section shows the external dimension diagrams of the MES interface module i t I O a X QJ71MES96 ERR 0 PULL a CF CARD 2 ae 10BASE T N 100BASE TX Lu o 100 a wo ae stag OS i x ME 5 3 KaJ N W O W a a lt QUTIMES96 a ae x lt W Q Z QU71MES96 je E U C T Unit mm inch Figure App 5 External dimensions The bending radius near the connector R1 yardstick should be at least four times longer than the cable s outside diameter when the twisted pair cable is connected Appendix 5 External Dimensions App 61 APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly This section explains the method for collecting data from CPUs that cannot be accessed
385. he field value is equal to or greater than the condition value gt The field value is greater than the condition value lt The field value is smaller than the condition value lt The field value is equal to or smaller than the condition value d Tag Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable e Component Select or directly enter a component constant value that is used as a condition for comparison If Variable is selected for Tag select or directly enter a variable For tag components constants or variables refer to the following lt gt Section 7 11 1 1 About tag components e Section 7 11 1 2 About constants e Section 7 11 1 3 About variables T 104 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 Select sort settings When Select or MultiSelect is selected in Action type set conditions for sorting the records to be selected multi selected If multiple sort conditions are set the database will process the conditions in order starting from the top In Select sort settings settings of up to eight lines are allowed for each communication action z Select sort settings EE Field name A 9 2 delete row Browse field name g O Figur
386. he network module Access target CPU For accessible CPU modules refer to the following Request source Use a QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU for the MES interface module and network module 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres Table 3 7 Different network Access target CPU PLC series Network Co existence ce feted ou i QCPU A mode C Controller Zz communication route network route RCPU 9 LCPU QnACPU wi Q mode ACPU module a CC IE Control 14 5 NET 10 H O O O CC Link C24 z x x rap Ethernet o O G 13 x x x ra CC IE Field o O O x x o 6 Accessible x Inaccessible z 2 For the network No and station number set the values same with the parameter settings of the Q E z series E71 QE71 L series E71 and R series E71 on access target CPU side ao Also set Station No IP information in the parameter settings of the Q series E71 QE71 L series E71 and R series E71 For the Station No IP information specify the IP address computation method table conversion method or both 2 For the CC Link system master local module on the access target CPU side use modules of software version S or later 3 Use a MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 13092 or later 4 Use Universal model QCPU whose serial No first five digits is 12012 or later 5 When a C Controller module is used as a control CPU of th
387. he same job twice is necessary when switching systems Create the system in view of executing the same job twice Example When INSERT is used at Communication action When the record of the same data production number etc is inserted to the table of data base twice create the information system to use the latest data T 74 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution Configure the settings for the program execution function ai For the program execution function refer to the following i 3 Section 6 1 9 Program execution function 2 Click the Setting button of Before actions or After actions e Before actions z Set a program to be performed before execution of the first action of the job 5 e After actions o Set a program to be performed after execution of the last action of the job 26 r Program execution Before actions Setting After actions Setting no Figure 7 60 Program execution O Program execution settings before action execution or Program execution settings 9 oO after action execution is displayed m Make the setting referring to the following descriptions After completing the setting click the OK_ button gf Lu Program execution settings before action execution s53 SRE IV Execute program before action 3 ui nao
388. he server computer allows to use the MES interface function of the MES interface module The following shows the functions of the DB Connection Service Point 1 It is necessary to install DB Connection Service on all the database server computers and application server computers to be accessed from the MES interface module 2 When using DB Connection Service on the database server computer the ODBC setting for the database to be used must be set beforehand K gt Section 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 3 When using DB Connection Service on the application server computer an account for user program execution must be created beforehand 4 Changes to the DB Connection Service settings are made with DB Connection Service Setting Tool gt Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 1 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC A ries 1 ODBC connection function The ODBC connection function connects the MES interface module and the ODBC interface for database A The following shows operation on the database server computer Database server Database computer 6 E a2 iz MES interface function DB Connection Service wn When an When SQL o access text execution is made is failed oO ao N eee SQL failure log ae Figure 8 1
389. hen the device tags used for trigger conditions of the job z have been sampled normally g The job can be started even if device tags used for another job s trigger conditions have not been sampled normally APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface App 5 Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables Appendix 2 1 ASCII code table Table App 1 ASCII code table 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lay NUL SP 0 P p Ee 1 A Q a q Rey 2 B R b r 3 C S c s 4 4 D T d t ka 5 E U e u om amp 6 F V f v 7 G W g w 8 8 H xX h x 9 Y i y ea J Z j z Be K k i a D M m LE l gt N ff RES O E o App 6 Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables Appendix 2 1 ASCII code table APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product w lt q A 1 ASCII characters a8 The shaded sections can be used ae However neither a number nor an underscore _ can be used as the first character g Table App 2 ASCII characters 8 i 1 2 k 4 5 6 7 8 f To o SP 0 P p 3 SS 1 A Q a q Z Ea 2 B R b r 3 C
390. her CPUs can be checked with the special relays SM220 to SM223 LC User s manual for the CPU module used 2 20 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration 2 6 2 Precautions for using multiple CPU system 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aerie 2 6 3 Precautions for using database The following shows the precautions for using database EJ Point For characters that can be used for field and table names refer to the following gt Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc OVERVIEW N z O lt o U zZ Q S 1 Microsoft SQL Server a Set SQL Server and Windows or SQL Server and Windows Authentication mode for the security authentication mode pl zZ Microsoft SQL Server 2000 2 Configure the setting in SQL Server Properties Configure z N SQL Server Properties Configure local Server Settings Database Settings Replication Generel Memory Processor Connections Security ie amp SQL Server provides authentication based on Windows a T accounts and a named SQL Server login ID and password F a Authentication S fi z O g fee axe C Windows only Audit level None C Failure C Success CA Ownership chaining IV Allow cross database ownership chaining Startup service account 3 Start and run SQL Server in the following account INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION System account Th
391. hether to enable or disable notification of the access error status i Connection timeout 7 9 Server Service Setting In case a connection error occurs on the network between the MES interface module and the server computer set a timeout time during which the MES interface module will detect the error Range 1 to 180 seconds Default 10 seconds 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 1 Server service name Up to 16 characters Enter a server service name The set server service name is used in Job settings A For characters that can be used for server service names refer to the following lt L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product Note that using the name same as the one of the tag set in Device tag settings is not Z allowed 5 Nz 2 Server type z6 a Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed Table 7 43 Options of Server type N Item Description Database server Used in Communication action of Job settings lt Application server Used in Program execution of Job settings a Lu at n b When Database server is selected set the following items Table 7 44 Items set for Database server Item Description Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed Z y Up to 30 characters 8 B 2 For characters
392. his name is entered when installing Microsoft SQL Server 2000 LA This can be checked with the SQL Server service manager server Start J n rA O 0 Clicking Performance and Maintenance 3 on the S Control Panel displays the Performance and p z N Maintenance dialog box To display the Control Panel select Start pola bre Control Panel tate 3 For Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 9 System and Maintenance ee OOF For Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 8 a 3 E Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 ano Windows Server 2012 R2 System and Security fe ee ee E Clicking Administrative Tools displays Q 0 8 Aes Administrative Tools dialog box INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS l To the next page MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION foe z O O mf A Z Q S m a ee as 22 Lu og Oz ZE W W nn 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 8 From the previous page ODBC Data Source Administrator Pix User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About System Data Sources Name Driver An ODBC System data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A System data source is visible to all users on this machine including NT services Cancel Apply Help Create New Data Source Select a driver for which you w
393. ice device in n 1 need be set Devices in and after n 2 are configured automatically Array setting I Use array Length of array 4 C series block RY AY Component List fo H 4 fal Component name CPU name Device Data type Device n 1 Component_A ControlCPU bo Single word D24 2 Component_B ControlCPU D1 D2 Double word D25 D26 3 Component_c ControlCPU D3 D7 String 10 D27 D31 n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 4 lm A S NOC a Component_A DO D8 D16 D24 a gt Component_B D1 to D2 D9 to D10 D17 to D18 D25 to D26 10 u Component_C D3 to D7 D11 to D15 D19 to D23 D27 to D31 13 Megas aS as 14 15 t 16 Block tjl I array block size of tag components in project 3 No of statistical processes in project 0 No of device points in tag 32 Figure 7 34 When block is selected Es Point When device types are different block cannot be selected T 44 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 2 Setting items in Array setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting Configure the settings for assigning programmable controller CPU devices to tags ai Up to 256 components can be set for one tag i Note that the maximum number of components available for one project is 4096 2 Adding a component e Set required items in Component setting input and click the Add button
394. ified user switch over e Remote desktop e Large font size Advanced setting of Display Properties DPI setting other than 100 set the size of text and illustration other than smaller 100 e Power save mode Standby Hibernate Sleep e Windows XP Mode e Windows Touch or Touch INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION wn e Modern UI i e Client Hyper V Q e Server Core Installation E le O w Z o O cae EE Ze 25 ic hss ZRO Z O 5298 Bi TE OFF oi AnNa 2 4 Operating Environment 2 13 2 4 2 Server computer SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Le series 2 Considerations for the database The restrictions when using database are as follows To use a relational database a license based on the number of MES interfaces is usually required Varies depending on the relational database type and license type For details please consult the relational database vendor e The redundant relational data base cannot be used e For the operating environment refer to the specifications of the relational database used Use 32 bit operating system for 32 bit relational database e For the precautions for using each database refer to the following section Section 2 6 3 Precautions for using database a Supported version Table 2 9 Supported version of Databases Database Serial No first five digits of Supported version of MES interface module
395. igits of serial No are 16071 or lower first 5 digits of serial No are 16072 or the access target CPU 4001h occurs used higher Were the devices of RCPU which do not e Access the device within the range that Tag collection error occurs exist in the range of QCPU or C Controller can be collected for QCPU or C module collected Controller module 1 0 54 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module APPENDICES APPENDICES SLSEC KEY series setting Multiple records can be acquired by one action e MultiSelect was added as a communication action in the Job setting The max no of characters available for table names and field names in communication actions of the Job setting was changed to 32 Ww f0 lt B yo we Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX 25 xm MESInterface aC 9 Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions Q 2 if This section explains the functions added in the MES interface module and MX a MESInterface and the serial No and software version corresponding to the functions g added Table App 1 Functions added in MES interface module and MX MESInterface Serial No first 5 digits of Software version of MX Functions added Reference MES interface module MESInterface 9 y O R dant CP dul ded t licabl ra edundant CPU modules were added to applicable i Section 2 2 faj systems m Q C
396. iguration Tool C gt Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres b Do not format the CompactFlash card with Windows If doing so by mistake restore the card according to the CompactFlash card manual O About a CompactFlash card file User original files cannot be stored to the CompactFlash card installed to the MES interface module If the user original files are stored in the card the characters in directories or files may be corrupted or deleted 7 Service life of CompactFlash card A CompactFlash card has a service life restriction on the number of writes For details refer to the specifications of each product Generally the service life of a CompactFlash card is dependant on its free space Therefore set an appropriate value to the user settable DB buffering capacity so that a sufficient free space will be ensured on the CompactFlash card lt s Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting 4 7 2 nstallation removing the CompactFlash card This section explains how to install remove the CompactFlash card Installation of the CompactFlash card Installation of a CompactFlash card f Install the CompactFlash card gt 2 Installation of the CompactFlash card Is the programmable controller power ON
397. il it clicks G28 Zwo SoZ 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 19 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC A series 4 8 Battery This section explains the mounting and replacement of the battery 4 8 1 Battery specifications This section shows the specifications of the MES interface module battery Table 4 9 Battery specifications Description Item Type Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0 V Nominal current 1800 mAh Battery life when stored Actual life of 5 years room temperature Battery life when used L gt Section 4 8 3 Battery replacement Lithium content 0 52 g Application File protection For the battery directive in EU member states refer to Appendix 9 4 8 2 Mounting of battery The MES interface module is shipped with the battery connector disconnected Before using the MES interface module connect the battery connector Connector Connector fixing ae MES interface module Open the cover on the bottom of the MES interface module Check if the battery is correctly mounted After confirming the insertion direction is correct insert the battery connector into the connector pin on the case End Figure 4 18 Battery mounting procedure Point e Firmly push the battery connector all the way in to the connector pin e When operating without battery mounted re
398. ile is deleted from the oldest one oe Zz O afa Oz mE E os OF ow aon Q e E 0 zZ Lu n 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 20 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series 8 6 Importing Exporting Files Import export files 1 Import Import a saved file D Select File Import from the menu 2 The Open dialog box is displayed Set the following items then click the Open button Look in G9 MESIF S dbConnected Fiemme Fo Files of type De connection service setting files xml Cancel Figure 8 11 Open dialog box Table 8 8 Setting items in the Open dialog box Look in Select the location where the file is stored File name Specify the name of the file to be imported Select a type of the file to be imported DB connection service setting files Files of type x Point When importing a file use the one that was stored by the export function Do not edit any export file 8 21 8 6 Importing Exporting Files 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Aerie 2 Export Export the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file Select File Export from the menu z 2 The Save As dialog box is displayed Set the following items then click the Save button 6 E f Save in
399. in Trigger conditions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job The job is activated when the trigger condition value is changed from false to true Trigger conditions Combination far ID v The job starts when the trigger conditions changes from false to true Trigger 1 Disable z Trigger 2 Disable Figure 7 44 Trigger conditions Table 7 47 Setting items in Trigger conditions Item Description Combination Selects conjunction of Trigger 1 and 2 Trigger 1 Selects Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Selects Trigger 2 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions 1 Combination r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL a Selects a combination of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 e OR When either of them is true the result is true AND When both of them are true the result is true MELSEC Aeres The combination result of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 is changed from false to true the job is activated b The following shows the timings at which the combination result of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 is changed from false to true In any other cases because the combination result is not changed from false to true the job is not activated Table 7 48 Timings at which combination result of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 is changed from false to true Combination Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Combination result OR When either of them is true the result is
400. in the Edit items tree and adds it T 4 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 2 Menu configuration r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aerie 3 View z w hA View J Toolbar v Status bar Figure 7 7 View menu Z aS Table 7 3 View menu items ES O rie Reference ae Item Description section Toolbar Select whether to show or hide the toolbar Status bar Select whether to show or hide the status bar a 6 4 Online S oO N Transfer setup Write af Zs Read 2 5 il E Verify Zoe ie amp Remote operation nao View working log One shot execution Q Figure 7 8 Online menu a ZE 3 Table 7 4 Online menu items Z w Reference Item Description 7 section Transfer setup Set the target MES interface module Section 7 12 1 Write Writes the MES interface function settings project to the MES interface module Section 7 12 2 no Reads the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface Read Section 7 12 3 module Q Compares the MES interface function settings in the MES interface module with rs Verify Section 7 12 4 those in the current project 7 Displays or changes the operation status of the MES interface module or formats Remote operation Section 7 13 3 a CompactFlash card View working log Allows users to check the operation logs of the MES interface module Section 7 12 5 Q S
401. in the project project No of statistical Displays the number of the components in the project for which Perform processings in project statistical processing is selected No of device points in tag Displays the number of total device points used in Device Tag setting le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 36 ZPO z e O Z 5 U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 8 Device Tag Setting T 39 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 1 Device tag name Up to 16 characters Enter a device tag name Configured tags are used in Job settings etc For characters that can be used for device tag names refer to the following K gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product Note that using the name same as the one set in Server service settings is not allowed 2 Sampling settings a Normal sampling Tag data are collected at the specified intervals When Normal sampling is selected the tag sampling interval can be set in units of seconds within the range from 1 to 32767 o High speed sampling up to 96 points Tag data are collected at high speed at the specified intervals When High speed sampling is selected the tag sampling interval can be set in units of 100 milliseconds within the range from 1 to 600 x 100ms
402. iner eviiie eas 6 7 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication Action cece eeeeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeettaeeeeeeetceeeeesenaaes 6 10 6 1 7 Stored procedure call function Communication Action ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetteeeeeeenaaes 6 11 6 1 8 Arithmetic processing function Operation action ee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 6 12 6 1 9 Program execution FUNCTION cc cece ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeecesenenseeceeeeeneeceeeesenseeeensensseeeeeeeneaeeneeneneees 6 12 621 10 DB puffering TUNCHION i sccsiecicccessiiececceetisertedesi creed da teaned a T E 6 13 NEAT sPPECAUUOMS ensien a EENET tenets EEE E EEEE EESE 6 20 6 2 XML Processing FUNCION caisseta Padeatenstiaeeberds iedee daa adeeeeen decades iedene 6 22 6 3 Time Synchronization FUNCTION eee reece entre etree etre adnia Aaa E E 6 23 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU uu eee 6 23 6 3 2 Daylight saving time FUNCTION 2 0 0 0 eee ai ERO a a 6 24 CHAPTER7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 1to7 147 7 4 MES Interface Function Configuration Tol ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeencneeeeeeeeneeeeseeenaeeeeseeeneeeeeneeaaes 7 1 7 2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool eeeessssseeesssesrnessssrrnsserrnrnsennnssseennnsneen 7 1 To Oeren STUC oina ea n ER 7 2 TSA Soren SUCE caie5 es cdieeet idee deete deeeescuet stecntentadeeenledasieenvonntatecelieia
403. ing Or an invalid device was specified Information on the network e Initialize the module and then Access target CPU setting ae 0610h Snor communication route set in Access configure the Access target CPU ri target CPU settings is corrupted settings again e Remove the cause of the module Unable to handle the processing due 0617h Module stop error stop error and reset the to a module stop error programmable controller CPU Because the load applied to the e Re execute the setting update Setting update time out repli 0618h Gol module is high setting update timed e Reset the programmable controller r out CPU The device name specified in Device Refer to the accessible device list 0619h Device name error i i j tag settings is erroneous or invalid and reenter a correct device name e Check the settings in Device tag A value which cannot be properly settings BCD type conversion 3 061Ah Sior expressed in BCD type was stored in Check if the value stored in the ri the device device can be properly expressed in BCD type Invalid multiple CPU settings was 0626h Multiple CPU setting error configured in Access target CPU settings e Correct Access target CPU The network No head I O or station settings 0627h Network communication No of the network route which was gsi route error specified in Access target CPU settings is out of range Tag sampling interval The sampling interv
404. ing Select and MultiSelect for a field whose data type is single type or double type perform the following for Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 e Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb in the ODBC setting for the database used F Section 8 2 3 For Microsoft Access e When the database source file used is accdb change it to mdb Not available for Select Update Delete conditions Memo type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used for Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 Clock precision Module time In units of seconds Server time Depends on the database server Server time is not available for Stored procedure When the data is written to tag for Wonderware Historian the module date and time will be added automatically Section 7 11 2 5 c When Insert is selected for Action type 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 89 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j w z iL pa im Z o w l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 ZO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 3 About variables Variables can be used as component values for each act
405. ing 1 to 64 error code areas Name Lafee leae elr Te Eases Sampling 1 to 10 error codes 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 _ N Sampling 11 to 20 error codes 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 X N Sampling 21 to 30 error codes 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 w N oe N Sampling 31 to 40 error codes 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Sampling 41 to 50 error codes 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 51 GYA 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Sampling 51 to 60 error codes 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 Sc OS RA Sampling 61 to 64 error codes 1072 1073 1074 1075 3 24 3 5 Buffer Memory List SPECIFICATIONS M eL aC Q series 3 The following table shows the error code area assignment for the Access target CPUs 1 to 64 Buffer memory address 4008 to 4071 Table 3 17 Access target CPU 1 to 64 error code areas Name Access target CPU 1 to 10 error codes Access target CPU 11 to 20 error codes Access target CPU 21 to 30 error codes Access target CPU 31 to 40 error codes Access target CPU 41 to 50 error codes Access target CPU 51 to 60 error codes Access target CPU 61 to 64 error codes Access target CPU 1 to 64 error code areas I TO 4008 4009 4010 12 13 4019 4020 22 23 4029
406. ing and installation environment of the MES interface module are the same as those of a programmable controller CPU For details refer to the following manual OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM gt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 4 1 Handling Precautions SPECIFICATIONS This section explains the precautions for handling the MES interface module itself A 1 Do not drop or apply severe shock to the module case since it is made of resin 2 Before touching the module always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the module to fail or malfunction e w x fa WW Q O x a fal zZ CE Bae W ma Do 3 Tighten the module fixing screws within the following range o lt 3 Table 4 1 Tightening torque amp z 709 Screw Tightening torque range Z 7 25 Module fixing screw usually not required M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 N m The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration no PA 9 E O R 3 fe wW z X EE 25 228 ZrO O 528 Te 9 ZO OSE oo fi ba ann 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 4 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 2 4 2 Settings and Procedure to Operation MELSEC A series
407. ing the following steps 4 to O set copy targets in Selected Actions to replicate 4 From Source Jobs select a job that includes a desired action Actions of the job selected in 4 are listed in Source Actions Select an action to be copied Multiple selection is available Clicking the gt button displays the action s selected in in Selected Actions to replicate Table 7 60 Button operations in the Replicate Actions of other Jobs dialog box Item Description butt Puts the action s selected in Source Actions into Selected Actions utton to replicate Puts all of the actions in Source Actions into Selected Actions to gt gt button replicate Deletes the action s selected in Selected Actions to replicate from lt button the box Deletes all of the actions in Selected Actions to replicate from the lt lt button bax Clicking the button executes copying Copied actions are placed after existing actions 7 82 7 11 Job Setting Actions MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres Actions Type Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete Procedure Operation NOORWNH Add Communication action X Edit Del tig Summary DB1 RECIPEDATA RECIPE1 gt gt Process1 RECIPE1 RECIPE2 gt gt Process1 RECIPEZHRECIPE3 gt gt P DB1 CompletionReport Completed lt lt Process1 Completed Rejected lt l
408. ing will add the item INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Click Add item e Select Edit Add item from the menu When the item is added properly it is automatically selected and the edit screen is switched to the one for the added item FUNCTIONS j EJ Point Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting type refer to the relevant section of each item le 2 ms G W z ESO 26 36 brats z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 3 Screen Structure Laz 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 3 Deleting an item D Selecting an item to be deleted and performing either of the following will delete the item Click 3 Delete item e Select Edit Delete item from the menu Point 1 When the selected item is currently used for another item it cannot be deleted As the error dialog box appears identify the location stop using it for another item and then delete the item 2 The top item listed under Access target CPU settings default name ControlCPU cannot be deleted 4 Replicating an item Q Selecting an item and choosing Edit Replicate item from the menu replicates the item 2 When the item is added properly it is automatically selected and the
409. ion was the power of the programmable controller turned OFF and then ON or was the programmable controller CPU reset Has a communication error occurred during one shot execution e Write a project again and perform Update settings lt 3 Section 7 15 4 One shot execution The program specified by the program execution function is not executed Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L3 Section 10 2 Error Code List Was the Windows account specified in Server service settings used to log on the application server computer once or more Use the account that has been used to log on once or more An account that has not been used before cannot be used Was the password of the Windows account specified in Server service settings set empty Set a password of the account or use another account that does not have an empty password An account that has an empty password cannot be used Does the program need to be run with administrator privileges by a user in Administrators group Programs that need to be run with administrator privileges by a user in Administrators group cannot be executed Specify a program that does not need to be run with administrator privileges Was execution of a program inc
410. ion File Format CSV File Format App 39 Appendix 3 14 ACFIELD CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Le series 3 Setting item Table App 45 Setting item Item Description Setting value Field name Any character string Return RETURN Input Integer ININTEGER Input Real INDECIMAL Input String INSTRING Input Date INDATE FIELDNAME put Date l Return Argument Output Integer OUTINTEGER Output Real OUTDECIMAL Output String OUTSTRING 1 O Integer INOUTINTEGER I O Real INOUTDECIMAL I O String INOUTSTRING Tag TAG Date DATE Date string DATESTR TYPE Constant type Numerical value NUMBER Character string STRING Variable VARIABLE None NONE When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 64 4 TAG Tag When other than the above is selected Blank with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE 1 to 256 ELEMENT Component When other than the above is selected Blank with TYPE When TAG is selected with TYPE Blank When DATE is Server time SERVER selected with Module t UNIT TYPE odule time When DATESTR is selected with Character string valid as a date TYPE 6 VALUE Constant value When NUMBER is selected with Numerical value TYPE When STRING is selected with TYPE Any character string When VARIABLE is selected with Variable name TYPE When NONE is selected with TYPE Bl
411. ion of actions Program execution ae Select an application server to be accessed destination Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application Command line server computer Up to 127 characters Check return value Set whether to check the return value or not Wait for execution Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before completion executing the next processing 1 Execute program before action or Execute program after action a Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution of actions b When Execute program before action or Execute program after action is enabled make the setting described in 2 and subsequent sections 2 Program execution destination Select an application server to be accessed 3 Command line Up to 127 characters Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application server computer 12 For characters that can be used for command lines refer to the following 3 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Programs that need to be run with administrator privileges by a user in Administrators group are not executable 2 To execute a program including any displays place the application server computer into the logon status 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres
412. ion or as condition values of Select Update Delete conditions The following table lists data types of variables and those of assignable fields If the type of a variable does not match the data type of its substitution target field an error occurs resulting in cancellation of job execution Up to 64 variables can be set for one job Point 1 A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held 2 The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value of zero 3 If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component when a substitution tag is the tag component Type conversion to tag component error is displayed Check the source type and the data type of the tag component lt gt Section 7 15 5 Type mismatch Table 7 70 Data types of variables and those of assignable fields Data type of assignable field I Data type of variable 21UeS variable names that pore SQL Server Access 2000 M yP can be entered in Component Oracle 8i 9i 2000 2005 Access 2003 2007 Wonderware 10g 11g 12c 2008 2012 F Historian MSDE 2000 2010 2013 Yes No type bit Byte type int Integer type smallint L Int t Onana a a e NUMBER tinyint ong n E i Discrete Ta Bit type Single type g i me Up to 16 characters CHAR float 3 Analog Single precision type Double type eh For characters that can be used VARCHAR rea Tag Integer Double precision
413. ions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states Appendix 9 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The symbol shown in Figure App 11 is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers Figure App 11 Symbol Note This symbol is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes App 74 Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States Appendix 9 1 Disposal precautions APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 9 2 Exportation precautions g The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or Be exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states az e To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging 2s e To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products g 1 Labeling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2
414. iplication Division Remainder 8 m button Selecting a row and clicking the ll button reverses the order between the selected row and the one immediately above it The t button cannot be clicked on the first row 9 l button Selecting a row and clicking the l button reverses the order between the selected row and the one immediately below it The l button cannot be clicked on the last row 10 button Selecting a row and clicking the button deletes the row 11 Tag component data length in job Point Operation actions are executed in order from the top to the bottom Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Kel ries 1 About constants Constants can be used for Operation tag and Component that are operands The following shows the constant types and values that can be entered in the g Component column Table 7 82 Constant types and values available for Component Up to 16 characters Number Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 fi 2 e Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 2S Up to 32 characters String For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following lt _ gt Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc Up to
415. is account lt lt n Figure 2 11 SQL Server Properties Configure 2 e Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE 2000 2 Set the security authentication mode into the Mixed Mode Specify the command parameter at installation of the MSDE 2000 a setup sapwd sa SECURITYMODE SQL s z sa Specify any password z 6 8 b For Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and Microsoft SQL Server 2012 return 922 values output arguments and input output arguments of a stored procedure ae which returns a result set cannot be acquired E a zwo Aann 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration 2 21 2 6 3 Precautions for using database 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 22 MELSEC Le series 2 Microsoft Access a The number of fields to be updated UPDATE by the one Communication action is up to 127 b Do not make multiple accesses to one and the same file Do not make access from multiple MES interface modules c There are some restrictions for the data type which can be assigned to tag component constant value and variable with MES Interface Function Configuration Tool lt Section 7 11 1 1 About tag components Section 7 11 1 2 About constants Section 7 11 1 3 About variables 3 Wonderware Historian a The insertion INSERT only can be used with Communication action b The rollback of insertion INSERT to the database is disabled 2 6
416. isconnection within the g programmable controller system e Failure in device data writing or an operation error e Failure in access to database except for jobs for which DB buffering is enabled Section 6 1 10 DB buffering function lt 3 e When statistic processing of Moving average Moving maximum or Moving pE minimum is specified for a tag component sampling for the specified number S of times is not complete e Failure in program execution b If a job execution is canceled the operation processed before the error A occurrence returns to the status before the job execution 5 The following explains access to device data in the programmable controller CPU and to the database 1 Device data in the programmable controller CPU T Since all of data are written to the device data area in the programmable Sae controller CPU at a time upon completion of job execution any change due to P the error is not reflected in the device data of the programmable controller pae CPU 2 Database f Rollback is executed assuming the time immediately before job activation as 23 a commit point k However when the database is Wonderware Historian rollback is not E executed When an error occurs data input before error occurrence is 25 reflected on the database ez c When Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution has been selected a value is assigned to the specified tag component K7 Section 7 10 5
417. it Error IP 0x20310010 address Failed to transmit a response due to disconnection SID Session ID Response Transmit Error IP 0x20310011 address Timed out during response transmission e Check if it is connected to the network SID Session ID Response Transmit Error IP e Check if the gateway and or hub is operating address Check if the power of the module is not turned 0x20310012 Detected failure of the MES interface module or the off configuration computer during response transmission SID Session ID Response Transmit Error IP 0x20310013 address Send I O error SID Session ID DB Connect Data source 0x20400001 User Failed Failed in DB connection due to insufficient memory ee e Terminate any unnecessary applications SID Session ID DB Connect Data source Add more memory to the personal computer ox User Failed 0x20400007 Failed in DB connection due to insufficient resources e Check if the source IP address belongs to the SID Session ID DB Connect Data source MES interface module or the configuration 0x20400010 User Failed computer Invalid DB connection request e Check the version of the MES interface module or MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 0x20400011 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative 0x20400012 To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 29 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service CA J XML MESSAG
418. ix problems Network and Internet View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options Hardware and Sound f bs Clock Language and Region User Accounts Change account type Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution View devices and printers Change keyboards or other input methods Add a device Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Programs Uninstall a program Get programs Had ef amp eee Select Change User Account Control settings Whee gt Control Panel System Control Panel Home Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues tem and Secur one a r rol setti Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time Windows Firewall Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall Network and Internet Hardware and Sound Programs User Accounts Appearance and Personalization Clock Language and Region Ease of Access Windows Update Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates System View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Power Options Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps Backup and Restore Back up your compute
419. izing the time server computer with CPU No 1 e Check if the clock time is synchronized between the specified SNTP server and the host server OAOTh SNTP server time enquiry Failed in the SNTP server time correctly error enquiry e Check that the time of the specified SNTP server has not been manually changed OA08h The CompactFlash card may be to Setting read error Replace the CompactFlash card corrupted OAODh Install a CompactFlash card No CompactFlash card has been i e Turn the power OFF and ON or OAOFh CF access stopped error installed reset the programmable controller File access is stopped X2 is ON CPU No CompactFlash card has been 0A11h No CF card installed installed OA12h CF directory operation The CompactFlash card may be error corrupted The setting file written to the module is OA13h Transferred setting file invalid Install a CompactFlash card check error The CompactFlash card may be corrupted The setting file is invalid 0A14h Setting file check error The CompactFlash card may be corrupted OA80h ar e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative OA83h e Check the actions in Job settings e In Job List of R t ti Some action set in the job has an i S E aa APA ion 0A84h Illegal action setting error i aainar the job having any illegal action can a a be checked Such a job is not displayed OBOOh ae e Please consult your local Mitsubishi
420. layed when a module continuation error has occurred in the MES Continuation error interface module Section 10 1 2 Error types Displayed when a module stop error has occurred in the MES interface Stop error module Section 10 1 2 Error types 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function Manipulate the operation status of the MES interface function a Module operation Stop C Restart Up C Clear error Zz Figure 7 107 Operation lt 3 Be 1 Stop 26 amp Selecting the Stop radio button and clicking the Execute button stops the operation of the MES interface function n 6 Point 7 1 The following operation also stops the operation of the MES interface 5 function B Click m Stop 2 If some job is being executed the job is canceled O LCF Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation Zu nDo oa O 2 Restart a Selecting the Restart radio button and clicking the button restarts the operation of the stopped MES interface function INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION E Point The following operation also restarts the operation of the stopped MES interface function Click j Restart FUNCTIONS j le 2 e G
421. local Mitsubishi representative 0B24h 0B25h to 0B28h Tag value read error System error Failed to read data from the tag e Check if Device tag settings is correct e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0B29h Type conversion to tag component error The data could not be converted to the type specified for the tag component 10 2 Error Code List Check the data type of the tag component or the substitute value e Check that the operation result obtained by operation action is within the range of the data type of the substitute source tag component When the database is Microsoft Access 2007 2010 2013 When using Select and MultiSelect for a field whose data type is single type or double type check that Microsoft Access Driver mdb is selected in the ODBC setting lt gt Section 8 2 3 For Microsoft Access To the next page 10 13 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT 1 Z Q O n w l D 9 E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 10 14 MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error code Error name Description Action OB2Ah it e Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative 0B2Dh 0B2Eh Data stored in the DB
422. log For Windows Vista Windows T Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 DB Connection Service Client also outputs errors to Windows Event Log 1 Event log of Windows a Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Table 10 4 Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Error code 1 Error description and cause There is no setting file Start the service using the default setting Corrective action Configure the settings again with DB Connection Service Setting Tool b Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Error code Error description and cause Corrective action 4 Unable to start the service due to insufficient memory e Terminate any unnecessary applications 2 Unable to start the service due to insufficient e Add more memory to the personal computer resources 3 Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative 4 se e Refer to the actions of error codes 101 to 129 Failed to read the setting file 2 So e Actions are displayed with error codes 101 to The service is stopped 129 e Refer to the actions of error codes 401 to 403 6 Failed to i
423. loper indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when some functions are added 2 18 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration This section describes precautions for system configuration OVERVIEW 2 6 1 Precautions for using Redundant CPU N The following describes the precautions for using the Redundant CPU 1 Mountable base unit When using the MES interface module in a redundant system be sure to mount the MES interface module to the extension base unit for CPU or redundant power supply The MES interface module cannot be mounted to the main base unit in a redundant z O lt o U zZ Q system 2 2 Access target CPU setting g e When the MES interface module is mounted to the Redundant CPU it can E access the CPU of host station only a It cannot access the CPU of other station When the MES interface module is mounted to other than the Redundant CPU it cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station r 3 Device Tag setting Sag e When a system switching occurs to the Redundant CPU collection of device tag Fe may stop for about 15 seconds 2 e When selecting High speed sampling from Sampling settings of Device Tag setting be sure to create system area for the user setting to the Redunda
424. luding displays attempted with the application server computer logged off Was execution of the program including displays attempted while multiple users have logged on to the application server computer 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom To execute a program including displays set the application server computer into the logon status When a program including displays is executed the program screen is displayed for only one user who has logged on to the application server Make all of the users log off the application server computer once and execute the program with a single user logged on To the next page 10 51 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module CA J XML MESSAGE gt FORMAT 0 z Q O n w l D O E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom Job startup is delayed Checked item Were the trigger conditions for multiple jobs met concurrently Corrective action If the trigger conditions for multiple jobs are met concurrently startup of some job may be delayed lt Section 6 1 11 1 Operation behavior of jobs Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log lt 7 Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective a
425. lue in the programmable controller CPU at the time of writing from the MES interface module Is the number of databases set for the database server computer sufficient e Correct the set number of databases or change the number of Server service settings items to the set number of databases L gt Section 7 9 Server Service Setting e One database connection must be used for one item of Server service settings When Select and MultiSelect are used for a field whose data type is single type or double type is Microsoft Access Driver mdb accdb selected in the ODBC setting for Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom e Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb in the ODBC setting Section 8 2 3 For Microsoft Access To the next page 10 49 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module se XML MESSAGE n FORMAT 1 Z Q O o w al a 9 ad APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom Job will not start up 10 50 Checked item Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log lt 3 Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Corrective action e If an error has occurred identify the error caus
426. med as dbConnector log 001 A new dbConnector log is created and logging resumes E ar dbConnector log 001 is renamed as dbConnector log 002 555 Z W T Foe The total number of files exceeds 3 if dbConnector log 002 is renamed bee therefore dbConnector log 002 is deleted 5 Output SQL failed log Default Output a Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION b When selecting Output SQL failed log set the following items Table 8 7 Setting items when Output SQL failed log is selected Item Description Output destination Set the output destination of the log file SQL failed log capacity Set the file capacity per SQL failure log and number of files 2 1 Output destination Default sqlFailed log 2 Set the output destination of the log file z If no output destination is set the log is output to the install folder If a read only file is specified the log is not output and SQL failure log output 8 error is output to Administrative Tools Event Viewer of Windows Q 6 Coe 2 SQL failed log capacity Range 1 to 10 MB x 2 to 100 files Default 1 MB x 10 B33 files o2z ZrO Set the file capacity per SQL failure log and number of files If the log exceeds the capacity for one file a new log file which copies the original log file name with adding a number is created If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files the f
427. mesir 2 o dbConnected 5 58 Filename Save z Save as type Ds connection service setting files xml x Cancel E O Figure 8 12 Save As dialog box 5 wW oO Table 8 9 Setting items in the Save As dialog box 2 Item Description Save in Select the location where the file is to be saved File name Specify the name of the file to be saved Files ohane Select a type of the file to be saved Z y i ve e DB connection service setting files OB 2 a ie nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL oe z O O mf A Z Q S m a ee as 22 Lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 6 Importing Exporting Files 8 22 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 23 MELSEC LAY series 8 7 Help The product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool and the Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website screen can be displayed 1 Product information Select Help Product information from the menu The Product information dialog box of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool is displayed Product information DB connection service setting tool Ver 1 004 Copyright C 2005 2006 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation All Rights Reserved This product is licensed to Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co ProductID Warning This product is protected by the copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized
428. mmable controller CPU in multiple CPU Clock system CPU No 1 or the SNTP server computer lt 3 Section 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 5VDC internal current consumption 0 69A 2 External dimensions 98 3 86 H x 27 4 1 08 W x 90 3 54 D mm inch G Weight 0 16 kg r 14 The MES interface module distinguishes 10BASE T from 100BASE TX depending on the device on other end a For connection with a hub not having the auto negotiation function set the hub side to half duplex 2 auto communication mode 2 This number applies when a repeater hub is used gt lt When using a switching hub check the number of cascaded stages with the manufacturer of the E o 3 hub to be used a22 3 For the maximum segment length a length between hubs consult with the manufacturer of the Zn switching hub used O 528 Te 9 ZO OSE om fi ba ann 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS DB interface Job 3 2 MELSEC A series 2 Software specifications Table 3 2 MX MESInterface performance specifications Item No of connected databases No of databases that can be connected Allowable number of settings Specifications Maximum 32 items project Oracle 8i 32 bits Oracle 9i 32 bits Oracle 10g 32 bits Oracle 11g 32 bit x64 Oracle 12c x64 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 32 bits e Microsoft SQL Server 2005 32 bits e Microsoft SQL Serv
429. mory areas is displayed Table 10 2 Displayed items No Display Buffer memory Address HAY LED 0000 RUN LED OFF ERR LED OFF 1 8000 RUN LED ON ERR LED OFF 0 1 Information C000 RUN LED ON ERR LED ON q Switch 1 status Mode setting 2 H W SW z F 2 information Switch 2 status Default operation setting Battery error detection setting 3 i 3 Switch 3 status Response monitoring time setting 4 1 0 6 10 1 Error Codes 10 1 3 System monitor 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres 10 2 Error Code List The error code list is shown below 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module z Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Q ie Error code Error name Description Action a e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 3 0001h System error Y representative Correct Access target CPU settings e Check the communication cable status and access target CPU status Correct the response monitoring time D setting fa Q Section 4 5 3 Response i monitoring time setting Switch 3 amp Lower byte 7 No response has been received Check the routing parameter set for the 0002h Response time out error from the other station CPU s on the access route Check the control CPU s of the network module s on the access route to the access target CPU module Y Ww gt Section 3 2 2 Accessible routes a
430. mponent D256 D511 CE D511 Figure App 9 Acquisition example of the Motion CPU device data Appendix 6 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly App 63 XML MESSAGE FORMAT TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES rs ELGG Ley aries Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R Appendix 7 1 Overview of warning messages When using the operating system with the User Account Control function a warning message is displayed when the following is attempted as an administrator e Installation uninstallation of MX MESInterface Start of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before setup exe Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow Itrust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before OB User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Program name setup exe Publisher Unknown File origin CD DVD drive Show deat Lvs Change when these notifications appear Figure App 10 User Account Control warning message App 64 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R Appendix 7 1 Overview of warning messages APPENDICES MELSEC Kel ries Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages Point The User Account
431. mputer Failed to receive data due to insufficient memory To the next page 10 28 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error code Error description and cause Corrective action SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP 0x20300010 address Connection disconnected during request reception SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP 0x20300011 address Timed out during request reception e Check if it is connected to the network SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP e Check if the gateway and or hub is operating address e Check if the power of the module is not turned 0x20300012 Detected failure of the MES interface module or the off configuration computer while waiting for or receiving a request SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP 0x20300013 address Receive O error SI Session ID Request Receive Error ip Check if the source IP address belongs to the 0x20300014 address i MES interface module or the configuration Buffer overrun Request length exceeded S miputer 31D Session ID Request REGANE Error e Check the version of the MES interface module 0x20900019 adaress or MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Received an invalid request SID Session ID Response Transm
432. n Database error number and Database error message in the output log format in the case of failure refer to the manual for each database Depending on the Error code however Database Message and subsequent data cannot be output According to the error code confirm the error details and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 2 2 Access log of DB Connection Service a Connection Table 8 15 Connection to a database Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID DB Connect Target data source Connection User Name Success Output succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID DB Connect Target data source Connection User Name Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 DB Connect DataSource User Name Success succeeded Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20400022 SID 00000001 DB Connect DataSource User Name Failed When failed Database Message 0x000003f9 Oracle ODBC OraJORA 01017 invalid username password logon denied b Disconnection Table 8 16 Disconnection to a database Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID DB Disconnect Target data source Connection User Name Success Output succeeded log format When tici Date Error code SID Session ID DB Disconnect Target data source Connection User Name Failed i Database Message Database er
433. n or Browse procedure name button of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool the table information browse request or stored procedure information browse request is received from the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2 Acquire the table information table names or field names or stored procedure information in the database Send the table information such as table names and field names or stored procedure information to the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEG Q series 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database z When using DB Connection Service on the database server computer the ODBC setting gt for the database to be used must be set beforehand z The following explains the ODBC setting procedure For details refer to the following K Manuals and online help for the database software and operating system used 8 He O 1 For Oracle be gt The following shows a setting example using Oracle 9i with Microsoft Windows ee XP Professional Operating System Set the following conditions Data source name SAMPLEDS 2 TNS service name 2 SAMPLETNS e OracleHome OraHome92 p 1 Data source name can be set as desired 2 For Data source name in Server service settings use the name set with this setting 2 The TNS service name is the name for accessing an Oracle database The name is entered when i
434. n send data to the database For the time synchronization function setting refer to the following lt 7 Section 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU 2 n a By using the SNTP time query timing XB and the SNTP time query result area buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 the time information acquired from the SNTP server computer can be utilized in the programmable controller CPU m z 1 Program examples The following are program examples where when MO turns ON the time of the g N programmable controller CPU is set at the SNTP time query timing XB ON e When the head I O No of the MES interface module is 0000 it indicates that the module is installed in slot 0 of the main base unit A time error in these programs shall be equal to two scan times or less 9 e MO X0B U0 E Jt Bmov G11501 DO K7 ala DATEWR DO Figure 6 18 Program example 1 z 5 52 zg QZ MO XOB ED ta is KO K11501 D K7 DAT EWR DO Figure 6 19 Program example 2 ez o Z O O Z 5 U MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 3 Time Synchronization Function 6 23 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series 6 3 2 Daylight saving time function The daylight saving time function allo
435. nable at module startup 7 Section 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting Is there any other job that is being executed Has an error or job cancellation occurred during job execution 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module Terminate the job that is in execution or use another Server service settings item gt Section 7 9 Server Service Setting If a job uses the same Server service settings item that is currently used for another job the job is not executed until another job execution is completed If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List When the job uses a tag component for which Moving average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is specified check if sampling for the specified number of times is completed To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries From the previous page Table 10 21 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function Symptom Job will not start up Checked item Is there any setting that enables data writing to the tag component for which statistical processing of Moving average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is specified in the job Corrective action e Check the Job settings and disable data writing to the relevant tag component Job will not start up after the one shot execution During one shot execut
436. nchronize with SNTP is selected set the following items Table 7 23 Setting items when Synchronize with SNTP is selected Item Description SNTP server address Enter the IP address of the SNTP server or NTP server in decimal required notation Default No setting Select a time zone used for time synchronization Default GMT 09 00 Japan Standard Time Configure the daylight saving time settings Default No setting Time zone required Daylight saving setting 7 20 7 6 System Setting 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres c Daylight saving setting A click on the Setting button displays the Daylight saving setting dialog box z m Make settings for the following items and click the _OK_ button A 3 Daylight saving setting Zz Setting by week z Month Day of week Time a BE 58 Setting by date z E Japr x fi vj 02 00 z S g N Figure 7 22 Daylight saving setting ae Zu z nNDO0 Table 7 24 Setting items in Daylight saving setting ou nao Item Description Enable daylight saving Enable or disable the daylight saving setting Specify the date and time of the start time at which the clock is set ahead and those of the end time at which the clock is set back for Month Week Setting by week Day of week and Time The default is set to
437. nction Configuration Tool C Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc e The number of characters exceeds 32 When the field name is not displayed enter the field name manually to Field name in the Communication action dialog box Point When a field in the database is added changed while the data are being browsed close the Communication action dialog box once and browse the field names again INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION et FUNCTIONS le 2 ms G WL raed ESO 26 36 brats z e O Z U DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 107 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 108 9 Exception process setting MELSEC TA series A click on the Exception process setting button displays the Exception process setting dialog box Complete the setting referring to the following explanation After completing the setting click the button Exception process setting Tag Exception processing No applicable record r 5 end notification of this exception Component Substitute value Continue this job Finish this job Tag m Exception processing Multiple applicable records IV Select firster find records J Send notification of this excep
438. nd click the Execute button Doing so clears the error status e The ERR LED on the MES interface module turns off The Current error area buffer memory address 140 to 145 is cleared e The latest error code displayed in System monitor of GX Developer is cleared gt Section 10 1 3 System monitor 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution Connection with the server computer set in Server service settings which is made at the a a 2 2 S time of the previous job execution can be checked w The following explains the display of Connection result of previous job execution Connection result of previous job execution Z Server servicename Resut A 7 DB Connected M 5 20 Zo DZ 58 x 2 9 z o e Figure 7 108 Connection result of previous job execution g N Table 7 95 Items displayed for Result of Connection result of previous job execution Display Description 9 2 W Normally connected to the server computer at the time of the F xg Connected i GAE previous job execution aS Not connected to the database server computer This is displayed m g a Disconnected when normal connection could not be established at the previous job execution and thereby the line is disconnected EJ Point I
439. nfirmation of hardware test result be Check the ERR LED status to see the hardware test result Table 4 8 Hardware test result OFF Completed 2 ON Failed G ra When the test is completed normally set the Mode setting to Online with Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module of GX Developer and reset a the programmable controller CPU Switch 1 0000h Ca When the test has failed check that the switch setting is correctly set and tee conduct the hardware test again A 5 T If an error occurs again a possible cause is the hardware failure of the MES z298 interface module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative cae 289 4 6 Self diagnostics Test 4 lt 13 4 6 2 Hardware test 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 14 MELSEC Le series 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card This section explains the precautions for using the CompactFlash card 1 Available CompactFlash cards 2 3 4 Use a CompactFlash card listed in Section 2 3 gt Section 2 3 Connection System Equipment Failure to do so may cause a problem such as data corruption in the CompactFlash card and system stop When powering off the system or resetting the programmable controller CPU When the system is powered off or the programmable controller CPU is reset during writing to the CompactFlash card the write processing may not be completed
440. ng communication error 4 Maximum capacity CompactFlash card capacity 32M bytes 16 M bytes to 512 M bytes Section 7 6 4 XML processing Command type One shot execution of a job enabling the job disabling the job Request message size Maximum 128 k bytes Reception protocol HTTP1 0 CHAPTER 9 User authentication No of accounts 16 User ID 1 to 20 characters Password 6 to 14 characters Working log Error log capacity Maximum capacity 1 M byte At least 4800 logs can be recorded Event log capacity I 2 Maximum capacity 4 M bytes At least 4800 logs can be recorded When there is no detailed log At least 2 logs can be recorded When there is a detailed log lt Section 2 6 3 Precautions for using database 3 4 capacity No of samples can be set up to 20 The following shows the method for roughly calculating the buffering duration from the buffering Section 7 12 5 The monitoring interval is 1 to 600 in units of 0 1 seconds or 1 to 32767 in units of seconds When the database is Microsoft Access 2000 2003 2007 2010 2013 refer to the following Buffering duration No of executable bufferings Execution frequency times hour h No of executable bufferings Usage capacity SQL text length Overhead 4 bytes cases SQL text length Total field character length 6 x No of fields Total data length 20 bytes Calc
441. ng message is displayed When the following screen is displayed click Allow or the button Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it fore E DBCnctConf exe Unidentified Publisher Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Program name DBCnctConf exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer Y Show details Change when these notifications appear Figure 8 4 User Account Control Point To disable the following message display refer to the following lt Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R DB Connection Service Setting Tool starts Only one DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be activated 8 3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEG Q series 8 4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool This section explains the screen structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool S e 8 4 1 Screen structure Z EA DB connection service setting tool O Menu File Help z ll Section 8 4 2 Menu configuration lt 2 Service port snz gaiil Be Output destination D 8 DB access timeout 30 seconds Fcbconnecter og Sl J Limit IP addresses permit
442. ng Battery This section explains operation without mounting a battery to the MES interface module 1 Shutdown operation required when the programmable controller is powered OFF while the MES interface module is operating without battery If the file protection battery is not mounted to the MES interface module make sure to perform shutdown operation when the programmable controller is powered OFF When the programmable controller is powered OFF without mounting the battery data such as setting information and system data may be lost a Operation procedure Stop file access Turn the File access stop request Y2 ON from OFF Confirm that file access has stopped Check the File access status X2 is turned ON Power OFF the programmable controller CPU File access stop request Y2 In operation During stop V Power OFF the programmable controller File access status X2 Figure 4 21 Shutdown operation required when the programmable controller is powered OFF while the MES interface module is operating without battery Es Point If the shutdown operation is not performed before powering OFF a programmable controller even though the MES interface module is operating without battery data in the CompactFlash card being accessed may be corrupted or a file system error may occur 2 Making battery error undetected during operation without battery D A battery error occurs when the
443. ng address of the auto refresh area Refer to the user s manual of the each PLC about the starting address The applicable device of head device is B M Y DW A ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Figure App 7 Refresh settings for the Motion CPU CPU No 2 c Refresh settings for the QCPU CPU No 1 Set the number of points and devices of the QCPU to which auto refresh area data in the Motion CPU shared memory is stored Example CPU No 2 auto refresh area 0000 to OOFF D256 to D511 r Refresh settings Change screens Setting v J Set starting devices for each PLC Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC The auto refresh area Caution D256 Poit Stat End Stat End EE es Se es ee No2 256 000 OFF 256 D511 i SSS an SS aa SS SS a e ee ee Caution Offset HE from starting address of the auto refresh area Refer to the user s manual of the each PLC about the starting address The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W A ZR The unit of points that send range for each PLC is word Figure App 8 Refresh settings for the QCPU CPU No 1 d Device tag settings for the MES interface module Register the QCPU CPU No 1 devices devices set for refreshing in the device tag Example Register D256 to D511 in tag 1 MES interface QCPU No 1 Motion CPU CPU No 2 module A CPU shared memory 0000 ral OOFF Component Component 4 Co
444. ng the target MES interface module OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 SLo z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M ELSEG Q series 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings Write the MES interface function settings project to the MES interface module Perform either of the following e Click af Write e Select Online Write from the menu MX MESInterface x A dialog box asking for confirmation is The data will be written into the MES interface module of the IP address 192 168 3 3 A ae displayed Clicking the OK_ button starts Attention All settings in the MES interface module will be discarded ri A module stop error will occur when High speed sampling is specified WwW riti n g in any device tag setting without existence of user setting system area in the control CPU except Universal model QCPUs Upon completion of writing a dialog box appears asking for confirmation of the setting Writing is completed Do you want to update the settings now u pdate MX MESInterface When Yes button is clicked Clicking Yes refreshes the setting data to the MES interface module
445. ng updating settings gt Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function 5 While file access is stopped _ Section 4 7 CompactFlash Card 1 Turns ON when Synchronize with SNTP is selected in Time synchronization setting and after succeeding the time query and storing the time into the buffer memory 2 Reads time data from the SNTP time query results Buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 while XB is ON 3 This device turns OFF 1 second after XB turns ON SNTP time query timing XB Initial value OFF XB SNTP time query timing Time synchronization setting status Initial value 0 Buffer memory address 11500 SNTP time query result Initial value 0 Buffer memory address 11501 to 11507 Sets time Sets time data data Inquires time Inquires time Time query processing to the SNTP tothe SNTP server computer server computer Initial 1 Turns ON while the ERR LED is ON during a module continuation error or flashing during a module stop error x10 ERR LED status 2 Turns OFF when the ERR LED i turned OFF by tuming the Error clear request Y10 ON with the ERR LED ON However this is not possible while the ERR LED is flashing 3 While the ERR LED is ON or flashing when X10 is ON any or some of X11 X12 X16 and X1C turn s ON 1 Turns ON when an error regarding Sampling error occurs 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Tag status area B
446. nge desktop background Customize colors Allow 2 program through Windows Firewall Adjust screen resolution Network and Internet Clock Language and Region Connect to the Internet amp Change keyboards or other input View network status and tasks methods Set up file sharing Ease of Access Hardware and Sound aE ara Play CDs or other media automatically Opinan dipli Printer Mouse J Additional Options Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Change battery settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings Select User Accounts User Accounts Change your account picture Add or remove user accounts Change your Windows password Windows CardSpace Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services User Accounts T es S a We 4 z 4 Select Turn User Account Control on or off 2 gt Control Panel User Accounts User Accounts 4 rch P S When User Account Control is enabled in Make changes to your user account Windows Vista the following screen appears Change your password reer poe al MX oe ange your picture Password protected H D ee Click the Continue button Change your account type Manage another account um User Account Control on or off Windows needs your permission to continue l If you started this action continue User Accounts Control Panel Microsoft Windows
447. nitialize the log file and 501 to 503 The service is stopped e Actions are displayed with error codes 401 to 403 and 501 to 503 if e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative 8 9 The server port has already been opened Change the server port No with DB Connection The service is stopped Service Setting Tool 10 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative 11 101 The computer ran out of memory while reading the Terminate any unnecessary applications setting file Add more memory to the personal computer F e Reinstall the DB Connection Service to the 102 The setting file path is too long directory whose path name is shorter To the next page 10 24 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name DBConnector Error code Error description and cause Corrective action 103 The setting file name indicates the directory e Reinstall the DB Connection Service 104 The setting file could not be opened e Terminate other applications and make the 105 Description of the setting file is not correct setting again with DB Connection Service Setting Tool 106 Parameter specification of the setting file is not correct 107 The v
448. nother station routing parameters must be set in addition to this setting For the routing parameters refer to the following gt Manual for the network module used T 36 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 6 Precautions on Access target CPU settings a The MES interface module prepares for communication with the access target CPU when executing Update settings powering ON the system from OFF or 3 resetting the programmable controller CPU Therefore if a large number of access target CPUs are set several minutes are required for the preparation Confirm that Update settings is completed or the MES interface module is ready X0 is ON before making access from the personal computer to the MES lt 5 interface module lire cS b Be sure to set a correct series for PLC series If PLC series is incorrectly set either of the following will occur At startup of the MES interface module an error may occur in a programmable controller CPU or a module on the route to the access target z CPU z e The system may operate within the device range of the incorrect PLC series 5 setting B c When accessing the Redundant CPU pay attention to the following points e When the MES interface module is mounted to the Redundant CPU it can access the CPU of host station only 5 It cannot access
449. notified LCF Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation 2 If Enable DB buffering is selected for a job its exception process setting is disabled lt gt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering FUNCTIONS j O 2 ms G WL raed Se 260 6 ZPO z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 109 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL b Exception processing Multiple applicable records M eLS a6 Q series When Select Update or Delete is selected for Action type set processing for the case where there are multiple records to be selected updated or deleted m Exception processing Multiple applicable records IV Select the first find record IV Send notification of this exception Component Substitute value Warning _Number 5 Continue this job Finish this job Figure 7 87 Setting example of Exception processing Multiple applicable records 1 Select the first find record When Select is selected for Action type checking the Select the first find record box allows extraction of the head record from multiple applicable records When this checkbox is not checked the select update delete processing is not performed EJ Point When Update or Delete is selected
450. ns safely all the time Also be sure to read the manual carefully and ensure safety before performing any other controls such as operating status change Especially when controlling a programmable controller from a remote location via network problems on the programmable controller side may not be dealt with promptly due to failure of data communications Create an interlock circuit on a sequence program For the operation status of each station at a communication error refer to the manual for that station Incorrect output or malfunctions may cause an accident Install a safety circuit external to the programmable controller that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the programmable controller Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation When the programmable controller system security needs to be protected against illegal access from an external device via a network take measures at the user s discretion Design Precautions WARNING Do not write any data to the System area in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module As for signals output from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module never output ON a Use prohibited signal Doing these operations may cause malfunctions of the programmable controller system CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main ci
451. nsed essteadeerdssdecardeesiadecens EAN A 22 PACKING LIST sivitiscstisivanceenis vince i ar RE NOOO OORO ERRA A 24 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 8 Wed AAU OS Sron E nt wasn ns eect ne E eens nde one See 1 2 1 2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration c cece eetnee eee tnneeee iinn EAE 1 8 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 22 2 1 System CONnTGUIALION senene ae RNS SN AN dicen hanadeenvaanecees dense tid 2 1 2 11 Overal system COMMQUIALON wis cectccedtesssnceuusvadencyaeseshanceudd ssenccaea tate scaeasunerachunseiadacedhessagecedseziagsed 2 1 2 1 2 System configuration for installation 0 0 0 cece eect entre eee eeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeiaaeeeseeenaeeeeeeeaes 2 2 2 1 3 System configuration for initial SCtUD 0 0 cece e teeter treet eaaeeeeeetaeeeeeseeiaeeeeseeiaeeeeeeeaes 2 3 2 1 4 System configuration for operation cece eect eeeeeeenee eee eeetaeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeieeeeseeeteeeeenenaees 2 4 22 Applicable System Secr oeio A E 2 5 2 3 Connection System Equipment ceccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeececeaaeceeeeeeeeeeesecsenaesaeeeeeeseeeeseeeecsensnsaeees 2 7 ZA Operating Environmo N ee OO O 2 9 24 1 C mfig ration COMMPUREN ssn aaa a a Aa E a A ai 2 9 242 SENVEr COMPETE A N 2 11 2 4 3 Computer for developing XML processing applications cc cccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeeeeees 2 15 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial NUMDEM cecccee ester ee eeeeeeee eee eneeeeeeetnaeeeeeetneeeeeeeeea 2
452. nserted as one record to the database by executing Communication action e Module date and time at execution e Tag for Wonderware Historian set in Field name e The value of tag component or constant set in Component When multiple fields are set the number of records corresponding to the number of fields set is inserted Communication action Action type insert Database Historian DB tag link settings Browse table name e E machines Analogi 2 AnalogTag2 lt lt Machine1 Analog2 3 AnalogTag3 lt lt Machine Analog TA 5 E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Delete row Browse field name Generated SQL text Tag Type Component A Combine ield name Condition __TagiType __ Component Field name vi Insert awhole tag Exception process settinc No of fields in project 15 Tag component data length in job 12 words total INSERT INTO History DateTime TagName Value SELECT Date YYYY MM DD hhimmiss AnalogTag1 Machinel Analog UNION ALL SELECT Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss AnalogTag2 Machine Analog2 UNION ALL SELECT Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss AnalogTag3 Machine2 Analog1 Figure 7 76 Setting example of Insert INSERT when database is Wonderware Historian Database Historian Table History Fixed
453. nstalling Oracle and creating a database instance This can be checked with Configuration and Migration Tools Net Manager Service naming of 9 Oracle 358 Zw an a nao BIG 0 Clicking Performance and Maintenance on the Control Panel displays the Performance and Maintenance dialog box a To display the Control Panel select Start denen Control Panel INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 3 For Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 System and Maintenance For Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 B Rearrange items on your hard disk to make programs run faster or pick a Control Panel icon ETL Administrative Tools System and Security 3 o R ENTE 2 Clicking Administrative Tools displays Om O Arnim Administrative Tools dialog box Addr tive T f File and Folder Tasks KAD i i grem 3 W cS rce Brutt wy Z Other Places a 2 8 B Control Panel c nce 5 My Documents E z F My computer Ha 3 EF My Network Places ZE i55 2r O foe l To the next page z O O mf A Z Q S m a ee as 22 Lu og Oz ZE W W nn 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 6 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL From the previous page ODBC Data Source Administrator User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About fee Data S
454. nt a 1 1 Variable 4 lt lt TAGI Startup Number 1 2 iia 0 1 2 TAGL Startup lt lt Variable 4 1 ie 1 lt lt Figure 7 104 Action details in the case of Operation action FUNCTIONS Table 7 92 Items displayed for Operation action Display Description 7 1 Upper row Displays the settings of Operation action 2 Lower row Displays values calculated in Operation action Point If a job is canceled information on how the cancellation has occurred is displayed in the detailed log le 2 ms G re z E ESO 260 6 ZRO z e S O Z ve In the case of job cancellation due to failed tag data acquisition however the detailed log information is not displayed Pad mee Zwo Lz 7 12 Online T M 133 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi als 26 Q ceries 7 12 6 Executing a job as a one shot task Execute a job as a one shot task Doing so allows the user to check the execution result of the currently editing Job settings For precautions for performing one shot execution refer to the following CF Section 7 15 4 One shot execution Point In One shot execution of a job settings of Startup logging and DB Buffering are not executed With the edit screen of Job settings displayed perform either of the following e Click One shot e
455. nt CPU 2 of both systems in the same capacity 6 3 Section 7 8 1 REMARKS 1 Creating a user specified system area E 4 Job setting 2 gt When accessing the Redundant CPU it is recommended to select Handshake operation for the trigger condition of a job When other than Handshake operation is selected for the trigger condition the following phenomenon may occur at system switching of a redundant system e Data separation e The write data is not reflected to the programmable controller CPU 3 Section 7 10 2 8 Handshake operation FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 2 6 Precautions for System Configuration 2 19 2 6 1 Precautions for using Redundant CPU 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 6 2 Precautions for using multiple CPU system The following describes the precautions for using the multiple CPU system 1 Access to each CPU module at start up of multiple CPU system In the system in which a MES interface module is mounted in the multiple CPU system an error may occur when accessing other CPU from the MES interface module or accessing the other station via a network module controlled by other CPU from the MES interface module due to the difference of start up time of each CPU module In this case clear the error in the MES interface module after starting up other CPU c gt Page 10 3 Section 10 1 2 2 The start up of ot
456. nt number of Blank EJ NTCELEMENT selected for NTCREC device tag Other than the above 1 to 64 Clear the unused tag Clear to 0 ENABLE FILLZERO components by zero Not clear to 0 DISABLE App 52 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 20 MULTISELECT CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 4 Processing Time g This section explains the processing time required for communication action as a result be of measurements made under the conditions shown in 1 z5 The processing time can be lengthened however depending on any of the following ae factors Operating environment personal computer network and the CompactFlash card 6 e Loading status of the server computer and the network e Sequence scan time e Accessing status from a personal computer terminal display or intelligent a function module to the programmable controller CPU g e Access from a personal computer by MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and XML processing Settings of the MES interface module Use the measurement result shown in 2 as reference of the processing time r Appendix 4 1 Product whose first five digits of serial No is 13092 or later E lt 1 Measurement conditions Table App 64 Measurement conditions CPU Intel Core i7 2 8GHz x Memory 3GB a Server computer 7 Operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 bit version Database Oracle 11g R2 In the cas
457. nt of the MES interface module 2 5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number 2 17 SETTINGS AND MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND OVERVIEW N z O lt o U Zz Q PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS SETTING TOOL 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 3 Confirming the serial number on the system monitor Product Information List To display the screen for checking the serial number and function version select Diagnostics System monitor gt Product inf list in GX Developer Serial Function Product number version number Product Information List y o l No QO6UDHCPU 3 Intelli Q QU71MES96 32pt 0000 B 0 1 None 0 2 None 0 3 None 0 4 None Figure 2 10 Product Information List of GX Developer Production number display Since the MES interface module does not support the production number display is displayed Point The serial No on the rated plate and on the front of the module may not match the serial No displayed in the product information list of GX Developer e The serial No on the rated plate and on the front of the module indicates the management information of the product e The serial No displayed in the product information list of GX Deve
458. nteger 00 to 23 Numbers head of the line 22 2 ae 14th byte at the head of the Zuz Hour Minute delimiter Colon 3Ah a56 line 9a 5 Output Minute EEE 2 cicit integer 00 to 59 Numbers ik inu digit i u A head of the line S E JER character 17th byte at the head of the line 18th and 19th bytes at the head of the line 20th byte at the head of the line 21th and 23th bytes at the head of the line 24th byte at the head of the Minute Second delimiter Colon 3Ah Second 2 digit integer 00 to 59 Numbers Second Millisecond delimiter Period 2Eh INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Millisecond 3 digit integer 000 to 999 Numbers Millisecond Error code delimiter Space 20h line 4 25th and 34th bytes at the Alphanumeric character of Ox 8 digit lErrorcode head of the line hexadecimal 2 me 35th byte at the head of the 2 Error code Message delimiter li Space 20h Q ine 36th byte at the head of the a T Message According to the specifications of each log line or later Line feed End of line CR LF ODh OAh 8 2 For error codes refer to the following w a lt gt Section 10 2 Error Code List 5 lt Eee Pale ire a56 TES oe z O O mf A Z Q S m Q ari as 22 Lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 24 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series
459. nterface module extension file register is invalid extension file register device type To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module MELSEC Kel ries From the previous page Lu f0 lt Error code Error name Description Action R z FFF5h oa z e Please consult your local Mitsubishi O FFF8h System error f a representative FFFAh 14 0 The device size exceeded the device Correct the device number entered FFFBh Size error 9 range in Device tag settings Z e Check the settings of the network 8 FE module on the access route A FFFCh CPU error An invalid station was specified 4 ae Check the station number setting in a Access target CPU settings g z e Correct the device type entered in FFFDh Device type error The device type is incorrect j Device tag settings A o e Correct the device number entered FFFEh Device No error The device number is incorrect in Device tag settings e Please consult your local Mitsubishi a EEEEN System error i D representative fa a oa lt x lt W Q zZ 10 2 Error Code List 1 0 23 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service The DB Connection Service outputs errors to the Windows Event Log access log and SQL failure
460. o the database before the buffered data Adding to the buffered data b Manually resend buffer After recovery the data is resent automatically The job data is being added to the bottom of the buffered data until the resend operation is completed The data is sent in order of the trigger conditions have met including in the new job data whose trigger condition created while the data resend is completed Select the buffering operation for when the communication is recovered from the communication disconnection in case the data are accumulated in the Manually resend buffer of the DB buffer Default Adding to the buffered data Table 7 34 Setting items in Manually resend buffer Item Description Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data After recovery the data is resent when the resend operation is performed After recovery the job whose trigger condition has been met is sent to the database before the data remaining in the resend buffer The new job data whose trigger condition created while the data resend is completed is met is sent immediately Therefore the new job data whose trigger condition is met may be sent to the database before the buffered data Adding to the buffered data 7 32 7 6 System Setting 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting After recovery the data is resent when the resend operation is performed The job data is being added to the bottom of the buf
461. o the following L gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting Set the network type network No head I O address and station No used r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 2 PLC series QCPU Q mode RCPU QCPU A mode LCPU QnACPU ACPU Select the PLC series of the access target CPU Select the QCPU Q mode RCPU when accessing a C Controller module OVERVIEW 3 Multiple CPU specification No specification No 1 to No 4 Select a CPU No when the access target CPU is used in the multiple CPU system z When No specification is selected access is made to the control CPU 7 Z2 4 Other station specification 26 Select whether or not to specify any other station For details on accessible routes refer to the following lt Section 3 2 2 Accessible routes a No specification Select this when accessing the CPU on the host station SPECIFICATIONS b Other station Single network To access a CPU module on another station over the following network s specify a single network 1 Using any one of the following networks ae CC Link IE Controller Network 358 e MELSECNET 10 P e MELSECNET H 20 CC Link Ethernet e C24 e CC Link IE Field Network lex Access to a CPU module on another station over CC Link IE Fiel
462. odule MES Interface Function Configuration Tool CompactFlash SE card Configuration computer 1 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION n PA Q LIQnA ACPU C Controller module 2 E Functions provided by MX MESInterface 2 Figure 2 1 Overall system configuration when using the MES interface module es al S The SNTP server computer and configuration computer can be shared with server computers ie 5 2 This computer is necessary when using the SNTP server computer time for the MES interface Q 2 module time we ze EOS lt Section 6 3 Time Synchronization Function Bis T yn 3 The redundant server system and database cannot be used 5 g O 528 2 lt tr TE gt FE An ann 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 2 1 1 Overall system configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Le series 2 1 2 System configuration for installation This section shows system configurations for installing MX MESInterface 1 When installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool on a server computer MX MESInterface Server computer Installation gt Vi DB Connection Service DB Connection Service Setting Tool Commercialized product Figure 2 2 Installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool Point 1 When installing DB Connection Service on a database server
463. of NET1 and NET2 depending on the combination 5 refer to the table below 2 If a value is set without following the restrictions an error occurs tt 5 QCPU is displayed even when using C Controller module or RCPU 3 ae Table App 22 Setting values of NET1 and NET2 z OTHER SERIES NET1 NET2 STATION SINGLE There is no restriction 1 When NET10 ETHERNET or i CCIEFIELD is set to NET1 NET10 a ETHERNET or CCIEFIELD cannot a QCPU ie amp DIFFERENT There is no restriction be set 2 When CCLINK or C24 is set to NET1 CCLINK or C24 cannot be set ETHERNET C24 and SINGLE CCIEFIELD cannot be set The following values cannot be set is QCPUA NET 10 zZ DIFFERENT CCLINK and C24 cannot be set ETHERNET CCIEFIELD C24 SINGLE NET10 cannot be set 1 The following values cannot be set e NET10 2 When NET10 ETHERNET or LCPU f a CCIEFIELD is set to NET1 DIFFERENT There is no restriction CCIEFIELD cannot be set 3 When CCLINK or C24 is set to NET1 CCLINK or C24 cannot be set SINGLE CCIEFIELD cannot be set The following values cannot be set QNACPU i INET 19 DIFFERENT CCLINK and C24 cannot be set ETHERNET e CCIEFIELD C24 ETHERNET C24 and SINGLE 5 CCIEFIELD cannot be set The following values cannot be set ACPU e NET10 DIFFERENT CCLINK and C24 cannot be set ETHERNET e CCIEFIELD C24 Ap
464. of the project file to be saved e MES interface function project file mup Files of type 7 10 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 3 Saving a project r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 4 4 Importing a project Import an existing project ai Any setting can be selected from an existing project and can be imported into the current w project setting This function is useful when settings of an existing project is utilized for another project Select Project Import Project file from the menu Zz O As the Open dialog box appears specify the project to be imported Pao For the operation for the Open dialog box refer to the following ae gt lt gt Section 7 4 2 Opening a project 220 When the project to be imported is selected the Import from project file dialog box is displayed 7 Make the setting referring to the following descriptions g O After completing the setting clicking the Import button starts the import k Lu oO Import from project file Eol Existing registration 2 ot lt __ Project root meek registration information information 3 06 RASERER settings Setting s 3 DA aor DOH controicPu lt Item type DASG a o Oo CPUI_in_Device1 No of Benes services S T DOH cPu2_in_Devicet No of jobs Re Selection tree a a T A Import information SRE Device2 No of access target CPUs Fo m E Server service settings No of devi
465. oft Access e Check if 128 or more fields are set in Update actions e Check the sent SQL text and the database contents e Check if the table and field settings are correct e Check that reserved terms of the database are not set for table names and field names Check if the uniqueness constraint of the database PRIMARY KEY constraint is violated or not e Check if multiple accesses have been made to one file at the same time accesses from multiple MES interface modules OB8Ch Message reception timeout An Ethernet communication error has occurred e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct e Check if the ODBC setting is correct OB8Dh to OB90h OB91h OB92h System error DB transaction status error DB transaction start status error The DB transaction status is invalid The DB transaction start status is invalid OB93h DB transaction end status error The DB transaction end status is invalid e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the status of the database OB94h to OB9Dh System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative OB9Eh Database connection error OB9Fh Message reception error OBAOh Received message data error An Ethernet communication error has occurred Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct
466. om the outside turns ON S UL 8 Ww D X100 M Sets In process flag at t SET Mo processing request MO M200 z Resets In process flag Wi RST Mo J at normal completion M200 For XML processing a e lt vz EEEE AAEE NEEE r n0 Send data generation 2 a z eS fe tie LRST M201 Job restart processing DaS SET mioo Jj M100 M200 posnema o 1 1 1 Receive data processing Zz ae ee my Processing for normal O job execution e z RST M100 z I a8 M201 EEE Rue lt 2 1 ___Error handling _ Be Processing for failed RST Mo J Fos execution RST M100 END o Figure 7 56 Program example 5 2 l Q O 4 6 TE EO D Ze 25E 2z SPo O 528 2 lt tr TE gt E An ann 7 10 Job Setting T 71 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions 3 Timing charts MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Mi als 26 Q ceries Timing charts for the program example in 2 are shown below When the job is executed normally Information linkage status X5 Processing request X100 In process MO Handshake startup M100 Completion notification M200 Job cancellation notification M201 Figure 7 57 When the job is executed normally When an error occurs during job execution Information linkage status X5 Processing request X100 In process MO ad Handshake startup M100 Completion n
467. omputer L gt Section 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions 3 Processing for which the DB buffering is available Table 6 1 Processing for which the DB buffering is available Processing DB buffering Update Insert Delete Stored procedure Available Not available when using return values output arguments or input output arguments Select MultiSelect Program execution N A 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 10 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries 4 Setting the DB buffering a Setting for DB buffering function Set the tag components or CompactFlash card capacity for DB buffering function 3 For the setting methods refer to the following lt gt Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting 6 b Enabling the DB buffering function z Set whether to enable the DB buffering function for each job ze When enabling the DB buffering function select the type of DB buffer 2S For the setting methods refer to the following KL Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering 2 5 DB buffer amp 5 a DB buffer type 2 There are two types of buffering areas Automatically resend buffer and Manually 5 resend buffer Use the Automatically resend buffer if resending the data automatically after recovery 2 Use the Manually resend buffer if resending the data with a desired timing Am Table 6 2 Automatically resend buffer and Manually resend buffer 8 Automatically After rec
468. on MELSEC TA series This section explains how to uninstall MX MESInterface 1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool The following screens are for Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Start pak Pick a category Been a E 9 Help and Support Networ Other Control Panel o Options j Add or Remove Programs B Opti e J S0unds Speech and Audio Devices Accessibility Options j Security Center l To the next page 5 9 5 2 Uninstallation From the Control Panel select Add or Remove Programs To display the Control Panel select Start Control Panel REMARKS For other operating system select the following item from the Control Panel e Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Server Add Remove Applications e Windows Server 2003 Add or Remove Programs e Windows Server 2008 Programs and features e Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 201 2 Windows Server 2012 R2 Uninstall a program 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION M als 2G Ce erie From the previous page Basis Remove Reopens a Select the program to be deleted and click the gt Change Remove button 3 lt For DB Connection Service and Setting Tool gt DB connection service and Setting tool MESInterface DBConnector
469. on 7 11 1 Section 3 2 Section 2 4 2 Section 7 8 3 Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions Section 2 2 Section 3 2 APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres F Serial No first 5 digits of Software version of MX Functions added Reference MES interface module MESInterface Connectable database servers were added a Section 2 4 lt e Microsoft Access 2013 Qe Ethernet module was added to LCPU network Z wae Section 3 2 So communication route Xo The stored procedure call function was added 15102 or later e Stored procedure was added as a communication 1 10L or later Section 7 11 3 action in the Job setting 2 f DB buffering operation of recovery from network Q Mae 9 sakes KSN ki Section 7 6 4 2 disconnection was added Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 ware added to Section 2 4 fo the operating environment E Windows 8 1 was added to the operating environment Section 2 4 Connectable database servers were added a Section 2 4 2 Orme ae 16072 or later 1 12N or later Following CPU modules were added to applicable systems F as mountable modules Section 2 2 Oo RO4CPU RO8CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU z pE Functions that are not related to serial No or software version z x lt W Q z Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface Ap
470. on Errors detected by the access target CPU gee User s Manual for the access target programmable controller CPU 7000h Errors detected by the serial communication module to lt 3 User s manual of serial communication module being used 7FFFh lt 3 gt MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 9000h e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error 9006h representative Check the control CPU s of the network module s on the access route to the access target CPU module Section 3 2 2 Accessible 9008h Send buffer fuil There is no available space in the routes l send buffer Check the routing parameter set for the CPU s on the access route Check if the access target PLC series is supported Section 3 2 1 Accessible CPU modules 9202h 9204h 920Ah e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error 9920h representative 9922h 9923h The issued processing code cannot Check the CPU s on the access 9E20h Processing code error be processed on the other end route The device type specified for the e Correct the device type entered in 9E81h Device type error oa s access target station is invalid Device tag settings R The device number specified for the e Correct the device number entered 9E82h Device No error hk access target station is out of range in Device tag settings 9E83h Number of device points The device points specified
471. on of recovery from network disconnection The operation of MX MESInterface version 1 09K or earlier is the same as the default settings L gt Appendix 1 2 1 b For MX MESInterface version 1 09K or earlier TE Te 9 ZO OSE oo fi ba ann 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 15 6 1 10 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series 6 Clearing the DB buffer The DB buffer is cleared by the following a After writing the MES interface function setting to the MES interface module performing any of the following operations e Perform Update settings e Power OFF and then ON e Reset the programmable controller CPU 3 Section 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings b Clear request from MES interface function configuration tool Remote operation 3 Section 7 13 6 Operating the DB buffering c Clear request from Clear DB buffer request of the specified tag component Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 16 6 1 10 DB buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries 7 DB buffering operation The job data whose trigger condition has been met is processed as shown below depending on the status of communication or DB buffering settings amp Table 6 4 DB buffering operation Communication Data of 3 7 RRE DB buffer DB buffering setting Operation Transmission Stored Invalid Job ex
472. on result is returned a status accepted Succeeded Aa failed Failed 2 ibue If an error occurs the error code is returned 7 code lt gt Section 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML Q response messages m Contents None Sub component None a Succeeded lt xml version 1 0 gt O lt RESPONSE status accepted gt A z b Failed lt xml version 1 0 gt lt RESPONSE status failed code 0x4117XXXX gt x lt W Q Z 9 1 XML Message Format Definition 9 3 Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC A series 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method This section explains the sending method and sample program of the XML message format 9 2 1 XML message format sending method 1 Send destination URL 2 x When the basic authentication information and the XML request message for a function are sent to the URL below with the HTTP POST method the function is executed and the XML response message is returned by HTTP http MES interface module IP address MESXML CGI HTTP basic authentication Accessing the URL shown in 1 requires HTTP basic authentication of the MES interface module The HTTP basic authentication uses the account information set with Account setting L gt Section 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting URL encoding To use HTTP it is necessary to use URL encoding to convert special characters in the XML request message Escape The following sh
473. onent NJ Temporary variable Data gt Constant Delete r Delete 1 There is no data communication Figure 6 8 SQL text transmission Communication action x Point Once records are deleted from the database they cannot be restored Make sure that correct target record and timing are set for the delete action 6 10 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries 6 1 7 Stored procedure call function Communication action The stored procedure call function starts up a stored procedure in the database a By executing a stored procedure in the database the variety and complex control can be Ei performed for the data in the database 2 For the stored procedure call function settings refer to the following K 7 Section 7 11 3 Setting items in Communication action Stored procedure Zz O The stored procedure call function is used to pass receive the values to from the stored 7 procedure by setting tag components or temporary variables to the arguments input o arguments output arguments and input output arguments or return value of the stored DZ O procedure When the temporary variable is received a value it can be used as a variable for other actions Database server computer E O Stored procedure 5 B Stored procedure call function Stored procedure execution
474. onent until the resend processing is completed Even if the value changes however the resend processing is not interrupted 2 To make another DB buffer resend request after completion of resend processing wait for a sampling interval of the specified tag component or more and then turn it ON or write 1 7 6 System Setting 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 4 Clear DB buffer request MELSEC Aeres a Select a tag component used to request for clear processing of the DB buffer Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set b The following explains the operation of the clear processing using Clear DB buffer request Table 7 30 Operation of the clear processing using Clear DB buffer request Data type of tag component Bit Description The clear processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified tag component is ON 1 2 Turns OFF after completion of the clear processing Clear DB buffer request Tag component value DB buffer clear processing Execute clear Other than the above The DB buffer is cleared when 1 is written to the specified tag component 0 is written after completion of the clear processing 1 Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the clear processing is complete
475. onnectable database servers were added 09012 or later BS e Microsoft SQL Server 2005 1 01B or later Section 2 4 2 e Wonderware Historian 9 0 Industrial SQL Server Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH QO6UDHCPU was added to A Section 2 2 applicable systems r S 09042 or later 1 02C or later CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET G was Pah Section 3 2 A added to the network communication route m The following devices were added as accessible devices Z e Link direct devices Jn W8000 or higher Section 3 2 e Extension data register D32768 or later e Extension link register W8000 or later Daylight saving time i rted aylig sang ime Ie supporte Section 7 62 e Daylight saving setting was added in the System setting A tting i fi ble rray se ing is configura e l l Section 7 8 2 Array setting was added in the Device Tag setting Timeout can be set 1 03D or later awe A 09102 or later e Connection timeout was added in the Server Service Section 7 9 1 Section 7 11 1 Max event log capacity was changed to 4M bytes Section 3 1 Following CPU modules were added to applicable systems as mountable modules e Q02PH QO6PHCPU Q Q 10012 or later Section 2 2 e Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Q03UDE Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU 1 04E or later Windows Vista was added Section 2 4 Connectable database servers were added 10012 or later Section 2 4 2 e Microsoft Access 2007 Th OUDE
476. ons to the MES interface module connected to the network Section 7 12 Communication setting Write Set the target MES interface module Section 7 12 1 Section 7 12 2 Write the MES interface function settings project to the MES interface module Read Verify Read the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface module those in the currently editing project Section 7 12 3 The MES interface function settings in the MES interface module are compared with Section 7 12 4 Remote operation Display or change the operation status of the MES interface module or format a CompactFlash card Section 7 13 Working log The working log of the MES interface module can be checked Section 7 12 5 One shot execution of a job Execute a job as a one shot task Section 7 12 6 Help 3 14 The product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and the Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website screen can be displayed Section 7 14 3 3 Function List 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 4 DB Connection Service function list Table 3 11 DB Connection Service function list a Sas Reference x Function Description j section ODBC connection function Connects the MES interface module and the ODBC interface for database A Executes a program on the application server computer upon request from the M
477. operation 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series 6 1 2 Job execution procedure The following shows the job execution procedure Stopped Is the MES interface function working No job is executed while the function is stopped Activate the MES interface function eae Section 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function e Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function Working Disabled The job is not executed when it is disabled Enable the job lt gt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status e Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT Is the job enabled Enabled Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met Section 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function e Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions When Handshake operation is selected for Trigger conditions tag component values are read out from the programmable controller CPU Is the Execute program before action box checked Not checked Checked The program in the application server computer is executed before execution of the first action ke Section 6 1 9 Program execution function e Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution k To the next page Figure 6 2 Job execution procedure 6 2 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 2 Job execution procedure FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aeres
478. or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision Sept 2006 SH NA 080644ENG A First edition Jan 2007 SH NA 080644ENG B Gorrection GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS Chapter 1 Sections 2 2 2 4 2 2 5 3 1 3 2 3 5 4 2 4 6
479. or how to find an error code refer to the following L Section 10 1 1 Finding an error code APPENDICES 2 Module continuation error a The ERR LED turns on b When a module continuation error occurs the MES interface module continues operation of the MES interface function By correcting the error according to the error code the correction can be reflected in the operation Since the ERR LED stays ON turn it off by the following e Error clear request Y10 e Online Remote operation Clear error L Section 7 13 2 4 Clear error INDEX c An error code is stored in the buffer memory area that is corresponding to the error location For how to find an error code refer to the following lt 7 Section 10 1 1 Finding an error code 10 1 Error Codes 1 _ 10 1 2 Error types 0 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA series 10 1 3 System monitor The module status of the MES interface module can be checked from System monitor 1 Checking the module status and error code in Module s Detailed Information of the diagnostics function a Operation procedure Select Diagnostics System monitor from the menu of GX Developer Select QJ71MES96 on System monitor dialog box and then click the Module s Detailed Information button displays Module s Detailed Information dialog box Operate it referring to the following descriptions Module s Detailed Information m Module Mo
480. or information on how to add delete copy or move an item refer to the following Section 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree 2 When an item is added or copied a New job item is added 7 10 Job Setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting Up to 64 items can be set in Job settings within one project E For job operations refer to the following i L Section 6 1 11 1 Operation behavior of jobs 2 Sob name NewJob IV Enable at module startup Startup logging IV Trigger buffering I Test mode Trigger conditions rA Combination fano i The job starts when the trigger conditions O changes from false to true Trigger 1 Disable s z aie 2S HO Trigger 2 Disable X Actions N Type Summary 5 z iS i 8 Ww oO N Add Communication action x Ed elete tjil Program execution DB Buffering o Before actions Setting J Enable DB buffering 2 s After actions Setting Using the Manually resend buffer x lt e Z OAE I Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution a re a Component Substitute value Hea nao No of fields in project No of fields in job 0 0 words total Tag component data length in job Figure 7 43 Job settings Table 7 46 Setting items in Job settings Item Description Job name Enter a job name Up to 16 characters Enable at mod
481. or job Cancellation essiensa O A TE 7 80 11 Job Setting ACONS ecri A OE EE ETEA EEA EE 7 81 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action eesseeeessseneeerrneeersrreseernnnnnarinnanntnnnneennnnaaaaeennnnanennnana 7 85 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete 7 92 7 11 3 Setting items in Communication action Stored procedure ssseeseeeesserrresseerrrssrrerrreereeen 7 116 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action sessecicsnnrunn ne EEE R 7 119 EAZs OMG E tie E estate ne laa eta ee aa ee 7 123 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module ee ee eentee eee eetee eee eeeeteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaees 7 123 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings ec eeeeeeeeeeeeetne eee eeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeseetateeeeeenaes 7 124 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings 0 0 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerteeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeteeeaees 7 126 7 12 4 Verifying the MES interface function settings 0 00 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeenaees 7 126 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module ccc cceceeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeettaeeeeeeeaas 7 127 7 12 6 Executing a job as a one shot task ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseneeeeeeeseniaeeeeeeeeaeees 7 134 11S Online Remote OPerallOn iccedvssadscaensdadecands saksacses uss hecedeanaanverts a a a aa 7 135 7 13 1 Checking the operation statu
482. ore memory to the personal computer 0x20100002 1 Failed to start the service due to insufficient resources e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20100010 System error representative Service Not Start 0x20100011 Failed to start the service due to failure of the server port initialization If firewall software has been installed set the specified server port operational Service Not Start e Terminate the application that has opened the server port A SANNA Another application has opened the server port e Set another server port No with DB Connection Service Setting Tool e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20100013 System error representative Not Initialize a service for each client IP address wT i TAS i Terminate any unnecessary applications 0x20200001 1 Failed to initialize a service for each client due to W Add more memory to the personal computer insufficient memory Deny network connection request from IP Using DB Connection Service Setting Tool add P address f j 0x20200002 1 the IP address to those with connection Rejected the connection request from the non A permission permitted IP address e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20200003 System error representative SID Session ID Request Receive Error IP os e Terminate any unnecessary applications 0x20300001 address WA Add more memory to the personal co
483. orkNo Browse fieldname p Select sort settings Field name BLE cotteron J Order Browse field name Insert awhole tag Exception process setting t Generated SQL text SELECT RECIPE1 RECIPE2 RECIPES FROM RECIPEDATA WHERE WorkNo Process1 WorkNo No of fields in project 8 Tag component data lengthin job 7 words total Lx Cancel Figure 7 70 Setting example of Select Database DB1 Table name RecipeData Work_No RECIPE1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3 536 32 Matched Tag component Selected Selected Selected Process1 Work_No Process1 RECIPE1 Process1 RECIPE2 Process1 RECIPE3 536 5 32 1 Figure 7 71 Operation example of Select 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres b When Update is selected for Action type Update substitutes a substitute value tag component value variable for a field value of the record whose conditions are met ai Set conditions of the record to be updated in Select Update Delete conditions wi lt 3 gt 6 Select Update Delete conditions in this section 2 1 Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for the field value to be updated E For characters that can be use
484. otification M200 Job cancellation notification M201 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions T 72 Error during job execution Figure 7 58 When an error occurs during job execution r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres d Program example Accessing to the Redundant CPU 1 Devices used in the program Table 7 55 Device used in program when Redundant CPU is used Device name Device Application MES interface module Input X5 Information linkage status External input command X100 Processing request MO In process M1 Retry flag Internal relay M100 Handshake startup M200 Completion notification Specify at Job settings M201 Job cancellation notification Special relay SM1518 Standby system to control system switching status flag Timer T100 Retry timer Point Retry timer T100 should be set much longer than DB access timeout of DB Connection Service 7 10 Job Setting T 73 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j 3 rs a Lu Z o Lu l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 zo DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL T MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC A series 2 Program exampl
485. ources Configure a An ODBC System data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A System data source is visible to all users on this machine including NT services Create New Data Source Name Microsoft ODBC for Oracle Microsoft Paradox Driver db Microsoft Paradox Treiber db Microsoft Text Driver tet csv Microsoft Text Treiber tat csv Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Microsoft Visual FoxPro Treiber Oracle ODBC Driver Configuration DaasoueNene p ooo Dercipion I ger TNS Service Name SaMPLETNS z Help Test Connection UserID Application Oracle Workarounds SQLServer Migration Translation Options Enable Resut Sets X Enable Quer Timeout Read Only Connection I Enable Closing Cursors 7 Enable Thread Safety V SOLGetData Extensions I Batch Autocommit Mode Commit only if all statements succeed x Oracle ODBC Driver Connect x Service Name SANPLETNS User Name Lo Cancel Password End 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database MELSEC feries E Double clicking Data Sources ODBC displays ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box 4 Select the System DSN tab then click the Add button 4 For use of the 64 bit version of Oracle install the 32 bit version of Oracle Client and then start the ODBC Data Source Administrator 5 For use of a 64 bit version operating system type
486. oute 6 ig za 8 aig E gt Co existence network communication route o gt a gt a gt 13 Eid Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV APPENDICES cru 2 Label Table App 20 Label Label Description Set Access target CPU settings items No 1 Setting required Only CPUNAME can be set Other setting items are disabled MELSEC Aeres CPU2 to CPU64 Set Access target CPU settings items No 2 to 64 Enter only the labels desired to be set Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set 3 Setting item Table App 21 Setting item Item Description Setting value CPUNAME CPU name 2 Up to 16 characters QCPU Q mode RCPU facpuy QCPU A mode QCPUA SERIES PLC series LCPU LCPU QnACPU QNACPU ACPU ACPU No specification NO When QCPU is CPU No 1 1 Multiple CPU selected with CPU No 2 2 MULTI CPU HRA SERIES CPU No 3 B pees CPU No 4 14 When other than the above is selected Blank with SERIES pa 5 3 Oiherstation No specification NO OTHER STATION eg Other station Single network SINGLE specification Other station Different network DIFFERENT When SINGLE CC IE Control NET10 or DIFFERENT NET 10 H CC Link CCLINK is selected with ih ETHERNET erne NET1 Network OTHER STATION 6 Pinay E C24 C24 CC IE Field CCIEFIEL
487. overy data is resent automatically resend buffer After recovery the data is resent by executing the following operation Manuall y Resend request from MES interface function configuration tool Remote operation resend buffer Resend request from the specified tag component in Resend DB buffer request INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION b The job operation whose trigger condition has been met before resend completion The operation after recovery can be set for each resend buffer whether to send the job whose trigger condition has been met immediately in case the data exists in the resend buffer or to send the buffered data after the resend completion ez Table 6 3 Operation of recovery from network disconnection Operation setting Job operation whose trigger condition has been met before resend completion Immediate sending Send the data immediately Do not add to the After recovery the job whose trigger condition has been met is sent to the database buffered data before the data remaining in the resend buffer o Z O Z 5 U A After recovery the job data is being added to the bottom of the buffered data until the 3 Adding to the gen 2 resend operation is completed 5 buffered data l i o The data is sent to the database in order of the trigger condition has been met lt 5 ao SoL For setting methods refer to the following 1 a56 K gt Section 7 6 4 8 Operati
488. ows the URL encoding rules and an example of URL encoding application a URL encoding rules Table 9 4 URL encoding rules Characters before conversion Character string after conversion A Z a z 0 9 _ Same not converted Space Plus sign Others 2 digit hexadecimal character code b URL encoding application example Table 9 5 URL encoding application example Characters before conversion Character string after conversion 25 amp 26 2B 3D 3F 9 2 XML Message Format Sending Method 9 2 1 XML message format sending method Q XML MESSAGE FORMAT MELSEC Aeres e 9 2 2 Sample program This section shows a sample program written in Java import java io w lt 2 E W 20 aire import java net class JobStart public static void main String args z try Storage of request message String requestMessage lt xml version 1 0 gt requestMessage lt REQUEST type oneshot jobname Pro01 gt System err printIn requestMessage Send contents display I Conversion with URL encording o requestMessage URLEncoder encode requestMessage UTF 8 S JI POST a URL url new URL http 192 168 3 3 MESXML cgi URLConnection conn url openConnection conn setDoOutput true conn setUseCaches false conn setRequestProperty Content type text xml 5 conn setRequestProperty
489. p 3 Appendix 1 1 Addition of new functions APPENDICES MELSEC Kel series Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions This section describes the operations of the former MES interface module and MX MES Interface versions 1 DB buffering function a For a MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 09101 or earlier The processing content of automatic resend while DB buffering is different Processing content When the job data cannot be sent to the database it is stored to DB buffer after the detection of a timeout Data is sent to database each time when the job is started up When the data cannot be sent to the database it is stored to DB buffer after the detection of a timeout The content of DB buffer is resent after recovery Communication recovery Pa Job startup a Job startup ee Job startup After sending After sending Send timeout detected timeout detected Stored to DB Stored to DB Resend DB buffer buffer buffer data automatically Figure App 1 When auto resend is set for a job For automatic resend processing of MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 09102 or later refer to the following e Overview of automatic resend processing gt Section 6 1 10 7 e Operation while data is being stored to DB buffer gt Section 6 1 10 8 a For MX MESInterface version 1 09K or earlier Due to upgrade the software version the displa
490. pendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format App 23 Appendix 3 7 CPU CSV APPENDICES Appendix 3 8 TAG CSV MELSEC Le series 1 File format Table App 23 File format Item Description File name TAG CSV File contents Device tag settings gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting OT a a g m ENABLE ENABLE osas ENABLE 3 BLOCK DISABLE y ARRAY ARRAYSIZE ARRAYTYPE _ BLOCKSPECIFY BLOCKSIZE File format L Item row Cannot be changed by the user __ Label column Setting area Can be changed by the user Device tag settings New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit Yiew Online Help DEHER s AmE S NewProject RP System setting P Device tag name NewTag DT Prohibit data writing Gl Access target CPU settings Speirs Device tag settings DA a Gi Job settings up to 96 points Donot sample Array setting Ea az A ch r Component setting input A p c Da 4 1 o amas Enhance samping efficiency Server service settings lt 3 e High sp Devices must be connected in series a E E Lie 14 7 No of tag components in project 0 No of statistical processes in project 0 No of device points ffi tag 0 ITEM EXECUTE _ no fe no fo yes ae EXECUTE ENABLE NO ENABLE NO YES tace4 LineD nor no enasejno 2 Label Table App 24 La
491. perates i The set port number is used for communications with the MES interface module or the configuration computer 1 Set the same value in Service port as the one set in Server service settings Port No of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool L gt Section 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting 2 Specify the number of the port that is not being used by any database or another application Usually it need not be changed 2 DB access timeout required Range 1 to 3600 Default 30 Set a DB access timeout Unit seconds for the case where no response is returned to the MES interface module or the configuration computer after requesting the server computer for value writing to or reading from the database or for a program execution When a timeout occurs the connection with the MES interface module or the configuration computer is disconnected and job execution is canceled Point Set a value to DB access timeout so that the relation with a value set in Connection timeout in MES Interface Configuration Tool is as follows e Connection timeout value DB access timeout value 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Kel ries 3 Limit IP addresses permit to connect a Specify whether or not to set the IP addresses permitted to connect By checking the Limit IP addresses permit to conn
492. ple 6 When failed 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000001 SQL lt SELECT COLL from TABLE gt Failed i Database Message 0x00000388 Oracle ODBC OraJORA 00904 COLL invalid identifier b UPDATE Table 8 18 UPDATE Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of updated records Output succeeded log format Whaa failed Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When ed 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt UPDATE TABLE SET COL 1 gt Success 1 succeede Example E Wrenvciled 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000001 SQL lt UPDATE TABLE SET COL COL gt Failed i Database Message 0x000006ba Oracle ODBC OraJORA 01 722 invalid number c INSERT Table 8 19 INSERT When Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of inserted records Output succeeded log format When failed Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed Database Message Database error number Database error message When 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt INSERT INTO TABLE COL VALUES succeeded 1 gt Success 1 Example 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x20600023 SID 00000001 SQL lt INSERT INTO TABLE COL VALUES When failed 1 gt Failed Database Message 0x000003ae Oracle ODBC Ora ORA 009
493. pling is selected the choice is fixed to the first item in Access target CPU settings Control CPU Head device a Set a device type and an actual device number b Indexing digit specification and word device specification by bit specification are not allowed c For accessible devices refer to the following lt Section 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges d When block is selected in Array setting different kinds of devices cannot be set e Set device points as follows The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of Device tag settings e 96 points when High speed sampling is selected e 40000 points when Array setting is set Data type Select the data type of sampling data device data Table 7 39 Options of Data type 89 Selectable Item Description 4 device Single word Handles data as single word data 16 bit Integer type Word Double word Handles data as double word data 32 bit Integer type Word Real number Handles data as floating point data Word Bit Handles data as bit data in units of bits 0 1 Bit String Handles data as character strings Word 16bit BCD Handles data as 16 bit BCD data Word 32bit BCD Handles data as 32 bit BCD data Word When Data type is String device values are processed as follows e When the device value neither an ASCII code nor shifted JIS code It is replaced with period 2Eh MES interface module
494. port gt All Programs Search programs and files 2 Shutdown 2 oo Select System and Security li Ties dois For Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 7 System and Security User Accounts and Family Safety select Classic View ea Review your computer s status Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer Set up parental controls for any user Find and fix problems Appearance and Personalization Network and Internet ay Changethe theme Connect to the Internet Change desktop background View network status and tasks Adjust screen resolution Choose homegroup and sharing options Clock Language and Region Hardware and Sound den aS f Change keyboards or other input methods Add a device A Ease of Access Connect to a projector Let Windows suggest settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings Optimize visual display Programs Uninstall a program E Select Administrative Tools Control Panel Home Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues System and Security Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time Windows Firewall Programs Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall User Accounts and Family Safety Network and Internet Hardware and Sound we System View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Appearance and scale
495. propriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be a
496. r Restore files from backup Administrative Tools Free up disk space Defragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions View event logs Schedule tasks J To the next page App 68 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES rs ELGG Ley aries From the previous page 4 Set the slide bar Never notify and click the OK_ button Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer User Account Control helps prevent potentially harmful programs from making changes to your computer Tell me more about User Account Control settings Programs try to install software or make changes to my computer I make changes to Windows settings use programs that are not certified for because they do not support User Account Control _Not recommended Choose this only if you need to Windows 7 Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R App 69 Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES Cs ELSE Ley aries 2 Method for permitting programs without any warning message The following shows a procedure for permitting programs without any warning message A seting tates Open the Control Panel S Connect to a Projector Q Snipping Tool a XPS Viewer i Windows Fax and Scan Devices and Printers e Remote Desktop Connection _ Default Programs amp Magnifier Help and Sup
497. r CPU E INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 12 Online T7 125 7 12 2 Writing the MES interface function settings MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC TAY series 7 12 3 Reading the MES interface function settings Read the MES interface function settings project from the MES interface module Perform either of the following Click amp Read e Select Online Read from the menu 2 A dialog box asking for confirmation is EEEE x displayed Clicking the button starts reading YD The project will be replaced with the active project Do you want to continue ai Cancel Upon completion of reading the confirmation MX MESInterface x dialog box appears Click the _OK_ button e D Loading completed Figure 7 98 Reading the MES interface function settings 7 12 4 Verifying the MES interface function settings The MES interface function settings in the MES interface module are compared with those in the currently editing project Point Data of Project name and Comment in Project setting are not verified Selecting Online Verify from the menu starts verification 2 Upon completion of verification the confirmation dialog box appears Click the OK button
498. r OFF and ON or reset the programmable controller CPU to restart the MES interface module Power OFF the programmable controller y Check that file access is active by the following CompactFlash card status X1 ON File access status X2 OFF i End Figure 4 12 Removal or replacement of the CompactFlash card Point Not following the procedure may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being accessed or a file system error 4 16 4 7 CompactFlash Card 4 7 2 Installation removing the CompactFlash card 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 1 Stopping file access z Q Stop file access e Turn the File access stop request Y2 ON from OFF z Check the file access stop by the following e Check the CompactFlash card status X1 is OFF e Check the File access status X2 is ON 5 e Turn the File access stop request Y2 OFF from ON z Z2 File access stop request Y2 2 File access status X2 _ BunngistoR CompactFlash card status X1 A A Figure 4 13 File access stop processing 2 Installation of the CompactFlash card Open the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module then remove the CompactFlash card slot cover e w oO fa WW Q O x a Q zZ lt tyrz Bae W ma Do INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Figure 4 14 Comp
499. r adding or modifying an action refer to the following ze lt gt Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 n 6 5 Component Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component i a Foe t Delete row Tag component data length in job 0 words total conc INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 8 9 10 11 Figure 7 93 Operation action dialog box et FUNCTIONS le 2 ms G W z E E o 260 36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 119 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 120 1 MELSEC A series Table 7 81 Setting items in the Operation action dialog box Item Description Substitution tag Component left side Select a tag or variable to which a value is assigned Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution target Operation tag Select a tag constant or variable which is computed Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable Component right side Select or directly enter a component constant value or a variable that is to be computed Operator Select an operator Addition Subtraction Mult
500. ray DIOCK SIZ ceros sianu a 7 51 Anay SEUN ra CO 7 43 Automatically resend buffer eeeeeeeeeeeereeeees 7 79 B Battery MOUNING sesvecseccttinvinccneaiiineetien neceeniciaeeteniviens 4 20 Operation without mounting battery 0 4 24 Removing battery for storage 4 25 Replacement osuneita ans 4 21 Specifications isiru aia 4 20 Buffer memory detailS 0 cceceeeeeeesteeeeeeeaes 3 26 Buffer Memory lists cscs ceeiieceeeesinieceeesennees 3 21 C Character Stig siveri n r taasccedeeteaanne 7 48 Component Setting esaera 7 45 Connection system equipment ccceeeeeees 2 7 Connection timeOut eee cee eceeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaas 7 57 CONSAN sic Seiass cacescagxs ince iabsavaacnettuarieedaciasrena 7 88 7 121 D Database Seftigen rcce 8 6 Daylight saving Summer time saaeeeeeeee A 24 FUNCION fee wha a NA 6 24 Eil o PEPE T PE E E E 7 21 DB access MeoUlb nesorssnonu non nee 8 17 DB DUP RING eiee A 22 Clear processing eseeceeeeeeeeeees 7 29 7 142 FUNGON fitis cciediiteees edie entities denne 6 13 Operation online 7 141 7 142 SOMN G eiiiai anaiai ss 7 27 7 79 DOCS es ticcevetetenceecdtestancsvcest eakat 7 102 Deleting an it M 2 ccccccecieeeeieeeeeeieeeeeeeeenereey 7 8 Detailed 10Q cc cccecceseccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeetenseeee 7 129 Device tag Tag ecccierairainaissss A 23 6 4 7 38 Disabling the job eeeeeteeeeeeee 7 60 7 140 9 1 E Enabling
501. rcuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation During registering each setting do not power OFF the mounted module or reset the programmable controller CPU Otherwise data in the CompactFlash card will be undefined Therefore resetting and re registering data are required This may also cause a module failure or malfunctions Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller under the environment specified in the User s Manual Using this programmable controller in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the programmable controller in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Installation Precautions CAUTION Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so could result in damage to the product Tighten th
502. representative FFD4h Writing a TC setting value was attempted to the programmable Change the TC setting value during FFD5h ROM operation error l controller CPU that was running the ROM operation ROM FFD6h FFD7h j ishi e Please consult your local Mitsubishi FFD9h System error representative to FFDEh FFDFh Incorrect access target The setting of the access target CPU e Correct Access target CPU error is incorrect settings FFEOh FFE1h i ishi e Please consult your local Mitsubishi FFEDh System error j representative to FFEFh FFFOh Station or Network No The station No or network No is out e Check the station No and network error of range or the setting is incorrect No in Access target CPU settings e Please consult your local Mitsubishi RERIK System error i representative No memory cassette or inappropriate e Check the memory cassette of the FFF2h Memory cassette error one is attached to the accessed access target CPU programmable controller CPU e Check the block No of the The block No of the specified ss f i extension file register device type p extension file register has been FFF3h Write protect error e Check the write protect DIP switch allocated to the write protect area of on the memory cassette of the the memory cassette access target CPU The block No of the specified e Check the block No of the FFF4h Block error 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES i
503. reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law Figure 8 13 Product information dialog box 2 Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website D Select Help Connect to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website from the menu 2 The MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website is displayed Online manuals and other information can be viewed 8 7 Help 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Kel ries 8 8 Output Log Specifications This section explains the output log format for the SQL failure log and access log shown S a Section 8 8 1 or later wi Date Error code Message Line feed Table 8 10 Output log format for the SQL failure log and access log a 5 Item Description 5 1st to 4th bytes at the head Year j a Four digit integer for year Numbers fa a of the line ES a 5th byte at the head of the ao Year Month delimiter ie Slash 2Fh i 6th and 7th bytes at the ee Month i 2 digit integer 01 to 12 Numbers head of the line 8th byte at the head of the 2 Month Day delimiter A Y Slash 2Fh O line lt 9th and 10th bytes at the rm Day i Y 2 digit integer 01 to 31 Numbers O head of the line T 11th byte at the head of the Day Hour delimiter li Y Space 20h ine 12th and 13th bytes at the rae Date Hour j 2 digit i
504. rget CPU Setting T 33 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 34 MELSEC Le series 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting Up to 64 items can be set in By default a control CPU is name Access target CPU settings within one project set as the first item with ControlCPU displayed for CPU Deletion or setting modification of the first item is not allowed Only the CPU name can be CPU name PLC series Multiple CPU specification modified NewCPU QCPU Q Mode RCPU v No specification X Other station specification No specification C Other Station Single network Other Station Co existence network Network communication route Figure 7 28 Access target CPU settings Table 7 35 Setting items in Access target CPU settings Item Description CPU name Set the access target CPU name Up to 16 characters PLC series Select the PLC series of the access target CPU Multiple CPU specification system Select a CPU No when the access target CPU is used in the multiple CPU Other station specification Select whether or not to specify any other station Network communication route Co existence network ste for access when any other station is specified communication route 1 CPU name Up to 16 characters Set the access target CPU name The set CPU name is used in Device tag settings For characters that can be used for CPU names refer t
505. rigger buffering is disabled refer to the following g L Section 6 1 11 1 Operation behavior of jobs 5 2 Whether a trigger condition changed from false to true or not is determined at the time of sampling LC Section 7 10 2 6 Value monitoring startup z i 2 No of times data can be stored in the trigger buffer 38 a The trigger buffering function allows up to 128 pieces of trigger information tag data time to be stored concurrently Note that there are no restrictions on the number of bufferings per job z b No of trigger buffer data can be confirmed by the following 5 e No of trigger buffer data Buffer memory address 11511 F Online Remote operation C gt Section 7 13 Online Remote operation c If a trigger occurs with No of trigger buffer data already reached 128 it is discarded A The number of times the trigger buffer data are discarded can be confirmed in the Am Trigger buffer overflow count area Buffer memory address 11512 Sae 3 Clearing the trigger buffer _ The following clears the contents of the trigger buffer e Update settings gt Section 7 13 2 3 Update settings a e Stop of the MES interface function operation by MES interface function 6 configuration tool Online Remote operation ES C Section 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface E function 32 ez e Turning the programmable controller power OFF and ON e Resetting the programmable cont
506. rocedure Es Point If a confirmation message for overwriting DLL files is displayed at installation click the Yes button and overwrite the DLL files Not overwriting the DLLs may fail to execute MX MESInterface correctly 5 1 5 1 Installation 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEC Aeres 2 MX MESInterface installation For system configurations refer to the following gt Section 2 1 2 System configuration for installation Ei O Point 1 Before installing MX MESInterface close any other applications running on Windows 2 The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating lt 5 system or other companies software such as Windows Update and Java pE update may start automatically SA Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically 3 When installing MX MESInterface log on as a user with Administrator 2 authority 2 O z gf o BES ol ja 23 k Eg Sz PE 23 FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 5 1 Installation 5 9 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEC TA series The following screens are for Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Start Ele git view Favorites Q Favortes Tes Hep a O B Asa iB rie Aches 0A DLE Files Currently on the CD
507. roller CPU o Z O Z 5 U MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 9 6 1 5 Trigger buffering function 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le series 6 1 6 SQL text transmission Communication action The SQL text transmission function allows automatic creation of SQL texts enabling communications with the database The following commands can be selected for the SQL text e Select MultiSelect e Update e Insert e Delete For the SQL text transmission setting refer to the following gt Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action 1 Select MultiSelect Select MultiSelect is used to write a database value to a tag component value area or to store it in the temporary variable area by sending a SQL text to the database When a value is stored in the temporary variable area it can be used as a variable for other actions 2 Update and Insert Update and Insert are used to embed a tag component value or a temporary variable in an SQL text and write the value to the database 3 Delete Delete is used to eliminate a record from the database Database server computer Select MultiSelect Select Tag Component gt Temporary variable Data Update Tag Component Update Temporary variable Data a Constant Insert Database Insert Tag Comp
508. ror log Floating point type in all cases Division of integer type 7 15 Precautions r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres d Operation between character string type values 1 B w wa operator Combines character strings Example ABCDEFG HIJ ABCDEFGHIJ Other operators When both of the operands can be converted to numerical values the operation is performed using the numerical values Both or either of them cannot be converted to numerical values the job execution is canceled At this time Operation error is displayed in the error log Example 312 x 4 1248 31AH x 4 gt Cancellation of job execution Operation between a character string type value and a numerical type value Same as the case of the operation between character string type values 7 15 Precautions T7 147 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 e G W coe ESO Z5r 6 ZPO z ie E O Z Le DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Kel cries CHAPTER 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL This section explains DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions Installing DB Connection Service on t
509. ror number Database error message When Example fen 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 DB Disconnect DataSource User Name Success succeede 8 8 Output Log Specifications 8 8 1 Access log 8 26 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL oe z O O mf A Z Q S m Q ari as 22 Lu og QZ ZE W W nn 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Le series 4 SQL text reception processing results For details on Database error number and Database error message in the output log format in the case of failure refer to the manual for each database Depending on the Error code however Database Message and subsequent data cannot be output According to the error code confirm the error details and take corrective actions lt 3 Section 10 2 2 2 Access log of DB Connection Service a SELECT Table 8 17 SELECT Item Description When Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Success No of selected records Output succeeded log format When tailed Date Error code SID Session ID SQL lt SQL text gt Failed i Database Message Database error number Database error message When Bienen 2007 10 01 12 00 00 000 0x00000000 SID 00000001 SQL lt SELECT COL from TABLE gt Success 1 u Exam
510. rosoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 5 Values are assigned with precision of six decimal digits Display format of tag component constant variable for generated SQL text execution procedure The components constant values of the action being edited or the tag components constants variables set to the condition value in update insert delete are displayed in Generated SQL text and Execution procedure with the following format The Tag component Module time Data String and Variable are generated at job execution therefore they are different from the actual SQL text and stored procedure call information Table 7 71 Display format of the tag component constant value Item Display format Displayed enclosed Tag component ith Device tag name component name wi Only the settin Access ie Number Numerical value content is displayed Other than the above Displayed enclosed Number String with single quotes String Oracle 8i sysdate Senne 5 Displayed as shown NOW i Access on the right 0 Date Other than the above CURRENT_TIMESTAMP e pisstaved h TO_DATE Date YYYYMMDDhhmmss splayed as shown Module time ale tn j n wn YYYYMMDDHH24MISS on the right Other than the above 9 Date YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Displayed as Date Date String Date String F Displayed enclosed A Variable
511. rs 3 1 to 64 However only one high speed CPUNO CPU name i sampling tag allowed Single precision SINGLE Double precision DOUBLE Floating point REAL Bit BIT DATATYPE Data type Character string The number shows STRING1 to STRING32 the number of characters 16 bit BCD 16BCD 32 bit BCD 32BCD DEVICE Head device 4 Head device FORMAT Fixed value DEC DECIMAL PLACES Fixed value 0 OPERATOR Fixed value NONE OPERAND Fixed value Blank Perform When enabled ENABLE ri STATISTICS statistical j When disabled DISABLE processing When DISABLE is selected p Blank with STATISTICS Average AVERAGE STATTYPE Statistical t When ENABLE Maximum MAXIMUM atistical type sica ee When ENABLE Piima MINIMUM is selected with Movi MOVINGAVERAGE STATISTICS pepe eee Moving maximum MOVINGMAXIMUM Moving minimum MOVINGMINIMUM When DISABLE is selected Blank with STATISTICS Average Blank Maximum Blank EJ STATSIZE No of samples When ENABLE Minimum Blank is selected with Movi aig O08 STATISTICS oving average o Moving maximum 2 to 20 Moving minimum 2 to 20 1 22 3 4 For characters can be used for component names refer to the following Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product If the same component name already exists in the same item Tag the existing n
512. rs values such as the time and tag values and when the trigger condition changes from false to true when the condition is met starts a job The following setting options are available as conditions for start e Disable Does not start the job by a trigger condition e Time specification startup Starts the job at the specified time Specified time period startup Starts the job at the specified intervals Unit Seconds e Value monitoring startup Compares the actual tag component value with the condition value tag component value or constant value at every sampling times and starts the job when the condition is met e Handshake operation Starts the job on request from the programmable controller CPU Completion of job execution can be reported to the programmable controller CPU e At module startup Starts the job only once when the MES interface module starts up Two kinds of conditions can be used in combination for starting a job For the trigger monitoring function setting refer to the following lt Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions 1st of every month 9 00 00 3600 seconds Time specification startup Specified time eriod startup Ta Component Value monitoring startup Handshake operation Figure 6 4 Trigger monitoring function 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 4 Trigger monitoring function Job Trigger es 4 ae Rondon met Job startup 6 5
513. rver 2003 x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System SPECIFICATIONS Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Operating System 2 Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Operating system vw 4 English version Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Enterprise Operating System Interface Ethernet INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION When using the DB interface function relational database English version Oracle 8i 32 bits Oracle 9i 32 bits Oracle 10g 32 bits Oracle 11g 32 bit x 64 Oracle 12c x 64 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 32 bits Microsoft SQL Server 2005 32 bits Microsoft SQL Server 2008 32 bit x64 Microsoft SQL Server 2012 32 bit x64 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE 2000 e Microsoft Access 2000 e Microsoft Access 2003 Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 32 bits Microsoft Access 2013 32 bits
514. rver 2012 R2 System and Security or pick a Control Panel icon PEL administrative Tools Gy Scheduled tasks EPEE siecle Clicking Administrative Tools displays ae Tl Administrative Tools dialog box tive Tools B Control Panel My Documents F My Computer G My Network Places ODBC Data Source Administrator ax amp Double clicking Data Sources ODBC displays Se Cee ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box a E Select the System DSN tab then click the Add button An ODBC System data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A System data source is visible to all users on this machine including NT services Cancel Ay Help l To the next page 8 11 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Kel ries From the previous page 4 The Create New Data Source dialog box is E displayed then select Microsoft Access Driver mdb 2 When using Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 z 2 ae Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb accdb BZ When using Select and MultiSelect for a field ae whose data type is single type or double type perform the following e Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb z e When the database source file used is accdb F convert the file into m
515. rvices in all the database server computers operating normally Check each of the DB Connection Services in all the database server computers e When buffered SQL texts are to be sent to more than one destination unless DB Connection Services in all the database server computers are operating resending is not started Data such as DB buffering status No of DB bufferings DB buffer full or DB buffer utilization will not be stored in the tag component which is selected in DB buffering settings of System setting L7 Section 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting Was the setting that enables data writing to the tag component made in Job settings Select another tag component or check the Job settings and disable data writing to the relevant tag component Was the device value of the relevant tag component manipulated in the programmable controller CPU Specify another device Or do not manipulate the relevant device value in the programmable controller CPU Failed to communicate with the server computer several times after module startup 10 52 Was the programmable controller powered ON immediately after OFF Turn OFF the programmable controller and after several minutes turn it ON Is there any problem on the server computer 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module Restart the server computer To the next page 1 O
516. s Section 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file Device tag name is not displayed for the setting item by which data are written to a tag Is the tag set to data write disabled e Set the tag to data write enabled Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting All the text is not displayed in a table The text display is truncated Isn t the column width narrow e Adjust the column width of the table Section 7 3 1 Screen structure 2 System setting gt Section 7 6 System Setting Symptom A desired device tag name is not displayed in DB buffering settings Table 10 11 System setting Checked item Is the tag set to data write disabled Corrective action e Set the tag to data write enabled gt Section 7 8 1 Setting items in Device Tag setting 3 Access target CPU settings gt Section 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting Symptom Unable to change or delete an item in Access target CPU settings 10 38 Table 10 12 Access target CPU settings Checked item Is it the first item Corrective action e If it is any item other than the first one change the item or add an item e Since the control CPU is set as the first item deletion or setting change is not allowed for it Only the CPU name can be changed Is the selected item used in Device tag settings 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configur
517. s 10 4 10 2 _ Error Code LiSt ssisesstecediseswncnecvasesiedcneavevets dads a aaa a aeea a te eaaa a a ENEE 10 7 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface Module cc cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeneseaaees 10 7 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeesecececcneaeceeeeeeeteeeeetesesssensaaeeess 10 24 10 2 3 Error codes returned in XML response MESSAGES eects eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetnaeeeeeeneaa 10 36 10 3 Troubleshooting by SYMPtoOM cece teeter eee eeeeee nirien aiaa iee EE ATAARE AA ERRE 10 37 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration TOol c ccccececeeeeeeeetieeeeeeenteeeeeeeeee 10 37 10 3 2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool 0 0 0 cceeeeeeeeeeetteee eee eeneeeeeetnnneeeeereea 10 44 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module eee eee eee eetee eee ee tenets eeeenaeeeeeetnaeeeeereea 10 45 APPENDICES App 1 to App 76 Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface ceeeeeeeeeeees App 1 Appendix 1 1 Addition of new fUNCTIONS cc cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeecaeeeeeeeeeeseesecceeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeseeteesennaees App 1 Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions ccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeaecceeeeeeeeeeeeeesecceeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaea App 4 Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables c ecceceeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeececce
518. s described below more sophisticated data linkage can be realized 1 Before executing the first action of the job By executing programs before the first action of the job data required for the job can be produced on the database in advance 2 After executing the last action of the job By executing programs after the last action of the job data written to the database by the job can be utilized for programs on the server computer 6 12 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 8 Arithmetic processing function Operation action 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aeres 6 1 10 DB buffering function 1 DB buffering function ai The DB buffering function temporarily stores SQL texts or stored procedure call w information into a CompactFlash card when they cannot be sent due to network 2 disconnection or failure of the database server computer After recovery the buffered SQL texts or stored procedure call information are automatically sent to the database Manual operation is also possible 5 no 6 z O B gf W Foe INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION ez CompactFlash card Figure 6 11 DB buffering function o Z O O Z 5 U MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 13 6 1 10 DB buffering function
519. s job Finish this job e When Continue this job is selected z After executions of exception processing described in the above 1 and 2 z the system continues executions of other actions 5 e When Finish this job is selected 6 After executions of exception processing described in the above 1 and 2 the system forcibly terminates the job without executing other actions At this time update insert delete values before execution of the exception 6 processing are committed and they are written to relevant tag ra components Ga 2 nao Point 1 When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing an error occurred during job execution job cancellation is not notified lt 3 Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation 2 If Enable DB buffering is selected for a job its exception process setting is disabled lt Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T7 113 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 114 MELSEC Aeres 10 Multi select setting A click on the Multi select setting button displays the Multi select setting dialog box Complete the setting
520. s must be taken when constructing the 100BASE TX and 10BASE T networks Consult a specialist when connecting connection cable terminals installing main line cables etc 2 Use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX connection cable compliant with the following standards 3 Section 2 3 Connection System Equipment 3 The bending radius near the connector should be at least four times longer than the cable s outside diameter 4 Connect the device on other end according to its specifications 4 8 4 4 Wiring 4 4 1 Wiring 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings z The intelligent function module switches are used to make the mode setting default S operation setting battery error detection setting and response monitoring time setting Select Project window Parameter gt PLC parameter I O assignment tab of GX Developer 2 5 2 The I O assignment tab is displayed lt 2 e Set the following items for the slot to which the MES interface module is mounted oZ nO then click the Switch setting button Qn H Parameter D PLC name PLC system PLC fie PLC RAS Device Program Boot fie SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment 5 QU71MES36 Enel ene 5 Detailed settino m N A Assigning the I D address is not necessary as the CPU does it ey Leaving this setting blank will not cau
521. s of the MES interface function eseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeernrneeeeen 7 136 7 13 2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function e ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 7 137 7 13 3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution eeessseessssisererirrrrrerressererreereeisns 7 139 7 434 Changing the job Status eee cere teenie enaint einai i aiaei E E ENERE A NNa 7 140 7 13 5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering eeeessieesssseceeerrreeererrnsseerrrnserrnnnesetennneeeeens 7 141 T136 Operating the DB DuieriNges scssi sni ieee teeek dee saee eben aaa tne tae ee eee 7 142 7 13 7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering ee ec ceeeeeeeeeertteeeeteetaeeeeeeeeaeees 7 143 1 13 89 Formatting the CompactFlash Card sc sccise cecdnceuses toadccuues aaa A A 7 143 TAA GIP esecccevisseeccdiviescerneeivisbectevisseaccevens RE E E E T EE 7 144 FAD PROCAULIONS siar N SONS 7 145 CHAPTER8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 1to8 31 8 1 DB Connection Service Functions ccc cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeereneeeeees 8 1 8 2 setting ODBC to the Databas Genier a E NON 8 6 8 3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting TOO cece eeeee rescence eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaaees 8 13 8 4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaees 8 14 B41 SCLECM SUCUT sec
522. s on Prompt for consent on the secure desktop Prompt for credentials Prompt for consent for consent for non Windows binaries Security Setting gt gt tab and click the button 1 End Appendix 7 Warning Messages in Windows R Appendix 7 2 Methods for disabling warning messages APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres Appendix 8 Transportation Precautions g When transporting a battery containing lithium handling according to transportation be regulations is required 2 xu Appendix 8 1 Controlled model Z The lithium battery used in the MES interface module is classified as follows 9 ae N Table App 76 Lithium battery z TERE 3 Classification for Y Product name Model Product supply status a ip transportation me Non hazardous Q series battery Q6BAT Lithium battery material Appendix 8 2 Handling for shipping APPENDICES The products are packed in accordance with transportation regulations before shipment When transporting products after repacking or unpacking them make them comply with the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and national transportation regulations For details consult with the shipping carrier INDEX Appendix 8 Transportation Precautions A T Appendix 8 1 Controlled model pp APPENDICES MELSEC Le series Appendix 9 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precaut
523. s target CPU until receiving the reply z A response time out error 0002h occurs if the access target CPU does not respond z within the set time 5 a Setting range 15 to 255 Second Default value 15 seconds 4 When setting the time between 0 and 14 or making no settings response monitoring time operates with 15 seconds z oF Zu z n0 b15 to b8 b7 to bO g i Upper byte Lower byte Switch 3 7 X a Specify 0 Response monitoring time setting 15 to 255 Second The upper byte data is ignored However when other than 0 is specified When setting the time between 0 a in this area Switch setting error 0180h occurs at hardware test and 14 or making no settings 25 response monitoring time operates 5 z with 15 seconds z z yl Figure 4 10 Response monitoring time setting Switch 3 Lower byte 5 2 D Point After Write to PLC is executed the intelligent function module switch settings are enabled when turning the power ON from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU R 3 For GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual 2 Ww Zz C GX Developer Operating Manual 2 2 eeeeeeeenuevseeaoeeevseeeeeeeeeeeoeoeeoe eee eeeeeeeeoeeoeoeee eee ee eee gs z e os EQO 9z 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4 11 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 12 MELSEC A series 4 6 Self diagnostics Test This section explains the self diagnostics test designed for checking th
524. s the MES interface function settings project to the MES interface module Section 7 12 2 Restart Makes the stopped MES interface function operation restart Section 7 13 2 m Stop Stops the MES interface function operation Section 7 13 2 mp One shot execution Executes a job as a one shot task Section 7 12 6 ong Product information Displays the product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 7 3 Screen Structure 7 3 3 Toolbar configuration Section 7 14 r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 3 4 Operations using the Edit items tree The Edit items tree shows overall project settings in a tree a This section explains the operations using the Edit items tree w G New MES interface function config Project Edit view Online Help Oe Bb fe Ow 6 Project root z QH System setting Item 3 DZ cas e NewTag Sy Server service settings B NewServer C Job settings Setting type o NewJob z 9 T rm oO Figure 7 11 Edit items tree 3 1 Selecting an item 9 2 When double clicking the project root or each setting type some items are Irz displayed zng fen nao Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area 2 Adding an item Selecting an item or a setting type to be added and performing either of the follow
525. s values that can be entered as a substitute value M EA Table 7 76 Values that can be entered as a substitute value O Data type oftag Values that can be entered as a substitute value 5 component a Bit type ON OFF is selectable Single precision type Up to 16 characters Double precision type e Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 Floating point type Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 Ae 16 bit BCD type Unsigned 16 bit BCD notation 0 to 9999 Example 1234 Zuz 32 bit BCD type Unsigned 32 bit BCD notation 0 to 99999999 Example 12345678 Ga 2 Up to 32 characters E 3 Character string For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following DES lt 3 Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc 2 Continue this job Finish this job e When Continue this job is selected After execution of exception processing described in the above 1 the system continues executions of other actions e When Finish this job is selected After execution of exception processing described in the above 1 the job is forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions At this time update insert delete values before exception processing execution are committed and they are written to relevant tag components INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Point 1 When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing an error occurred during job execution job cancellation is not
526. s when Select or MultiSelect is Z fe selected for Action type ZE 2 Request record No ype p AT s Note that if the number of requested records is not specified No specification z a is displayed z 2 De Displays the execution result of the SQL text zs e When succeeded 3 Execution result Success is displayed e When failed Failed is displayed Displays the number of selected records when Select Update MultiSelect or 2 Delete is selected for Action type 2 io The number of records is stored in Applicable record No as follows Z TE e When Execution result is Success 7 Number of records that met the Select Update Delete Select conditions 3 4 Applicable record No 2 Update Number of records that were updated u zZ Number of records that met the Select Update Delete z E MultiSelect 7 tow conditions Eos zk gt Delete Number of records that were deleted 7 9 z ZPO e When Execution result is Failed Noting is displayed To the next page DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 12 Online T7 E 131 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 1 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 132 MELSEC A series From the previous page Table 7 90 Items displayed for Communication action Display Description 5 6 Acquired record No Insert records No Displays the number of acquired r
527. se an error to occu Base setting Base mode Base model name Power model name Extension cable Slots Pine Detail Ext Basel ti 8 Slot Defaut _ ErtBase5 12 Slot Defaut Mo te Caen Import Multiple CPL Parameter Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU setings Default Check End Cancel ie W oc 5 fal W O O ir a fal zZ CE Bae E W ma Do Figure 4 7 I O assignment tab Q Table 4 4 I O assignment tab setting items Z 5 ZE Item Description e S Type Select Intelli d A A Model name Enter the model name of the module 9 z Points Select 32 points StartXY Enter the MES interface module head I O number Detailed setting For a multiple CPU system specify the control CPU of the MES interface module Clicking the Switch setting button displays the Switch setting for I O and intelligent o PA function module dialog box 2 O Make the setting with referring to the following descriptions 5 Selecting HEX in Input format facilitates the input After completing the setting click the End button a fe J 6 Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module 5 lt Input format HEX D 2 5 S28 rh Type 2a a ce SS ST a Figure 4 8 Switch setting for I O and TEIE function module dialog box E O aod ze Wo ZO0Zz OSE oo fi ba ann
528. se error message are output to the space after Database Message in the access log of DB Connection Service For the output log format refer to the following Section 8 8 1 Access log 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 0x20600001 MELSEC Aeres 3 SQL failure log of DB Connection Service Table 10 8 SQL failure log output error list of DB Connection Service Error description and cause Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory 0x20600002 Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient resources Corrective action e Terminate any unnecessary applications Add more memory to the personal computer 0x20600020 DB Connection Service does not support the SQL instruction to be executed e Check if the source IP address belongs to the MES interface module or the configuration computer Check the version of the MES interface module or MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 0x20600021 Failed in preparation before SQL execution 0x20600022 Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record that is to be obtained by the SQL execution Set a correct database type in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Select Job settings Communication action in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and set a correct table name 0x20600023 0x20600024 Failed in SQL
529. se of colon is not allowed for User name of Account setting Table App 4 Characters can be used in character string constants etc i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E vu SP o0 P p Em l 1 A Q a q E g 2 B R b r Ea 3 C S c s 4 4 D T d t ey 5 E U e u 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 G W g w Ea 8 H x h x 8 9 l Y i y A J Z j z E Te aa E e lt L l l o f Ti m gt PE i ee eae Be I 2 O a o Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc The shaded sections can be used However a number cannot be used as the first character Reserved terms of the database cannot be used For reserved terms of the database refer to the following lt L gt Manuals of the database used Table App 5 Characters can be used in field names table names etc o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 f HH vu SP 0 P p m 1 A Q a q 2 i 2 B R b r 3 E S c a Ea 4 D T d t e 5 E U e u ea amp 6 F V f v i T G W g w 8 8 H x h x E 9 Y l y a aaa EEH ES EN a a Le EE a E gt N 4S n EE O o App 8 Appendix 2 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc APPENDICES M SLSEC KEY series Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format
530. se type of the DB server setting acquiring table names from the database correctly with the MES Interface Function Failed to prepare before the SQL execution when 0x20B00009 u Configuration Tool acquiring table names from the database Set the database type of the DB server setting lt correctly with the MES Interface Function Failed to execute SQL when acquiring table names 0x20B0000A Configuration Tool from the database r e Check if there is any problem in the connection route 0x20B0000B Please consult your local Mitsubishi to System error representative 0x20B0000D on Set the database type of the DB server setting The database type set for the DB server setting is 0x20B0000E correctly with the MES Interface Function different from the actual database type Configuration Tool 0x20B0000F e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20C00001 System error representative 0x20C00002 Set the database type of the DB server setting correctly with the MES Interface Function 0x20C00003 Failed to acquire field names from the database Configuration Tool e Check if there is any problem in the connection route Failed to acquire the information which is e Set the database type of the DB server setting 0x20C00004 necessary for field name acquisition when correctly with the MES Interface Function acquiring field names from the database Configuration Tool 0x20C00005 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi
531. select items to be imported Table 7 11 Automatically selected item Setting type Automatically selected item Device tag settings Access target CPU settings Job settings Device tag settings Server service settings 2 Import precautions There is a limit on the number of settings for each setting type in a project Check Existing registration information and Import information and select items of each setting type to be imported so that each limit is not exceeded Table 7 12 Number of settings available for each setting type Setting type Allowable number of settings Access target CPU settings 64 Device tag settings 64 Server service settings 32 Job settings 64 2 Ifan item of the same name exists it is overwritten and therefore excluded from the restriction on the number of settings for each setting type T 12 7 4 Project File Handling 7 4 4 Importing a project r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 4 5 Importing a CSV file Import an existing CSV file a 3 s Any setting can be selected from a CSV file edited on a personal computer and it can be w imported into the setting of the current project 2 System setting Access target CPU settings and Device tag settings can be imported D Save the import target CSV files shown in Table 7 13 in the same folder z The files which are shown as Required in the Saving in
532. shake operation Table 7 53 Setting items when selecting Handshake operation Item Description Select a tag component used to request for job startup Handshake startup Only the tag components whose Data type is Bit are selectable Note that tags with Array setting are not selectable Select a tag component that allows notification of execution completion of the job Only the tag components whose Data type is Bit are selectable Note that the following tags are not selectable e Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled e Tags for which Array setting is set Completion notification 1 1 Do not specify the same Completion notification to multiple jobs 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres c Program example 1 Devices used in the program a Table 7 54 Devices used in the program Device name Device Application MES interface module Input X5 Information linkage status External input command X100 Processing request MO In process M100 Handshake startup lt Internal relay a F M200 Completion notification Specify at Job settings fu 2 M201 Job cancellation notification A 6 2 Program example The following is a program example in which a job is executed when an Al execution request X100 fr
533. signed with precision of six decimal digits oy z iS 8 N gf W E 20g ie nao INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j w z iL pa im Z o w l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 ZO DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 11 Job Setting Actions T 87 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 2 About constants M ALS a6 Q series Constants can be used as component values for each action or as condition values of Select Update Delete conditions The following table lists constant types and the data types of assignable fields If the type of a constant does not match the data type of its substitution target field an error occurs resulting in cancellation of job execution Table 7 69 Constant types and the data types of assignable fields BEERA Ro E Ee EL CERA SQL Server Constant e Access 2000 Values that can be entered in Component Oracle 8i 9i 2000 2005 Wonderware type Access 2003 2007 PR 10g 11g 12c 2008 2012 fi Historian MSDE 2000 2010 2013 Yes No type bit Byte type Up to 16 characters int Integer type Discrete Tag e Signed decimal notation per Long Integer type Analog Number Example 521 98 NUMBER smallint l 7 Tag Integer e Signed exponential notation tinyint Single type Analog Example 5 2198E03 float Double type Tag Real real AutoNumber type Curr
534. ss status X2 Information linkage status X5 CompactFlash card status X1 V Replace the CompactFlash card Power OFF the programmable controller x4 3 18 Network status 1 Turns ON when the MES interface module is initialized and became a connectable state 2 When powering ON from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU the network of the MES interface module is initialized To the next page 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 2 I O signals details 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 3 13 Input signals details Device gt ae Signal name Description No 1 Turns ON when the MES interface function operation is enabled This indicates that MES interface function processing is executable 2 Turns OFF when the MES interface function is in stop The MES interface function processing stops in the following cases 1 The period after the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset until the MES interface function starts x5 Information linkage 2 When the MES interface function processing stops with Remote operation of MES Interface status Function Configuration Tool gt Section 7 13 Online Remote operation 3 When a module stop error occurs in the MES interface module lt Section 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 4 Duri
535. st SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION b Time The time when the error occurred is stored in BCD code Q eee b15 to b8 b7 to bO E 5 Buffer memory address 152 to 157 Error log 1 0 Error code 2 z 158 to 163 Error log 2 h 1 System area Use prohibited 2 1 i Year 00H to 99H D Z ON 2 Month 014 to 121 The last ail digits of ie year 25 i LON 3 Hour 00x to 23x Day 01H to 31H Time 242 to 247 Error log 16 Be 4 Second 00x to 59x Minute 00x to 59x N Year 00H to 99 N 5 The PEA digits of ts year Day of the week OH to 6x Figure 3 9 Error time area 2 O c If an error that has already stored in the Error log area recurs the error code is not G stored in the Error log area T 3 fe 2 Ww z RE 25 226 ZrO G 528 aN o ZO OSE om fi ba ann 3 6 Buffer Memory Details 3 29 3 6 5 Error log area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 30 Point MELSEC Le series 1 The information of the Error log area can be confirmed on the following diagnostic screen Select System monitor gt Error Display of GX Developer Section 10 1 3 System monitor The Error log area can be cleared in either of the following methods a Power ON the programmable controller from OFF or reset the programmable controller CPU b Select Online and click the View working log button lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface
536. starting at 02 00 on the second Sunday in March and ending at 02 00 on the first Sunday in November INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Specify the date and time of the start time at which the clock is set ahead and those of the end time at which the clock is set back for Month Day Setting by date and Time The default is set to starting on April 1 at 02 00 and ending on October 1 at 02 00 FUNCTIONS j w z iL pa im Z o w l Q O z O 65 e oL 56 zo DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 21 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7222 MELSEC Le series 3 When time information is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer When the MES interface module cannot obtain time information from the SNTP server computer due to failure of the network or time synchronization server it behaves as follows a When time information is not obtained at the time of powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller CPU 1 The operation for the case of selecting Synchronize with programmable controller CPU time is performed Adjusted to the time of CPU No 1 Daylight saving setting is not enabled 2 Error code OAOGh is output to the error log 3 One minute later time query is executed again to the SNTP server computer If the time query is
537. successful Daylight saving setting is enabled b When time information is not obtained in timings of once a minute 1 The module continues its operations based on the information that was successfully obtained by time query 2 When the previous time query was successful error code OA07h is output to the error log 3 One minute later time query is executed again to the SNTP server computer Point Whether time query to the SNTP server computer is executed successfully or not can be confirmed by Online View working log C Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 7 6 System Setting 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 4 Precautions on the time synchronization function a Synchronizing time with SNTP server computer gt 1 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected an SNTP server computer is z required Note that the SNTP server computer must have the time synchronization server function a 2 If time information cannot be obtained at the time of powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or resetting the programmable controller o CPU the MES interface module operates in time synchronization with CPU 26 No 1 until successful time information acquisition When the clock time of CPU No 1 is different from that of the SNTP server computer the clock time of the MES interface module is changed
538. t V designates a version upgraded product Generic term for the LO2SCPU LO2SCPU P LO2CPU LO2CPU P LO6CPU LO6CPU P Been L26CPU L26CPU P L26CPU BT and L26CPU PBT L series E71 Another term for the LJ71E71 100 MELSECNET H Abbreviation for MELSECNET H network system supporting the Q series MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for MELSECNET 10 network system supporting the AnU and QnA Q4AR MES interface module Abbreviation for the QJU71MES96 MES interface module MX MESInterface Product name for the model name SW1DNC MESIF E QCPU A mode QCPU Q mode Generic term for the QO2CPU A QO2HCPU A and QO6HCPU A Generic term for the QOOJCPU QOO0CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q0O2UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU QO3UDVCPU QO04UDVCPU QO6UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU and Q26UDVCPU Generic term for the AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 QC24 N A1SJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N1 and A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 Generic term for the AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N3 T Pen A1SJ71QE71N B5 and A1SJ71QE71N B2 QnACPU Generic term for the Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2AS
539. t Process1 Rejected Dat DB1 ERRORLOG Date lt lt Date Server time Processs_No lt lt 1 Work_No lt lt Process1 Work_No DB1 RECIPEDATA Work_No gt gt Process2 Work_No RECIPE_4 gt gt Process2 RECIPE1 RECIPE_B DB1 CompletionReport DB1 Procedure_1 Totall Result Procedure_1 Device1 Production Device2 Production Devic CompletionRate lt lt Process1 Completed 1000 CompletionRate lt lt CompletionRate 100 Figure 7 66 Action list Table 7 61 Setting items in Action list Item Description Type Displays the type of the action registered Summary Displays the description of the action registered t button Selecting an action in Action list and clicking the t button reverses the order between the selected one and the one immediately above it The ti button cannot be clicked on the first action l button Selecting an action in Action list and clicking the E button reverses the order between the selected one and the one immediately below it The l button cannot be clicked on the last action Point When more than one action are set they are executed in order starting from the top 1 Type The types of the existing actions are displayed Table 7 62 Displays in Type Item Description Select Select of Communication action Update Update of Communication action Insert Insert of Communication action
540. t operation setting battery error detection setting z 1 Default operation setting Account setting b0 T S 0 Operates according to Account setting z Module status 1 Operates according to the default Section 7 2 3 area 2 Default operation setting Account setting b1 0 R 3 6 1 3h 0 Operates according to Network settings 1 Operates according to the default 3 Battery error detection setting b2 z 0 Detects battery errors Z F para 1 Does not detect battery errors Bae 4 Switch 3 status Response monitoring time setting 0 R E a a H o econd Response monitoring time HEO 4 15 to 255 Second R toring t oo 5 to 6 5x to 6x System area 7 Battery status 0 R a ra H Normal 1 Battery error fe 7 0 Normal 1 Batt lt 8 to 54 as 2 sj Use prohibited System area lt z oe a o ripen IP address o R Z5 H H Network 57 to 58 Section connection ubnetwor 39h to 3An i PENEI ark E R 3 6 2 J status area Ds o efault gatewa 3Bu to 3Cx Default gateway 0 R H H n 61 to 70 7 3Du to 46x Use prohibited System area 5 H H 71 to 72 z 47u to 48x IP address 0 R Network 73 to 74 Section a 49n to 4An settings status Subnet mask 0 R 3 63 o BS o O 4Bu to 4Cu Default gateway 0 R 5 5 H H mie 628 77 to 139 SiS i Use prohibited System area 9 2 Z 4Du to 8Bx ZrO 1 Shows whether or not reading writing is possible
541. t type Up to 16 characters Signed decimal notation Example 521 98 Signed exponential notation Example 5 2198E03 16 bit BCD type Unsigned 16 bit BCD notation 0 to 9999 Example 1234 32 bit BCD type Unsigned 32 bit BCD notation 0 to 99999999 Example 12345678 Character string 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation Up to 32 characters For characters that can be used for character strings refer to the following Appendix 2 3 Characters available for character string constants etc r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 11 Job Setting Actions z Set actions of Job settings S Up to 10 actions can be set for one job There are two types of actions Communication action for communicating with a database and Operation action for operating tag component values Adding an action z e Select Communication action or Operation action in the combo box next to the z Add button and click the Add button EE cas The Communication action or Operation action dialog box is displayed Make the setting referring to the following lt Section 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action g e Section 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action O Modifying an action g e Select an action to be modified in Action list and click the Egit button The Communication action or Operation action
542. t variables can be used 2 When calling the stored procedure whose returned values output arguments or input output arguments exists in the job whose DB buffering is enabled remain the tag settings with blank unset 3 When the tag settings are blank unset the default value of the stored procedure are set to input value of input argument and input output argument b Tag Select or directly enter a tag constant or variable of the substitution target The constant can be used only for input arguments c Component Select or directly enter a component value constant value or variable of the substitution target For tag components constants or variables refer to the following lt Section 7 11 1 1 About tag components e Section 7 11 1 2 About constants e Section 7 11 1 3 About variables 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 3 Setting items in Communication action Stored procedure r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL M eL AG Ce wries 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action Configure the settings for operation of tag component values 7 Up to 20 dyadic operations can be set for one operation action G e Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the Operation action dialog box Make the setting referring to the following descriptions fe Clicking the _OK__ button after setting adds or modifies the action z For the operation fo
543. tFlash card it takes time to turn XO ON e Delete unnecessary files from the CompactFlash card CompactFlash card status X1 does not turn ON or it takes time to turn ON Is file access stopped X2 is ON e Cancel the file access stop Are there many files in the installed CompactFlash card e If many files are stored in the CompactFlash card it takes time to turn X1 ON e Delete unnecessary files from the CompactFlash card 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 3 When operating the MES interface module 10 45 mA J XML MESSAGE n FORMAT 0 lt E Q O n w D 9 ad E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Troubleshooting about network connection MELSEC Le series Table 10 19 Troubleshooting about network connection Symptom Unable to access the MES interface module Checked item Is it in Online mode Corrective action e Change the mode to Online Is the MES interface module connected to the network X4 ON e Connect the MES interface module to the network Is there any disconnection in the connection route Connect the cables properly Is the IP address duplicated e Correct the IP address setting 7 Section 7 6 1 Setting items in Network setting Is there a firewall and or a proxy server in the connection route Is there any problem on the personal computer e Ask your network
544. ta source name is assigned to connection information for management The database can be accessed via ODBC by specifying the data source name in the MES interface function Database DB or relational database RDB Data management method that follows relational data model logic One data is expressed as a collection of multiple items Fields and the data collection is expressed as a table Data can be easily merged and selected using key data Table Device Data management format managed with relational databases It is a two dimensional table format composed of rows and columns Variety of memory data in the programmable controller There are devices handled in units of bits and devices handled in units of words Device tag Tag Data table that contains a set of information Component required to access the device data in the programmable controller CPUs on the network The MES interface module collects device data in units of tags at an interval defined in the tag Trigger condition Startup conditions for job operation To the next page A 23 From the previous page Term Description Trigger buffering When trigger conditions conditions for data transmission of multiple jobs are met in a concentrated manner their data and trigger times are buffered in the module s internal memory so that actions data operation transmission can be executed later using the buffered data Even if the frequency
545. tag component where statistical processing is set will reset the statistical values The database is not updated 10 48 Has an error occurred in Error log of Working log lt 3 Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module e If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List When trigger conditions of a job with Startup logging setting are met is the startup logged in Event log of Working log lt 3 Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module e If no startup data is logged refer to the following 7 Job will not start up If the startup log is identified in the above case is there an error in Error log of Working log lt gt Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module In Change job status of Remote operation is Disable writing to database set Has an error occurred in the access log of DB Connection Service e If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions L gt Section 10 2 Error Code List e Enable writing to the database lt lt Section 7 13 4 Changing the job status e If an error has occurred identify the error cause and take corrective actions lt Section 10 2 Error Code List Are the relevant records or table locked on the database when inserting updating or deleting data
546. tem from illegal access When the programmable controller system security needs to be protected against illegal access take measures at the user s discretion It is recommended to pay attention to the following a Set Account setting observing the following so that your account user name password will not be leaked 1 Prevent any simple setting consisting of alphanumeric characters only and include some non alphanumeric character s e g amp to create complicated user name and password 2 To protect from illegal access using the default account delete the account after creating another account b An account of User name QJ71MES96 and Password MITSUBISHI is set by default To protect from illegal access using the default account delete the account after creating another account 7 6 System Setting 7 6 3 Setting items in Account setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 6 4 Setting items in DB buffering setting Configure the settings for the DB buffering function a a 2 j For the DB buffering function setting refer to the following w Section 6 1 10 DB buffering function 2 DB buffering settings Component DB buffering status No of DB bufferings Resend DB buffer request 5 Clear DB buffer request r aie DB buffer Full DB buffering capacity a DB buffer utilization 64 MB EE Operation of recovery from network disconnection ra S IF trig
547. tem configuration for initial setup 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 4 System configuration for operation This section shows the system configuration when operating the MES interface module MELSEC TA series Point The MES interface module can only be connected with a LAN The module cannot be connected via the Internet MES interface module Twisted pair cable n ze Server computer SNTP server computer Configuration computer Figure 2 7 System configuration for operating the MES interface module 2 1 System Configuration 2 1 4 System configuration for operation 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Aeres 2 2 Applicable Systems This section describes the applicable systems OVERVIEW 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules N a When mounted with a CPU module The table below shows the CPU modules and base units applicable to the MES interface module and quantities for each CPU model Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules z O T ir 9 Le Z Q Table 2 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules Applicable module
548. that can be used for data source names refer to the ES g Data source name ca We a following nao lt gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product Select the type of the database server a zs e Oracle 8i ZE Oracle 9i z Oracle 10g 11g 12c z Q Database type SQL Server 2000 2005 2008 2012 Bz MSDE 2000 e Access 2000 e Access 2003 2007 2010 2013 e Wonderware Historian 3 IP address Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection Service is installed FUNCTIONS j 4 Port No Range 1024 to 65535 Default 5112 Set a port number of the server computer 1 2 Set the same value in Port No as the one set in Service port of DB Connection Service lt Section 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 2 Specify the number of the port that is not being used by any database or another application Usually it need not be changed w z iL ae im Z o w l Q O z O 62 e oL 56 zo DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 9 Server Service Setting T 355 7 9 1 Setting items in Server Service setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL T 56 5 7 MELSEC Le series User name Up to 30 characters Set a user name used to access the server computer For characters that can be used for user names refer to the following
549. the CPU of other station a5 e When the MES interface module is mounted to other than the Redundant P CPU it cannot access the Redundant CPU of other station DE INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 36 ZPO z e O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 7 Access Target CPU Setting T 37 7 7 1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 7 8 Device Tag Setting Configure the settings for the tag function For the tag function refer to the following K gt Section 6 1 3 Tag function Configured tags are used in Job settings etc Q Double clicking Device tag settings in the Edit items tree displays relevant items 2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed setting edit screen area Make the setting referring to the following descriptions QX New MES interface function configuration tool Project Edit View Online Help OSHER sAm E NewProject RG System setting Device tag name NewTag JT Prohibit data writing H E Access target CPU settings Sampling settings B E Device ta 19 settings Tag Normal sampling 1 seconds J Enhance sampling efficiency g A a G Server service settings c High speed sampling al NE Devices must be connected in series E Job settings up to 96 points 1 x100 milliseconds
550. the access log file Failed to delete an old access log file e When the disk space is full ensure a free disk space e When the access log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault e When the attribution of the oldest access log file is set to read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the oldest access log file enable it in the security setting When the oldest access log file has been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault 407 10 26 Failed to rename the access log file 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service e When the attribution of the new and old access log files is set to read only cancel the setting If read write is disabled for the new and old access log files enable it in the security setting e When the new and old access log files have been open in another application terminate the application e Check the disk device for any fault To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code 501 Error description and cause The computer ran out of memory when initializing the SQL failure log file 502 The computer ran out of resources when initializing the SQL failure log file MELSEC Aeres From the previous page Table 10 5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service source name
551. the device range of the next array is displayed in Device n of Component List button When the device range of the last array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked If this is clicked the device range of the last array is displayed in Device n of Component List button When the device range of the last array is already displayed this button cannot be clicked f button Selecting a component in Component List and clicking the t button reverses the order between the selected component and the one immediately above it The t button cannot be clicked on the first component Array block size T 46 button 7 8 Device Tag Setting Selecting a component in Component List and clicking the l button reverses the order between the selected component and the one immediately below it The l button cannot be clicked on the last component Make setting when changing the block size manually 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 1 MELSEC Aeres Component name Up to 16 characters Enter a component name For characters that can be used for component names refer to the following K gt Appendix 2 2 Characters that can be used for item names component names variable names etc in the product CPU name Select one from a list of the access target CPU names set in Access target CPU settings If High speed sam
552. ting for the MES interface module Section 7 6 2 i Account setting Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface module Section 7 6 3 DB buffering setting Configure the settings for the DB buffering function Section 7 6 4 Access Target CPU setting Set a connection channel to the access target CPU Section 7 7 Device tag settings Configure the settings for the tag function Section 7 8 Configure this setting when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the Array setting Section 7 8 2 same tag component Component setting Configure the settings for assigning programmable controller CPU devices to tags Section 7 8 3 Server Service setting Configure the settings for access to a server computer Section 7 9 Job settings Configure the settings for the DB interface function Section 7 10 Trigger conditions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job Section 7 10 2 Trigger buffering Set whether to utilize the Trigger buffering function or not Section 7 10 1 Communication action Configure the settings for communications with a database Section 7 11 1 Operation action Configure the settings for operation of tag component values Section 7 11 4 Program execution Configure the settings for the program execution function Section 7 10 3 DB buffering Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not Section 7 10 4 Online Perform online operati
553. tion Component Substitute value Continue this job Finish this job Figure 7 85 Exception process setting dialog box In the case of Select a Exception processing No applicable record When Select Update MultiSelect or Delete is selected for Action type set processing for the case where there is no record to be selected updated multi selected or deleted Exception processing No applicable record Continue this job Substitute value 23 Finish this job Figure 7 86 Setting example of Exception processing No applicable record 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 1 Send notification of this exception When the Send notification of this exception box is checked if there is no record to be selected updated multi selected or deleted a value will be E assigned to the specified tag component Ei When Send notification of this exception is selected set a tag component to 2 which the value is assigned e Tag Component Select a tag component to which a value is assigned Z Note that the following tags are not selectable lt Tags for which Prohibit data writing is enabled ze Tags for which Array setting is set 25 e Substitute value Directly enter a substitute value The following list
554. tion if a folder for installation destination is C MELSEC MES interface function configuration tool C MELSEC MESIF MIFConfigTool exe DB connection service and setting tool C MELSEC MESIF DBCnctConf exe DBConnector C MELSEC MESIF DBConnector exe DBCnctClient 1 C MELSEC MESIF DBCnctClient exe 1 When using Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 no setting is required For setting methods refer to the following K 7 Manuals and online help for the operating system and the security software used l End 5 7 5 1 Installation INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION MELSEG lA aries After installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and DB Connection Service Setting Tool the following icons are registered z w z All Programs fh MELSOFT Application Tar SAE A DB connection service setting tool B me fol yg amp MES interface function configuration tool F4 O Figure 5 2 Icon registration z aie 1 For Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 DB Connection Service Client is A 8 installed and its icon DBCnctClient is shown in the list appeared by clicking Startup n ra fe z o TE O wW m n of W E DEO ol a lt 8 6k Bs 5E Ez 25 FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 5 1 Installation 5 8 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 5 2 Uninstallati
555. tion 1 Field name Up to 32 characters Set a field name for the field values to be multi selected For characters that can be used for field names refer to the following c Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc For browsing the field names in the database refer to the following lt 3 8 Browse field name in this section 2 Tag Select a target tag Only the tags with Array setting can be selected 3 Component Select a target component When MultiSelect is used in a job the total of Tag component data length in job must be 45000 words or less Tag component data length in job represents a total length of the tag component data set for the following e DB tag link settings in Communication action e Select Update Delete conditions in Communication action e Operation action Even if the same tag component is set more than once in the same job each setting is handled separately The number of settings can be confirmed on the status bar of Job setting or in the Communication action or Operation action dialog box 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL Communication action MELSEC Aeres Action type MultiSelect Database oe1 DB tag link settings Tag Type 12S Process1 gt gt Processi gt gt
556. tion action 3 c in this section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres a Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete Ww Action details Y z Type MultiSelect Field name Substitute value Tag Type Component A Ww 1 1 colt gt gt 222 0 SS TAGI colt 5 Database DB 2 col2 gt gt 50 0 gt gt TAGI col2 e 3 colS gt gt 2007 09 01 00 gt gt TAGI colS Table name mestbl gt gt gt gt 2 gt Request record No 10 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 7 z gt gt gt gt O gt gt gt gt E Execution result gt gt gt gt z 3 Success Fi 3 4 Applicable record No 3 gt gt gt gt i _ gt gt gt gt O 5 Acquired record No 2 gt gt gt gt Qe 5 gt gt gt gt J QL text SELECT colt col2 cols FROM mestbl WHERE col2 50 N gt 8 no 3 When the action is Insert k Execution result a Success 6 Insert records No il SQL text Figure 7 102 Action details in the case of Communication action at Z y a 56 GOF ts a Table 7 90 Items displayed for Communication action ou Display Description ie 1 Type Database Table Displays data of Action type Database and Table name which were set in name Communication action Displays the number of requested record
557. tions are met e Not checked The job is disabled and thereby it is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met e Checked The startup logging is enabled and thereby startup records are logged e Not checked The startup logging is disabled and thereby startup records are not logged e Checked The detailed logging is enabled and thereby detailed records are logged e Not checked The detailed logging is disabled and thereby detailed records are Enable job Enable startup logging Enable detailed logging 7 not logged e Checked Disable writing to PLC Writing to programmable controller devices is disabled device e Not checked Writing to programmable controller devices is enabled Checked 3 Writing to the database is disabled e Not checked Writing to the database is enabled Disable writing to database 7 13 Online Remote operation 7 13 4 Changing the job status r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres The startup log can be checked from Online Working log Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 2 Enable detailed logging is selectable only when Test mode is selected in Job settings LF Section 7 10 1 When Enable detailed logging is checked Enable startup logging is also selected w The detailed log can be checked from Online Working log View details lt L gt Section
558. titution tag of Operation action e Output arguments input output arguments and returned values of stored procedures 3 Communication action MultiSelect cannot be selected 4 Up to 4096 words can be set as the total tag component data length usable in one job The setting can be checked on the status bar of Job settings or in each action dialog box 1 The total data length of the tag components that are set in DB tag link settings or Select Update Delete conditions of Communication action or in Operation action If two or more identical tag components are set in the same job respective data lengths are counted oa a When Delete is used for Communication action and if it is executed the deleted record cannot be restored 7 60 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 4 Startup logging a Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not If this function is enabled the job startup timing can be checked during system start up or tune up When the Startup logging box is checked the startup history of the job date and time job name is saved on a CompactFlash card The startup log can be checked from Online View working log C Section 7 12 5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module When the log capacity becomes full Log capacity 2MB x 2 The first half
559. to 433n 64 error codes 19 Refer to for the assignment of each area 1076 to 1289 sae Use prohibited System area 434 to 5091 1290 No of requested tag 0 R W 50Ax 1291 No of stored tag 0 R 50Bx 1292 Update count 0 R 50Cn Current tag Section 1293 data value area 3 6 8 No of components 0 R 50Dx 1294 to 1299 System area 50Ex to 5131 1300 to 1811 Current tag data value 0 R 514 to 7131 1812 to 3999 Use prohibited System area 7144 to FOFH Bue aia Access target CPU setting information 0 R ing i i FAO to FA3x g g 4004 to 4007 Access target CPU error information 0 R FA4H to FA7H Access target f 4008 CPU settin Section g Access target CPU 1 error code 0 R 3 6 9 FA8x status area Access target The composition of each area is the same as that of the Access target 4009 to 4071 CPU 2 to 64 CPU 1 error code FAQH to FE7n 3 error codes Refer to for the assignment of each area 1 Shows whether or not reading writing is possible R Only reading is possible W Only writing is possible R W Both reading and writing are possible 3 5 Buffer Memory List To the next page 3 23 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 o Z O q o S M a o SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECI
560. to System error representative OBOAh 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 1 Error codes for the MES interface module To the next page 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Error code OBOBh OBOCh MELSEC Kel ries From the previous page Table 10 3 Error codes for the MES interface module Error name Setting read error Description The CompactFlash card may be corrupted Action Replace the CompactFlash card OBODh DB connection service communication error An Ethernet communication error has occurred e Check the Ethernet connection e Check if Server service settings is correct e Check if the ODBC setting is correct OBOEh to OB1Eh System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0B1Fh Type conversion error The data could not be converted to the specified type Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case 0B20h 0B21h 0B22h Tag write error System error Tag access error Failed to write data to the tag Failed to read or write the tag Check if data can be written to the device specified for the tag component Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Check if Device tag settings is correct e Check if the ERR LED is on or flashing on the MES interface module Section 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 0B23h System error Please consult your
561. to the character string length are stored Example ABCD is attempted to be stored in the device of the tag component whose character length is 2 AB is stored 6 Perform statistical processing a Set whether to perform statistical processing or not Up to 64 components that have Perform statistical processing setting can be set in all projects The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of Device tag settings When the Perform statistical processing box is checked statistical processing is performed for tag component values Statistically processed values can be used by specifying the tag component values for which Perform statistical processing is selected in Job settings Note that this setting is not available when e Do not sample is selected in Sampling settings e Enhance sampling efficiency is selected in Sampling settings The data type of the tag component is Bit or String e Array setting is set b When Perform statistical processing is selected set the following items Table 7 40 Setting items for Perform statistical processing Item Description Statistical type Select a type of the statistical processing Specify the number of samples 2 to 20 when Moving average Moving maximum or Moving minimum is selected No of samples 7 48 7 8 Device Tag Setting 7 8 3 Setting items in Component setting r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATI
562. total Substitution tag Component Operation tag Component Operator Operation tag Component Figure 7 94 Setting example of Operation action T 122 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 4 Setting items in Operation action r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 12 Online Online operations can be performed to the MES interface module connected to the network 7 12 1 Setting the target MES interface module Set the target MES interface module Specify the IP address user name and password that were set in System setting L Section 7 6 System Setting Select Online Transfer setup from the menu The Transfer setup dialog box is displayed Set the following items and click the OK_ button Transfer setup IP address 192 168 3 3 User name Password Connection test Cancel Figure 7 95 Transfer setup dialog box Table 7 84 Setting items in the Transfer setup dialog box Item Description Specify the IP address of the MES interface module in decimal notation IP address Example 192 168 3 3 Specify a user name 1 to 20 characters User name Case sensitive Example QJ71MES96 Specify a password 8 to 14 characters Password Case sensitive Example MITSUBISHI Checks if the device of the specified IP address is connectable to the MES interface module Connection test 7 12 Online T 123 7 12 1 Setti
563. ts made by user applications using XML format messages f 9 The XML processing function allows the following instructions for job execution Section 6 2 XML processing function One shot execution of a job CHAPTER 9 e Validating a job The job is executed when the trigger conditions are met Invalidating a job The job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met ae Makes the time of the MES interface module synchronized with the time of the SNTP Time synchronization Section 6 3 server computer on the network or a programmable controller CPU No 1 CPU in the function Section 7 6 2 multiple CPU system 3 3 Function List OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 o Z O q o 3 w a o SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool function list Table 3 10 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool function list ELS a6 Q series l A Reference Function Description 5 section System Setting Configure the initial settings for the MES interface module Section 7 6 Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module to the Network settings Section 7 6 1 network Time synchronization ai Make the time set
564. tup 2 When Trigger buffering is enabled for the job The trigger information is stored in the trigger buffer and after completion of the current job execution the job is executed based on the trigger information Condition value ee Tag component value i Sampling I l 1 i i i interval k a Trigger information 2 3 Trigger buffer 4 Job Job Job Job Job startup startup startup startup startup Job execution 1 2 D 3 gt 4 5 gt Figure 6 16 When trigger condition is met again during execution of the job set to Value monitoring startup b When trigger conditions for multiple jobs are met concurrently Up to three jobs can start their executions concurrently in the order in Job settings e After completion of these jobs executions of the other jobs are started sequentially Note that if a job uses the same item in Server service settings that is currently used for another job the job is not executed until another job execution is completed c Monitoring interval timeout Depending on the number of set jobs or the trigger condition setting the monitoring interval timeout may occur 6 20 6 1 DB Interface Function 6 1 11 Precautions 6 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Kel ries 2 When an error occurs in job execution a The job execution is canceled when the error cause is the following ai e Failure in device data writing due to network d
565. turned OFF and then ON or was the programmable controller CPU reset Has a communication error occurred during one shot execution Is there any difference between the system settings being used on the MES interface module and the system settings of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Check for an error code in System monitor of GX Developer e Write a project again and perform Update settings Section 7 15 4 One shot execution Set the same settings for the system settings being used on the MES interface module and the system settings of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool By the error code check the error details and take corrective actions e Re execute formatting of the CompactFlash card Is the MES interface module operation stopped Stop the MES interface module operation and then execute formatting lt L gt Section 7 13 8 Formatting the CompactFlash card It takes time to write the settings to the MES interface module Is the MES interface module operation in the Stop state 10 3 Troubleshooting by symptom 10 3 1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Stop the MES interface module operation and then write the settings To the next page 10 41 CA J XML MESSAGE n FORMAT 0 z Q O o w al a 9 E APPENDICES INDEX 10 42 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom The most recent tabl
566. tuted Communication action Actiontype inset x Database pei z Table name RECIPEDATA Browse table name DB tag link settings Sgectjupdate Delete conditions IIe __ Tag Type Component Field name Condition Tag Type Component 1 Servertime RE Date Server time 2 ProsessNo lt lt Number 1 _3 WorkNo EZ Process WorkNo 4 Parameter lt Process Parameter lt lt a a Aes fess case risme ernest T Insert a whole tag eption process setting Generated SQL text INSERT INTO RECIPEDATA Servertime ProsessNo WorkNo Parameter VALUES CURRENT_TIMESTAMP 1 Process1 WorkNo Process1 Parameter No of fields inprojecti 12 Tag component data length in job 9 words total Cancel Figure 7 74 Setting example of Insert Database DB1 Table name ERRORLOG Date Process_No Work_No Parameter 2005 07 01 15 12 00 1 536 8 Inserted Inserted Inserted Inserted Tag component Constant Module time Constant 1 Process1 Work_No Process1 Parameter 2005 07 01 15 12 00 1 536 8 Figure 7 75 Operation example of Insert 7 98 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELS a6 Q series 4 When the database is Wonderware Historian the following is i
567. twork Access target CPU PLC series CC Link C24 O O O O 5 i Accessible x Inaccessible For the network No and station number set the values same with the parameter settings of the Q series E71 QE71 L series E71 and R series E71 on access target CPU side Also set Station No IP information in the parameter settings of the Q series E71 QE71 L series E71 and R series E71 For the Station No IP information specify the IP address computation method table conversion method or both 2 For the QnACPU and QE71 on the access target CPU side use products of the manufacturing date 9707B or later 3 For the CC Link system master local module on the access target CPU side use modules of software version S or later 4 Use a MES interface module whose serial No first five digits is 13092 or later 5 Use Universal model QCPU whose serial No first five digits is 12012 or later 6 When a C Controller module is used as a control CPU of the access target network module the accessible CPU module is only the control CPU 7 Use QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU of the access target network module 8 Use an Ethernet module to access a programmable controller CPU over Ethernet With the built in Ethernet port of a programmable controller CPU a programmable controller CPU cannot be accessed module configuration module configuration MES interface Ethernet module module v MES Programmable Ethern
568. type AutoNumber type for variables refer to the char Currency type following varchar soe 9 Text type 24 lt gt Appendix 2 2 Characters text a that can be used for item Memo Were float 5 N Fegi names component names i Single type DaS eating variable names etc in the NUMBER ki Double type Analog oin char p f product in Text type Tag Real Floating point type VARCHAR varchar B text Memo type 24 char Character string PTAR varchar reer i String Tag i i VARCHAR i Memo type 4 text 7 90 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 4 MELSEC Aeres 1 When using the operation field the insertion function INSERT and update function UPDATE cannot be executed for the operation field for Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 2 Not available for Select Update Delete conditions 3 When using Select and MultiSelect for a field whose data type is single type or double type perform the following for Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access 2010 and Microsoft Access 2013 e Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb in the ODBC setting for the database used lt lt Section 8 2 3 For Microsoft Access e When the database source file used is accdb change it to mdb 4 Memo type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used for Microsoft Access 2007 Mic
569. ubstitute value tag component value variable for a Update field value of the record whose conditions are met hoe Generates a new value and inserts an insert value tag component value constant value variable into a field of the generated record a Substitutes field values of the records whose conditions are met for MoliSelect substitute values tag component values Delete Deletes a specific record by specifying a database and a table 1 Cannot be selected when the database is Wonderware Historian 2 Database Select a database to be accessed 3 Table name Up to 32 characters Set a table name of the database to be accessed For characters that can be used for table names refer to the following Appendix 2 4 Characters available for field names table names stored procedure names etc For browsing the table names in the database refer to the following lt 3 4 Browse table name in this section T 94 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 2 Setting items in Communication action Select Update Insert MultiSelect Delete MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 4 Browse table name Clicking the Browse table name button displays the Tables list dialog box Select a table name The selected table name is set on the Communication action dialog box ui O by clicking the OK button Tables list 8 5 Ez 2 Table2 i 2 3 Table3 g A 4 Table4 BO
570. ubstitution setting Operation action Operation Substitution tag component constant value Operation tag component constant value Operator Operation tag component constant value e Without substitution setting Operation action Substitution tag component constant value Operation tag component constant value T 84 1 Display format of the tag component constant value Table 7 64 Display format of the tag component constant value Item Description Tag component Device tag name component name Number Numerical value String Character string nate Module time Date Module time Server time Date Server time Date String Date String Variable Variable name 2 Display format of the operator Table 7 65 Display format of the operator Item Description Addition Subtraction x Multiplication x Division Remainder 7 11 Job Setting Actions r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Aeres 7 11 1 Setting items in Communication action Configure the settings for communications with a database a a Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the 3 Communication action dialog box Make the setting referring to the following descriptions Clicking the button after setting adds or modifies the action 5 For the operation for adding or modifying an action refer to the following A
571. uffer memory X11 Sampling error address 1000 to 1075 3 Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON 1 Turns ON when an error regarding information linkage occurs X12 Information linkage 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Error log area Buffer memory error address 150 to 247 3 Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON To the next page 3 4 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU 3 19 3 4 2 I O signals details OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO o Zz O q o 3 M a o SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 3 13 Input signals details Device 4 NR Signal name Description No 1 Turns ON when an error occurs in communications with the access target CPU X16 Access target CPU 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Access target CPU setting status area error Buffer memory address 4000 to 4071 3 Turns OFF when the Error clear request Y10 is turned ON 1 Turns ON when an error not corresponding to X11 X12 or X16 occurs 2 When this device is ON the error code is stored into the Error log area Buffer memory X1C Another error address 150 to 247 3
572. ulation example Accessing to 256 fields with 1 job and 1 action and performing every 30 seconds when capacity 64 M bytes field name 16 characters data length 32 characters SQL text length 16 x 256 6 x 256 32 x 256 20 13844 bytes No of executable bufferings 64 x 1024 x 1024 13844 4 4846 cases Buffering duration 4846 60 30 x 60 40 h 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO o Z O q o 3 iw fT 7 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Le series Point Performance of the MES interface module and the system using the MES interface module differs depending on the following factors Conduct a verification by user prior to starting the system e Operating environment personal computer network and the CompactFlash card e Loading status of the server computer and the network e Sequence scan time e Accessing status from a personal computer terminal display or intelligent function module to the programmable controller CPU e Access from a personal computer by MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and XML processing e Settings of the MES interface module For the reference value of the processing time refer to the following t Appendix 4 Pro
573. ule startup Set whether to enable the job at startup of the MES interface module or not Trigger buffering Set whether to enable the trigger buffering or not Startup logging Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not Test mode Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not Trigger conditions Actions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job Section 7 10 2 Setting items in Trigger conditions Configure the action settings L 3 Section 7 11 Job Setting Actions Program execution Configure the settings for the program execution function L gt Section 7 10 3 Setting items in Program execution DB Buffering Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not Section 7 10 4 Setting items in DB Buffering Notify errors job cancellation that occur during job execution Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors job cancellation that occur during job execution L gt Section 7 10 5 Setting items for job cancellation No of fields in project Displays the total number of fields in the project No of fields in job Displays the total number of fields used in Job settings Tag component data length g P Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job z in job Pad B22 Wo PALS OSE oo fi ba ann 7 10 Job Setting 7 10 1 Setting items in Job setting oe INSTALLATION AND UNINS
574. ult operation setting Network settings 0 Operates according to Network settings 1 Operates according to the default When other than 0 is specified in this area IP ADDRESS 192 168 3 3 Switch setting error 0180h occurs at hardware test Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 4 9 Default operation setting battery error detection setting Switch 2 a Default operation setting bit 0 1 Set whether to operate Account setting and Network settings with their default 1 Account setting bit 0 0 Operates according to Account setting 1 Operates according to the default 2 Network settings bit 1 0 Operates according to Network settings 1 Operates according to the default 4 10 4 5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION MELSEC Aeres Point Use the default operation setting when changing the settings of the MES interface E module connected to the configuration computer on a 1 1 basis ee O b Battery error detection setting bit 2 Set whether to detect battery errors while the MES interface module is operating Zz without battery gt Section 4 9 Operation without Mounting Battery 0 Detects battery errors 3 1 Does not detect battery errors BZ nO 3 Response monitoring time setting Switch 3 Lower byte Set the timeout time Second from when the MES interface module sends a request to the acces
575. unction module I O number When using the QOOJCPU the access is not possible M L and S devices are in the same region regardless of the parameter device setting ERO R cannot be specified The devices can be accessed only when specifying Use device function on the device setting screen in the C Controller setting utility The device is available in a multiple CPU system only When the access target CPU is Q12DCCPU V the access is not possible The devices newly added to RCPU are not accessible When the access target CPU is RCPU only in the device range from U3En GO0 to 9999 are accessible When the access target CPU is RCPU only in the device range that can be set for QCPU or C Controller module are accessible For the settable device range refer to the following manuals lt gt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection lt MELSEC Q C Controller Module User s Manual 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3 11 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z O q o S M o 7 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS 26 Kel ceries 3 3 Function List This section lists the MES interface module functions 1 Function summary The following explains the function summary of the MES interfac
576. unnecessary applications ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed e Add more memory to the personal computer 0x20700002 Failed in program execution due to insufficient resources e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20700003 System error representative To the next page 10 2 Error Code List 10 31 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service CA J XML MESSAGE a FORMAT o zZ E O I wo W a O E APPENDICES INDEX 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Le series From the previous page Table 10 7 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service Error code Error description and cause Corrective action 0x20700010 ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed e Check if the source IP address belongs to the x Invalid program execution request MES interface module 0x20700011 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative 0x20700012 Set correct user name and password in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool e Check if the user account is invalid or not by the ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed administrative tool of Windows 0x20700020 gt P i Failed to log on in program execution Check if the setting is forcing the user to enter password at next logon by the administrative tool of Windows e Check if the user password is e
577. unnecessary applications SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed Add more memory to the personal computer SID Session ID COMMIT Failed SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed 0x20600002 1 SID Session ID GetNext Failed SID Session ID Reset Failed Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient resources SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed Check if the source IP address belongs to the SID Session ID COMMIT Failed i MES interface module or the configuration SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed 0x20600010 computer SID Session ID GetNext Failed i e Check the version of the MES interface module SID Session ID Reset Failed i or MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Invalid SQL execution request 0x20600011 e Please consult your local Mitsubishi System error representative 0x20600012 SID Session ID SQL lt gt Failed SID Session ID COMMIT Failed e Check if the source IP address belongs to the SID Session ID ROLLBACK Failed MES interface module or the configuration 0x20600020 SID Session ID GetNext Failed computer SID Session ID Reset Failed Check the version of the MES interface module DB Connection Service does not support the SQL or MES Interface Function Configuration Tool instruction to be executed To the next page 10 30 10 2 Error Code List 10 2 2 Error codes of DB Connection Service 1 O TROUBLESHOOTING M
578. ure names registered to the set database 3 Set assignments between return value argument and tag component Beso inik setings values or constant values Displays the stored procedure information executed with Communication action being edited For the display format of tag components constants valuables refer to the following gt Section 7 11 1 4 Selecting a row and clicking the pe button reverses the order between the l button selected row and the one immediately above it Executed procedure The t button cannot be clicked on the first row Selecting a row and clicking the l button reverses the order between the l button selected row and the one immediately below it The l button cannot be clicked on the last row Delete row button Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row Up to 8192 fields can be set in DB tag link settings Select Update Delete conditions and Select sort settings for each project The setting can be checked on the status bar of Job settings or in the Communication action dialog box 7 11 Job Setting Actions 7 11 3 Setting items in Communication action Stored procedure r MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 1 2 Point MELSECTA eries Procedure name Up to 32 characters Set a stored procedure name of the database to be accessed For characters that can be used for
579. ut the MES interface module lt gt Chapter 3 SPECIFICATIONS Section 3 1 covers the performance specifications Procedure up to MES interface Function module start up K gt Chapter 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION Section 4 2 covers the schematic procedure up to the MES interface module operation Installation and uninstallation methods for MX MESInterface lt gt Chapter 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION CHAPTER 5 covers MX MESInterface installation and uninstallation methods MES interface module functions L gt Chapter 6 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 6 covers the MES interface module functions Setting method for MES Interface Function Configuration Tool K gt Chapter 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL CHAPTER 7 covers the setting method of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Section 7 6 to Section 7 10 provide explanations as indicated below Section 7 6 Explains a display method of the screen Section 7 6 1 Section 7 6 2 Explains setting items and Section 7 6 3 the setting methods of the screen Section 7 6 4 Sections 7 7 to 7 10 also provide explanations as indicated above A 17 A 18 8 Setting method for DB Connection Service L gt Chapter 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL CHAPTER 8 covers the functions and setting method for the DB Connection Service 9 XML message format lt gt Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT CHAPTER 9 covers the XML message format 10 Methods for checkin
580. uter and operating systems Table 2 4 Performance required for personal computer and operating systems Operating system Windows 2000 Professional CPU Windows XP Pentium 300MHz or more Performance required for personal computer Required memory 128 MB or more Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 Pentium 550MHz or more 256 MB or more Windows Vista Windows 7 Pentium 1GHz or more 1GB or more Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Intel Core 2 Duo 2GHz or more b Supported version Table 2 5 Supported version of MX MESInterface Operating system Windows 2000 Professional 32 bit version 1GB or more 64 bit version 2GB or more Supported version of MX MESinterface Windows XP 32 bit version Windows 2000 Server All versions Windows Server 2003 32 bit version Windows Vista 32 bit version Version 1 04E or later Windows 7 32 bit version Version 1 06G or later Windows 7 64 bit version Version 1 08J or later Windows 8 32 bit version 64 bit version Version 1 10L or later Windows 8 1 32 bit version 64 bit version c User authority Log on as a user having administrator authority Version 1 12N or later e Installation uninstallation are available only by the administrator s authority e Use the product as a user having a privilege higher than Standard user
581. ver ODBC Data Source Test dialog box Zu z 256 SA z O Click the OK_ button in the ODBC Microsoft EOM Lu SQL Server Setup dialog box ee Click the OK button in the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box l End INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTION oe z O D A Z Q S m a ee as 22 Lu og SZ ZE W W nn 8 2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 10 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEG Q series 3 For Microsoft Access The following shows a setting example using Microsoft Access 2003 with Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Set the following conditions Data source name SAMPLEDS Database name 2 C mes sampledb mdb 1 Data source name can be set as desired For Data source name in Server service settings use the name set with this setting 2 The database name is the name for accessing a Microsoft Access database Specify a database file path created with Microsoft Access Clicking Performance and Maintenance on the 2S Control Panel displays the Performance and ce Maintenance dialog box To display the Control Panel select Start Control Panel 3 For Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 System and Maintenance For Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 Windows Se
582. when time information is successfully obtained from the SNTP server computer Because z of this tag sampling timing and job operation timing may be changed 3 b Synchronizing time with programmable controller CPU g 1 Before using the MES interface module set the time of CPU No 1 Changing time setting during operation of the MES interface module changes its clock time at the timing of time data acquisition Because of this tag r sampling timing and job operation timing may be changed Am 2 Since the MES interface module obtains time data of CPU No 1 in the following a timings transmission time delay may occur bee e When powering ON the programmable controller from OFF e When resetting the programmable controller CPU e Once a minute 3 When obtaining the clock data of CPU No 1 an error of up to scan time of CPU No 1 plus 1 second may be observed x Point When using the time information which is obtained from the SNTP server computer in the programmable controller CPU C z Section 6 3 1 Using the SNTP time query result in the programmable controller CPU INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION FUNCTIONS j le 2 ms G W z E ESO 260 B36 ZPO z O O Z Te DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 7 6 System Setting T 23 7 6 2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 6 3 Setting items
583. will be available in any case e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0B4Ch Error in conversion from character string to number Character strings could not be converted to numerical values Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case 0B4Dh System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0B4Eh Error in conversion from character string to number Character strings could not be converted to numerical values Change the setting so that type conversion will be available in any case OB4Fh to 0B52h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0B53h Overflow or zero divide error Assignment to the tag component or input argument and input output argument of stored procedure was not possible Overflow Division by zero was attempted Check the data type or the substitute value of the tag component or input argument and input output argument of stored procedure e Change the setting to avoid division by zero OB54h Operation error Invalid operation was performed Change the setting so that any invalid operation will not performed OB55h System error e Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative OB56h Trigger buffer full error The trigger buffer became full Reduce the frequency of job startups and their processing loads 0B57h to
584. ws or your computer Choose one of the following options and click OK to finish setup C No will restart my computer later MX MESInterface Select the component which wants to be installed IES interface Function configuration tool SWnDNC MESIF is a tool to configure MES interface modules This tool is executed by installing on a setting computer t is possible to be installed on the same omputer as DB connection service and etting tool DB connection service and setting tool l MELSEC A series When the left screen appears installation is complete Click the OK button 10 To restart the computer check the Yes want to restart my computer now checkbox then click the OK_ button To not restart the computer check the No will restart my computer later checkbox then click the OK button The dialog box for selecting the component to be installed is displayed When installing the other software select the component to be installed with the radio button then click the Install button When the installation is complete click the Exit button 12 If the firewall function of the operating system and the security software is enabled make one of the following settings 1 Disable the firewall function or 2 Set the following programs to Exception Program Name Execution file storage loca
585. ws the time of the MES interface module to be changed to the daylight saving time during the period of summer time using the clock time of the SNTP server computer For the daylight saving time setting refer to the following K7 Section 7 6 2 2 When Synchronize with SNTP is selected 1 About the daylight saving time function When Daylight saving setting is enabled one hour is added at the daylight saving start time and one hour is subtracted at the daylight saving ending time The following is an example of the start and end of the daylight saving time Example When the daylight saving time starts at 02 00 on the second Sunday in March and ends at 02 00 on the first Sunday in November 2nd Sunday ist Sunday in March in November At the specified time of the start date At the specified time of the time is set ahead one hour the end date the time La gt wet back one hour Before correction 01 59 59 03 00 00 03 00 01 After correction Figure 6 20 Daylight saving time function 2 Precautions a If Time specification startup is set for a trigger condition of a job the following may occur e The job does not start at the daylight saving start time e The job starts two times at the daylight saving ending time b The daylight saving time function is enabled when clock time information is acquired from the SNTP server computer For processing performed when clock time information is not
586. x is displayed then select SQL Server lt SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2008 gt Select the SQL Server Native Client lt SQL Server 2012 gt Select the SQL Server Native Client 11 0 The Create a New Data Source to SQL Server dialog box is displayed then set the following e Data source name SAMPLEDS Server name SAMPLESRV Q Select the With SQL Server authentication using a login ID and password entered by the user radio button then enter Login ID and Password REMARKS lt Setting Wonderware Historian gt Mark a check in Change the default value to and select Runtime 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL MELSEC Aerie From the previous page Creste a New Data Source to SQL Server I REMARKS Poser asiomanedl cdlcare AAN When the following item appears do not select the z i b a encryption for data checkbox j e Use regional settings when outputting currency See numbers dates and times re aie Ss The screen on the left is for Windows 7 Log ODBC driver statistics to the log file z lt Bek mnn caret h a 58 l detsen n Inthe ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup dialog Popes ses A box click the Test Data Source button to check that the connection is normal z TESTS COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY E S B Click the OK button in the SQL Ser
587. xecution e Select Online One shot execution from the menu Selecting One shot execution updates the setting and perform one shot execution of the job ignoring the trigger conditions For Update settings refer to the following LF Section 7 13 2 3 x Point All of job operations running in the MES interface module are temporarily disabled during one shot execution Check the execution result shown in the View details dialog box which is displayed after the execution For the display of the View details dialog box refer to the following lt 3 gt Section 7 12 5 2 b Detailed log 4 After the one shot execution Update settings is performed lt gt Section 7 13 2 3 T 134 7 12 Online 7 12 6 Executing a job as a one shot task MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEG Q series 7 13 Online Remote operation Perform the remote operation for the MES interface module QD Select Online Remote operation from the menu 2 The Remote operation dialog box is displayed Operate it referring to the following descriptions Remote operation Figure 7 105 Remote operation dialog box LN MES INTERFACE CONFIGURATION TOO FUNCTION 7 13 Online Remote operation T 135 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL MELSEC Le series 7 13 1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function The operation status
588. xpired or not by the administrative tool of Windows e No user profile for Windows may have been created With the user name and password set in Server service settings of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool log on Windows ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed once and re execute it With the user name and 0x20700021 Failed to load user profile during program password set in Server service settings of MES execution Interface Function Configuration Tool log on Windows once and re execute it The load applied to the computer may have been too high Check the execution conditions of other applications e Please consult your local Mitsubishi 0x20700022 System error representative e Check if the application to be executed in program execution exists or not ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed hee Check if the name of the application to be 0x20700023 Failed to generate process during program me executed in program execution is a directory execution i a Make a proper security setting for the application to be executed in program execution In DB Connection Service Setting Tool ProgramExec IP address lt gt Failed j increase the DB access timeout value 0x20700024 The wait for process completion timed out or was A e Terminate the application executed by program interrupted during program execution execution before logoff e Check if the
589. y contents on the DB buffering settings of the Job settings will be changed as shown in the following table The operation of the system settings Operation of recovery from network disconnection added to version 1 10L or later is the same as the default settings of version 1 09K or earlier EF Table App 1 DB buffering settings version 1 09K or earlier version 1 10L or later k 3 System settings Job settings Job settings a r Operation of recovery from network disconnection Select Using Automatically resend at the Automatically time of restoration resend buffer Clear Automatically resend at time of restoration Automatically resend buffer Immediate sending Do not add to the buffered data Using the Manually resend buffer Manually resend buffer Adding to the buffered data App 4 Appendix 1 Functions Added in MES Interface Module and MX MESInterface Appendix 1 2 Operations of former versions APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres 2 Trigger monitoring function w The operation conditions for starting a job are as described below 3 we a For an MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 11011 or 26 earlier The job can be started only when the device tags used for trigger conditions of all jobs have been sampled normally g Q b For an MES interface module whose first five digits of serial No is 11012 or later The job can be started w
590. y y DECIMAL PLACES OPERATOR OPERAND STATISTICS STATTYPE _ STATSIZE DISABLE 1 ENABLE AVERAGE ENABLE maximum 0 NONE DISABLE L Item row Change disabled _ Label column setting area Can be changed by the user Device tag settings Component setting input Component name En CPU name ControlCPU bd e Head device Za Data type single word bytes Add I Perform statistical processes Frese RIBS 10 ofsonses 10 Component List Hf f fi Component name CPU name Device Data type Statistical type 2 Label COMPONENT1 1 to COMPONENT64 256 Table App 27 Label Label Description Set Device tag settings items No 1 to 64 Component setting items No 1 to 256 COMPONENT64 256 Indicates Component setting No 1 to 256 Indicates Device tag settings No 1 to 64 Necessary to set the number of labels set with TAG CSV COMPNUM The label setting following it are ignored Example When TAG CSV label TAG5 has COMPNUM of 10 COMPONENT CSV must set labels COMPONENT5 1 to COMPONENT5 10 App 26 Appendix 3 Setting Information File Format CSV File Format Appendix 3 9 COMPONENT CSV APPENDICES MELSEC Aeres 3 Setting item Table App 28 Setting item Item Description Setting value COMPNAME Component name 1 2 Up to 16 characte
591. ypes Figure 3 4 Different network Table 3 6 Different network Network Co existence communication route network route CC IE Control NET CC Link Relay station Use a QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU for the network module Access target CPU For accessible CPU modules refer to the following Access target CPU PLC series QCPU A QCPU A mode C Controller f RCPU 10 LCPU QnACPU Q mode ACPU module o of o o o o Request source Use a QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU for the MES interface module and network module 10 H Ethernet T pa a x x x CC IE Field O O O O Accessible x Inaccessible MES interface Network Network 2 to 7 module module l Ia Request source Relay Relay Network 1 station station Network 8 Access target CPU C24 multidrop lt yd CC Link Network f Co existence network communication route communication route i e The network is any of CC IE Control NET 10 H Ethernet or CC IE Field i i i i gt i i e The following lists CPU modules that can be used on the network communication route and the communication routes of other network types Figure 3 5 Different network 3 8 3 2 Accessible Devices and Ranges Relay station Use a QCPU Q mode or RCPU as a control CPU for t
592. zZ Lu wn 8 5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 16 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL a6 Q series DB connection service setting tool File Help dv Service port 5114 IV Output access log Output destination DB access timeout 30 seconds _ dbConnector log i rT Limit IP addresses permit to connect Access log capacity IP Address J 1 MBx 10 Files Mask bit length Optional add iis Output SQL Failed log Permitted IP Output destination addresses list sqlFailed log a SQL failed log capacity 1 MBx 10 Files Figure 8 8 DB Connection Service Setting Tool Table 8 3 Setting items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool Item Description Service port required Set the port number where the DB Connection Service operates Set a DB access timeout Unit seconds for the case where no response DB access timeout is returned to the MES interface module after requesting the server required computer for value writing to or reading from the database or for a program execution Limit IP addresses which permit to connect Specify whether or not to set the IP addresses permitted to connect Output access log Set whether or not to output the access log Output SQL failed log Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log 1 Service port required Range 1024 to 65535 Default 5112 Set the port number where the DB Connection Service o

MES Interface Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents